Professional Documents
Culture Documents
WRB-P-P-003 - Instrument Installation Procedures Rev.A PDF
WRB-P-P-003 - Instrument Installation Procedures Rev.A PDF
(includingcover)
ProyekPembangunanSPAMIPAWaribang
DenpasarBali
PROJECTNO.:41116T011
InstrumentInstallationProcedures
YINDOC.NO.:WRBPP003
CUSTOMERDOC.NO.:
PT.ADHIKARYA CIPTAKARYA,PUPROVINSIBALI
PT.YOKOGAWAINDONESIA
PO/CONTRACTNO.:
REV.NO.
A APPROVED
B APPROVEDWITHCOMMENT
C NOTAPPROVED
PLEASERETURNONECOPYWITHYOURSIGNAGAINSTTHESTATUSOFTHEAPPROVALDOCUMENT
ThisdocumentisthepropertyofCOMPANY.Itmustnotbestored,reproducedordisclosedto
otherscompletelyorinparts,withoutwrittenauthorizationfromtheCOMPANY.
Rev. Date Description Preparedby Checkedby Approvedby
00 01Sept2016 ForApproval HaryadiW RickiS
ProyekPembangunanSPAMIPAWaribang
DenpasarBali
Doc.Title:InstrumentInstallationProcedures Rev:0
Doc.No:WRBPP003 Page:2of716
TABULATIONOFREVISEDPAGES
REVISION REVISION
SHEET SHEET
A B C 1 2 3 10 A B C 1 2 3 10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
xxx
ATTACHMENT/APPENDIX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ThisdocumentisthepropertyofCOMPANY.Itmustnotbestored,reproducedordisclosedtoothers
completelyorinparts,withoutwrittenauthorizationfromtheCOMPANY.
ProyekPembangunanSPAMIPAWaribang
DenpasarBali
Doc.Title:InstrumentInstallationProcedures Rev:0
Doc.No:WRBPP003 Page:3of716
DESCRIPTIONOFCHANGE
ThisdocumentisthepropertyofCOMPANY.Itmustnotbestored,reproducedordisclosedtoothers
completelyorinparts,withoutwrittenauthorizationfromtheCOMPANY.
ProyekPembangunanSPAMIPAWaribang
DenpasarBali
Doc.Title:InstrumentInstallationProcedures Rev:0
Doc.No:WRBPP003 Page:4of716
TABLEOFCONTENTS
TABULATIONOFREVISEDPAGES.......................................................................................................2
DESCRIPTIONOFCHANGES................................................................................................................3
TABLEOFCONTENT...........................................................................................................................4
1. InstrumentInstallationProcedures
1.1 InstructionManualforPressureTransmitter.....................................................................5
1.2 InstructionManualforMagneticFlowmeter.....................................................................68
1.3 InstructionManualforpHAnalyzer....................................................................................159
1.4 InstructionManualforTurbidity.........................................................................................435
1.5 InstructionManualforChlorineAnalyzerandResidualChlorineAnalyzer........................516
1.6 InstructionManualforWaterLevelSensor........................................................................623
1.7 InstructionManualforStreamCurrentMonitor................................................................686
ThisdocumentisthepropertyofCOMPANY.Itmustnotbestored,reproducedordisclosedtoothers
completelyorinparts,withoutwrittenauthorizationfromtheCOMPANY.
1.1InstructionManualforPressureTransmitter
ApplicableModel Area
EJA530EJBS7N019DN/A/D3/HE INTAKE
EJA530EJBS7N019DN/A/D3/HE PRASEDIMENTASI
EJA530EJBS7N019DN/A/D3/HE RESERVOIRIPA
Users
Manual
Absolute Pressure and
Gauge Pressure Transmitters
EJ510, EJ530,
EJX610A and EJX630A
IM 01C25F01-01E
IM 01C25F01-01E
13th Edition
i
Contents
1. Introduction................................................................................................ 1-1
Regarding This Manual................................................................................................. 1-1
Trademarks ................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1 Safe Use of This Product ................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Warranty.............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3 ATEX Documentation........................................................................................ 1-4
2. Handling Cautions..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Model and Specifications Check...................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Unpacking........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Storage................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.4 Selecting the Installation Location ................................................................. 2-1
2.5 Pressure Connection......................................................................................... 2-2
2.6 Waterproofing of Cable Conduit Connections............................................... 2-2
2.7 Restrictions on Use of Radio Transceivers.................................................... 2-2
2.8 Insulation Resistance and Dielectric Strength Test....................................... 2-2
2.9 Installation of an Explosion-Protected Instrument........................................ 2-3
2.9.1 FM Approval........................................................................................ 2-4
2.9.2 CSA Certification................................................................................. 2-6
2.9.3 ATEX Certification............................................................................... 2-8
2.9.4 IECEx Certification............................................................................ 2-12
2.10 EMC Conformity Standards............................................................................ 2-15
2.11 Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)............................................................ 2-16
2.12 Safety Requirement Standards...................................................................... 2-16
3. Component Names................................................................................... 3-1
4. Installation.................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Precautions ....................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Mounting ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.3 Rotating Transmitter Section............................................................................ 4-2
4.4 Changing the Direction of Integral Indicator ................................................. 4-2
IM 01C25F01-01E
iii
8. Maintenance............................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Calibration Instruments Selection................................................................... 8-1
8.3 Calibration.......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.4 Disassembly and Reassembly......................................................................... 8-3
8.4.1 Replacing the Integral Indicator.......................................................... 8-3
8.4.2 Replacing the CPU Board Assembly.................................................. 8-4
8.4.3 Cleaning and Replacing the Capsule Assembly...........................8-4
8.5 Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 8-5
8.5.1 Basic Troubleshooting........................................................................ 8-6
8.5.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts................................................................ 8-6
8.5.3 Alarms and Countermeasures............................................................ 8-8
9. General Specifications............................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Standard Specifications.................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Model and Suffix Codes.................................................................................... 9-5
9.3 Optional Specifications .............................................................................. 9-8
9.4 Dimensions....................................................................................................... 9-10
Revision Information
IM 01C25F01-01E
<1. Introduction> 1-1
1. Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the DPharp EJX and EJA
Differential Pressure and pressure transmitter. NOTE
Your transmitter was precisely calibrated at the Unless otherwise stated, the illustrations in this
factory before shipment. To ensure both safety and manual are of the EJ530 gauge pressure
efficiency, please read this manual carefully before transmitter.
you operate the instrument. Users of the EJ510, EJX610A and EJX630A
should bear in mind that certain features of their
NOTE instrument will differ from those shown in the
illustrations of the EJ530.
This manual describes the hardware
configurations of the transmitters listed in below.
For information on the software configuration
and operation, please refer to either
Regarding This Manual
IM 01C25T03-01E for the BRAIN communication This manual should be provided to the end
type, or IM 01C25T01-06EN for the HART user.
communication type. The contents of this manual are subject to
For FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol type, please change without prior notice.
refer to IM 01C25T02-01E. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may
For PROFIBUS PA protocol type, please refer to be reproduced in any form without Yokogawas
IM 01C25T04-01EN. written permission.
Model Style code Yokogawa makes no warranty of any kind with
EJX510A S2 regard to this manual, including, but not limited
EJX530A S2 to, implied warranty of merchantability and
EJX610A S1 fitness for a particular purpose.
EJX630A S1
EJA510E S1 If any question arises or errors are found, or if
EJA530E S1 any information is missing from this manual,
please inform the nearest Yokogawa sales
To ensure correct use of this instrument, read office.
both the hardware and software manuals
The specifications covered by this manual are
thoroughly before use.
limited to those for the standard type under the
specified model number break-down and do not
cover custom-made instruments.
WARNING
Please note that changes in the specifications,
When using the transmitters in a Safety construction, or component parts of the
Instrumented Systems (SIS) application, refer instrument may not immediately be reflected
to Appendix 1 in either IM 01C25T01-06EN for in this manual at the time of change, provided
the HART protocol or IM 01C25T03-01E for the that postponement of revisions will not cause
BRAIN protocol. The instructions and procedures difficulty to the user from a functional or
in this section must be strictly followed in order to performance standpoint.
maintain the transmitter for this safety level. Yokogawa assumes no responsibility for this
product except as stated in the warranty.
If the customer or any third party is harmed by
NOTE the use of this product, Yokogawa assumes
no responsibility for any such harm owing to
When describing the model name like EJ510
any defects in the product which were not
or EJ530, it shows the applicability for
predictable, or for any indirect damages.
both EJX510A and EJA510E or EJX530A and
EJA530E.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<1. Introduction> 1-2
The following safety symbols are used in this 1.1 Safe Use of This Product
manual:
For the safety of the operator and to protect the
instrument and the system, please be sure to follow
this manuals safety instructions when handling this
WARNING instrument. If these instructions are not heeded,
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, the protection provided by this instrument may be
if not avoided, could result in death or serious impaired. In this case, Yokogawa cannot guarantee
injury. that the instrument can be safely operated. Please
pay special attention to the following points:
(a) Installation
CAUTION This instrument may only be installed by an
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, engineer or technician who has an expert
if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate knowledge of this device. Operators are not
injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe allowed to carry out installation unless they
practices. meet this condition.
With high process temperatures, care must
be taken not to burn yourself by touching the
IMPORTANT instrument or its casing.
Indicates that operating the hardware or software Never loosen the process connector nuts when
in this manner may damage it or lead to system the instrument is installed in a process. This can
failure. lead to a sudden, explosive release of process
fluids.
When draining condensate from the pressure
NOTE detector section, take appropriate precautions
to prevent the inhalation of harmful vapors and
Draws attention to information essential for
the contact of toxic process fluids with the skin
understanding the operation and features.
or eyes.
When removing the instrument from a
Direct current hazardous process, avoid contact with the fluid
and the interior of the meter.
Functional grounding terminal
All installation shall comply with local installation
Caution requirements and the local electrical code.
This symbol indicates that the operator must
(b) Wiring
refer to an explanation in the users manual
in order to avoid the risk of injury or death of The instrument must be installed by an
personnel or damage to the instrument. engineer or technician who has an expert
knowledge of this instrument. Operators are not
permitted to carry out wiring unless they meet
Trademarks
this condition.
DPharp, EJX, EJA, FieldMate and BRAIN
Before connecting the power cables, please
TERMINAL are registered trademarks of
confirm that there is no current flowing through
Yokogawa Electric Corporation. Company
the cables and that the power supply to the
names and product names used in this material
instrument is switched off.
are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective owners.
In this manual, trademarks or registered
trademarks are not marked with or .
IM 01C25F01-01E
<1. Introduction> 1-3
(c) Operation 1.2 Warranty
Wait 5 min. after the power is turned off, before The warranty shall cover the period noted on
opening the covers. the quotation presented to the purchaser at the
time of purchase. Problems occurring during
(d) Maintenance
the warranty period shall basically be repaired
Please carry out only the maintenance free of charge.
procedures described in this manual. If you If any problems are experienced with this
require further assistance, please contact the instrument, the customer should contact the
nearest Yokogawa office. Yokogawa representative from which this
Care should be taken to prevent the build up of instrument was purchased or the nearest
dust or other materials on the display glass and Yokogawa office.
the name plate. To clean these surfaces, use a If a problem arises with this instrument,
soft, dry cloth. please inform us of the nature of the problem
and the circumstances under which it
(e) Explosion Protected Type Instrument
developed, including the model specification
Users of explosion proof instruments should and serial number. Any diagrams, data and
refer first to section 2.9 (Installation of an other information you can include in your
Explosion Protected Instrument) of this manual. communication will also be helpful.
The use of this instrument is restricted to those The party responsible for the cost of fixing the
who have received appropriate training in the problem shall be determined by Yokogawa
device. following an investigation conducted by
Take care not to create sparks when accessing Yokogawa.
the instrument or peripheral devices in a The purchaser shall bear the responsibility for
hazardous location. repair costs, even during the warranty period, if
the malfunction is due to:
(f) Modification
Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or - Improper and/or inadequate maintenance by
damage resulting from any modification made the purchaser.
to this instrument by the customer. - Malfunction or damage due to a failure
(g) Product Disposal to handle, use, or store the instrument in
accordance with the design specifications.
The instrument should be disposed of in
- Use of the product in question in a location
accordance with local and national legislation/
not conforming to the standards specified by
regulations.
Yokogawa, or due to improper maintenance
(h) Authorized Representative in EEA of the installation location.
- Failure or damage due to modification or
In relation to the CE Marking, The
repair by any party except Yokogawa or an
authorised representative for this product
approved representative of Yokogawa.
in the EEA (European Economic Area) is:
- Malfunction or damage from improper
Yokogawa Europe B.V. Euroweg 2, 3825 HD
relocation of the product in question after
Amersfoort,The Netherlands
delivery.
- Reason of force majeure such as fires,
earthquakes, storms/floods, thunder/
lightening, or other natural disasters, or
disturbances, riots, warfare, or radioactive
contamination.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<1. Introduction> 1-4
1.3 ATEX Documentation
This is only applicable to the countries in European Union.
GB SK
CZ
DK
I LT
E LV
EST
NL
PL
SF
SLO
P
BG
RO
S
M
GR
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-1
2. Handling Cautions
This chapter provides important information on how 2.2 Unpacking
to handle the transmitter. Read this carefully before
using the transmitter. Keep the transmitter in its original packaging to
prevent it from being damaged during shipment.
The transmitters are thoroughly tested at the Do not unpack the transmitter until it reaches the
factory before shipment. When taking delivery of an installation site.
instrument, visually check them to make sure that
no damage occurred during shipment.
Also check that all transmitter mounting hardware
2.3 Storage
shown in figure 2.1 is included. If the transmitter The following precautions must be observed when
is ordered without the mounting bracket and the storing the instrument, especially for a long period.
process connector, the transmitter mounting (a) Select a storage area which meets the following
hardware will not be included. After checking the conditions:
transmitter, carefully repack it in its box and keep it It is not exposed to rain or subject to water
there until you are ready to install it. seepage/leaks.
U-bolt nut (L) Vibration and shock are kept to a minimum.
It has an ambient temperature and relative
humidity within the following ranges.
Ambient temperature:
40* to 85C without integral indicator
30* to 80C with integral indicator
* 15C when /HE is specified.
Mounting bracket
Relative humidity:
0% to 100% R.H.
Preferred temperature and humidity:
U-bolt nut (S)
approx. 25C and 65% R.H.
(b) When storing the transmitter, repack it carefully
U-bolt (S)
in the packaging that it was originally shipped
with.
U-bolt (L)
(c) If the transmitter has been used, thoroughly
F0201.ai
clean the chambers inside the cover flanges, so
Figure 2.1 Transmitter Mounting Hardware
that there is no process fluid remaining inside.
Before placing it in storage, also make sure that
the pressure-detector is securely connected to
2.1 Model and Specifications the transmitter section.
Check
The model name and specifications are written on 2.4 Selecting the Installation
the name plate attached to the case. Location
The transmitter is designed to withstand severe
environmental conditions. However, to ensure
that it will provide years of stable and accurate
performance, take the following precautions when
selecting the installation location.
F0202.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-2
(a) Ambient Temperature 2.6 Waterproofing of Cable
Avoid locations subject to wide temperature
variations or a significant temperature gradient.
Conduit Connections
If the location is exposed to radiant heat from Apply a non-hardening sealant to the threads
plant equipment, provide adequate thermal to waterproof the transmitter cable conduit
insulation and/or ventilation. connections. (See figure 6.8, 6.9 and 6.10.)
(b) Ambient Atmosphere
Do not install the transmitter in a corrosive 2.7 Restrictions on Use of Radio
atmosphere. If this cannot be avoided, there
must be adequate ventilation as well as Transceivers
measures to prevent the leaking of rain water
and the presence of standing water in the IMPORTANT
conduits. Although the transmitter has been designed to
(c) Shock and Vibration resist high frequency electrical noise, if a radio
Although the transmitter is designed to be transceiver is used near the transmitter or its
relatively resistant to shock and vibration, an external wiring, the transmitter may be affected
installation site should be selected where this is by high frequency noise pickup. To test this, start
kept to a minimum. out from a distance of several meters and slowly
approach the transmitter with the transceiver
(d) Installation of Explosion-protected Transmitters
while observing the measurement loop for noise
An explosion-protected transmitters is
effects. Thereafter use the transceiver outside
certified for installation in a hazardous area
the range where the noise effects were first
containing specific gas types. See subsection
observed.
2.9 Installation of an Explosion-Protected
Transmitters.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-3
Insulation Resistance Test 2.9 Installation of an Explosion-
1) Short-circuit the + and SUPPLY terminals Protected Instrument
in the terminal box. In case of 1 to 5 V output,
short-circuit the SUPPLY+, SUPPLY and A NOTE
(VOUT +) terminals.
2) Turn OFF the insulation tester. Then connect For FOUNDATION Fieldbus explosion protected
the insulation tester plus (+) lead wire to the type, please refer to IM 01C22T02-01E.
shorted SUPPLY terminals and the minus () For PROFIBUS PA explosion protected type,
leadwire to the grounding terminal. please refer to IM 01C25T04-01EN.
3) Turn ON the insulation tester power and
measure the insulation resistance. The voltage If a customer makes a repair or modification to
should be applied as briefly as possible to verify an intrinsically safe or explosionproof instrument
that the insulation resistance is at least 20 M. and the instrument is not restored to its original
4) After completing the test and being very careful condition, its intrinsically safe or explosionproof
not to touch exposed conductors disconnect the construction may be compromised and the
insulation tester and connect a 100 k resistor instrument may be hazardous to operate. Please
between the grounding terminal and the short- contact Yokogawa before making any repair or
circuiting SUPPLY terminals. Leave this resistor modification to an instrument.
connected at least one second to discharge any
static potential. Do not touch the terminals while CAUTION
it is discharging.
This instrument has been tested and certified
Dielectric Strength Test
as being intrinsically safe or explosionproof.
1) Short-circuit the + and SUPPLY terminals Please note that severe restrictions apply to this
in the terminal box. In case of 1 to 5 V output, instruments construction, installation, external
short-circuit the SUPPLY+, SUPPLY and A wiring, maintenance and repair. A failure to abide
(VOUT +) terminals. by these restrictions could make the instrument a
2) Turn OFF the dielectric strength tester. Then hazard to operate.
connect the tester between the shorted
SUPPLY terminals and the grounding terminal.
Be sure to connect the grounding lead of the
WARNING
dielectric strength tester to the ground terminal.
3) Set the current limit on the dielectric strength Maintaining the safety of explosionproof
tester to 10 mA, then turn ON the power and equipment requires great care during mounting,
gradually increase the test voltage from 0 to wiring, and piping. Safety requirements also
the specified voltage. place restrictions on maintenance and repair.
4) When the specified voltage is reached, hold it Please read the following sections very carefully.
for one minute.
5) After completing this test, slowly decrease the
voltage to avoid any voltage surges.
WARNING
The range setting switch must not be used in a
hazardous area.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-4
Note 2. Entity Parameters
IMPORTANT Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters
For combined approval types [Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G]
Once a device of multiple approval type is Vmax = 30 V Ci = 6 nF
installed, it should not be re-installed using any Imax = 200 mA Li = 0 H
other approval types. Apply a permanent mark Pmax = 1 W
in the check box of the selected approval type * Associated Apparatus Parameters
on the certification label on the transmitter to (FM approved barriers)
distinguish it from unused approval types. Voc 30 V Ca > 6 nF
Isc 200 mA La > 0 H
Pmax 1W
IMPORTANT
Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters
All the blind plugs which accompany the EJX/ [Groups C, D, E, F and G]
EJA-E transmitters upon shipment from the Vmax = 30 V Ci = 6 nF
factory are certified by the applicable agency Imax = 225 mA Li = 0 H
in combination with the transmitters. The plugs Pmax = 1 W
which are marked with the symbols Ex on
their surfaces are certified only in combination * Associated Apparatus Parameters
with the EJX/EJA-E series transmitters. (FM approved barriers)
Voc 30 V Ca > 6 nF
Isc 225 mA La > 0 H
2.9.1 FM Approval Pmax 1 W
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-5
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair Output signal: 4 to 20 mA
The instrument modification or parts 15 mA (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
replacement by other than authorized PROFIBUS PA type)
representative of Yokogawa Electric 1 to 5 V (Low Power type)
Corporation is prohibited and will void
Note 2. Wiring
Factory Mutual Intrinsically safe and
All wiring shall comply with National Electrical
Nonincendive Approval.
Code ANSI/NFPA70 and Local Electrical
[Intrinsically Safe] Codes.
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location When installed in Division 1, FACTORY
Class I, II, III, Division 1, SEALED, CONDUIT SEAL NOT
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G REQUIRED.
Class 1, Zone 0 in Wiring connection for output signal code Q
Hazardous (Classified) General
Locations AEx ia IIC (Low Power type) shall follow the diagram
Purpose
Pressure Transmitters Safety Barrier Equipment below.
+ + + + Pressure Transmitters
Supply SUPPLY +
Voltmeter
A Power Supply
F0203-1.ai
+ +
[Nonincendive]
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location SUPPLY
Class I, II, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, D, F, G Three-Wire Connection
Class 1, Zone 2, Group IIC, Pressure Transmitters
in Hazardous (Classified)
General SUPPLY +
Locations
Purpose Voltmeter
Pressure Transmitters Equipment A Power Supply
+ + + +
Supply
Not Use
Safety Barrier SUPPLY
F0203-2.ai
Four-Wire Connection
F0211.ai
b. FM Explosionproof Type
Caution for FM explosionproof type. Note 3. Operation
Keep the WARNING nameplate attached to
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters the transmitter.
with optional code /FF1 are applicable for WARNING: OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE
use in hazardous locations. REMOVING COVER. FACTORY SEALED,
Applicable Standard: FM3600, FM3615, CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED.
FM3810, ANSI/NEMA 250 INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, USERS MANUAL IM 01C25.
Groups B, C and D. Take care not to generate mechanical
Dust-ignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, sparking when accessing to the instrument
Groups E, F and G. and peripheral devices in a hazardous
Enclosure: Type 4X location.
Temperature Class: T6
Ambient Temperature: 40 to 60C
Supply Voltage: 42 V dc max.
32 V dc max. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
PROFIBUS PA type)
9 to 28 V dc, 27 mW (Low Power type)
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-6
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair [For CSA E60079]
The instrument modification or parts Applicable Standard: CAN/CSA E60079-11,
replacement by other than authorized CAN/CSA E60079-15, IEC 60529:2001
representative of Yokogawa Electric Ex ia IIC T4, Ex nL IIC T4
Corporation is prohibited and will void Ambient Temperature: 50* to 60C
* 15C when /HE is specified.
Factory Mutual Explosionproof Approval.
Max. Process Temp.: 120C
c. FM Intrinsically Safe Type/FM Enclosure: IP66/IP67
Explosionproof Type
Note 2. Entity Parameters
EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters with Intrinsically safe ratings are as follows:
optional code /FU1 or /V1U1 can be selected Maximum Input Voltage (Vmax/Ui) = 30 V
the type of protection (FM Intrinsically Safe Maximum Input Current (Imax/Ii) = 200 mA
or FM Explosionproof) for use in hazardous Maximum Input Power (Pmax/Pi) = 0.9 W
locations. Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 10 nF
Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter, Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H
once a particular type of protection is Type "n" or Nonincendive ratings are as
selected, any other type of protection follows:
cannot be used. The installation must be in Maximum Input Voltage (Vmax/Ui) = 30 V
accordance with the description about the Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 10 nF
type of protection in this instruction manual. Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H
Installation Requirements
Note 2. In order to avoid confusion, unnecessary Uo Ui, Io Ii, Po Pi,
marking is crossed out on the label other Co Ci + Ccable, Lo Li + Lcable
than the selected type of protection when Voc Vmax, Isc Imax,
the transmitter is installed. Ca Ci + Ccable, La Li + Lcable
2.9.2 CSA Certification Uo, Io, Po, Co, Lo, Voc, Isc, Ca and La are
parameters of barrier.
a. CSA Intrinsically Safe Type
Note 3. Installation
Caution for CSA Intrinsically safe and In any safety barreir used output current
nonincendive type. (Following contents refer to must be limited by a resistor 'R' such that
DOC No. ICS013-A13) Io=Uo/R or Isc=Voc/R.
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series differential, gauge, The safety barrier must be CSA certified.
and absolute pressure transmitters with Input voltage of the safety barrier must be
optional code /CS1 are applicable for use less than 250 Vrms/Vdc.
in hazardous locations Installation should be in accordance with
Certificate: 1606623 Canadian Electrical Code Part I and Local
[For CSA C22.2] Electrical Code.
Applicable Standard: C22.2 No.0, C22.2 Dust-tight conduit seal must be used when
No.0.4, C22.2 No.25, C22.2 No.94, C22.2 installed in Class II and III environments.
No.157, C22.2 No.213, C22.2 No.61010-1, The instrument modification or parts
C22.2 No.61010-2-030, C22.2 No.60079-0 replacement by other than authorized
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, representative of Yokogawa Electric
Groups A, B, C & D, Class II, Division 1, Corporation and Yokogawa Corporation
Groups E, F & G, Class III, Division 1 of America is prohibited and will void
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups Canadian Standards Intrinsically safe and
A, B, C & D, Class II, Division 2, Groups F & nonincendive Certification.
G, Class III, Division 1
Enclosure: Type 4X
Temp. Code: T4
Amb. Temp.: 50* to 60C
* 15C when /HE is specified.
Process Temperature: 120C max.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-7
[Intrinsically Safe] Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA dc
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location 15 mA (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
Group IIC, Zone 0 PROFIBUS PA type)
Class I, II, III, Division 1, 1 to 5 V (Low Power type)
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G General
Purpose
Safety Barrier
Note 2. Wiring
Pressure Transmitters Equipment
+ + + + All wiring shall comply with Canadian
Electrical Code Part I and Local Electrical
Supply
Codes.
In hazardous location, wiring shall be in
F0204-1.ai
conduit as shown in the figure.
[Nonincendive] WARNING:
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location A SEAL SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN
Group IIC, Zone 2 50cm OF THE ENCLOSURE.
Class I, II, Division 2,
CSA Certified
UN SCELLEMENT DOIT TRE INSTALL
Groups A, B, C, D, F, G
Equipment MOINS DE 50cm DU BOTIER.
Class III, Division 1.
([nL] or WARNING:
Pressure Transmitters nonincendive)
WHEN INSTALLED IN CL.I, DIV 2, SEAL
+ +
NOT REQUIRED.
Supply UNE FOIS INSTALL DANS CL I, DIV 2,
Not Use
Safety Barrier AUCUN JOINT N'EST REQUIS.
F0204-2.ai Non-Hazardous Hazardous Locations Division 1
Locations
b. CSA Explosionproof Type Non-hazardous
Location
Equipment 50 cm Max.
Caution for CSA explosionproof type.
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters
with optional code /CF1 are applicable for 42 V DC Max. Conduit
use in hazardous locations: 4 to 20 mA DC Sealing Fitting
Signal
Certificate: 2014354 Transmitter
F0205-1.ai
Applicable Standard: C22.2 No.0,
C22.2 No.0.4, C22.2 No.0.5, C22.2 No.25, Non-Hazardous Hazardous Locations Division 2
C22.2 No.30, C22.2 No.94, Locations
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-8
Pressure Transmitters Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter,
SUPPLY +
once a particular type of protection is
Voltmeter selected, any other type of protection
A Power Supply cannot be used. The installation must be in
+ +
accordance with the description about the
type of protection in this instruction manual.
SUPPLY Note 2. In order to avoid confusion, unnecessary
Three-Wire Connection marking is crossed out on the label other
than the selected type of protection when
Pressure Transmitters
the transmitter is installed.
SUPPLY +
A
Voltmeter 2.9.3 ATEX Certification
Power Supply
+ +
(1) Technical Data
a. ATEX Intrinsically Safe Ex ia
SUPPLY
Four-Wire Connection
Caution for ATEX Intrinsically safe type.
F0212.ai
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters
Note 3. Operation with optional code /KS21 for potentially
WARNING: explosive atmospheres:
AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 5 No. DEKRA 11ATEX0228 X
MINUTES BEFORE OPENING. Applicable Standard:
APRS POWER-OFF, ATTENDRE 5 EN 60079-0:2009, EN 60079-11:2007,
MINUTES AVANT D'OUVRIR. EN 60079-26:2007, EN 61241-11:2006
WARNING: Type of Protection and Marking code:
WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 65C, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
USE THE HEAT-RESISTING CABLES Ex ia IIIC T85 C T100 C T120 C Db
90C. Group: II
QUAND LA TEMPRATURE AMBIANTE Category: 1G, 2D
65C, UTILISEZ DES CBLES Ambient Temperature for EPL Ga:
RSISTANTES LA CHALEUR 90C. 50 to 60C
Ambient Temperature for EPL Db:
Take care not to generate mechanical
30* to 60C
sparking when accessing to the instrument
* 15C when /HE is specified.
and peripheral devices in a hazardous
Process Temperature (Tp.): 120C max.
location.
Maximum Surface Temperature for EPL Db:
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair T85C (Tp.: 80C)
The instrument modification or parts T100C (Tp.: 100C)
replacement by other than authorized T120C (Tp.: 120C)
representative of Yokogawa Electric Enclosure: IP66 / IP67
Corporation and Yokogawa Corporation of
Note 2 Electrical Data
America is prohibited and will void Canadian
In type of explosion protection intrinsic safety
Standards Explosionproof Certification.
Ex ia IIC or Ex ia IIIC, only for connection to a
c CSA Intrinsically Safe Type/CSA certified intrinsically safe circuit with following
Explosionproof Type maximum values:
EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters with Ui = 30 V
optional code /CU1 or /V1U1 can be selected Ii = 200 mA
the type of protection (CSA Intrinsically Safe Pi = 0.9 W
or CSA Explosionproof) for use in hazardous (Linear Source)
locations. Maximum internal capacitance; Ci = 27.6 nF
Maximum internal inductance; Li = 0 H
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-9
Note 3. Installation b. ATEX Flameproof Type
Refer to the control drawing. All wiring shall
Caution for ATEX flameproof type.
comply with local installation requirements.
[Control Drawing] Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters
with optional code /KF22 for potentially
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
explosive atmospheres:
Pressure Transmitters No. KEMA 07ATEX0109 X
+ + Applicable Standard: EN 60079-0:2009,
Supply Safety Barrier *1
EN 60079-1:2007, EN 60079-31:2009
Type of Protection and Marking Code:
Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb, Ex tb IIIC T85C Db
Group: II
F0206.ai Category: 2G, 2D
*1: In any safety barriers used the output current must be Enclosure: IP66/IP67
limited by a resistor R such that Io=Uz/R.
Temperature Class for gas-poof:
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair T6, T5, and T4
The instrument modification or parts Ambient Temperature for gas-proof:
replacement by other than authorized 50 to 75C (T6), 50 to 80C (T5), and
representative of Yokogawa Electric 50 to 75C (T4)
Corporation is prohibited and will void Maximum Process Temperature (Tp.) for
DEKRA Intrinsically safe Certification. gas-proof:
85C (T6), 100C (T5), and 120C (T4)
Note 5. Special Conditions for Safe Use
Maximum Surface Temperature for dust-
proof:
WARNING
T85C (Tamb.: 30* to 75C, Tp.: 85C)
* 15C when /HE is specified.
In the case where the enclosure of the
Pressure Transmitter is made of aluminium, Note 2. Electrical Data
if it is mounted in an area where the use of Supply voltage: 42 V dc max.
category 1 G apparatus is required, it must 32 V dc max. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
be installed such, that, even in the event of PROFIBUS PA type)
rare incidents, ignition sources due to impact 9 to 28 V dc, 27 mW (Low Power type)
and friction sparks are excluded. Output signal: 4 to 20 mA
Electrostatic charge may cause an exlosion 15 mA (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the PROFIBUS PA type)
generation of electrostatic charge, such as 1 to 5 V (Low Power type)
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of Note 3. Installation
the product. All wiring shall comply with local installation
In case of the enclosure of the Pressure requirement.
Transmitter with paint layers, if it is mounted Cable glands, adapters and/or blanking
in an area where the use of category 2D elements with a suitable IP rating shall
apparatus is required, it shall be installed in be of Ex d IIC/Ex tb IIIC certified by ATEX
such a way that the risk from electrostatic and shall be installed so as to maintain the
discharges and propagating brush specific degree of protection (IP Code) of the
discharges caused by rapid flow of dust is equipment.
avoided. Wiring connection for output signal code Q
To satisfy IP66 or IP67, apply waterproof (Low Power type) shall follow the diagram
glands to the electrical connection port. below.
When the lightning protector option is
specified, the apparatus is not capable
of withstanding the 500V insulation test
required by EN60079-11. This must be taken
into account when installing the apparatus.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-10
Pressure Transmitters c. ATEX Intrinsically Safe Type/ATEX
SUPPLY +
Flameproof Type
Voltmeter
A Power Supply
EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters with
+ + optional code /KU22 or /V1U1 can be selected
the type of protection ATEX Flameproof,
Intrinsically Safe. Ex ia, or Ex ic for use in
SUPPLY hazardous area.
Three-Wire Connection Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter,
Pressure Transmitters once a particular type of protection is
SUPPLY + selected, any other type of protection
A
Voltmeter cannot be used. The installation must be in
Power Supply
accordance with the description about the
+ +
type of protection in this users manual.
Note 2. For combined approval types Once a
SUPPLY device of multiple approval type is installed,
Four-Wire Connection it should not be re-installed using any
other approval types. Apply a permanent
F0213.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-11
Note 3. Maintenance and Repair (3) Installation
The instrument modification or parts
replacement by other than authorized
WARNING
representative of Yokogawa Electric
Corporation is prohibited and will void ATEX All wiring shall comply with local installation
intrinsically safe. requirements and the local electrical code.
[Control drawing] There is no need for conduit seal in Division
Hazardous Area Nonhazardous Area 1 and Division 2 hazardous locations
because this product is sealed at the factory.
+
Pressure Associated
Transmitters Apparatus
(4) Operation
F0207.ai WARNING
Note 4. Specific Conditions of Use OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING
COVER. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH
WARNING THIS USERS MANUAL
Take care not to generate mechanical
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion sparking when access to the instrument and
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the peripheral devices in a hazardous location.
generation of electrostatic charge, such as
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of
the product. (5) Maintenance and Repair
When the lightning protector option is
specified, the apparatus is not capable WARNING
of withstanding the 500V insulation test
required by EN60079-11. This must be taken The instrument modification or parts replacement
into account when installing the apparatus. by other than an authorized Representative of
Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and
will void the certification.
(2) Electrical Connection
A mark indicating the electrical connection type
is stamped near the electrical connection port.
These marks are as followed.
Screw Size Marking
ISO M20 1.5 female M
ANSI 1/2 NPT female N or W
F0208.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-12
(6) Name Plate 2.9.4 IECEx Certification
Name plate EJX Series pressure transmitters with optional
code /SU21 can be selected the type of
protection (IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ia, Ex ic
or flameproof) for use in hazardous locations.
EJX Series pressure transmitters with optional
code /SS26 can be selected the type of
Tag plate for flameproof type
protection (IECEx intrinsically safe Ex ia or Ex
ic) for use in hazardous locations.
No. KEMA 07ATEX0109 X
Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb, Ex tb IIIC T85C Db
Enlcosure : IP66/IP67
TEMP. CLASS T6 T5 T4
WARNING
a. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ia
Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe Ex ia.
POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC
F0209.ai
with optional code /SU21 are applicable for
MODEL: Specified model code. use in hazardous locations
STYLE: Style code. No. IECEx DEK 11.0081X
SUFFIX: Specified suffix code. Applicable Standard: IEC 60079-0:2011,
SUPPLY: Supply voltage. IEC 60079-11:2011, IEC 60079-26:2006
OUTPUT: Output signal. Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
MWP: Maximum working pressure. Ambient Temperature: 50 to 60C
CAL RNG: Specified calibration range. Max. Process Temp.: 120C
NO.: Serial number and year of production*1.
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN: Note 2. Electrical Data
The manufacturer name and the address*2. Maximum Input Voltage (Ui) = 30 V
Maximum Input Current (Ii) = 200 mA
*1: The first digit in the three numbers next to the nine
letters of the serial number appearing after NO. Maximum Input Power (Pi) = 0.9 W
on the nameplate indicates the year of production. (linear source)
The following is an example of a serial number for a
product that was produced in 2010: Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 27.6 nF
91K819857 032 Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H
Note 3. Installation
The year 2010 In any safety barrier used output current
*2: 180-8750 is a zip code which represents the must be limited by a resistor R such that
following address.
Io=Uz/R.
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo Japan
The safety barrier must be IECEx certified.
*3: The identification number of Notified Body.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-13
Input voltage of the safety barrier must be Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
less than 250 Vrms/Vdc. Ambient Temperature: 30* to 60C
* -15 C when /HE is specified.
The instrument modification or parts
replacement by other than authorized Max. Process Temp.: 120C
representative of Yokogawa Electric IP Code: IP66
Corporation is prohibited and will void IECEx Overvoltage Category: I
certification. Note 2. Electrical Data
[Ex ia] Maximum Input Voltage (Ui) = 30 V
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 27.6 nF
Group IIC, Zone 0 Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 0 H
EJX/EJA-E Series IECEx certified Note 3. Installation
Pressure Transmitters Safety Barrier
The pressure transmitter is allowed to
+ +
be installed in nL systems, on condition
Supply
that the output parameters of nL source
(associated energy-limited apparatus)
(*1) are suitable to the above mentioned input
*1: When using non isolation barrier, parameters of the pressure transmitter and
connect (*1) to IS barrier system. F0215.ai
the cable parameters.
Note 4. Specific Condition of Use Cable glands, adapters and/or blanking
elements shall be of Ex n, Ex e or Ex
WARNING d and shall be installed so as to maintain
the specified degree of protection of the
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion equipment.
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the The instrument modification or parts
generation of electrostatic charge, such as replacement by other than authorized
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of representative of Yokogawa Electric
the product. Corporation is prohibited and will void IECEx
In the case where the enclosure of the certification.
pressure transmitter is made of aluminum, [Ex ic]
if it is mounted in an area where the use of Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
EPL Ga equipment is required, it shall be
EJX/EJA-E Series Associated apparatus
installed in such a way that , even in the Pressure Transmitters
event of rare incidents, ignition sources due
+ +
to impact and friction sparks are excluded. Supply
When the lightning protector option is
specified, the apparatus is not capable
F0216.ai
of withstanding the 500 V insulation test
required by IEC 60079-11. This must be Note 4. Specific Condition of Use
taken into account when installing the
apparatus. WARNING
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion
b. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ic hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the
Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe Ex ic. generation of electrostatic charge, such as
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E series pressure transmitters
the product.
with optional code /SU21 are applicable for
The apparatus is not capable of dielectric
use in hazardous locations
strength tests required by IEC 60079-11.
No. IECEx DEK 13.0061X
This must be taken into account when
Applicable Standard: IEC 60079-0:2011,
installing the apparatus.
IEC 60079-11:2011
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-14
c. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Type / type n [Intrinsically Safe]
Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe and type n. Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
Group IIC, Zone 0
Note 1. EJX Series differential, gauge, and General
IECEx certified Purpose
absolute pressure transmitters with Pressure Transmitters Safety Barrier Equipment
optional code /SU2 are applicable for use + + + +
in hazardous locations
Supply
No. IECEx CSA 05.0005
Applicable Standard: IEC 60079-0:2000,
IEC 60079-11:1999, IEC 60079-15:2001 F0210-1.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-15
Note 2. Wiring Note 4. Maintenance and Repair
In hazardous locations, the cable entry The instrument modification or parts
devices shall be of a certified flameproof replacement by other than authorized
type, suitable for the conditions of use and representative of Yokogawa Electric
correctly installed. Corporation is prohibited and will void IECEx
Unused apertures shall be closed with Certification.
suitable flameproof certified blanking Electrical Connection
elements. A mark indicating the electrical connection
Wiring connection for output signal code Q type is stamped near the electrical
(Low Power type) shall follow the diagram connection port. These marks are as
below. followed.
Pressure Transmitters
Screw Size Marking
SUPPLY +
Voltmeter ISO M20 1.5 female M
A Power Supply
ANSI 1/2 NPT female N or W
+ +
SUPPLY
Three-Wire Connection
Location of the mark
Pressure Transmitters
SUPPLY + F0208.ai
Voltmeter
A Power Supply
+ +
2.10 EMC Conformity Standards
EN 61326-1 Class A, Table2 (For use in
SUPPLY industrial locations)
Four-Wire Connection EN 61326-2-3
F0214.ai
EN 61326-2-5 (for Fieldbus)
Note 3. Operation
WARNING: CAUTION
AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 5
MINUTES BEFORE OPENING. To meet EMC regulations, Yokogawa
WARNING: recommends that customers run signal wiring
WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP.65C, USE through metal conduits or use shielded twisted-
HEAT-RESISTING CABLE AND CABLE pair cabling when installing EJX/EJA-E series
GLAND 90C. transmitters in a plant.
Take care not to generate mechanical
sparking when accessing to the instrument
and peripheral devices in a hazardous
location.
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the
generation of electrostatic charge, such as
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of the
product.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-16
2.11 Pressure Equipment (3) Operation
Directive (PED)
CAUTION
(1) General
The temperature and pressure of fluid should
EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters are be maintained at levels that are consistent
categorized as piping under the pressure with normal operating conditions.
accessories section of directive 97/23/EC, The ambient temperature should be
which corresponds to Article 3, Paragraph 3 of maintained at a level that is consistent with
PED, denoted as Sound Engineering Practice normal operating conditions.
(SEP). Please take care to prevent water hammer
EJ510-D, EJ530-D, EJX610A-D, and the like from inducing excessive
and EJX630A-D can be used above 200 pressures in pipes and valves. If phenomena
bar and therefore considered as a part of a are likely, install a safety valve or take
pressure retaining vessel where category III, some other appropriate measure to prevent
Module H applies. These models with option pressure from exceeding PS.
code /PE3 conform to that category. Take appropriate measures at the device or
(2) Technical Data system level to protect transmitters if they
are to be operated near an external heat
Models without /PE3 source.
Article 3, Paragraph 3 of PED, denoted as
Sound Engineering Practice (SEP).
Models with /PE3
Module: H
2.12 Safety Requirement
Type of Equipment: Pressure Accessory-Vessel Standards
Type of fluid: Liquid and Gas
Applicable standard: EN 61010-1,
Group of fluid: 1 and 2
EN 61010-2-30, C22.2 No.61010-1,
Capsule PS*1 PS.V C22.2 No.61010-2-030
Model V(L) Category*2
code (bar) (bar.L)
Article 3, (1) Pollution Degree 2
EJ510 A, B, C 100 0.1 10
Paragraph 3
EJX610A D 700 0.1 70 "Pollution degree" describes the degree to
(SEP)
EJ510,
which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates
EJX610A dielectric strength or surface resistivity is
D 700 0.1 70 III
with code / adhering. " 2 " applies to normal indoor
PE3
atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive
A, B, C 100 0.1 10 Article 3,
EJ530,
Paragraph 3 pollution occurs. Occasionally, however,
EJX630A D 700 0.1 70 (SEP) temporary conductivity caused by condensation
EJ530, must be expected.
EJX630A
D 700 0.1 70 III
with code / (2) Installation Category I
PE3
"Overvoltage category (Installation category)"
*1: PS is maximum pressure for vessel itself based on
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. Refer to describes a number which defines a transient
General Specification for maximum working pressure of a overvoltage condition. It implies the regulattion
transmitter.
*2: Referred to Table 1 covered by ANNEX II of EC Directive
for impulse withstand voltage. " I " applies to
on Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC electrical equipment which is supplied from the
circuit when appropriate transient overvoltage
control means (interfaces) are provided.
(3) Altitude of installation site:
Max. 2,000 m above sea level
(4) Indoor/Outdoor use
IM 01C25F01-01E
<3. Component Names> 3-1
3. Component Names
External indicator
conduit connection (Note 1)
Conduit
connection
(Note 2) Zero-
Slide switch adjustment
screw
Integral
indicator (Note 1)
Mounting screw
CPU assembly
Range-setting
switch (Note 1) Burnout direction switch
(See section 7.5)
BO H L
Transmitter section
WR E D
Amplifier Cover
Write protection switch
NO YES
Burnout Direction HIGH LOW Write Protection
(Write enabled) (Write disabled)
F0301.ai
Note 1: See subsection 9.2, Model and Suffix Codes, for details.
Note 2: Applicable for BRAIN/HART communication type. Set the switches as shown in the figure above to set the burn-out direction
and write protection. The Burnout switch is set to the H side for delivery (unless option code /C1 or /C2 is specified in the order),
and the hardware write protection switch is set to E side.The setting of the switches can be confirmed via communication. An
external zero adjustment screw can only be disabled by communication. To disable the screw, set a parameter before activating
the hardware write protect function. See each communication manual.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<4. Installation> 4-1
4. Installation
4.1 Precautions Vertical pipe mounting
IMPORTANT
When welding piping during construction,
take care not to allow welding currents to
flow through the transmitter.
Mounting bracket
Do not step on this instrument after U-bolt (L)
installation. U-bolt (S)
For the EJ530 and EJX630A whose
capsule code is A, B or C, the pipe of the
U-bolt nut (L)
atmospheric opening is located on the Horizontal pipe mounting
pressure detecting section. The opening
must not face upward. See subsection 5.1.1. Mounting bracket
D capsule of EJ530 and EJX630A is
of sealed gauge reference and the change
in atomospheric pressure may affect the 50 mm (2-inch) pipe
measurement.
Gasket
F0402.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<4. Installation> 4-2
Transmitter section
IMPORTANT
Tighten the hexagonal nut part of the capsule
assembly. See Figure 4.3.
Setscrew
Capsule assembly
Pressure-detector section
Stopper
F0404.ai
IMPORTANT
Do not rotate the transmitter section more than
the above limit.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<5. Installing Impulse Piping> 5-1
downwards for all the models. Figure 5.2 Process Pressure Tap Angle
(For Horizontal Piping)
The pipe (open to atmosphere) is positioned horizontal.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<5. Installing Impulse Piping> 5-2
(3) Impulse Piping Slope Tap valve
The impulse piping must be routed with only an
upward or downward slope. Even for horizontal Union or flange
routing, the impulse piping should have a slope of
at least 1/10 to prevent condensate (or gases) from
accumulating in the pipes. Stop valve
IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-1
6. Wiring
6.1 Wiring Precautions 6.3 Connections of External
IMPORTANT Wiring to Terminal Box
Lay wiring as far as possible from electrical Terminal Configuration
noise sources such as large capacity
transformers, motors, and power supplies.
Remove the electrical connection dust cap
before wiring.
All threaded parts must be treated with
waterproofing sealant. (A non-hardening
silicone group sealant is recommended.)
To prevent noise pickup, do not pass signal
and power cables through the same ducts. Terminal 1 Terminal 3
Materials VOUT +
3
2
1 to 5 V DC with HART communication
terminals
IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-2
6.3.1 Power Supply Wiring Connection Connect the BT200 or HART Communicator to the
SUPPLY + and terminals. (Use hooks.)
IMPORTANT Transmitter terminal box Power supply
Connecting with the commercial AC power +
supply will damage the device. Be sure to use
the DC power supply in the predetermined Ignore the polarity since the
range. BT200 is AC-coupled to the
terminal box.
BT200 F0603.ai
Connect the power supply wiring to the SUPPLY +
Figure 6.4 BT200 Connection
and terminals. When /AL is specified, also refer to
subsection 6.3.5.
1 to 5 V output, HART
Transmitter terminal box Connect the HART communicator or configuration
+ tool to the SUPPLY - and VOUT (+) terminals. (Use
Power supply
hooks.)
Load resistance is not necessary
Power supply Transmitter terminal box Voltmeter
for 1 to 5 V output.
F0601.ai + +
Figure 6.2 Power Supply Wiring Connection USB
FieldMate Modem
F0604.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-3
6.3.5 Status Output Connection (2) 4 to 20 mA output, Intrinsically Safe Type
When option code /AL is specified, connect the With the intrinsically safe type, a safety barrier must
external wiring as shown in Figure 6.5. be included in the loop.
To configure and activate the process alarm Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
function and status output, it is necessary to set
Transmitter terminal box
some parameters. Refer to each communication Distributor
manual for procedures. (Power supply unit)
Transmitter
24V DC
terminal box Shielded cable Receiver
+ instrument
Distributor
250
Receiver Receiver
instrument instrument
F0606.ai F0617.ai
Figure 6.9 Connection between Transmitter and Figure 6.11 Connection between Transmitter,
Distributor Distributer and Receiver
IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-4
Four wire connection (2) Flameproof Type
Fasten the negative side wiring of both power
Wire cables through a flameproof packing adapter,
supply and signal line to the SUPPLY - terminal.
or use a flameproof metal conduit.
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
Wiring cable through flameproof packing
Transmitter terminal box adapter.
Distributor
(Power supply unit) Apply a non-hardening sealant to the terminal
box connection port and to the threads on the
flameproof packing adapter for waterproofing.
Flameproof packing
adapter
(1) General-use Type and Intrinsically Safe Flameproof metal conduit wiring
Type A seal fitting must be installed near the terminal
box connection port for a sealed construction.
With the cable wiring, use a metallic conduit or
Apply a non-hardening sealant to the threads of
waterproof glands.
the terminal box connection port, flexible metal
Apply a non-hardening sealant to the terminal conduit and seal fitting for waterproofing.
box connection port and to the threads on the
Gas sealing device
flexible metal conduit for waterproofing. Non-hazardous area
Flameproof flexible
metal conduit
Hazardous area
Flexible metal conduit Apply a non-hardening
Flameproof
Apply a non-hardening heavy-gauge sealant to the threads of
Wiring metal steel conduit these fittings for
conduit sealant to the threads for
waterproofing. waterproofing
IM 01C25F01-01E
<6. Wiring> 6-5
6.5 Grounding
Grounding is always required for the proper
operation of transmitters. Follow the domestic
electrical requirements as regulated in each
country. For a transmitter with a built-in lightning
protector, grounding should satisfy ground
resistance of 10 or less.
Ground terminals are located on the inside and
outside of the terminal box. Either of these terminals
may be used.
Ground terminal
(inside)
Ground terminal
(outside)
F0611.ai
600
External E10.5
R= Communication
load 0.0244
applicable range
resistance BRAIN and HART
R ()
250
IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-1
NOTE
Tee
Check that the process pressure tap valves,
Union or flange
drain valves, and stop valves are closed.
Drain valve
(a) Follow the procedures below to introduce
Drain plug
process pressure into the impulse piping and
F0701.ai
transmitter.
Figure 7.1 Liquid Flow Measurement
1) Open the tap valve (main valve) to fill the (Gauge Pressure Transmitters)
impulse piping with process fluid.
2) Gradually open the stop valve to introduce
process fluid into the transmitter pressure- Confirming that Transmitter is Operating
detector section. Properly
3) Confirm that there is no pressure leak in
Using the BT200
the impulse piping, transmitter, or other
components. IMPORTANT
(b) Turn ON power and connect the communicator.
Analog output may change temporally in
Open the terminal box cover, and connect
connecting with BRAIN terminal due to
the communicator to the SUPPLY + and
an initial current flowed to it. To prevent
terminals.
communication signal affecting the upper
(c) Using the communicator, confirm that the system, it is recommended to install a low-
transmitter is operating properly. Check pass filter (approximately 0.1s).
parameter values or change the setpoints as Communication signal is superimposed on
necessary. analog output signal. It is recommended
See IM 01C25T03-01E (BRAIN to set a low-pass filter (approximately
communication) or IM 01C25T01-06EN (HART 0.1s) to the receiver in order to reduce the
communication) for communicator operation. output effect from communication signal.
If the transmitter is equipped with an integral Before online-communication, confirm that
indicator, its indication can be used to confirm communication signal does not give effect on
that the transmitter is operating properly. the upper system.
PARAM
C60:SELF CHECK
ERROR
communication error
IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-2
Using the integral indicator
If the wiring system is faulty, the display stays
IMPORTANT
blank. Do not turn off the power to the transmitter
If the transmitter is faulty, an error code is immediately after performing a zero point
displayed. adjustment. Powering off within 30 seconds of
performing this procedure will return the zero
point to its previous setting.
NOTE
Before performing this adjustment, make sure
Self-diagnostic error on the integral indicator
(Faulty transmitter) that the external zero adjustment function has
F0703.ai
NOT been disabled by a parameter setting.
Figure 7.3 Integral Indicator with Error Code
The parameters related to the following items are Figure 7.4 External Zero-adjustment Screw
set at factory as specified in order.
Calibration range The zero-adjustment screw is located inside the
Integral indicator display cover.
Software damping (optional)
Other parameters like following are shipped with the (1) When you can obtain the Low Range Value
default setting. from the actual measured value of 0% (0
Low-cut kPa, atmospheric pressure);
Process alarm setting
For pressure measurement using gauge pressure
Signal characterizer
transmitters, follow the steps below before
Write protection
performing zero point adjustment.
To confirm or change the values, see IM 01C25T01-
06EN or 01C25T03-01E. 1) Close the tap valve (main valve).
2) Loosen the fill plug so that the pressure applied
7.2 Zero Point Adjustment to the transmitter is only the head of the seal
liquid.
After completing preparations for operating the 3) Adjust the zero point at this status.
transmitter, adjust the zero point. 4) After the adjustment, close the fill plug and then
Zero point adjustment can be done by turning the gradually open the tap valve.
transmitters zero-adjustment screw or by using Use a slotted screwdriver to turn the zero-
the communicator. This section describes the adjustment screw. Turn the screw clockwise
procedure for the zero-adjustment screw. For the to increase the output or counterclockwise to
communicator procedure, see the communication decrease the output. The zero point adjustment can
manual. be made with a resolution of 0.01% of the setting
range. Since the degree of the zero adjustment
varies with the screw turning speed, turn the screw
slowly to make a fine adjustment and quickly to
make a rough adjustment.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-3
(2) When you cannot obtain the Low Range 7.4 Shutting Down the
Value from the actual measured value of 0%;
Transmitter
Adjust the transmitter output to the actual measured
Shut down the transmitter as follows.
value obtained by a digital manometer or a glass
Steps 2) and 3) are specific to the differential
gauge.
pressure transmitters.
[Example]
1) Turn off the power.
The measuring range of 50 to 250 kPa; the actual 2) Close the stop valve.
measured value of 130 kPa. 3) Open the equalizing valve.
4) Close the high pressure stop valve.
13050
Actual measured value= x100=40.0% 5) Close the tap valves.
25050
(=10.4mA)
NOTE
Turn the screw to match the output signal to the
actual measured value. Whenever shutting down the transmitter for a
long period, remove any process fluid that is
in the transmitter pressure-detector section.
7.3 Starting Operation
The equalizing valve must be left OPEN.
After completing the zero point adjustment, follow
the procedures below to start operation. Steps
1) and 2) are specific to the differential pressure
7.5 Local Parameter Setting
transmitters.
1) Confirm the operating status. If the output
WARNING
signal exhibits wide fluctuations (hunting) due to
periodic variation in the process pressure, use The local push button on the integral indicator
the communicator to dampen the transmitter must not be used in a hazardous area. When it is
output signal. Confirm the hunting using a necessary to use the push button, operate it in a
receiving instrument or the integral indicator, non- hazardous location.
and set the optimum damping time constant.
2) After confirming the operating status, perform
the following. IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power to the transmitter
immediately after performing parameter
Remove the communicator from the terminal
setting. Powering off within 30 seconds of
box, and confirm that none of the terminal
performing this procedure will return the
screws are loose.
parameter to its previous setting.
Close the terminal box cover and the
The parameter of Ext SW must beEnabled
amplifier cover. Screw each cover in tightly
to perform this configuration. See the users
until it will not turn further.
manual IM 01C25T (HART/BRAIN) for the
There are two covers that must be locked
setting procedure.
on the ATEX Flameproof type transmitters.
The Local Parameter Setting function
An Allen head bolt (shrouding bolt) under
is available with HART or BRAIN
the edge of each cover is used to lock the
communication type.
cover. When the shrouding bolt is driven
LCD update will be slower at low ambient
counterclockwise with an Allen wrench, the
temperature, and it is recommended to use
bolt rotates upward and locks the cover. (See
LPS function at temperatures above -10
section 8.4.) After locking the covers, confirm
degrees C.
that they are secure and cannot be opened
by hand.
Tighten the zero-adjustment cover mounting
screw to secure the cover.
Tighten the zero-adjustment cover mounting
screw to secure the cover.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-4
7.5.1 Local Parameter Setting (LPS) Overview
Parameter configuration by the external adjustment screw and push button (integral indicator code E) offers
easy and quick setup for parameters of Tag number, Unit, LRV, URV, Damping,Output mode (linear/square
root), Display out 1, and Re-range by applying actual pressure (LRV/URV). There is no effect on measurement
signal (analog output or communication signal) when Local Parameter Setting is carried out.
Integral indicator
External adjustment
screw cover
Push-button
F0705.ai F0706.ai
Figure 7.5 External Adjustment Screw Figure 7.6 Range Setting Switch (push button)
screw
Process
Measurement Zero adjustment
Display push
Activate LPS mode
push
*
1. Tag Number Edit Tag number Save/Cancel the value
*
2. Press Unit Select Press unit Save/Cancel the value
push *
3. Press LRV Edit Press LRV Save/Cancel the value
*
4. Press URV Edit Press URV Save/Cancel the value
push *
5. Damping Time Edit Damping time Save/Cancel the value
*
6. Output Mode Select Output mode Save/Cancel the value
push *
7. Display Out1 Edit Display Out1 Save/Cancel the value
push
9. URV-Apply Press Set URV Save/Cancel the value
Process
Measurement
Display
F0707.ai
*: Note that the above 1 to 7 parameter configurations are available with the software revision (SOFT REV)2.03 or later.
Software revision can be checked via a field communicator (HART/BRAIN) or DTM. Please refer to IM 01C25T01 for HART
parameter Software rev and IM 01C25T03 for BRAIN SOFT REV.
Figure 7.7
IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-5
7.5.2 Activating Local Parameter Setting
Press the push button on the integral indicator to activate the Local Parameter Setting mode. The transmitter
will exit automatically from the Local Parameter Setting mode if no operation is carried out for 10 minutes.
push
push
push
push
push
push
push
push
push Process
Measurement
Display
F0708.ai
*: [Software revision: 2.03] Up to 6 characters are shown in the bottom line. To review after the 7th character, turn the external
adjustment screw and press the push button six times or more.
[Software revision: 3.01 or later] The display automatically scrolls to show all the characters.
To configure each parameter value, turn the external adjustment screw on each parameter screen after
activating the Local Parameter Setting mode.
To cancel the Local Parameter Setting configuration, please refer to 7.5.11 Save or Cancel and 7.5.12 Abort
Configuration.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-6
7.5.4 Tag Number Configuration
Tag Number is edited by turning the external adjustment screw. Up to 8 alphanumeric characters for HART or
16 alphanumeric characters for BRAIN can be set.
Save ?/
Cancel ?
Blinking Blinking
Set all other
characters in the
Go to the next Character same way
Change the first Character
screw
push
F0709.ai
Save ?/
Cancel ?
Blinking Blinking
[Available pressure units]
Select by the push button
kPa bar inH2O@4degC(39.2degF)
Torr mbar inH2O@20degC(68degF)
atm g/cm2 inHg
MPa kg/cm2 ftH2O@4degC(39.2degF)
screw hPa Pa ftH2O@20degC(68degF)
push mmHg mmH2O@4degC(39.2degF)
psi mmH2O@20degC(68degF)
In addition to the above units, mmAq@4degC,
mmAq@20degC, mmWG@4degC and mmWG@20degC
are available for BRAIN communication type.
F0710.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-7
7.5.7 Damping Time Constant Configuration
The damping time constant for the amplifier assembly can be set. Quick Response Parameter is automatically
set to ON when the damping time constant is set to less than 0.5 seconds. Damping time constant is rounded off
to two decimal places.
Save ?/
Cancel ?
push
F0711.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<7. Operation> 7-8
7.5.11 Save or Cancel 7.5.12.2 Abort Configuration (Parameter)
At the end of each parameter setting, select Save To exit the configuration while editing the value,
or Cancel by the external adjustment screw hold down the button for over 2 seconds and select
and press the push button to save or cancel the Save or Cancel.
configuration.
Save or Cancel
Proccess Value
F0714.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-1
8. Maintenance
8.1 Overview 8.3 Calibration
Use the procedure below to check instrument
WARNING operation and accuracy during periodic
maintenance or troubleshooting.
Since the accumulated process fluid may be
toxic or otherwise harmful, take appropriate care 1) Connect the instruments as shown in figure 8.1
to avoid contact with the body or inhalation of and warm up the instruments for at least ten
vapors when draining condensate or venting gas minutes.
from the transmitter pressure-detector section
and even after dismounting the instrument from IMPORTANT
the process line for maintenance.
To adjust the transmitter for highest
accuracy, make adjustments with the
Maintenance of the transmitter is easy due to its power supply voltage and load resistance
modular construction. This chapter describes the including leadwire resistances set close to
procedures for calibration, adjustment, and the the conditions under which the transmitter is
disassembly and reassembly procedures required installed.
for component replacement. If the measurement range 0% point is
Transmitters are precision instruments. Please 0 kPa or shifted in the positive direction
carefully and thoroughly read the following sections (suppressed zero), the reference pressure
for information on how to properly handle them should be applied as shown in the figure.
while performing maintenance. If the measurement range 0% point is shifted
in the negative direction (elevated zero), the
IMPORTANT reference pressure should be applied using
a vacuum pump.
As a rule, maintenance of this transmitter
should be done in a shop that has all the 2) Apply reference pressures of 0%, 50%,
necessary tools. and 100% of the measurement range to the
The CPU assembly contains sensitive parts transmitter. Calculate the errors (differences
that can be damaged by static electricity. between digital voltmeter readings and
Take precautions such as using a grounded reference pressures) as the pressure is
wrist strap when handling electronic parts or increased from 0% to 100% and is decreased
touching the board circuit patterns. Also be from 100% to 0%, and confirm that the errors
sure to place the removed CPU assembly are within the required accuracy.
into a bag with an antistatic coating.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-2
Table 8.1 Instruments Required for Calibration
Name Yokogawa-recommended Instrument Remarks
Power supply Model SDBT or SDBS distributor 4 to 20 mA DC signal
Load resistor Model 2792 standard resistor [250 0.005%, 3 W]
Load adjustment resistor [100 1%, 1 W]
Voltmeter Model 2501 A digital multimeter
Accuracy (10V DC range): (0.002% of rdg + 1 dgt)
Digital Model MT220 precision digital manometer Select a manometer having
manometer 1) For 10 kPa class a pressure range close to
Accuracy: (0.015% of rdg + 0.015% of F.S.) . . . . for 0 to 10 kPa that of the transmitter.
(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . for -10 to 0 kPa
2) For 130 kPa class
Accuracy: 0.02% of rdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for 25 to 130 kPa
5digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 25 kPa
(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . for -80 to 0 kPa
3) For 700 kPa class
Accuracy: (0.02% of rdg + 3digits) . . . . . . . . . . . . for 100 to 700 kPa
5 digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 100 kPa
(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . for -80 to 0 kPa
4) For 3000 kPa class
Accuracy: (0.02% of rdg + 10 digits) . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 3000 kPa
(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . for -80 to 0 kPa
5) For 130 kPa abs class
Accuracy: (0.03% of rdg + 6 digits) . . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 130 kPa abs
Pressure Model 7674 pneumatic pressure standard for 200 kPa {2 kgf/cm2}, 25 kPa Requires air pressure
generator {2500 mmH2O} supply.
Accuracy: 0.05% of F.S.
Dead weight gauge tester 25 kPa {2500 mmH2O} Select the one having a
Accuracy: 0.03% of setting pressure range close to that
of the transmitter.
Pressure Model 6919 pressure regulator (pressure pump) Prepare the vacuum pump
source Pressure range: 0 to 133 kPa {1000 mmHg} for negative pressure
ranges.
Note: The above table contains the instruments capable of performing calibration to the 0.2% level. Since special maintenance and
management procedures involving traceability of each instrument to higher-level standards are required for calibration to the 0.1%
or higher level, there may be difficulties in calibration to this level in the field. For calibration to the 0.1% or higher level, use proper
instruments for required level or contact Yokogawa representatives from which the instrument was purchased or the nearest
Yokogawa office.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-3
8.4 Disassembly and 8.4.1 Replacing the Integral Indicator
Reassembly
CAUTION
This section describes procedures for disassembly
and reassembly for maintenance and component Cautions for Flameproof Type Transmitters
replacement. Users are prohibited by law from modifying the
Always turn OFF power and shut off and release construction of a flameproof type transmitter.
pressures before disassembly. Use proper tools for This would invalidate the agency approval for the
all operations. Table 8.2 shows the tools required. use of the transmitter in a rated area.
It follows that the user is prohibited from using
Table 8.2 Tools for Disassembly and Reassembly a flameproof type transmitter with its integral
Tool Quantity Remarks indicator removed, or from adding an integral
Phillips 1 JIS B4633, No. 2 indicator to a transmitter. If such modification is
screwdriver absolutely required, contact Yokogawa.
Slotted 1
screwdriver
This subsection describes the procedure for
Allen wrenches 3 JIS B4648
One each, nominal 3, 4 and replacing an integral indicator. (See figure 8.3)
2.5 mm Allen wrenches
Wrench 1 Width across flats, 17 mm Removing the Integral Indicator
Torque wrench 1
1) Remove the cover.
Adjustable 1
wrench 2) While supporting the integral indicator with one
Socket wrench 1 Width across flats, 16 mm hand, loosen its two mounting screws.
Socket driver 1 Width across flats, 5.5 mm 3) Dismount the LCD board assembly from the
Tweezers 1 CPU assembly.
When doing this, carefully pull the LCD board
assembly straight forward so as not to damage
CAUTION the connector pins between it and the CPU
assembly.
Precautions for ATEX Flameproof Type
Attaching the Integral Indicator
Transmitters
Flameproof type transmitters must be, as 1) Align both the LCD board assembly and CPU
a rule, removed to a non-hazardous area assembly connectors and engage them.
for maintenance and be disassembled and 2) Insert and tighten the two mounting screws.
reassembled to the original state. 3) Replace the cover.
On the flameproof type transmitters the two Output terminal cable
covers are locked, each by an Allen head bolt
(shrouding bolt). When a shrouding bolt is
driven clockwise by an Allen wrench, it is going
in and cover lock is released, and then the Press
cover can be opened. forward
Shrouding Bolt
F0803.ai
Shrouding Bolt F0802.ai Figure 8.3 Removing and Attaching LCD Board
Figure 8.2 Shrouding Bolts Assembly and CPU Assembly
IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-4
8.4.2 Replacing the CPU Board Assembly
NOTE
This subsection describes the procedure for
replacing the CPU assembly. (See figure 8.3) Confirm that the zero-adjustment screw pin is
placed properly in the groove on the bracket prior
Removing the CPU Assembly to tightening the two bosses. If it is not, the zero-
1) Remove the cover. If an integral indicator is adjustment mechanism will be damaged.
mounted, refer to subsection 8.4.1 and remove
the indicator. 5) Replace the cover.
2) Turn the zero-adjustment screw to the position
8.4.3 Cleaning and Replacing the Capsule
(where the screw head slot is horizontal) as
Assembly
shown in figure 8.3.
3) Disconnect the output terminal cable (cable This subsection describes the procedures for
with brown connector at the end). When doing cleaning and replacing the capsule assembly. (See
this, lightly press the side of the CPU assembly figure 8.4.)
connector and pull the cable connector to
disengage.
4) Use a socket driver (width across flats, 5.5mm) CAUTION
to loosen the two bosses.
Cautions for Flameproof Type Transmitters
5) Carefully pull the CPU assembly straight
Users are prohibited by law from modifying the
forward to remove it.
construction of a flameproof type transmitter. If
6) Disconnect the flat cable (cable with white
you wish to replace the capsule assembly with
connector at the end) that connects the CPU
one of a different measurement range, contact
assembly and the capsule.
Yokogawa.
The user is permitted, however, to replace a
NOTE capsule assembly with another of the same
Be careful not to apply excessive force to the measurement range. When doing so, be sure to
CPU assembly when removing it. observe the following.
The replacement capsule assembly must
have the same part number as the one being
Mounting the CPU Assembly replaced.
1) Connect the flat cable (with white connector) The section connecting the transmitter and
between the CPU assembly and the capsule. capsule assembly is a critical element in
2) Connect the output terminal cable (with brown preservation of flameproof performance, and
connector). must be checked to verify that it is free of
dents, scratches, and other defects.
NOTE After completing maintenance, be sure to
securely tighten the setscrews that fasten the
Make certain that the cables do not get pinched transmitter section and pressure-detector
between the case and the edge of the CPU section together.
assembly.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-5
Removing the Capsule Assembly Transmitter section
IMPORTANT
Hexagon
Exercise care as follows when cleaning the head screw
3) Remove the hexagon-head screw and the Figure 8.4 Removing and Mounting the Pressure-
stopper. detector Section
4) Separate the transmitter section and capsule
assembly.
5) Clean the capsule assembly or replace with a 8.5 Troubleshooting
new one.
If any abnormality appears in the measured values,
Reassembling the Capsule Assembly use the troubleshooting flow chart below to isolate
and remedy the problem. Since some problems
1) Insert the capsule assembly to the transmitter
have complex causes, these flow charts may
section. Reattach the sopper with the hexagon-
not identify all. If you have difficulty isolating or
head screw.
correcting a problem, contact Yokogawa service
2) Tighten the two setscrews. (Tighten the screws
personnel.
to a torque of 1.5 Nm)
3) Install the CPU assembly according to
subsection 8.4.2.
4) After completing reassembly, adjust the zero
point and recheck the parameters.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-6
8.5.1 Basic Troubleshooting 8.5.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts
First determine whether the process variable
The following sorts of symptoms indicate that transmitter
is actually abnormal or a problem exists in the may not be operating properly.
Example : There is no output signal.
measurement system. Output signal does not change even though
process variable is known to be varying.
If the problem is in the measurement system, Output value is inconsistent with value
isolate the problem and decide what corrective inferred for process variable.
action to take.
This transmitter is equipped with a self-diagnostic Connect communicator and check self-diagnostics.
function which will be useful in troubleshooting,
and the transmitter equipped with an integral
indicator will show an alarm code as a result of self- Does the self-diagnostic YES
diagnosis. indicate problem location?
Inspect the NO
Measurement system problem Are power
process system. NO
supply voltage and load
resistance correct?
Isolate problem in
measurement system. YES Refer to Section 6.6 for rated voltage
and load resistance.
YES
Environmental conditions Transmitter itself Is there any pressure leak?
Is there
Check/correct operating continuity through the NO
conditions. transmitter loop wiring?
F0805.ai Do the loop numbers
match?
Figure 8.5 Basic Flow and Self-Diagnostics
Find/correct broken conductor or
YES
wiring error.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-7
Connect a communicator and check self-diagnostics. Connect a communicator and check self-diagnostics.
Is impulse piping NO
Are valves opened or NO
connected correctly?
closed correctly?
Is transmitter
installed where there is YES
Is impulse piping NO
to high pressure and low marked variation in
pressure side correct? temperature?
Were appropriate NO
Is zero point NO instruments used for
adjusted correctly? calibration?
NO
Contact Yokogawa service personnel. Is output adjusted correctly?
F0807.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<8. Maintenance> 8-8
8.5.3 Alarms and Countermeasures
Table 8.3 Alarm Message Summary
Output Operation
Indicator Cause Countermeasure
during Error
None
AL. 01 Sensor problem. Outputs the signal (Hold, High, or Replace capsule when error
CAP. ERR Capsule temperature sensor Low) set with parameter. keeps appearing even after
problem. restart.
Capsule EEPROM problem.
AL. 02 Amplifier temperature sensor Outputs the signal (Hold, High, or Replace amplifier.
AMP. ERR problem. Low) set with parameter.
Amplifier EEPROM problem.
Amplifier problem.
AL. 10 Input is outside measurement Outputs high range limit value or Check input or replace capsule
PRESS range limit of capsule. low range limit value. when necessary.
AL. 11 Static pressure exceeds limit. Continues to operate and output.
ST. PRSS
AL. 12 Capsule temperature is outside Use heat insulation or make
CAP. TMP range (50 to 130C). lagging to keep temperature
AL. 13 Amplifier temperature is outside within range.
AMP. TMP range (50 to 95C)
AL. 30 Output is outside upper or lower Outputs high range limit value or Check input and range setting,
RANGE range limit value. low range limit value. and change them as needed.
AL. 31 Static pressure exceeds specified Continues to operate and
SP. RNG range. output.
AL. 35 *1 Input pressure exceeds specified Check input.
P. HI threshold.
AL. 36 *1
P. LO
AL. 39 *1 Detected temperature exceeds
TMP. HI specified threshold.
AL. 40 *1
TMP. LO
AL. 50 Specified value is outside of setting Holds output immediately before Check setting and change them
P. LRV range. error occurred. as needed.
AL. 51
P. URV
AL. 52
P. SPN
AL. 53 Continues to operate and output. Check input.
P. ADJ
AL. 60 Specified values or settings to Continues to operate and output. Check setting and change
SC. CFG define signal characterizer function them as needed.
do not satisfy the condition.
AL. 79 Displayed value exceeds limit.
OV. DISP
*1: These alarms may appear only when process alarm function is activated.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-1
9. General Specifications
9.1 Standard Specifications EJX610A (Values are absolute pressure)
Measurement
MPa psi (/D1) bar (/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4)
Refer to IM 01C25T02-01E for FOUNDATION Span/Range
Fieldbus communication type and IM 01C25T04- A
Span 2 to 200 kPa 0.3 to 29 0.02 to 2 0.02 to 2
01EN for PROFIBUS PA communication type for Range 0 to 200 kPa 0 to 29 0 to 2 0 to 2
the items marked with . Span 0.01 to 2 1.5 to 290 0.1 to 20 0.1 to 20
B
Range 0 to 2 0 to 290 0 to 20 0 to 20
Span 0.05 to 10 7.3 to 1450 0.5 to 100 0.5 to 100
Performance Specifications C
Range 0 to 10 0 to 1450 0 to 100 0 to 100
50.8 to
See General Specifications sheet for each model. D
Span 0.35 to 70
10150
3.5 to 700 3.5 to 700
Range 0 to 70 0 to 10150 0 to 700 0 to 700
Functional Specifications
EJA530E
Measurement
Span & Range Limits MPa psi(/D1) bar(/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4)
Span/Range
EJX530A Span
10 to 200
1.45 to 29 0.1 to 2 0.1 to 2
Measurement kPa
MPa psi(/D1) bar(/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4) A
Span/Range -100 to
Range -14.5 to 29 -1 to 2 -1 to 2
Span 8 to 200kPa 1.16 to 29 0.08 to 2 0.08 to 2 200 kPa
A -100 to Span 0.1 to 2 14.5 to 290 1 to 20 1 to 20
Range -14.5 to 29 -1 to 2 -1 to 2 B
200 kPa Range -0.1 to 2 -14.5 to 290 -1 to 20 -1 to 20
Span 0.04 to 2 5.8 to 290 0.4 to 20 0.4 to 20 Span 0.5 to 10 72.5 to 1450 5 to 100 5 to 100
B C
Range -0.1 to 2 -14.5 to 290 -1 to 20 -1 to 20 Range -0.1 to 10 -14.5 to 1450 -1 to 100 -1 to 100
Span 0.2 to 10 29 to 1450 2 to 100 2 to 100 Span 5 to 50* 720 to 7200* 50 to 500* 50 to 500*
C D
Range -0.1 to 10 -14.5 to 1450 -1 to 100 -1 to 100 Range -0.1 to 50* -14.5 to 7200* -1 to 500* -1 to 500*
Span 1 to 50 145 to 7200 10 to 500 10 to 500 *: 70 MPa, 10150 psi, 700 bar or 700 kgf/cm2 when /HG is
D
Range -0.1 to 50 -14.5 to 7200 -1 to 500 -1 to 500 specified.
*: 70 MPa, 10150 psi, 700 bar or 700 kgf/cm2 when /HG is
EJX630A specified.
Measurement
MPa psi (/D1) bar (/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4)
Span/Range
Span 2 to 200 kPa 0.3 to 29 0.02 to 2 0.02 to 2
A -100 to 200
Range -14.5 to 29 -1 to 2 -1 to 2
kPa
Span 0.01 to 2 1.5 to 290 0.1 to 20 0.1 to 20
B
Range -0.1 to 2 -14.5 to 290 -1 to 20 -1 to 20
Span 0.05 to 10 7.3 to 1450 0.5 to 100 0.5 to 100
C
Range -0.1 to 10 -14.5 to 1450 -1 to 100 -1 to 100
50.8 to
Span 0.35 to 70 3.5 to 700 3.5 to 700
10150
D
-14.5 to
Range -0.1 to 70 -1 to 700 -1 to 700
10150
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-2
Output Integral Indicator (LCD display)
5-digit Numerical Display, 6-digit Unit Display
For 4 to 20 mA output
and Bar graph.
(Output signal code D, E and J)
The indicator is configurable to display one or
Two wire 4 to 20 mA DC output with digital
up to four of the following variables periodically.;
communications, linear or square root
Pressure in %, Scaled pressure, pressure in
programmable. BRAIN or HART FSK protocol
Engineering unit.
are superimposed on the 4 to 20 mA signal.
See Setting When Shipped for factory setting.
Output range: 3.6 mA to 21.6 mA
Output limits conform to NAMUR NE43 can be Burst Pressure Limits
pre-set by option C2 or C3. EJ510 and EJ530
Capsule Pressure
For 1 to 5 V output
(Output signal code Q) A, B, C 30 MPa (4350 psi)
Three or four wire low power 1 to 5 V DC output D* 132 MPa (19100 psi)
with HART, linear or square root programmable. *: 182 MPa (26300 psi) for EJA510E and EJA530E when
/HG is specified.
HART protocol is superimposed on the 1 to 5 V
DC signal. EJX610A and EJX630A
Output range: 0.9 V to 5.4 V DC Capsule Pressure
A, B, C 50 MPa (7200 psi)
Failure Alarm
D 182 MPa (26300 psi)
For 4 to 20 mA output
(Output signal code D, E and J)
Analog output status at CPU failure and Normal Operating Condition
hardware error; (Selected features may affect limits.)
Up-scale: 110%, 21.6 mA DC or more
Ambient Temperature Limits
(standard)
40 to 85C (40 to 185F)
Down-scale: 5%, 3.2 mA DC or less
30 to 80C (22 to 176F) with LCD display
For 1 to 5 V output
Process Temperature Limits
(Output signal code Q)
40 to 120C (40 to 248F)
Analog output status at CPU failure and
hardware error; Ambient Humidity Limits
Up-scale: 110%, 5.4 V DC or more 0 to 100% RH
(standard) Working Pressure Limits (Silicone oil)
Down-scale: 5%, 0.8 V DC or less
Maximum Pressure Limits
Damping Time Constant (1st order)
Amplifier damping time constant is adjustable Pressure
Capsule EJ510 EJ530
from 0 to 100.00 seconds and added to
A 200 kPa abs (29 psia) 200 kPa (29 psig)
response time.
Note: For BRAIN protocol type, when amplifier damping B 2 MPa abs (290 psia) 2 MPa (290 psig)
is set to less than 0.5 seconds, communication C 10 MPa abs (1450 psia) 10 MPa (1450 psig)
may occasionally be unavailable during the D* 50 MPa abs (7200 psia) 50 MPa (7200 psig)
operation, especially while output changes
dynamically. The default setting of damping *: 70 MPa(10150 psi) for EJA510E and EJA530E when
ensures stable communication. /HG is specified.
Pressure
Update Period Capsule EJX610A EJX630A
45 ms A 200 kPa abs (29 psia) 200 kPa (29 psi)
Zero Adjustment Limits B 2 MPa abs (290 psia) 2 MPa (290 psi)
Zero can be fully elevated or suppressed, within C 10 MPa abs (1450 psia) 10 MPa (1450 psi)
D 70 MPa abs (10150 psia) 70 MPa (10150 psi)
the lower and upper range limits of the capsule.
Minimum Pressure Limit
External Zero Adjustment
External Zero is continuously adjustable with See graph below
0.01% incremental resolution of span. Re-range
can be done locally using the digital indicator
with range-setting switch.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-3
100(750) Pressure
Capsule EJX610A EJX630A
A 4 MPa abs (580 psia) 4 MPa (580 psi)
B 16 MPa abs (2300 psia) 16 MPa (2300 psi)
10(75)
C 25 MPa abs (3600 psia) 25 MPa (3600 psi)
D 105 MPa abs (15200 psia) 105 MPa (15200 psi)
Working 2.7(20)
pressure Applicable range
1(7.5) Supply & Load Requirements
kPa abs
(mmHg abs)
For output signal code D, E, and J.
0.13(1) (Optional features or approval codes may
0.1(0.75) affect electrical requirements.)
With 24 V DC supply, up to a 550 load can be
used. See graph below.
0.013(0.1)
0.01(0.075)
-40 0 40 80 120
(-40) (32) (104) (176) (248)
600
85 (185) E-10.5
Process temperature C(F) R=
F0901.ai
External 0.0244 Digital
load Communication
Figure 9.1 Working Pressure and Process range
resistance
Temperature [For EJ510 and BRAIN and HART
EJX610A]
250
R ()
Atmospheric
100(14.5)
pressure
Working
pressure 10.5 16.6 25.2 42
kPa abs Power supply voltage E (V DC)
(psia) F0903.ai
Applicable range
10(1.4) Figure 9.3 Relationship Between Power Supply
Voltage and External Load Resistance
2.7(0.38)
Supply Voltage
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-4
Load for 4 to 20 mA output EMC Conformity Standards
(Output signal code D, E and J) EN 61326-1 Class A, Table2 (For use in
0 to 1290 for operation industrial locations)
250 to 600 for digital communication EN 61326-2-3
EN 61326-2-5 (for Fieldbus)
Output Load for 1 to 5 V output
(Output signal code Q) Immunity influence during the test
1 M or greater (meter input impedance) Pressure: Output shift is specified within 1% of
1/20 Max span.
Communication Requirements
Static pressure: Output shift is specified within
(Safety approvals may affect electrical
2% of 1MPa span.
requirements.)
Status Output Line*: Continues to operate
BRAIN without reversal.
*: Only for /AL option.
Communication Distance
Up to 2 km (1.25 miles) when using CEV Condition for EMC test for FOUNDATION fieldbus
polyethylene-insulated PVC-sheathed cables. type: The shield of the cable and the case
Communication distance varies depending on are connected with a capacitor of 10nF.
type of cable used.
Physical Specifications
Load Capacitance
0.22 F or less Wetted Parts Materials
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-5
9.2 Model and Suffix Codes
Model Suffix Codes Description
EJX510A ...................... Absolute pressure transmitter
EJX530A ...................... Gauge pressure transmitter
Output -D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC Output with digital communication (BRAIN protocol)
signal -E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC Output with digital communication (HART protocol)
-J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC with digital communication (HART 5/HART 7 protocol)
-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol,
refer to IM 01C25T02-01E)
-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (PROFIBUS PA protocol,
refer to IM 01C25T04-01EN)
Measurement A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 to 200 kPa (1.16 to 29 psi)
span (capsule) B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.04 to 2 MPa (5.8 to 290 psi)
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 to 10 MPa (29 to 1450 psi)
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 50 MPa (145 to 7200 psi)
Wetted parts Process connector Diaphragm Others
material S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316L SST Hastelloy C-276 *1 316L SST
H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hastelloy C-276 *1 Hastelloy C-276 *1 Hastelloy C-276 *1
Process 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female
connections 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT male
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1/2 DIN 16 288 male *2
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M201.5 DIN 16 288 male *2
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . Always N
-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . Always 0
Amplifier housing 1 . . . . . . . . . . Cast aluminum alloy
2 . . . . . . . . . . ASTM CF-8M Stainless steel*4
3 . . . . . . . . . . Cast aluminum alloy with corrosion resistance properties
Electrical connection 0 . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, one electrical connection without blind plugs
2 . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections without blind plugs
4 . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections without blind plugs
5 . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections with a blind plug
7 . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections with a blind plug
9 . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections with a blind plug
A . . . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections with a 316SST blind plug
C . . . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections with a 316SST blind plug
D . . . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections with a 316SST blind plug
Integral indicator D . . . . . . Digital indicator*5
E . . . . . . Digital indicator with the range setting switch (push button)*3
N . . . . . . None
Mounting bracket F . . . . . 304 SST 2-inch pipe mounting
L . . . . . 316 SST 2-inch pipe mounting
N . . . . . None
Optional codes / Optional specification
The marks indicate the most typical selection for each specification. Example: EJX530A-DAS4N-012NN/.
*1: Hastelloy C-276 or ASTM N10276.
*2: Not applicable for combination of capsule code D and wetted parts material code H.
*3: Not applicable for output signal code F.
*4: Not applicable for electrical connection code 0, 5, 7 and 9.
*5: Not applicable for output signal code G.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-6
The marks indicates the most typical selection for each specification. Example: EJX630A-DAS4N-012NN/.
*1: Hastelloy C-276 or ASTM N10276.
*2: Not applicable for combination of capsule code D and wetted parts material code H.
*3: Not applicable for output signal code F.
*4: Users must consider the characteristics of selected wetted parts material and the influence of process fluids. The use of
inappropriate materials can result in the leakage of corrosive process fluids and cause injury to personnel and/or damage to plant
facilities. It is also possible that the diaphragm itself can be damaged and that material from the broken diaphragm and the fill fluid
can contaminate the userfs process fluids.
Be very careful with highly corrosive process fluids such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrogen sulfide, sodium hypochlorite,
and high-temperature steam (150C [302F] or above). Contact Yokogawa for detailed information of the wetted parts material.
*5: Not applicable for electrical connection code 0, 5, 7 or 9.
*6: Material of a blind plug is aluminum alloy or 304 SST.
*7: Not applicable for output signal code G.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-7
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-8
9.3 Optional Specifications
Item Description Code
Factory Mutual (FM) FM Explosionproof *1
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
FF1
Dust-ignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G
Hazardous (classified) locations, indoors and outdoors (NEMA 4X)
FM Intrinsically safe *1*3
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D, Class II,
Division 1,Groups E, F and G and Class III, Division 1 Hazardous Locations. FS1
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D, Class II,
Division 2, Groups F and G, Hazardous Locations.
Combined FF1 and FS1 *1*2 FU1
ATEX ATEX Flameproof *1
II 2G, 2D Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb, Ex tb IIIC T85C Db KF22
Special fastener: ClassA2-50(A4-50) or more
ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ia *1*2
KS21
II 1G, 2D Ex ia IIC T4 Ga, Ex ia IIIC T85C T100C T120C Db
Combined KF22, KS21 and ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ic *1*3
KU22
Ex ic: II 3G Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
Canadian Standards CSA Explosionproof *1
Association (CSA) [For CSA C22.2]
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
Dustignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G
[For CSA E60079]
CF1
Flameproof for Zone1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 Enclosure IP66/IP67
Process Sealing Certification
Dual Seal Certified by CSA to the requirement of ANSI/ISA 12.27.01
No additional sealing required
Primary seal failure annunciation: at the zero adjustment screw
CSA Intrinsically safe *1 *2
[For CSA C22.2]
Intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D, Class II,
Division 1, Groups E,F and G, Class III, Division 1
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D, Class II,
Division 2, Groups F and G, Class III, Division 1
CS1
[For CSA E60079]
Ex ia IIC T4, Ex nL IIC T4
Process Sealing Certification
Dual Seal Certified by CSA to the requirement of ANSI/ISA 12.27.01
No additional sealing required
Primary seal failure annunciation: at the zero adjustment screw
Combined CF1 and CS1 *1*2 CU1
IECEx IECEx flameproof *1
Flameproof for Zone1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb SF2
Special fastener: ClassA2-50(A4-50) or more
IECEx Intrinsically safe, type n and flameproof *1*2
Intrinsically safe and type n
Ex ia IIC T4, Ex nL IIC T4
SU2
Flameproof
Flameproof for Zone1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb
Special fastener: ClassA2-50(A4-50) or more
IECEx Intrinsically safe and flameproof *1*2
Intrinsically safe
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga, Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
SU21
Flameproof
Flameproof for Zone1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb
Special fastener: ClassA2-50(A4-50) or more
Combination of Approval Combination of KU22, FU1 and CU1 V1U1
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-9
Item Description Code
High Accuracy type *19 High accuracy HAC
Painting Color change Amplifier cover only P
Amplifier cover and terminal cover, Munsell 7.5 R4/14 PR
Coating change Anti-corrosion coating*3 X2
316 SST exterior parts *4 316 SST name plate, tag plate and zero adjustment screw HC
Fluoro-rubber O-ring All O-rings of amplifier housing. Lower limit of ambient temperature: 15C (5F) HE
Lightning protector Transmitter power supply voltage:
10.5 to 32 V DC (10.5 to 30 V DC for intrinsically safe type, 9 to 32 V DC for
Fieldbus communication type.) A
Allowable current: Max. 6000 A (140 s), Repeating 1000 A (140 s) 100 times
Applicable Standards: IEC 61000-4-4, IEC 61000-4-5
Status output *5 Transistor output (sink type)
AL
Contact rating: 10.5 to 30 VDC, 120 mA DC(max) Low level: 0 to 2 VDC
Oil-prohibited use Degrease cleansing treatment. K1
Degrease cleansing treatment with fluorinated oilfilled capsule.
K2
Operating temperature 20 to 80C( 4 to 176F)
Capsule fill fluid Fluorinated oil filled in capsule
K3
Operating temperature 20 to 80C( 4 to 176F)
Calibration units *6 P calibration (psi unit) D1
(See Table for Span and
bar calibration (bar unit) D3
Range Limits.)
M calibration (kgf/cm2 unit) D4
Output limits and failure Failure alarm down-scale: Output status at CPU failure and hardware error is
C1
operation *7 5%, 3.2 mA DC or less. *21
NAMUR NE43 Compliant Failure alarm down-scale: Output status at CPU
C2
Output signal limits: failure and hardware error is 5%, 3.2 mA DC or less.
3.8 mA to 20.5 mA *22 Failure alarm up-scale: Output status at CPU
C3
failure and hardware error is 110%, 21.6 mA or more.
Gold-plated diaphragm *15 Surface of isolating diaphragm is gold plated, effective for hydrogen permeation. A1
Wired tag plate 304 SST tag plate wired onto transmitter N4
Data configuration at Data configuration for HART Software damping, Descriptor, Message
CA
factory *8 communication type
Data configuration for BRAIN Software damping
CB
communication type
Advanced diagnostics *16 Multi-sensing process monitoring
Impulse line blockage detection *17 DG6
Heat trace monitoring
European Pressure PED 97/23/EC
Equipment Directive *18 Category: III, Module: H, Type of Equipment; Pressure Accessory-Vessel, PE3
Type of Fluid; Liquid and gas, Group of Fluid: 1 and 2
Material Certificate *9 Process connector M15
Pressure test/ Test Pressure: 200 kPa (2 kgf/cm2) *10 T05
Leak test certificate Test Pressure: 2 MPa (20 kgf/cm2) *11 T06
Test Pressure: 10 MPa (100 kgf/cm2) *12 Nitrogen(N2) Gas or Water *14 T07
Retention time: one minute
Test Pressure: 50 MPa (500 kgf/cm2) *13 T08
Test Pressure: 70 MPa (10150 psi) *20 T15
High pressure-proof Maximum working pressure: 70MPa.
HG
structure*
Contact Yokogawa representative for the codes indicated as -.
*1: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2, 4, 7, and 9.
*2: Not applicable for option code /AL.
*3: Not applicable with color change option.
*4: This specification is included when amplifier case code 2 is specified.
*5: Check/External indicator terminals cannot be used when this option code is specified. Not applicable for output signal code F.
*6: The unit of MWP (Max. working pressure) on the name plate of a housing is the same unit as specified by option codes D1, D3, and D4.
*7: Applicable for output signal codes D, E and J. The hardware error indicates faulty amplifier or capsule.
*8: Also see Ordering Information.
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-10
*9: Material traceability certification, per EN 10204 3.1B.
*10: Applicable for capsule code A.
*11: Applicable for capsule code B.
*12: Applicable for capsule code C.
*13: Applicable for capsule code D of EJ510 and EJ530.
*14: Pure nitrogen gas or pure water is used for oil-prohibited use (option codes K1 and K2).
*15: Applicable for wetted parts material code S.
*16: Applicable only for output signal code -E and -J.
*17: The change of pressure fluctuation is monitored and then detects the impulse line blockage. See TI 01C25A31-01E for detailed
technical information required for using this function.
*18: Applicable for measurement span code D. If compliance with category III is needed, specify this option code.
*19: Applicable for EJX630A, EJA510E and EJA530E.
Not applicable for the combination of measurement span code A and wetted parts material code H.
Not applicable for option code K2, K3 or A1.
When specified range value includes minus value for A capsule, the accuracy shall be the standard accuracy even if high accuracy
option (/HAC) is specified.
*20: Applicable for capsule code D of EJX610A and EJX630A. Applicable also for EJA510E and EJA530E with /HG.
*21: Output status at CPU failure and hardware error is 5%, 0.8V DC or less for output signal code Q.
*22: The 1 to 5 V voltage output corresponding to 4 to 20 mA current output is applied to output signal code Q which is non-compliant to
NAMUR NE43.
*23: Applicable for capsule code D of EJA510E and EJA530E.
9.4 Dimensions
(2.76)
70
126(4.96)
110(4.33)
54
159(6.26)
(2.13)
(6.50)
165
6
(0.24)
Ground terminal
Open to
Electrical connection atmosphere*1
for code 5, 9, A, and D.
(6.77)
172
6
5(0.20)
(0.24)
F0904.ai
IM 01C25F01-01E
<9. General Specifications> 9-11
IM 01C25F01-01E
i
Revision Information
Title : Absolute Pressure and Gauge Pressure Transmitters
EJ510, EJ530, EJX610A and EJX630A
Manual No. : IM 01C25F01-01E
IM 01C25F01-01E
1.2InstructionManualforMagneticFlowmeter
ApplicableModel Area
AXF300GE1UL1LBA1141B PRASEDIMENTASI
AXF300GE1UL1LBA1141B RESERVOIRIPA
Users
Manual AXF Series
Magnetic Flowmeter
Installation Manual
IM 01E20A01-01EN
Contents
1. Introduction
1.1 Using the Magnetic Flowmeter Safely.........................2 1
1.2 Warranty.......................................................................4
1.3 Combination for Flowtube and Remote Converter......4
2. Handling Precautions 2
2.1 Checking Model and Specifications.............................5
2.2 Storage Precautions....................................................5
3. Installation 3
Integral Flowmeter Remote Flowtube
3.1 Piping Design Precautions...........................................6
(AXFG, (AXFG, 3.2 Handling Precautions...................................................8
AXFC, AXFC, 3.3 Installation of Integral Flowmeter and Remote 4
AXFH) AXFH, Flowtube.......................................................................9
AXFW) 3.4 Installation of Remote Converter.............................. 27
4. Wiring 5
4.1 Wiring the Integral Flowmeter................................... 29
4.2 Wiring the Remote Flowtube..................................... 35
4.3
4.4
Wiring the AXFA14 Remote Converter..................... 40
Wiring the AXFA11 Remote Converter..................... 46
6
5. Basic Operating Procedures
5.1
5.2
Operating Procedures Using the Display Unit.......... 52
Operating Panel Configuration and Functions......... 52
7
5.3 Display Unit Setting Methods.................................... 53
5.4 Parameter Setting Procedure................................... 55
Remote Converter Remote Converter
5.5 BRAIN / HART Connection....................................... 57 8
(AXFA11G) (AXFA14G, AXFA14C)
6. Operation
6.1 Pre-operation Zero Adjustment................................. 59
This manual outlines the basic guidelines for installation and wiring 6.2 Zero Adjustment Using Display Unit Switches.......... 59 9
procedures of the ADMAG AXF Series. For the items which are not 6.3 Write Protect Switch.................................................. 60
covered in this manual, see the users manuals in the following table.
7. Errors and Countermeasures for Display unit
Note: For FOUNDATION fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA type, refer to
IM 01E20A01-02EN in addition to this manual. and BRAIN protocol
10
For ATEX or IECEx explosion proof type, refer to 8. Parameter Summary
IM 01E20A01-11EN in addition to this manual.
8.1 Menu tree for DD (HART 5)....................................... 64
Document No. Document Title 8.2 Parameter List (BRAIN)............................................ 67
IM 01E20D01-01E
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter/ 9. Approvals
Remote Flowtube [Hardware Edition]
10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument
AXFA11G Magnetic Flowmeter Remote Converter
IM 01E20C01-01E 10.1 ATEX......................................................................... 77
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition]
10.2 FM............................................................................. 77
AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote Converter 10.3 CSA........................................................................... 80
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition] 10.4 IECEx........................................................................ 81
IM 01E20C02-01E
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter
10.5 TIIS............................................................................ 82
[Software Edition]
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT (EX-B03E)
IM 01E20A01-01EN
3rd Edition
<1. Introduction> 1
1. Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the ADMAG AXF Magnetic
flowmeter. NOTE
This manual provides the basic guidelines for installation
and wiring procedures of integral flowmeter, remote When describing the model name like AXFC in
flowtube, and remote converter of the AXF magnetic this manual, means any of the following.
flowmeters through front panel, BRAIN protocol, and 002, 005, 010, 015, 025, 032, 040, 050, 065, 080, 100,
HART protocol. 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
It does not provide the product specific functional
specifications and explanations, maintenance,
troubleshooting, FOUNDATION fieldbus and PROFIBUS
Safety and Modification Precautions
PA communication operating procedures. For the items The following general safety precautions must be
which are not covered in this manual, see the applicable observed during all phases of operation, service,
users manuals as listed in Table 1.1. These manuals and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with
can be downloaded from the website of Yokogawa. To these precautions or with specific WARNINGS given 1
ensure correct use of the instrument, read these manuals elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards
of design, manufacture, and intended use of the
Introduction
thoroughly and fully understand how to operate the
instrument before operating it. For method of checking instrument. Yokogawa assumes no liability for the
the model and suffix code, refer to Section 2.1. customers failure to comply with these requirements.
If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in
Website address: http://www.yokogawa.com/fld/doc/ this manual, the protection provided by this instrument
may be impaired.
Table 1.1 Manual List Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or
Model Document Title Document No. damage resulting from any modification made to this
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter/ instrument by the customer.
IM 01E20D01-01E
AXFG
Remote Flowtube [Hardware Edition] The following safety symbol marks are used in this
AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote
AXFC Converter users manual and instrument.
AXFH
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition] IM 01E20C02-01E
AXFW
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter
[Software Edition]
AXFA11G Magnetic Flowmeter Remote
WARNING
AXFA11G Converter IM 01E20C01-01E
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition] A WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention
AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote
to procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if
Converter
AXFA14G
[Hardware Edition/Software Edition] IM 01E20C02-01E not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
AXFA14C
AXF Magnetic Flowmeter Integral Flowmeter injury or death of personnel.
[Software Edition]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<1. Introduction> 3
(2) Wiring (4) Maintenance
WARNING WARNING
The wiring of the magnetic flowmeter must be Maintenance of the magnetic flowmeter should
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. be performed by the trained personnel having
No operator shall be permitted to perform knowledge of safety standard. No operator shall
procedures relating to wiring. be permitted to perform any operations relating to
When connecting the wiring, check that the supply maintenance.
voltage is within the range of the voltage specified When opening the cover, wait for more than 10
for this instrument before connecting the power minutes after turning off the power.
cable. In addition, check that no voltage is applied Do not open the cover in wet weather or humid
to the power cable before connecting the wiring. environment. When the cover is open, stated
The protective grounding must be connected enclosure protection is not applicable.
securely at the terminal with the mark to avoid When maintaining the instrument, refer to user's
danger to personnel. manual as listed in Table 1.1. Do not perform the
maintenance that is not described in the manual. If 1
necessary, contact Yokogawa.
(3) Operation
Introduction
Care should be taken to prevent the build up of
dirt, dust or other substances on the display panel
glass or name plate. If these surfaces do get dirty,
WARNING wipe them clean with a soft dry cloth.
When opening the cover, wait for more than 10
minutes after turning off the power. Only expert
(5) Explosion Protected Type Instrument
engineer or skilled personnel are permitted to
open the cover.
Do not open the cover in wet weather or humid WARNING
environment. When the cover is open, stated
enclosure protection is not applicable. Magnetic flowmeters with the model name
Be sure to set parameters as Protect on the write AXFC and AXFA14C are products which
protect function after finish of parameter setting have been certified as explosion proof type
work. instruments. Strict limitations are applied to the
Under extremely rare case, the infra-red switches structures, installation locations, external wiring
may respond unexpectedly in such conditions as work, maintenance and repairs, etc. of these
sticking ball of water or extraneous substances on instruments. Sufficient care must be taken, as any
the surface of display panel glass according to the violation of the limitations may cause dangerous
principle of infra-red switch operation. situations.
Its probability rises in such cases as sticking Be sure to read Chapter 10 before handling the
rain water by storm or other similar situation and instruments. The description in Chapter 10 is prior
washing up work near flowmeter installation place. to the other description in this users manual.
Either to illuminate or stop illuminating the infrared For ATEX or IECEx explosion proof type, be sure
switches by the flashlight may cause the mis- to read IM 01E20A01-11EN.
reaction. For TIIS explosion proof type, be sure to
Refer to Section 6.3 how to use the write protect read INSTALLATION AND OPERATING
function in detail. PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF
EQUIPMENT at the end of this manual.
Only trained persons use this instrument in the
industrial location.
The protective grounding must be connected to
a suitable IS grounding system.
Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
hazardous locations.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<1. Introduction> 4
(6) European Pressure Equipment Directive The guarantee will not apply in the
(PED) following cases:
Damage due to negligence or insufficient
WARNING maintenance on the part of the customer.
Problems or damage resulting from handling,
When using the instrument in compliance with operation or storage that violates the intended use
PED, be sure to read Chapter 9 before use. and specifications.
Problems that result from using or performing
maintenance on the instrument in a location that does
(7) Modification not comply with the installation location specified by
Yokogawa.
Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or damage
Problems or damage resulting from repairs or
resulting from any modification made to this instrument by
modifications not performed by Yokogawa or
the customer.
someone authorized by Yokogawa.
(8) Product Disposal Problems or damage resulting from inappropriate
reinstallation after delivery.
The instrument should be disposed of in accordance with
Problems or damage resulting from disasters such as
local and national legislation/regulations.
fires, earthquakes, storms, floods, or lightning strikes
(9) Authorized Representative in EEA and external causes.
IMPORTANT
1.2 Warranty
The AXF remote flowtube (sizes 2.5 to 400 mm
The terms of this instrument that are guaranteed are
(0.1 to 16 in.)) should be combined with one of the
described in the quotation. We will make any repairs
following converters:
that may become necessary during the guaranteed
term free of charge. Table 1.2 Combination for flowtube and
remote converter
Contact our sales office if this instrument requires
Combined with the
repair. Remote Flowtube
Remote Converter
If the instrument is faulty, contact us with concrete Model
Communication
Model
Code
details about the problem and the length of time it has AXFG
been faulty, and state the model and serial number. AXFC
-N AXFA11G
AXFH
We would appreciate the inclusion of drawings or AXFW
additional information. AXFG
AXFC AXFA14G
The results of our examination will determine whether AXFH
-P
AXFA14C
the meter will be repaired free of charge or on an at- AXFW
cost basis. Note: means any of the following.
002, 005, 010, 015, 025, 032, 040, 050, 065, 080,
100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
Contact Yokogawa before using it in combination
with converters other than those listed above.
For ATEX, IECEx or TIIS certified AXF remote
flowtube, it is only approved to be combined with
AXFA14 converter.
The AXW remote flowtube (sizes 500 to 1800
mm (20 to 72 in.)) should be combined with the
AXFA11 remote converter.
If the converter combined with the AXF magnetic
flowmeters remote flowtube is changed from
the AXFA11 to AXFA14 or vice versa, the meter
factor of the remote flowtube must be readjusted
according to its flow calibration.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<2. Handling Precautions> 5
2. Handling Precautions
This instrument has been inspected carefully at the factory
before shipment. When the instrument is delivered, visually
check that no damage has occurred during transportation.
Also check that all flowmeters mounting hardware shown
below is included.
Integral Flowmeter and Remote Flowtube
Applicable model Part name Qty
AXFG
2 pieces
AXFC
Hexagonal wrench (one each of 1.5 mm and
AXFH
3 mm nominal sizes)
AXFW
Note: In case of selecting the process connection code -AA1, F0203.ai
-AA2, -AD1, -AD2, -AD4, -AJ1, -AJ2, -AG1 or
-AP1, a set of centering devices is also attached. Figure 2.1.3 Name Plate (AXFA14 Remote Converter)
Remote Converter
Applicable model Part name Qty
AXFA11G Mounting hardware 1 set
AXFA14G
Mounting hardware 1 set
1 piece
2
AXFA14C Hexagonal wrench
(nominal size 3mm)
Handling Precautions
2.1 Checking Model and
Specifications
The model code and specifications are found on the name
plate located on the outside of the case. When checking the F0204.ai
model code and specifications match what you have ordered, Figure 2.1.4 Name Plate (AXFA11 Remote Converter)
refer to users manual as listed in Table 1.1.
Be sure you have your model number and serial number
available when contacting Yokogawa.
2.2 Storage Precautions
If the instrument is to be stored for a long period of time
after delivery, observe the following points.
The instrument should be stored in its original packing
condition in the storage location.
Select a storage location that fulfils the following
conditions:
A place where it will not be exposed to rain or water
A place subject to minimal vibrations or shocks
Temperature and humidity levels should be as
follows:
Temperature: -30 to 70C
Humidity: 5 to 80% RH (no condensation)
The preferred ambient temperature and humidity
levels are 25C and approximately 65% RH.
F0201.ai If the instrument is transferred to the installation site
Figure 2.1.1 Name Plate (AXF Integral Flowmeter) and stored without being installed, its performance
may be impaired due to the infiltration of rainwater
and so forth. Be sure to install and wire the instrument
as soon as possible after transferring it to the
installation location.
F0202.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 6
3. Installation
(1) Location
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Installation of the magnetic flowmeter must be
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. Install the flowmeter in a location where it is not
No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures exposed to direct sunlight. The minimum ambient
relating to installation. temperature is limited by the minimum fluid
temperature of the flowtube (the lining). For more
Installation Location Precautions information, refer to OUTLINE of the appropriate
manual which can be downloaded from our website.
Select the installation location with consideration to the
The flowmeter may be used in an ambient humidity
following items to ensure long-term stable operation of
where the relative humidity ranges from 0 to 100%.
the instrument.
However, avoid long-term continuous operation at
Ambient Temperature: relative humidity above 95%.
Avoid installing the instrument in locations with constantly
fluctuating temperatures. If the location is subject to
(2) Noise Avoidance
radiant heat from the plant, provide heat insulation or
improve ventilation.
IMPORTANT
Atmospheric Condition:
Avoid installing the instrument in a corrosive atmosphere. The flowmeter should be installed away from
In situations where this is unavoidable, consider ways to electrical motors, transformers, and other power
improve ventilation and to prevent rainwater from entering sources in order to avoid interference with
and being retained in the conduit pipes. measurement.
Vibrations or Shocks:
Avoid installing the instrument in a place subject to (3) Required Lengths of Straight Runs
shocks or vibrations. To maintain accurate measurement, see JIS B7554 which
Explosion protected type: explains the requirements for upstream piping conditions
of magnetic flowmeters.
Explosion protect types can be installed in hazardous
Based on JIS B7554 and our piping condition test data,
areas according to the types of gases for which they
we recommend the piping conditions as shown in the
are certified. See the description in Chapter 10 and
following figures.
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
When installing two or more magnetic flowmeters on a
FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT in this users
single pipe, provide a run of at least 10D between them.
manual. D: Flowtube Size
Gate valve Reducer Expander
fully open pipe pipe
IMPORTANT
2D
5D or more 0 is allowable. 5D or more 0 is allowable. 10D or more or more
Design piping correctly, referring to the following to F0301.ai
prevent damage to flowtubes and to assure accurate Figure 3.1.1 Required Lengths of Straight Runs
measuring.
*1: Do not install anything in the vicinity that may interfere
with the magnetic field, induced signal voltages, or flow
velocity distributions of the flowmeter.
NOTE *2: A straight run may not be required on the downstream
side of the flowmeter. However, if a downstream valve
or other fitting causes irregularity or deviation in flows,
This chapter describes the remote flowtube as an provide a straight run of 2D to 3D on the downstream side.
example. The same attention must be paid to the *3: The valves shall be mounted on the downstream side so
that deviated flows do not occur in the flowtube and to
integral flowmeter. avoid startup from an empty condition.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 7
(4) Maintaining Stable Fluid Conductivity (8) Supporting the Flowmeter
IMPORTANT CAUTION
Do not install the flowmeter where fluid conductivity
Do not secure the flowmeter separately to prevent the
tends to become uneven. If chemicals are fed near
vibrations, shocks, and expansion and contraction forces
the upstream side of a magnetic flowmeter, they may
of the piping from affecting it. Fix the pipes first, then
affect the flow rates indications. To avoid this situation,
support the flowmeter with the pipes. With extra small-
it is recommended that the chemical feed ports be
sized flowmeters (sizes 2.5 to 10 mm (0.1 to 0.4 in.)), in
located on the downstream side of the flowmeter. If
particular, fix the flowmeter in parallel with the piping on a
it is unavoidable that chemicals must be fed on the
mounting base.
upstream side, provide a sufficient length of straight
run (approximately 50D or more) to ensure the proper
mixture of fluids.
(9) Mounting Positions
(Incorrect) (Correct)
Pipes must be fully filled with liquids.
Upstream side Downstream side
IMPORTANT
It is essential that pipes remain fully filled at all times,
F0302.ai
otherwise flow rate indications may be affected and
Figure 3.1.2 Chemical Injection measurement errors may be caused.
Piping shall be designed so as to maintain the interior 3
of the flowtube filled with fluids.
(5) Precautions for Use of Liquid Sealing Vertical mounting is effective in such cases as
Installation
Compounds when fluids tend to separate or solid matter may be
precipitated. When employing vertical mounting, direct
IMPORTANT the fluids from the bottom to the top to ensure that the
pipes remain fully filled.
Care must be taken in using liquid sealing compounds
on the piping, as it may have a negative influence
(Correct) (Incorrect)
on the flow indications by flowing out and covering h
(Correct) (Incorrect) h>0
the surfaces of an electrode or grounding ring. In
h
particular, care must be taken if a liquid sealing
h>0
compound is used in the case of vertical piping. F0304.ai
Bypass valve
In cases where fluids contain air bubbles, piping must
be designed to prevent them from accumulating in the
measurement pipe of a flowtube.
Block valve If a valve exists near the flowmeter, try to mount the
flowmeter on the valves upstream side in order to
prevent a possible reduction of pressure inside the pipe,
Block valve F0303.ai thereby avoiding the possibility of air bubbles.
Figure 3.1.3 Bypass Line
(Correct) (Incorrect)
(Correct)
(Incorrect)
Valve
F0305.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 8
Mounting orientation
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
In order to lift a magnetic flowmeter that is fitted with
If electrodes are perpendicular to the ground, air eyebolts, proceed as in Figure 3.2.1. Never lift it using
bubbles near the top or precipitates at the bottom may a bar passed through the flowtube as this damages
cause measurement errors. Ensure that the terminal the liner severely.
box of a remote flowtube and converter of an integral When lifting the magnetic flowmeter in vertical
flowmeter are mounted above the piping to prevent position, eyebolts (or eyenuts and bolts) are
water from entering them. necessary. Attach them to the flange bolt holes, and
then lift the magnetic flowmeter.
(Correct)
(Incorrect)
(Incorrect)
Air bubble
F0307.ai
3.2 Handling Precautions Figure 3.2.1 Lifting Flowmeter
NOTE
(3) Flange Protection Covers
This chapter describes the remote flowtube as an
example. The same attention must be paid to the IMPORTANT
integral flowmeter.
Keep the protective covering (i.e. the corrugated
cardboard or other cushioning material) in place over
3.2.1 General Precautions the flange except when mounting the flowmeter to the
pipe.
(1) Precaution during Transportation
The magnetic flowmeter is packed tightly. When
it is unpacked, pay attention to prevent damaging (4) Terminal Box Cover
the flowmeter. To prevent accidents while it is being
transported to the installing location, transport it to the site IMPORTANT
in its original packing.
As it is possible that the insulation will deteriorate, do
not open the terminal box cover until it is time to wire it.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 9
(5) Long-term Non-use 3.3 Installation of Integral
IMPORTANT Flowmeter and Remote
Flowtube
It is not desirable to leave the flowmeter unused
for a long term after installation. If this situation is IMPORTANT
unavoidable, take care of the flowmeter by observing
the following. Do not forget to insert gaskets from Yokogawa between
pipes and flowmeter, which shall be supplied when the
flowmeter has ceramics lining with no grounding rings.
Confirmation of sealing conditions for In case of grounding rings to be supplied and attached
the flowmeter later, these gaskets shall be inserted between
Confirm that the terminal box screw and wiring ports are grounding rings and flowmeter.
well sealed. Equip the conduit piping with drain plugs
or waterproof glands to prevent moisture or water from
penetrating into the flowmeter through the conduit.
NOTE
Regular inspections
The tightening torque value to which gaskets must
Inspect the sealing conditions as mentioned above, and
be tightened varies depending on the type and
the inside of the terminal box at least once a year.
external dimensions of the lining and the gasket. In
Also, due to rain, etc. when it is suspected that water
this section, the tables indicating tightening torque
may have penetrated into the inside flowmeter perform
values include the corresponding gasket types.
supplementary inspections.
The internal diameters of the gaskets are close to
3
those of the grounding rings (refer to Table 3.3.16).
Installation
3.2.2 Flowmeter Piping For fluids capable of potentially permeating PFA
linings (such as nitric acid, hydrofluoric acid, or
sodium hydrate at high temperatures), different
CAUTION tightening torque values must be applied. The
tables of these torque values is indicated in this
Misaligned or slanted piping can lead to leakage and
section.
damage to the flanges.
For replacement models for the earlier ADMAG
or ADMAG AE, the tightening torque values in the
(1) Correct any misaligned or slanted piping, and any tables can be applied if their process connections,
gaps that may exist between mounting flanges before the lining types, and the nominal sizes are the same.
installing the flowmeter (refer to Figure 3.2.2).
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 10
Table 3.3.1 Fitting Dimensions (2) Connecting Process Piping
Screw joint (process connection codes: GUR and GUN)
Weld or screw the connection fittings to the process piping.
Unit : mm (approx. inch)
D
IMPORTANT
0
Be sure to pass the connection fittings through the
A B C -0.1
union joint nuts in advance.
When welding the fittings, pay attention to the
11.5(0.45)
edge preparation, level differences between the
4
(0.16) 30(1.18) fittings and the piping, and the welding current to
avoid deforming the piping or causing stagnation
F0309.ai
portion of the fluid.
Size Code A B C D
GUR 22 (0.87) 8 (0.31) 18.5 (0.73) R1/4
2.5 (0.1)
GUN 22 (0.87) 8 (0.31) 18.5 (0.73) NPT1/4
(3) Positioning the Flowmeter
GUR 22 (0.87) 8 (0.31) 18.5 (0.73) R1/4
5 (0.2)
GUN 22 (0.87) 8 (0.31) 18.5 (0.73) NPT1/4 Install the flowmeter on a mounting base and position it
GUR 25 (0.98) 10 (0.39) 22.5 (0.89) R3/8
10 (0.4) so that the center axis of the flowtube is aligned with that
GUN 25 (0.98) 10 (0.39) 22.5 (0.89) NPT3/8
of the process piping. Then screw the union joint nuts to
Weld joint (process connection code: GUW)
the connecting ports of the flowmeter.
Unit : mm (approx. inch)
CAUTION
+0.3 0
0 -0.1
A B C D Ceramics pipes may be damaged if the nuts are
tightened when the center axes are not properly aligned.
4 10(0.39)
(0.16) 35(1.38)
(4) Tightening Nuts
F0310.ai
Use a torque wrench to tighten the union joint nuts.
Size Code A B C D
2.5 (0.1) GUW 22(0.87) 8(0.31) 14.3(0.56) 18.5(0.73)
5 (0.2) GUW 22(0.87) 8(0.31) 14.3(0.56) 18.5(0.73)
10 (0.4) GUW 25(0.98) 10(0.39) 17.8(0.70) 22.5(0.89) CAUTION
Tighten the union joint nuts according to the tightening
(1) Mounting Direction torque values in Table 3.3.2. For permeable fluid (such
Mount the flowmeter so that the flow direction of the fluid as nitric acid, hydrofluoric acid or sodium hydrate at
to be measured is in line with the direction of the arrow high temperature), tighten the nuts according to the
mark on the flowmeter. torque values in Table 3.3.3.
As the gasket material is fluorocarbon PTFE, it is
possible that the nuts may loosen as time passes.
IMPORTANT Retighten the nuts if this is the case. Be sure to use
the gasket (thickness is 1.5 mm) which comes with the
If it is impossible to match the direction of the arrow flowmeter.
mark, the direction of the electrical connection can
be changed. Refer to the applicable users manuals
Table 3.3.2Tightening torque values for Union Joint Type
which can be downloaded from our website.
Size mm (inch) Torque (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
In case the fluid being measured flows against the
2.5 (0.1) 9 to 12 / {91.77 to 122.4} / [79.66 to 106.2]
arrow direction, change the value from Forward to 5 (0.2) 9 to 12 / {91.77 to 122.4} / [79.66 to 106.2]
Reverse at the parameter [ J20: Flow Direction ] 10 (0.4) 14 to 18 / {142.8 to 183.5} / [123.9 to 159.3]
(refer to Chapter 8).
Table 3.3.3Tightening torque values for Union Joint Type
and Permeable Fluids
Size mm (inch) Torque (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
2.5 (0.1) 11 to 15 / {112.2 to 153} / [97.36 to 132.8]
5 (0.2) 11 to 15 / {112.2 to 153} / [97.36 to 132.8]
10 (0.4) 17 to 23 / {173.4 to 234.5} / [150.5 to 203.6]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 11
(1) Mounting Direction
Mount the flowmeter so that the flow direction of the fluid
to be measured is in line with the direction of the arrow
mark on the flowmeter.
Gasket
Connecting fitting
IMPORTANT
Union joint nut
If it is impossible to match the direction of the arrow
*Piping
mark, the direction of the electrical connection can
be changed. Refer to the applicable users manuals
which can be downloaded from our website.
In case the fluid being measured flows against the
*Mounting base *: To be provided by user arrow direction, change the value from Forward to
F0311.ai
Reverse at the parameter [ J20: Flow Direction ]
(refer to Chapter 8).
Installation
Pass two through-bolts through the adjacent holes of
both flanges and position the flowmeter so that the Mini-
Horizontal mounting
F0312.ai flanges and the centering devices come in close contact
with each other. Pass the other through-bolts through
the other holes (refer to Figure 3.3.2 and Figure 3.3.3).
In case stud-type through-bolts are used, position them
in such a way that the centering devices come in contact
with the bolt threads.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 12
*Through-bolt (four units) *: These items can be ordered optionally.
If they are provided by the user, choose nuts and
bolts in compliance with the flange ratings.
Piping-side flange
Vertical mounting
F0314.ai
Figure 3.3.2 Mounting Procedure for Wafer Type (sizes: 2.5 to 15 mm (0.1 to 0.5 in.))
Horizontal mounting
Mini-flange
Vertical mounting
F0315.ai
Figure 3.3.3 Mounting Procedure for Wafer Type (sizes: 25, 32 and 40 mm (1.0, 1.25 and 1.5 in.))
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 13
Table 3.3.4 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping
Tightening torque values for PFA/Polyurethane Rubber lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
No gasket (standard)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
Non-asbestos fiber gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40 JPI Class 150
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
7.2 to 8.4 7.3 to 8.4 7.6 to 8.4 7.9 to 12.7
2.5 (0.1) {73.42 to 85.66} {74.44 to 85.66} {77.5 to 85.66} {80.8 to 129.9}
[63.72 to 74.35] [64.61 to 74.35] [67.26 to 74.35] [70.1 to 112.7]
7.2 to 8.4 7.3 to 8.4 7.6 to 8.4 7.9 to 12.7
5 (0.2) {73.42 to 85.66} {74.44 to 85.66} {77.5 to 85.66} {80.8 to 129.9}
[63.72 to 74.35] [64.61 to 74.35] [67.26 to 74.35] [70.1 to 112.7]
7.2 to 8.4 7.3 to 8.4 7.6 to 8.4 7.9 to 12.7
10 (0.4) {73.42 to 85.66} {74.44 to 85.66} {77.5 to 85.66} {80.8 to 129.9}
[63.72 to 74.35] [64.61 to 74.35] [67.26 to 74.35] [70.1 to 112.7]
7.2 to 8.4 7.3 to 8.4 7.6 to 8.4 7.9 to 12.7
15 (0.5) {73.42 to 85.66} {74.44 to 85.66} {77.5 to 85.66} {80.8 to 129.9}
[63.72 to 74.35] [64.61 to 74.35] [67.26 to 74.35] [70.1 to 112.7]
23.5 to 27.3 23.7 to 27.3 22.3 to 27.3 19.6 to 21.8
25 (1.0) {239.6 to 278.4} {241.7 to 278.4} {227.4 to 278.4} {200.0 to 222.1}
[208 to 241.6] [209.8 to 241.6] [197.4 to 241.6] [173.5 to 192.6]
26.2 to 30.5 26.6 to 30.5 28.0 to 30.5
32 (1.25) {267.2 to 311} {271.2 to 311} {285.5 to 311}
[231.9 to 269.9] [235.4 to 269.9] [247.8 to 269.9]
36.2 to 42.4 36.9 to 42.4 39.1 to 42.4 30.1 to 33.4
40 (1.5) {369.1 to 432.4} {376.3 to 432.4} {398.7 to 432.4} {307.2 to 341.3}
[320.4 to 375.3] [326.6 to 375.3] [346.1 to 375.3] [266.5 to 296.0]
Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
Fluororesin with ceramic fillers (Valqua #7020) (standard) gasket, or fluororesin with carbon gasket (optional code GF)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
Non-asbestos gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
ratings
JIS 10K
ANSI Class 150
JIS 20K
ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40
3
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
Installation
6.8 to 11.0 6.8 to 11.0 6.6 to 11.0
15 (0.5) {69.3 to 112.2} {69.3 to 112.2} {67.3 to 112.2}
[60.2 to 97.4] [60.2 to 97.4] [58.4 to 97.4]
18.9 to 24.5 19.1 to 24.5 14.7 to 24.5
25 (1.0) {192.7 to 249.8} {194.8 to 249.8} {149.9 to 249.8}
[167.3 to 216.8] [169.0 to 216.8] [130.1 to 216.8]
34.5 to 45.7 41.7 to 57.4 34.5 to 57.4
40 (1.5) {351.8 to 466.0} {425.2 to 585.3} {351.8 to 585.3}
[305.4 to 404.5] [369.1 to 508.0] [305.4 to 508.0]
Table 3.3.5 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for PVC Piping
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket (optional codes BSC and BCC), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40 JPI Class 150
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.4 1.6 to 2.6
2.5 (0.1) {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 24.47} {16.4 to 26.5}
[13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 21.24] [14.2 to 23.0]
1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.4 1.6 to 2.6
5 (0.2) {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 24.47} {16.4 to 26.5}
[13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 21.24] [14.2 to 23.0]
1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.4 1.6 to 2.6
10 (0.4) {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 24.47} {16.4 to 26.5}
[13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 21.24] [14.2 to 23.0]
1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.5 1.5 to 2.4 1.6 to 2.6
15 (0.5) {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 25.49} {15.3 to 24.47} {16.4 to 26.5}
[13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 22.13] [13.28 to 21.24] [14.2 to 23.0]
4.9 to 8.1 5.0 to 8.3 4.3 to 7.2 4.0 to 6.6
25 (1.0) {49.97 to 82.6} {50.99 to84.64 } {43.85 to 73.42} {41.3 to 67.0}
[43.37 to 71.69] [44.25 to 73.46] [38.06 to 63.72] [35.8 to 58.1]
5.5 to 9.2 5.7 to 9.5 5.4 to 8.9
32 (1.25) {56.08 to 93.81} {58.12 to 96.87} {55.06 to 90.75}
[48.68 to 81.43] [50.45 to 84.08] [47.79 to 78.77]
7.7 to 12.9 8.1 to 13.4 7.5 to 12.5 6.4 to 10.4
40 (1.5) {78.52 to 131.5} {82.6 to 136.6} {76.48 to 127.5} {65.4 to 106.6}
[68.15 to 114.2] [71.69 to 118.6] [66.38 to 110.6] [56.7 to 92.4]
Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket (optional codes BSC and BCC), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
0.8 to 1.4 0.8 to 1.4 0.8 to 1.4
15 (0.5) {8.2 to 14.3} {8.2 to 14.3} {8.2 to 14.3}
[7.1 to 12.4] [7.1 to 12.4] [7.1 to 12.4]
2.3 to 3.1 2.4 to 3.1 1.9 to 3.1
25 (1.0) {23.5 to 31.6} {24.5 to 31.6} {19.4to 31.6}
[20.4 to 27.4] [21.2 to 27.4] [16.8 to 27.4]
4.4 to 6.0 5.2 to 7.3 4.4 to 7.3
40 (1.5) {44.9 to 61.2} {53.0 to 74.4} {44.9 to 74.4}
[38.9 to 53.1] [46.0 to 64.6] [38.9 to 64.6]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 14
Table 3.3.6 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping and Permeable Fluids
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
No gasket (standard)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40 JPI Class 150
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
10.8 to 12.4 10.8 to 12.4 11.1 to 12.4 11.8 to 12.1
2.5 (0.1) {110.1 to 126.4} {110.1 to 126.4} {113.2 to 126.4} {120.6 to 123.7}
[95.59 to 109.7] [95.59 to 109.7] [98.24 to 109.7] [104.6 to 107.3]
10.8 to 12.4 10.8 to 12.4 11.1 to 12.4 11.8 to 12.1
5 (0.2) {110.1 to 126.4} {110.1 to 126.4} {113.2 to 126.4} {120.6 to 123.7}
[95.59 to 109.7] [95.59 to 109.7] [98.24 to 109.7] [104.6 to 107.3]
10.8 to 12.4 10.8 to 12.4 11.1 to 12.4 11.8 to 12.1
10 (0.4) {110.1 to 126.4} {110.1 to 126.4} {113.2 to 126.4} {120.6 to 123.7}
[95.59 to 109.7] [95.59 to 109.7] [98.24 to 109.7] [104.6 to 107.3]
10.8 to 12.4 10.8 to 12.4 11.1 to 12.4 11.8 to 12.1
15 (0.5) {110.1 to 126.4} {110.1 to 126.4} {113.2 to 126.4} {120.6 to 123.7}
[95.59 to 109.7] [95.59 to 109.7] [98.24 to 109.7] [104.6 to 107.3]
34.9 to 40.1 35.2 to 40.1 32.3 to 37.1 29.2 to 29.9
25 (1.0) {355.9 to 408.9} {358.9 to 408.9} {329.4 to 378.3} {297.6 to 305.5}
[308.9 to 354.9] [311.5 to 354.9] [285.9 to 328.4] [258.1 to 265.0]
38.8 to 44.6 39.2 to 44.6 40.6 to 46.7
32 (1.25) {395.6 to 454.8} {399.7 to 454.8} {414.0 to 476.2}
[343.4 to 394.7] [346.9 to 394.7] [359.3 to 413.3]
53.5 to 61.5 54.2 to 61.5 56.4 to 61.5 44.6 to 45.8
40 (1.5) {545.5 to 627.1} {552.7 to 627.1} {575.1 to 627.1} {455.0 to 467.3}
[473.5 to 544.3] [479.7 to 544.3] [499.2 to 544.3] [394.7 to 405.3]
Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type (N-m / {kgf-cm} / [in-lbf])
Gasket types within
Fluororesin with ceramic fillers (Valqua #7020) gasket (standard), or fluororesin with carbon gasket (optional code GF)
flowtube
Gasket types for users
PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
flange
Flange
JIS 10K JIS 20K
ratings
ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300 DIN PN40
Size
DIN PN10 DIN PN16
mm (inch)
8.1 to 13.1 8.1 to 13.1 7.9 to 13.1
15 (0.5) {82.6 to 133.6} {82.6 to 133.6} {80.6 to 133.6}
[71.7 to 115.9] [71.7 to 115.9] [69.9 to 115.9]
22.5 to 29.0 22.7 to 29.0 17.4 to 29.0
25 (1.0) {229.4 to 295.7} {231.5 to 295.7} {177.4 to 295.7}
[199.1 to 256.7] [200.9 to 256.7] [154.0 to 256.7]
40.6 to 53.8 49.3 to 67.7 40.6 to 67.7
40 (1.5) {414.0 to 548.6} {502.7 to 690.3} {414.0 to 690.3}
[359.3 to 476.2] [436.3 to 599.2] [359.3 to 599.2]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 15
(2) Mounting Centering Devices
NOTE
To maintain concentricity of the flowmeter with the pipes,
install centering devices. From the process piping side, Precautions for size 125 mm (5 in.), 150 mm (6 in.),
pass two through-bolts through the four centering devices replaceable electrode type
(two for each bolt) and the adjacent two holes (the lower When installing this type of flowmeter with JIS F12
two holes for horizontal mounting) of both of the flanges (JIS 75M) flanges, turn the flowmeter slightly because
(refer to Figure 3.3.4). Use the appropriate centering the cover of the electrode chambers will interfere with
devices according to the nominal diameter and the flange the bolts.
ratings. The centering devices are engraved with an
identifying character. Use the appropriate ones which
meet the required specifications by referring to Table (4) Tightening Nuts
3.3.10 and Table 3.3.11 (AXF standard models) and Table
Tighten the nuts according to the torque values for metal
3.3.12 (replacement models for the earlier ADMAG or
piping in Table 3.3.7. For PVC piping, select an optional
ADMAG AE).
code of GA, GC, or GD, use rubber gaskets and tighten
(3) Positioning the Flowmeter the nuts to the torque values for PVC piping in Table
3.3.8.
Position the flowmeter so that the Mini-flanges and the
For permeable fluids (such as nitric acid, hydrofluoric
centering devices come in close contact with each other.
acid, or sodium hydrate at high temperatures), tighten the
Be careful to prevent the four centering devices from
nuts according to the torque values in Table 3.3.9.
coming into contact with the housing. If stud-type through-
bolts are used, position them in such a way that the four
centering devices come in contact with the bolt threads
(refer to Figure 3.3.4). Pass the other through-bolts CAUTION 3
through from the process piping side.
For a flowmeter with fluorocarbon PFA lining, it is
Installation
possible that the nuts may loosen as time passes,
so tighten them regularly. Be sure to tighten the nuts
according to the prescribed torque values. Tighten
them diagonally with the same torque values, step by
step up to the prescribed torque value.
*Through-bolt
Piping-side flange *: These items can be ordered optionally.
*Gasket (two units) If they are provided by the user, choose nuts and
bolts in compliance with the flange ratings.
Housing
Centering device
(four units)
Figure 3.3.4 Mounting Procedure for Wafer Type (sizes: 50 to 300 mm (2.0 to 12 in.))
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 16
Table 3.3.7 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA/Polyurethane Rubber/Natural Soft Rubber/EPDM Rubber lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]
Gasket types
No gasket (standard)
within flowtube
Gasket types for Non-asbestos fiber gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket
users flange (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150
mm (inch)
45.0 to 56.8 45.0 to 56.8 22.5 to 25.9 22.5 to 25.9 50.0 to 57.5 44.5 to 50.9
50 (2.0) {458.9 to 579.2} {458.9 to 579.2} {229.4 to 264.1} {229.4 to 264.1} {509.9 to 586.3} {454.1 to 519.8}
[398.3 to 502.7] [398.3 to 502.7] [199.1 to 229.2] [199.1 to 229.2] [442.5 to 508.9} [393.9 to 450.9]
61.3 to 70.5 61.3 to 70.5 30.8 to 35.4 30.8 to 35.4 56.1 to 70.8
65 (2.5) {625.1 to 718.9} {625.1 to 718.9} {314.1 to 361.0} {314.1 to 361.0} {572.1 to 722.0}
[542.5 to 624.0] [542.5 to 624.0] [272.6 to 313.3] [272.6 to 313.3] [496.5 to 626.6]
35.0 to 40.3 76.0 to 80.9 39.9 to 45.9 39.9 to 45.9 39.9 to 45.9 68.4 to 78.7 70.0 to 80.1
80 (3.0) {356.9 to 410.9} {775.0 to 825.0} {406.9 to 468.1} {406.9 to 468.1} {406.9 to 468.1} {697.5 to 802.5} {714.4 to 817.8}
[309.8 to 356.7] [672.6 to 716.0] [353.1 to 406.2] [353.1 to 406.2] [353.1 to 406.2] [605.4 to 696.5] [619.6 to 709.3]
46.1 to 53 46.1 to 53 52.9 to 60.8 52.9 to 60.8 52.9 to 60.8 88.6 to 101.9 45.0 to 51.5
100 (4.0) {470.1 to 540.5} {470.1 to 540.5} {539.4 to 620.0} {539.4 to 620.0} {539.4 to 620.0} {903.5 to 1039} {459.0 to 525.2}
[408.0 to 469.1] [408.0 to 469.1] [468.2 to 538.1] [468.2 to 538.1] [468.2 to 538.1] [784.1 to 901.9] [398.1 to 455.6]
73.7 to 84.8 73.7 to 84.8 80.5 to 92.6 80.5 to 92.6 80.5 to 92.6 75.1 to 86.4
125 (5.0) {751.5 to 864.7} {751.5 to 864.7} {820.9 to 944.3} {820.9 to 944.3} {820.9 to 944.3} {765.8 to 881.0}
[652.3 to 750.5] [652.3 to 750.5] [712.5 to 819.5] [712.5 to 819.5] [712.5 to 819.5] [664.7 to 764.7]
85.4 to 98.2 85.4 to 98.2 61.0 to 70.2 61.0 to 70.2 91.2 to 96.3 86.3 to 99.2 78.9 to 86.2
150 (6.0) {870.8 to 1001} {870.8 to 1001} {622.0 to 715.8} {622.0 to 715.8} {930.0 to 982.0} {880.0 to 1012} {805.2 to 879.9}
[755.8 to 869.1] [755.8 to 869.1] [539.9 to 621.3] [539.9 to 621.3] [807.2 to 852.3] [763.8 to 878.0] [698.4 to 763.2]
78.8 to 90.6 113.6 to 135.8 113.6 to 135.8 87.5 to 100.6 87.5 to 100.6 87.5 to 100.6 88.6 to 101.9 109.6 to 119.7
200 (8.0) {803.5 to 923.9} {1158 to 1385} {1158 to 1385} {892.3 to 1026} {892.3 to 1026} {892.3 to 1026} {903.5 to 1039} {1118 to 1221}
[697.4 to 801.8] [1005 to 1202] {1005 to 1202] [774.4 to 890.3] [774.4 to 890.3] [774.4 to 890.3] [784.1 to 901.9] [970 to 1060]
119.4 to 137.3 119.4 to 137.3 119.4 to 137.3 158.1 to 181.8 120.8 to 136.4
250 (10) {1218 to 1400} {1218 to 1400} {1218 to 1400} {1612 to 1854} {1232 to 1392}
[1057 to 1215] [1057 to 1215] {1057 to 1215] [1399 to 1609] [1069 to 1207]
83.0 to 99.2 105.2 to 121.0 105.2 to 121.0 146.6 to 168.6 141.8 to 160.1
300 (12) {846.4 to 1012} {1073 to 1234} {1073 to 1234} {1495 to 1719} {1447 to 1634}
[734.6 to 878] [931.1 to 1071] {931.1 to 1071] [1297 to 1492] [1255 to 1417]
N-m
Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]
Gasket types
Fluororesin with ceramic fillers (Valqua #7020) gasket (standard), or fluororesin with carbon gasket (optional code GF)
within flowtube
Gasket types for
Non-asbestos gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M)
mm (inch)
48.2 to 80.3 48.6 to 81.0 23.5 to 39.1 23.7 to 39.5 48.2 to 80.3
50 (2.0) {491.5 to 818.8} {495.6 to 826.0} {239.6 to 398.7} {241.7 to 402.8} {491.5 to 818.8}
[426.6 to 710.7] [430.1 to 716.9] [208.0 to 346.1] [209.8 to 349.6] [426.6 to 710.7]
31.5 to 52.4 64.2 to 107.0 38.8 to 64.7 38.2 to 63.7 31.5 to 52.4 63.7 to 106.2
80 (3.0) {321.2 to 534.3} {654.7 to 1091.1} {395.6 to 659.8} {389.5 to 649.6} {321.2 to 534.3} {649.6 to 1082.9}
[278.8 to 463.8] [568.2 to 947.0] [343.4 to 572.6] [338.1 to 563.8] [278.8 to 463.8] [563.8 to 939.9]
36.0 to 59.9 36.3 to 60.4 44.3 to 73.8 43.6 to 72.7 36.0 to 59.9 73.0 to 121.6
100 (4.0) {367.1 to 610.8} {370.2 to 615.9} {451.7 to 752.6} {444.6 to 741.3} {367.1 to 610.8} {744.4 to 1240.0}
[318.6 to 530.2] [321.3 to 534.6] [392.1 to 653.2] [385.9 to 643.4] [318.6 to 530.2] [646.1 to 1076.3]
75.5 to 125.9 74.4 to 123.9 53.4 to 89.1 48.8 to 81.3 75.5 to 125.9 82.3 to 137.1
150 (6.0) {769.9 to 1283.8} {758.7 to 1263.4} {544.5 to 908.6} {497.6 to 829.0} {769.9 to 1283.8} {839.2 to 1398.0}
[668.2 to 1114.3] [658.5 to 1096.6] [472.6 to 788.6] [431.9 to 719.6] [668.2 to 1114.3] [728.4 to 1213.4]
72.9 to 121.6 109.1 to 181.8 110.9 to 184.9 79.0 to 131.6 80.0 to 133.3 72.9 to 121.6 89.7 to 149.5
200 (8.0) {743.4 to 1240.0} {1112.5 to 1853.8} {1130.9 to 1885.5} {805.6 to 1341.9} {815.8 to 1359.3} {743.4 to 1240.0} {914.7 to 1524.5}
[645.2 to 1076.3] [965.6 to 1609.1] [981.5 to 1636.5] [699.2 to 1164.8] [708.1 to 1179.8] [645.2 to 1076.3] [793.9 to 1323.2]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 17
Table 3.3.8 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for PVC Piping
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]
Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket (optional codes BSC and BCC), or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150
mm (inch)
9.9 to 16.5 9.9 to 16.5 10.6 to 17.6 10.6 to 17.6 9.5 to 15.9 9.6 to 15.9
50 (2.0) {101.0 to 168.3} {101.0 to 168.3} {108.1 to 179.5} {108.1 to 179.5} {96.9 to 162.1} {98.1 to 162.2}
[87.6 to 146.0] [87.6 to 146.0] [93.8 to 155.8] [93.8 to 155.8] [84.1 to 140.7] [85.1 to 140.7]
14.2 to 23.7 14.2 to 23.7 15.5 to 25.9 15.5 to 25.9 28.2 to 51.8
65 (2.5) {144.8 to 241.7} {144.8 to 241.7} {158.1 to 264.1} {158.1 to 264.1} {287.6 to 528.2}
[125.7 to 209.8] [125.7 to 209.8] [137.2 to 229.2] [137.2 to 229.2] [249.6 to 458.4]
8.0 to 13.3 17.4 to 26.7 9.7 to 16.1 9.7 to 16.1 9.7 to 16.1 15.4 to 25.6 16.4 to 27.0
80 (3.0) {81.6 to 135.6} {177.4 to 272.3} {98.9 to 164.2} {98.9 to 164.2} {98.9 to 164.2} {157.0 to 261.0} {167.1 to 275.9}
[70.8 to 117.7] [154.0 to 236.3] [85.8 to 142.5] [85.8 to 142.5] [85.8 to 142.5] [136.3 to 226.6] [145.0 to 239.3]
11.3 to 18.8 11.3 to 18.8 14.2 to 23.6 14.2 to 23.6 14.2 to 23.6 21.1 to 35.1 10.6 to 17.5
100 (4.0) {115.2 to 191.7} {115.2 to 191.7} {144.8 to 240.7} {144.8 to 240.7} {144.8 to 240.7} {215.2 to 357.9} {108.2 to 178.3}
[100.0 to 166.4] [100.0 to 166.4] [125.7 to 208.9] [125.7 to 208.9] [125.7 to 208.9] [186.7 to 310.6] [93.8 to 154.7]
18.8 to 31.3 18.8 to 31.3 22.3 to 37.2 22.3 to 37.2 22.3 to 37.2 18.5 to 30.8
125 (5.0) {191.7 to 319.2} {191.7 to 319.2} {227.4 to 379.3} {227.4 to 379.3} {227.4 to 379.3} {188.6 to 314.1}
[166.4 to 277.0] [166.4 to 277.0] [197.4 to 329.2] [197.4 to 329.2] [197.4 to 329.2] [163.7 to 272.6]
22.5 to 37.6 22.5 to 37.6 27.2 to 45.3 27.2 to 45.3 40.7 to 62.1 21.8 to 36.3 19.9 to 32.0
150 (6.0) {229.4 to 383.4} {229.4 to 383.4} {277.4 to 461.9} {277.4 to 461.9} {415.0 to 633.2} {222.3 to 370.2} {202.8 to 326.0}
[199.1 to 332.8] [199.1 to 332.8] [240.7 to 400.9] [240.7 to 400.9] [360.2 to 549.6] [192.9 to 321.3] [175.9 to 282.8]
200 (8.0)
22.1 to 36.9
{225.4 to 376.3}
31.9 to 55.3 31.9 to 55.3
{325.3 to 563.9} {325.3 to 563.9}
27.3 to 45.3
{278.4 to 461.9}
27.3 to 45.3
{278.4 to 461.9}
27.3 to 45.3
{278.4 to 461.9}
23.8 to 39.6
{242.7 to 403.8}
30.6 to 49.2
{312.3 to 501.7} 3
[195.6 to 326.6] [282.3 to 489.4] [282.3 to 489.4] [241.6 to 400.9] [241.6 to 400.9] [241.6 to 400.9] [210.6 to 350.5] [270.9 to 435.2]
Installation
N-m
Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]
Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket (optional codes BSC and BCC), or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M)
mm (inch)
6.2 to 10.4 6.3 to 10.5 2.9 to 4.9 2.9 to 4.9 6.2 to 10.4
50 (2.0) {63.2 to 106.1} {64.2 to 107.1} {29.6 to 50.0} {29.6 to 50.0} {63.2 to 106.1}
[54.9 to 92.0] [55.8 to 92.9] [25.7 to 43.4] [25.7 to 43.4] [54.9 to 92.0]
4.4 to 7.3 10.6 to 17.7 5.3 to 8.8 5.2 to 8.7 4.4 to 7.3 9.6 to 16.0
80 (3.0) {44.9 to 74.4} {108.1 to 180.5} {54.0 to 89.7} {53.0 to 88.7} {44.9 to 74.4} {97.9 to 163.2}
[38.9 to 64.6] [93.8 to 156.7] [46.9 to 77.9] [46.0 to 77.0] [38.9 to 64.6] [85.0 to 141.6]
5.2 to 8.6 5.7 to 9.5 6.0 to 10.0 6.0 to 10.0 5.2 to 8.6 11.7 to 19.5
100 (4.0) {53.0 to 87.7} {58.1 to 96.9} {61.2 to 102.0} {61.2 to 102.0} {53.0 to 87.7} {119.3 to 198.8}
[46.0 to 76.1] [50.4 to 84.1] [53.1 to 88.5] [53.1 to 88.5] [46.0 to 76.1] [103.6 to 172.6]
10.7 to 17.8 11.6 to 19.3 7.0 to 11.6 6.6 to 11.0 10.7 to 17.8 13.3 to 22.2
150 (6.0) {109.1 to 181.5} {118.3 to 196.8} {71.4 to 118.3} {67.3 to 112.2} {109.1 to 181.5} {135.6 to 226.4}
[94.7 to 157.5] [102.7 to 170.8] [62.0 to 102.7] [58.4 to 97.4] [94.7 to 157.5] [117.7 to 196.5]
10.2 to 17.1 18.9 to 31.5 18.7 to 31.2 10.6 to 17.7 10.8 to 18.0 10.2 to 17.1 15.3 to 25.5
200 (8.0) {104.0 to 174.4} {192.7 to 321.2} {190.7 to 318.2} {108.1 to 180.5} {110.1 to 183.5} {104.0 to 174.4} {156.0 to 260.0}
[90.3 to 151.3] [167.3 to 278.8] [165.5 to 276.1] [93.8 to 156.7] [95.6 to 159.3] [90.3 to 151.3] [135.4 to 225.7]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 18
Table 3.3.9 Wafer Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping and Permeable Fluids
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]
Gasket types
No gasket (standard)
within flowtube
Gasket types
PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150
mm (inch)
66.2 to 76.1 66.2 to 76.1 33.1 to 38.0 33.1 to 38.0 71.2 to 118.6 65.7 to 69.7
50 (2.0) {675.1 to 776.0} {675.1 to 776.0} {337.5 to 387.5} {337.5 to 387.5} {726.0 to 1209} {670.9 to 711.0}
[585.9 to 673.5] [585.9 to 673.5] [292.9 to 336.3] [292.9 to 336.3] [630.1 to 1050] [581.9 to 616.7]
89.5 to 102.9 89.5 to 102.9 44.9 to 51.6 44.9 to 51.6 81.8 to 103.2
65 (2.5) {912.6 to 1049} {912.6 to 1049} {457.9 to 526.2} {457.9 to 526.2} {834.1 to 1052}
[792.1 to 910.7] [792.1 to 910.7] [397.4 to 456.7] [397.4 to 456.7] {724.0 to 913.4]
51.3 to 59.0 111.3 to 118.4 58.1 to 66.8 58.1 to 66.8 58.1 to 66.8 100.8 to 115.9 102.5 to 108.7
80 (3.0) {523.1 to 601.6} {1135 to 1207} {592.5 to 681.2} {592.5 to 681.2} {592.5 to 681.2} {1028 to 1182} {1046 to 1109}
[454.0 to 522.2] [985.0 to 1048] [514.2 to 591.2] [514.2 to 591.2] [514.2 to 591.2] [892.1 to 1026] [907.7 to 962.0]
66.7 to 76.7 66.7 to 76.7 76.1 to 87.5 76.1 to 87.5 76.1 to 87.5 129.8 to 149.3 65.7 to 69.6
100 (4.0) {680.2 to 782.1} {680.2 to 782.1} {776.0 to 892.3} {776.0 to 892.3} {776.0 to 892.3} {1324 to 1522} {670.1 to 710.0}
[590.3 to 678.8] [590.3 to 678.8] [673.5 to 774.4] [673.5 to 774.4] [673.5 to 774.4] [1149 to 1321] [581.2 to 615.9]
106.1 to 122.0 106.1 to 122.0 114.5 to 131.7 114.5 to 131.7 114.5 to 131.7 109.6 to 126.0
125 (5.0) {1082 to 1244} {1082 to 1244} {1168 to 1343} {1168 to 1343} {1168 to 1343} {1118 to 1285}
[939.0 to 1080] [939.0 to 1080] [1013 to 1166] [1013 to 1166] {1013 to 1166] [970.0 to 1115]
122.2 to 140.5 122.2 to 140.5 86.8 to 99.8 86.8 to 99.8 129.8 to 136.9 125.6 to 144.4 114.2 to 115.3
150 (6.0) {1246 to 1433} {1246 to 1433} {885.1 to 1018} {885.1 to 1018} {1324 to 1396} {1281 to 1472} {1165 to 1177}
[1082 to 1243] [1082 to 1243] [768.2 to 883.3] [768.2 to 883.3] {1149 to 1212] [1112 to 1278] [1010 to 1021]
111.6 to 128.3 161.0 to 192.3 161.0 to 192.3 122.0 to 140.3 122.0 to 140.3 122.0 to 140.3 128.0 to 147.2 156.7 to 158.3
200 (8.0) {1138 to 1308} {1642 to 1961} {1642 to 1961} {1244 to 1431} {1244 to 1431} {1244 to 1431} {1305 to 1501} {1599 to 1615}
[987.7 to 1136] [1425 to 1702] [1425 to 1702] [1080 to 1242] [1080 to 1242] [1080 to 1242] [1133 to 1303] [1387 to 1401]
167.7 to 192.9 167.7 to 192.9 167.7 to 192.9 227.6 to 261.7 172.3 to 175.8
250 (10) {1710 to 1967} {1710 to 1967} {1710 to 1967} {2321 to 2669} {1758 to 1794}
[1484 to 1707] [1484 to 1707] [1484 to 1707] [2014 to 2316] [1525 to 1556]
115.2 to 137.6 146.0 to 167.9 146.0 to 167.9 209.1 to 240.5 199.8 to 203.9
300 (12) {1175 to 1403} {1489 to 1712} {1489 to 1712} {2132 to 2452} {2039 to 2080}
[1020 to 1218] [1292 to 1486] [1292 to 1486] [1851 to 2129] [1768 to 1805]
N-m
Tightening torque values for Ceramics lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]
Gasket types
Fluororesin with ceramic fillers (Valqua #7020) gasket (standard), or fluororesin with carbon gasket (optional code GF)
within flowtube
Gasket types
PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket (optional codes BCF and BSF), or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M)
mm (inch)
56.5 to 94.2 57.0 to 95.0 27.7 to 46.1 27.9 to 46.5 56.5 to 94.2
50 (2.0) {576.1 to 960.6} {581.2 to 968.7} {282.5 to 470.1} {284.5 to 474.2} {576.1 to 960.6}
[500.1 to 833.7] [504.5 to 840.8] [245.2 to 408.0] [246.9 to 411.6] [500.1 to 833.7]
37.3 to 62.2 76.0 to 126.7 46.2 to 77.0 45.4 to 75.7 37.3 to 62.2 75.5 to 125.8
80 (3.0) {380.4 to 634.3} {775.0 to 1292.0} {471.1 to 788.2} {463.0 to 771.9} {380.4 to 634.3} {769.9 to 1282.8}
[330.1 to 550.5] [672.7 to 1121.4] [408.9 to 681.5] [401.8 to 670.0] [330.1 to 550.5] [668.2 to 1113.4]
42.2 to 70.3 42.5 to 70.8 52.0 to 86.7 51.2 to 85.3 42.2 to 70.3 85.4 to 142.3
100 (4.0) {430.3 to 716.9} {433.4 to 722.0} {530.3 to 884.1} {522.1 to 869.8} {430.3 to 716.9} {870.8 to 1451.1}
[373.5 to 622.2] [376.2 to 626.6] [460.2 to 767.4] [453.2 to 755.0] [373.5 to 622.2] [755.9 to 1259.5]
87.8 to 146.4 86.4 to 144.0 62.4 to 104.0 56.8 to 94.7 87.8 to 146.4 95.4 to 159.0
150 (6.0) {895.3 to 1492.9} {881.0 to 1468.4} {636.3 to 1060.5} {579.2 to 965.7} {895.3 to 1492.9} {972.8 to 1621.3}
[777.1 to 1295.7] [764.7 to 1274.5] [552.3 to 920.5] [502.7 to 838.2] [777.1 to 1295.7] [844.4 to 1407.3]
84.0 to 140.1 125.4 to 209.1 127.6 to 212.7 91.1 to 151.9 92.3 to 153.8 84.0 to 140.1 103.0 to 171.7
200 (8.0) {856.6 to 1428.6} {1278.7 to 2132.2} {1301.2 to 2168.9} {929.0 to 1548.9} {941.3 to 1568.3} {856.6 to 1428.6} {1050.3 to 1750.9}
[743.5 to 1240.0] [1109.9 to 1850.7] [1129.4 to 1882.6] [806.3 to 1344.4] [816.9 to 1361.2] [743.5 to 1240.0] [911.6 to 1519.7]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 19
Table 3.3.10Centering Device Identification (AXF Standard Models, PFA/Polyurethane Rubber/Natural Soft Rubber/EPDM
Rubber lining)
Installation
mm (inch) 10K 20K F12(75M) Class 150 Class 300 PN10 PN16 PN40
50 (2.0) B B B F F
80 (3.0) B F H F C G
100 (4.0) B F H C H F
150 (6.0) C D D C E C
200 (8.0) C D D D E C C
*: Each centering device is engraved with a character as identification.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 20
3.3.4 Nominal Diameter 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) to (2) Tightening Nuts
400 mm (16 in.), Flange Type Tighten the bolts according to the torque values for the
metal piping in Table 3.3.13. For PVC piping, select an
optional code of GA, GC, or GD, use rubber gaskets and
IMPORTANT tighten the nuts to the torque values for the PVC piping in
Table 3.3.14.
Use bolts and nuts in compliance with the flange For permeable fluids (such as nitric acid, hydrofluoric
ratings. Be sure to choose a gasket with inner and acid, or sodium hydrate at high temperatures), tighten the
outer diameters that does not protrude inside the nuts according to the torque values in Table 3.3.15.
piping (refer to Table 3.3.16). If the inner diameter of
the gasket is too large, or outer diameter of the gasket
is too small, fluid leakage may result.
CAUTION
For a flowmeter with fluorocarbon PFA lining, it is
(1) Mounting Direction
possible that the nuts may loosen as time passes,
Mount the flowmeter so that the flow direction of the fluid so tighten them regularly. Be sure to tighten the nuts
to be measured is in line with the direction of the arrow according to the prescribed torque values. Tighten
mark on the flowmeter. them diagonally with the same torque values, step by
step up to the prescribed torque value.
IMPORTANT
If it is impossible to match the direction of the arrow
mark, the direction of the electrical connection can
be changed. Refer to the applicable users manuals
which can be downloaded from our website.
In case the fluid being measured flows against the
arrow direction, change the value from Forward to
Reverse at the parameter [ J20: Flow Direction ]
(refer to Chapter 8).
*Piping-side flange
*Gasket (two units)
*: These items must be provided by the user.
Choose nuts and bolts in compliance with
the flange ratings.
Flowmeter-side flange
*Bolt
(eight units)
*Nut
(eight units)
F0317.ai
Figure 3.3.5 Mounting Procedure for Flange Type (sizes: 2.5 to 400 mm (0.1 to 16 in.))
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 21
Table 3.3.13 Flange Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA/Polyurethane Rubber/Natural Soft Rubber/EPDM Rubber lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]
Gasket types
No gasket (standard)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Non-asbestos gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket, or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI AS AS
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150 Table D Table E
mm (inch)
3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.4
2.5 (0.1)
{38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 65.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 56.64]
4.6 to 7.7 4.6 to 7.7 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.9 5.1 to 8.5
2.5 (0.1)
{46.91 to 78.52} {46.91 to 78.52} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 80.56} {52.1 to 86.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[40.71 to 68.15] [40.71 to 68.15] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.92] [45.2 to 75.3]
3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.4
5 (0.2)
{38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 65.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 56.64]
4.6 to 7.7 4.6 to 7.7 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.9 5.1 to 8.5
5 (0.2)
{46.91 to 78.52} {46.91 to 78.52} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 80.56} {52.1 to 86.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[40.71 to 68.15] [40.71 to 68.15] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.92] [45.2 to 75.3]
3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.3 3.8 to 6.4
10 (0.4)
{38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 64.24} {38.75 to 65.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 55.76] [33.63 to 56.64]
4.6 to 7.7 4.6 to 7.7 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.9 5.1 to 8.5
10 (0.4)
{46.91 to 78.52} {46.91 to 78.52} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 80.56} {52.1 to 86.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[40.71 to 68.15] [40.71 to 68.15] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.92] [45.2 to 75.3]
4.6 to 7.7 4.6 to 7.7 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.9 5.1 to 8.5
15 (0.5) {46.91 to 78.52} {46.91 to 78.52} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 80.56} {52.1 to 86.8}
[40.71 to 68.15] [40.71 to 68.15] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.92] [45.2 to 75.3]
13.1 to 15.1 13.1 to 15.1 13.2 to 15.2 13.2 to 15.2 11.9 to 13.7 11.0 to 12.6
25 (1.0) {133.6 to 154.0} {133.6 to 154.0} {134.6 to 155.0} {134.6 to 155.0} {121.3 to 139.7} {112.1 to 128.9}
[115.9 to 133.6] [115.9 to 133.6] [116.8 to 134.5] [116.8 to 134.5] [105.3 to 121.3] [97.3 to 111.8]
14.4 to 15.6 14.4 to 15.6 14.6 to 16.8 14.6 to 16.8 15.0 to 17.3
32 (1.25) {146.8 to 159.1} {146.8 to 159.1} {148.9 to 171.3} {148.9 to 171.3} {153.0 to 176.4}
[127.4 to138.1] [127.4 to138.1]
21.9 to 25.2 21.9 to 25.2
[129.2 to 148.7] [129.2 to 148.7]
22.2 to 25.5 22.2 to 25.5
[132.8 to 153.1]
23.2 to 26.7 18.3 to 20.3
3
40 (1.5) {223.3 to 257.0} {223.3 to 257.0} {226.4 to 260.0} {226.4 to 260.0} {236.6 to 272.3} {186.6 to 207.4}
[193.8 to 223.0] [193.8 to 223.0] [196.5 to 225.7] [196.5 to 225.7] [205.3 to 236.3] [161.8 to 179.9]
Installation
28.0 to 32.2 28.0 to 32.2 27.8 to 32.0 27.8 to 32.0 28.8 to 33.1 27.8 to 31.8 26.2 to 30.0 26.6 to 30.5
50 (2.0) {285.5 to 328.3} {285.5 to 328.3} {283.5 to 326.3} {283.5 to 326.3} {293.7 to 337.5} {283.3 to 324.2} {267.0 to 305.8} {271.8 to 311.0}
[247.8 to 285.0] [247.8 to 285.0] [246.0 to 283.2] [246.0 to 283.2] [254.9 to 293.0] [245.7 to 281.2] [231.6 to 265.2] [235.7 to 269.8]
41.6 to 47.8 41.6 to 47.8 19.5 to 28.5 19.5 to 28.5 41.4 to 47.6
65 (2.5) {424.2 to 487.4} {424.2 to 487.4} {198.8 to 290.6} {198.8 to 290.6} {422.2 to 485.4}
[368.2 to 423.0] [368.2 to 423.0] [172.6 to 252.2] [172.6 to 252.2] [366.4 to 421.3]
23.2 to 26.7 52.7 to 53.6 26.1 to 30.0 26.1 to 30.0 26.1 to 30.0 46.0 to 52.9 46.9 to 53.7 44.1 to 50.5 45.4 to 51.9
80 (3.0) {236.6 to 272.3} {536.9 to 546.2} {266.1 to 305.9} {266.1 to 305.9} {266.1 to 305.9} {469.1 to 539.4} {478.8 to 547.6} {450.2 to 515.4} {463.6 to 530.0}
[205.3 to 236.3] [466.0 to 474.1] [231.0 to 265.5] [231.0 to 265.5] [231.0 to 265.5] [407.1 to 468.2] [415.3 to 475.0] [390.5 to 447.0] [402.1 to 459.7]
30.9 to 35.5 30.9 to 35.5 34.8 to 40.0 34.8 to 40.0 34.8 to 40.0 60.9 to 70.0 30.5 to 34.8 58.1 to 66.5 29.6 to 33.8
100 (4.0) {315.1 to 362.0} {315.1 to 362.0} {354.9 to 407.9} {354.9 to 407.9} {354.9 to 407.9} {621.0 to 713.8} {311.0 to 355.6} {593.3 to 678.9} {301.6 to 344.7}
[273.5 to 314.2] [273.5 to 314.2] [308.0 to 354.0] [308.0 to 354.0] [308.0 to 354.0] [539.0 to 619.5] [269.7 to 308.4] [514.6 to 588.8] [261.6 to 299.0]
45.6 to 52.4 45.6 to 52.4 48.6 to 55.9 48.6 to 55.9 48.6 to 55.9 48.1 to 55.3
125 (5.0) {465.0 to 534.3} {465.0 to 534.3} {495.6 to 570.0} {495.6 to 570.0} {495.6 to 570.0} {490.5 to 563.9}
[403.6 to 463.8] [403.6 to 463.8] [430.1 to 494.7] [430.1 to 494.7] [430.1 to 494.7] [425.7 to 489.4]
64.5 to 74.2 64.5 to 74.2 44.8 to 51.5 44.8 to 51.5 66.7 to 80.8 67.5 to 77.6 60.5 to 66.3 47.0 to 53.8 60.3 to 66.7
150 (6.0) {657.7 to 756.6} {657.7 to 756.6} {456.8 to 525.2} {456.8 to 525.2} {680.2 to 823.9} {688.3 to 791.3} {617.7 to 676.5} {479.5 to 548.5} {615.5 to 681.0}
[570.8 to 656.7] [570.8 to 656.7] [396.5 to 455.8] [396.5 to 455.8] [590.3 to 715.1] [597.4 to 686.8] [535.8 to 586.8] [415.9 to 475.8] [533.8 to 590.7]
59.2 to 68.1 100.3 to 102.1 100.3 to 102.1 63.6 to 73.1 63.6 to 73.1 63.6 to 73.1 69.9 to 80.4 84.9 to 93.0 65.5 to 74.9 85.9 to 95.2
200 (8.0) {603.7 to 694.4} {1023 to 1041} {1023 to 1041} {648.5 to 745.4} {648.5 to 745.4} {648.5 to 745.4} {712.8 to 819.9} {866.0 to 949.5} {668.2 to 763.9} {876.2 to 972.0}
[523.9 to 602.7] [887.8 to 903.3] [887.8 to 903.3] [562.9 to 647.0] [562.9 to 647.0] [562.9 to 647.0] [618.6 to 711.6] [751.2 to 823.6] [579.6 to 662.6] [760.0 to 842.7]
144.0 to 165.6 144.0 to 165.6 144.0 to 165.6 156.3 to 179.7 127.2 to 148.8 156.3 to 179.7 190.5 to 219.1 142.1 to 160.5 161.7 to 178.4 114.1 to 126.3
250 (10) {1468 to 1689} {1468 to 1689} {1468 to 1689} {1594 to 1832} {1297 to 1517} {1594 to 1832} {1943 to 2234} {1450 to 1638} {1650 to 1821} {1164 to 1289}
[1274 to 1466] [1274 to 1466] [1274 to 1466] [1383 to 1590] [1126 to 1317] [1383 to 1590] [1686 to 1939] [1258 to 1421] [1431 to 1579] [1010 to 1118]
119.3 to 137.2 163.1 to 197.4 163.1 to 197.4 123.1 to 136.3 152.3 to 169.4 173.3 to 199.3 168.0 to 193.2 158.5 to 178.9 116.9 to 129.2 149.7 to 163.1
300 (12) {1217 to 1399} {1663 to 2013} {1663 to 2013} {1255 to 1390} {1553 to 1727} {1767 to 2032} {1713 to 1970} {1617 to 1826} {1193 to 1318} {1527 to 1664}
[1056 to 1214] [1443 to 1747] [1443 to 1747] [1089 to 1206] [1348 to 1499] [1534 to 1764] [1487 to 1710] [1402 to 1584] [1035 to 1143] [1325 to 1444]
164.7 to 189.4 256.4 to 293.3 164.7 to 189.4 238.6 to 274.4 243.0 to 265.2 204.5 to 223.1
350 (14) {1679 to 1931} {2615 to 2991} {1679 to 1931} {2433 to 2798} {2480 to 2706} {2087 to 2276}
[1458 to 1676] [2269 to 2596] [1458 to 1676] [2112 to 2429] [2151 to 2347] [1810 to 1974]
225.2 to 258.9 225.2 to 258.9 225.2 to 258.9 305.8 to 351.7 233.1 to 254.4 267.1 to 291.3
400 (16) {2296 to 2640} {2296 to 2640} {2296 to 2640} {3118 to 3586} {2378 to 2596} {2725 to 2972}
[1993 to 2291] [1993 to 2291] [1993 to 2291] [2706 to 3113] [2063 to 2252] [2364 to 2578]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 22
Table 3.3.14 Flange Type Tightening Torque Values for PVC Piping
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]
Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket (optional codes GA, GC, and GD)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Fluororubber gasket, chloroprene rubber gasket, or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI AS AS
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150 Table D Table E
mm (inch)
0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3
2.5 (0.1)
{8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51]
0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.7
2.5 (0.1)
{9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {10.5 to 16.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [9.1 to 14.6]
0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3
5 (0.2)
{8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51]
0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.7
5 (0.2)
{9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {10.5 to 16.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [9.1 to 14.6]
0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3 0.8 to 1.3
10 (0.4)
{8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26} {8.158 to 13.26}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51] [7.08 to 11.51]
0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.7
10 (0.4)
{9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {10.5 to 16.8}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [9.1 to 14.6]
0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 0.9 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.7
15 (0.5) {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {9.177 to 16.32} {10.5 to 16.8}
[7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [7.966 to 14.16] [9.1 to 14.6]
2.7 to 4.5 2.7 to 4.5 2.7 to 4.5 2.7 to 4.5 2.3 to 3.9 2.2 to 3.6
25 (1.0) {27.53 to 45.89} {27.53 to 45.89} {27.53 to 45.89} {27.53 to 45.89} {23.45 to 39.77} {22.8 to 36.9}
[23.9 to 39.83] [23.9 to 39.83] [23.9 to 39.83] [23.9 to 39.83] [20.36 to 34.52] [19.8 to 32.0]
3.0 to 4.9 3.0 to 4.9 3.0 to 5.0 3.0 to 5.0 2.9 to 4.9
32 (1.25) {30.59 to 49.97} {30.59 to 49.97} {30.59 to 50.99} {30.59 to 50.99} {29.57 to 49.97}
[26.55 to 43.37] [26.55 to 43.37] [26.55 to 44.25] [26.55 to 44.25] [25.67 to 43.37]
4.5 to 7.6 4.5 to 7.6 4.7 to 7.8 4.7 to 7.8 4.4 to 7.4 3.8 to 6.2
40 (1.5) {45.89 to 77.5} {45.89 to 77.5} {47.93 to 79.54} {47.93 to 79.54} {44.87 to 75.46} {38.6 to 62.8}
[39.83 to 67.26] [39.83 to 67.26] [41.6 to 69.03] [41.6 to 69.03] [38.94 to 65.49] [33.5 to 54.4]
5.9 to 9.8 5.9 to 9.8 2.9 to 4.8 2.9 to 4.8 5.5 to 9.2 5.8 to 9.6 5.3 to 8.8 5.5 to 9.1
50 (2.0) {60.16 to 99.93} {60.16 to 99.93} {29.57 to 48.95} {29.57 to 48.95} {56.08 to 93.81} {58.9 to 97.6} {54.1 to 89.8} {56.1 to 92.9}
[52.22 to 86.74] [52.22 to 86.74] [25.67 to 42.48] [25.67 to 42.48] [48.68 to 81.43] [51.1 to 84.6] [47.0 to 77.9] [48.7 to 80.6]
9.0 to 15.0 9.0 to 15.0 2.1 to 4.4 2.1 to 4.4 4.4 to 7.3
65 (2.5) {91.8 to 153.0} {91.8 to 153.0} {21.4 to 44.9} {21.4 to 44.9} {44.9 to 74.4}
[79.7 to 132.8] [79.7 to 132.8] [18.6 to 38.9] [18.6 to 38.9] [38.9 to 64.6]
4.9 to 8.1 11.1 to 16.3 5.5 to 9.1 5.5 to 9.1 5.5 to 9.1 9.7 to 12.2 10.2 to 16.8 9.1 to 15.1 9.7 to 16.0
80 (3.0) {50.0 to 82.6} {113.2 to 166.2} {56.1 to 92.8} {56.1 to 92.8} {56.1 to 92.8} {98.9 to 124.4} {103.6 to 171.1} {92.9 to 153.9} {98.8 to 163.2}
[43.4 to 71.7] [98.2 to 144.3] [48.7 to 80.5] [48.7 to 80.5] [48.7 to 80.5] [85.8 to 108.0] [89.9 to 148.4] [80.6 to 133.5] [85.7 to 141.6]
6.7 to 11.2 6.7 to 11.2 7.5 to 12.6 7.5 to 12.6 7.5 to 12.6 13.3 to 22.2 6.5 to 10.8 12.2 to 20.2 6.3 to 10.3
100 (4.0) {68.3 to 114.2} {68.3 to 114.2} {76.5 to 128.5} {76.5 to 128.5} {76.5 to 128.5} {135.6 to 226.4} {66.7 to 110.1} {124.6 to 206.1} {63.9 to 105.6}
[59.3 to 99.1] [59.3 to 99.1] [66.4 to 111.5] [66.4 to 111.5] [66.4 to 111.5] [117.7 to 196.5] [57.8 to 95.5] [108.1 to 178.8] [55.5 to 91.6]
9.9 to 16.5 9.9 to 16.5 10.7 to 17.8 10.7 to 17.8 10.7 to 17.8 10.5 to 17.6
125 (5.0) {101.0 to 168.3} {101.0 to 168.3} {109.1 to 181.5} {109.1 to 181.5} {109.1 to 181.5} {107.1 to 179.5}
[87.6 to 146.0] [87.6 to 146.0] [94.7 to 157.5] [94.7 to 157.5] [94.7 to 157.5] [92.9 to 155.8]
14.4 to 24.0 14.4 to 24.0 9.8 to 16.3 9.8 to 16.3 14.6 to 25.6 15.2 to 25.3 13.3 to 21.4 10.0 to 16.4 13.1 to 21.2
150 (6.0) {146.8 to 244.7} {146.8 to 244.7} {99.9 to 166.2} {99.9 to 166.2} {148.9 to 261.0} {155.0 to 258.0} {135.8 to 218.0} {101.6 to 167.9} {133.6 to 216.4}
[127.4 to 212.4] [127.4 to 212.4] [86.7 to 144.3] [86.7 to 144.3] [129.2 to 226.6] [134.5 to 223.9] [117.8 to 189.1] [88.1 to 145.6] [115.9 to 187.7]
13.4 to 22.3 22.7 to 33.4 22.7 to 33.4 14.6 to 24.3 14.6 to 24.3 14.6 to 24.3 16.1 to 26.9 19.6 to 31.7 14.3 to 23.7 19.7 to 32.2
200 (8.0) {136.6 to 227.4} {231.5 to 340.6} {231.5 to 340.6} {148.9 to 247.8} {148.9 to 247.8} {148.9 to 247.8} {164.2 to 274.3} {200.2 to 323.1} {146.3 to 241.3} {201.5 to 328.7}
[118.6 to 197.4] [200.9 to 295.6] [200.9 to 295.6] [129.2 to 215.1] [129.2 to 215.1] [129.2 to 215.1] [142.5 to 238.1] [173.7 to 280.3] [126.9 to 209.3] [174.8 to 285.1]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 23
Table 3.3.15 Flange Type Tightening Torque Values for Metal Piping and Permeable Fluids
N-m
Tightening torque values for PFA lining type Unit: {kgf-cm}
[in-lbf]
Gasket types
No gasket (standard)
within flowtube
Gasket types
Non-asbestos gasket, PTFE-sheathed non-asbestos gasket, or the equivalent in hardness
for users flange
Flange
ratings ANSI ANSI JIS F12 JPI AS AS
JIS 10K DIN PN10 JIS 20K DIN PN16 DIN PN40
Size Class 150 Class 300 (JIS 75M) Class 150 Table D Table E
mm (inch)
5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6
2.5 (0.1)
{58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41]
6.9 to 7.9 6.9 to 7.9 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.6 to 7.8
2.5 (0.1)
{70.36 to 80.56} {70.36 to 80.56} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {77.9 to 79.9}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[61.07 to 69.92] [61.07 to 69.92] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [67.6 to 69.3]
5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6
5 (0.2)
{58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41]
6.9 to 7.9 6.9 to 7.9 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.6 to 7.8
5 (0.2)
{70.36 to 80.56} {70.36 to 80.56} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {77.9 to 79.9}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[61.07 to 69.92] [61.07 to 69.92] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [67.6 to 69.3]
5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6 5.7 to 6.6
10 (0.4)
{58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3} {58.12 to 67.3}
(with 10 mm flanges)
[50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41] [50.45 to 58.41]
6.9 to 7.9 6.9 to 7.9 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.6 to 7.8
10 (0.4)
{70.36 to 80.56} {70.36 to 80.56} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {77.9 to 79.9}
(with 15 mm flanges)
[61.07 to 69.92] [61.07 to 69.92] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [67.6 to 69.3]
6.9 to 7.9 6.9 to 7.9 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.0 to 8.1 7.6 to 7.8
15 (0.5) {70.36 to 80.56} {70.36 to 80.56} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {71.38 to 82.6} {77.9 to 79.9}
[61.07 to 69.92] [61.07 to 69.92] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [61.95 to 71.69] [67.6 to 69.3]
19.6 to 22.5 19.6 to 22.5 19.7 to 22.7 19.7 to 22.7 17.5 to 20.1 16.4 to 16.8
25 (1.0) {199.9 to 229.4} {199.9 to 229.4} {200.9 to 231.5} {200.9 to 231.5} {178.5 to 205.0} {167.3 to 171.7}
[173.5 to 199.1] [173.5 to 199.1] [174.4 to 200.9] [174.4 to 200.9] [154.9 to 177.9] [145.1 to 148.9]
21.5 to 24.7 21.5 to 24.7 21.6 to 24.8 21.6 to 24.8 22.1 to 25.4
32 (1.25) {219.2 to 251.9} {219.2 to 251.9} {220.3 to 252.9} {220.3 to 252.9} {225.4 to 259.0}
[190.3 to 218.6] [190.3 to 218.6]
32.5 to 37.4 32.5 to 37.4
[191.2 to 219.5] [191.2 to 219.5]
32.8 to 37.7 32.8 to 37.7
[195.6 to 224.8]
33.8 to 38.9 27.2 to 27.9
3
40 (1.5) {331.4 to 381.4} {331.4 to 381.4} {334.5 to 384.4} {334.5 to 384.4} {344.7 to 396.7} {277.2 to 284.8}
[287.6 to 331.0] [287.6 to 331.0] [290.3 to 333.7] [290.3 to 333.7] [229.2 to 344.3] [240.4 to 247.0]
Installation
41.3 to 47.5 41.3 to 47.5 20.6 to 23.7 20.6 to 23.7 42.2 to 48.5 41.2 to 43.6 39.1 to 41.4 39.5 to 41.9
50 (2.0) {421.1 to 484.4} {421.1 to 484.4} {210.1 to 241.7} {210.1 to 241.7} {430.3 to 494.6} {420.2 to 445.3} {398.7 to 422.7} {403.4 to 427.5}
[365.5 to 420.4] [365.5 to 420.4] [182.3 to 209.8] [182.3 to 209.8] [373.5 to 429.3] [364.5 to 386.2] [345.8 to 366.6] [349.9 to 370.8]
61.2 to 70.4 61.2 to 70.4 14.3 to 21.0 14.3 to 21.0 30.5 to 35.1
65 (2.5) {624.1 to 717.9} {624.1 to 717.9} {145.8 to 214.1} {145.8 to 214.1} {311.0 to 357.9}
[541.6 to 623.1] [541.6 to 623.1] [126.6 to 185.9] [126.6 to 185.9] [269.9 to 310.6]
34.2 to 39.3 77.6 to 78.8 38.5 to 44.3 38.5 to 44.3 38.5 to 44.3 68.1 to 78.3 69.1 to 73.2 65.6 to 69.5 66.9 to 70.8
80 (3.0) {348.7 to 400.7} {791.3 to 803.5} {392.6 to 451.7} {392.6 to 451.7} {392.6 to 451.7} {694.4 to 798.4} {704.9 to 746.8} {669.3 to 709.4} {682.6 to 722.9}
[302.7 to 347.8] [686.8 to 697.4] [340.7 to 392.1] [340.7 to 392.1] [340.7 to 392.1] [602.7 to 693.0] [611.5 to 647.8] [580.5 to 615.3] [592.1 to 627.1]
45.2 to 52.0 45.2 to 52.0 51.0 to 58.7 51.0 to 58.7 51.0 to 58.7 89.6 to 103.0 44.9 to 47.5 86.1 to 91.2 43.5 to 46.1
100 (4.0) {460.9 to 530.3} {460.9 to 530.3} {520.1 to 598.6} {520.1 to 598.6} {520.1 to 598.6} {913.7 to 1050} {457.9 to 484.9} {878.3 to 930.7} {444.1 to 470.3}
[400.0 to 460.2] [400.0 to 460.2] [451.4 to 519.5] [451.4 to 519.5] [451.4 to 519.5] [793.0 to 911.6] [397.2 to 420.6] [761.9 to 807.3] [385.2 to 407.9]
66.8 to 76.8 66.8 to 76.8 70.8 to 81.4 70.8 to 81.4 70.8 to 81.4 70.7 to 81.3
125 (5.0) {681.2 to 783.1} {681.2 to 783.1} {722.0 to 830.1} {722.0 to 830.1} {722.0 to 830.1} {720.9 to 829.0}
[591.2 to 679.7] [591.2 to 679.7] [626.6 to 720.4] [626.6 to 720.4] [626.6 to 720.4] [625.7 to 719.5]
93.9 to 108.8 93.9 to 108.8 65.4 to 75.2 65.4 to 75.2 97.3 to 118.0 98.8 to 113.6 88.6 to 89.7 69.4 to 73.5 88.2 to 90.2
150 (6.0) {957.5 to 1109} {957.5 to 1109} {666.9 to 766.8} {666.9 to 766.8} {992.2 to 1203} {1007 to 1158} {904.5 to 915.2} {708.2 to 750.3} {900.5 to 920.0}
[831.1 to 962.9] [831.1 to 962.9] [578.8 to 665.5] [578.8 to 665.5] [861.1 to 1044] [874.4 to 1005] [784.6 to 793.9] [614.3 to 650.8] [781.1 to 798.4]
85.8 to 98.7 145.4 to 147.9 145.4 to 147.9 91.5 to 105.2 91.5 to 105.2 91.5 to 105.2 101.8 to 117.1 123.1 to 124.6 96.0 to 101.7 124.0 to 126.5
200 (8.0) {874.9 to 1006} {1483 to 1508} {1483 to 1508} {933.0 to 1073} {933.0 to 1073} {933.0 to 1073} {1038 to 1194} {1256 to 1272} {980.0 to 1038} {1265 to 1291}
[759.4 to 873.5] [1287 to 1309] [1287 to 1309] [809.8 to 931.1] [809.8 to 931.1] [809.8 to 931.1] [901.0 to 1036] [1089 to 1103] [850.0 to 900.0] [1097 to 1120]
207.8 to 239.0 207.8 to 239.0 207.8 to 239.0 222.9 to 256.3 181.4 to 212.2 222.9 to 256.3 277.9 to 319.6 207.1 to 211.3 237.1 to 241.9 164.3 to 167.7
250 (10) {2119 to 2437} {2119 to 2437} {2119 to 2437} {2273 to 2614} {1850 to 2164} {2273 to 2614} {2834 to 3259} {2113 to 2156} {2419 to 2468} {1677 to 1711}
[1839 to 2115] [1839 to 2115] [1839 to 2115] [1973 to 2268] [1605 to 1878] [1973 to 2268] [2460 to 2829] [1833 to 1870] [2098 to 2141] [1455 to 1484]
171.0 to 196.7 233.7 to 283.0 233.7 to 283.0 130.7 to 144.8 161.8 to 180.0 184.1 to 211.7 243.8 to 280.4 228.7 to 233.4 170.9 to 174.5 214.4 to 215.3
300 (12) {1744 to 2006} {2383 to 2886} {2383 to 2886} {1333 to 1477} {1650 to 1835} {1877 to 2159} {2486 to 2859} {2334 to 2382} {1744 to 1780} {2188 to 2197}
[1513 to 1741] [2068 to 2505] [2068 to 2505] [1157 to 1282] [1432 to 1593] [1629 to 1874] [2158 to 2482] [2024 to 2066] [1512 to 1544] [1898 to 1906]
234.7 to 269.9 365.4 to 418.0 234.7 to 269.9 350.6 to 403.2 351.4 to 354.4 299.8 to 302.2
350 (14) {2393 to 2752} {3726 to 4262} {2393 to 2752} {3575 to 4112} {3586 to 3617} {3059 to 3084}
[2077 to 2389] [3234 to 3699] [2077 to 2389] [3103 to 3568] [3110 to 3137] [2654 to 2675]
320.0 to 368.0 320.0 to 368.0 320.0 to 368.0 448.3 to 515.5 336.6 to 339.5 390.0 to 393.2
400 (16) {3263 to 3753} {3263 to 3753} {3263 to 3753} {4571 to 5257} {3435 to 3465} {3980 to 4012}
[2832 to 3257] [2832 to 3257] [2832 to 3257] [3968 to 4562] [2979 to 3005] [3452 to 3480]
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 24
3.3.5 Gaskets size
Be sure to choose a gasket with an inner and outer diameter that does not protrude inside the piping.
If the inner diameter of the gasket is too large, or outer diameter of the gasket is too small, fluid leakage may result.
Table 3.3.16Inner Diameter of Grounding Ring, Outer Diameter for Effective Sealing and Recommended Inner Diameter of
Gasket
AXF Standard: Unit : mm (approx. inch)
PFA/ Polyurethane Rubber/ Natural Soft Rubber/ EPDM Rubber Ceramics
Wafer Flange
Outer Recommended Inner
Outer Recommended Inner Outer Recommended Inner Inner Diameter of Gasket
Inner Inner Diameter
Size Diameter Diameter of Gasket Diameter Diameter of Gasket Diameter of
Diameter of Diameter of for
for for Grounding
Grounding PTFE-sheathed Grounding PTFE-sheathed Effective PTFE-sheathed
Effective Flat Effective Flat Ring Flat
Ring Non-asbestos Ring Non-asbestos Sealing Non-asbestos
Sealing Gasket Sealing Gasket [A] Gasket
[A] Gasket [A] Gasket [B] Gasket
[B] [C] [B] [C] [C]
[D] [D] [D]
15 (0.5) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 22 (0.87) 15 (0.59) 34 (1.34) 22 (0.87) 15 (0.59) 33 (1.30) 22 (0.87)
25 (1.0) 28 (1.10) 53 (2.09) 35 (1.38) 28 (1.10) 53 (2.09) 35 (1.38) 27 (1.06) 50 (1.97) 35 (1.38)
40 (1.5) 41 (1.61) 71 (2.80) 49 (1.93) 41 (1.61) 71 (2.80) 49 (1.93) 40 (1.57) 68 (2.68) 49 (1.93)
50 (2.0) 53 (2.09) 84 (3.31) 61 (2.40) 53 (2.09) 84 (3.31) 61 (2.40) 52 (2.05) 82 (3.23) 61 (2.40)
80 (3.0) 77 (3.03) 114 (4.49) 90 (3.54) 77 (3.03) 114 (4.49) 90 (3.54) 81 (3.19) 112 (4.41) 90 (3.54)
100 (4.0) 102 (4.02) 140 (5.51) 115 (4.53) 102 (4.02) 140 (5.51) 115 (4.53) 98 (3.86) 134 (5.28) 115 (4.53)
125 (5.0) 128 (5.04) 165 (6.50) 141 (5.55) 128 (5.04) 165 (6.50) 141 (5.55)
150 (6.0) 146.1 (5.75) 190 (7.48) 167 (6.57) 146.1 (5.75) 190 (7.48) 167 (6.57) 144 (5.67) 188 (7.40) 167 (6.57)
200 (8.0) 193.6 (7.62) 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58) 193.6 (7.62) 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58) 192 (7.56) 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58)
250 (10) 243.7 (9.59) 300 (11.81) 270 (10.63) 243 (9.57) 315 (12.40) 270 (10.63)
300 (12) 294.7 (11.60) 348 (13.70) 321 (12.64) 291.3 (11.47) 360 (14.17) 321 (12.64)
*1: The inner diameter of the process connection code: DD4, DJ1, DJ2 is values in brackets [ ].
Replacement Model for earlier ADMAG or ADMAG AE: Unit : mm (approx. inch) Size of Inner Diameter of Grounding
Ring, Outer Diameter for Effective
PFA/ Polyurethane Rubber
Sealing and Recommended Inner
Wafer Flange Diameter of Gasket:
Outer Recommended Inner Recommended Inner
Inner Outer
Size Diameter Diameter of Gasket Inner Diameter Diameter of Gasket
Diameter of Diameter
for PTFE-sheathed of Grounding PTFE-sheathed
Grounding Flat for Effective Flat
Effective Non-asbestos Ring Non-asbestos
Ring Gasket Sealing Gasket
Sealing Gasket [A] Gasket AXF
[A] [C] [B] [C] B Flowtube
[B] [D] [D] D *2 C A
Lining
2.5 (0.1) 15 (0.59) 38 (1.50) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87)
150 (6.0) 140.7(5.54) 190 (7.48) 167 (6.57) 140.7 (5.54) 205 (8.07) 167 (6.57)
200 (8.0) 188.9(7.44) 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58) 188.9 (7.44) 255 (10.04) 218 (8.58)
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 25
3.3.6 Nomial Diameter 15 mm (0.5 in.) to 4) Tightening clamp
125 mm (5.0 in.), Sanitary Type Install a clamp to cover the tapered parts of the
flowmeter-side adapter and the ferrule, and
The sanitary type can be mounted to the piping using a tighten the clamp screw.
clamp, a union, or a welded joint. 5) Confirmation of adapter mounting screw
After installation of the magnetic flowmeter, be
NOTE sure to retighten the adapter mounting screw
according to Table 3.3.18 or Table 3.3.19.
This section describes the remote flowtube as an Be sure to confirm that leakage from adapter
example. The same procedure also applies to the connection point does not occur by filling the pipe
integral flowmeter. of the flowtube with fluid.
Installation
Gasket
mark on the flowmeter. Ferrule
IMPORTANT
(2) Mounting Procedure
Be sure to weld the sleeve after passing the piping
(a) Clamp type
through the nut.
(process connection codes: HAB, HDB, and HKB)
When welding the sleeve, pay attention to the
1) Welding ferrule
edge preparation, level differences between the
Weld a ferrule to the piping.
sleeve and the piping, and the welding current to
avoid deforming the piping or causing stagnation
IMPORTANT of some of the fluid.
When welding the ferrule, pay attention to the edge 2) Installing gasket
preparation, level differences between the ferrule and Install a gasket for union to fit in the groove on the
the piping, and the welding current to avoid deforming sleeve.
the piping or causing stagnation portion of the fluid. 3) Positioning flowmeter
Move the nut closer to the piping temporarily and
2) Installing gasket position the flowmeter between the two sleeves.
Install a gasket for clamp to fit in the groove on the 4) Tightening nut
ferrule. Install the nut to cover the tapered parts of the
3) Positioning flowmeter flowmeter-side adapter and the sleeve, and
Position the flowmeter between the two ferrules. tighten it using a wrench.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 26
5) Confirmation of adapter mounting screw
After installation of the magnetic flowmeter, be CAUTION
sure to retighten the adapter mounting screw
according to Table 3.3.18 or Table 3.3.19. In case of standard gasket (EPDM rubber), tighten
Be sure to confirm that leakage from adapter the adapter mounting screw according to the
connection point does not occur by filling the pipe torque values in Table 3.3.18.
of the flowtube with fluid. In case that optional code GH (Silicon rubber)
is selected, tighten the adapter mounting screw
according to the torque values in Table 3.3.19.
NOTE Tighten the adapter mounting screw in diagonal
order step by step.
The sleeve, nut, and gasket are not provided with the After tightening of screw, confirm that gaskets
flowmeter, and must be provided by the user. protrude inside adapter. Protruding of gasket is
necessary to keep the sanitary requirements.
F0321.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 27
3.4 Installation of Remote
Converter
WARNING
Installation of the magnetic flowmeter must be 2-inch pipe
IMPORTANT
3.4.3 Mounting of AXFA11
Install the instrument in a location where it is not
AXFA11 Remote Converter can be mounted using surface
exposed to direct sunlight. For ambient temperature,
mounting, 2-inch pipe mounting, or panel mounting.
refer to OUTLINE of the appropriate manual which
can be downloaded from our website.
Surface Mounting (Wall Mounting) 3
The instrument may be used in an ambient humidity
where the RH ranges from 0 to 100%. However, avoid Unit: mm
(approx. inch)
Installation
long-term continuous operation at relative humidity
For surface mounting, use the mounting
above 95%. fixture provided, using M6 screws.
These M6 screws must be provided by the user.
4-6 Hole or
3.4.2 Mounting of AXFA14 M6 Screw
(2.56)
installation site.
65
1. Fix the instrument on the mounting fixture using four
screws.
2. Fix the mounting fixture with the instrument installed 194 (7.64)
on a 2-inch pipe using a U-bolt. F0324.ai
Washer
Mounting fixture
Screw F0322.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<3. Installation> 28
2-inch Pipe Mounting
2-inch pipe
Mounting fixture
Washer
Clamp screw
Panel Mounting
Unit: mm
(approx. inch)
Panel cutout
203 (8.0)
Mounting fixture
172 (6.8)
R3MAX
Washer
Screw
Clamp screw
Fit the AXFA11 into the panel. Then attach the mounting fixture
to the AXFA11 using the screw and the washer, and secure the
instrument with the two clamp screws.
F0326.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 29
4. Wiring
4.1 Wiring the Integral 4.1.1 Wiring Precautions
Flowmeter Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring:
Wiring
watertight using sealing tape.
When waterproof glands or union equipped
waterproof glands are used, avoid tightening the
glands with an excessive torque.
When the power supply voltage is 24V, it comes
with a blanking plug. Use this plug to cover the
unused wiring port when wiring the instrument with
only one, four-core cable.
Be sure to turn the power off before opening the
terminal box cover.
Before turning the power on, tighten the terminal
box cover securely.
The terminal box cover is locked by the special
screw. In case of opening the terminal box cover,
use the hexagonal wrench attached. For handling
the locking screw, refer to Figure 4.1.5.
Be sure to lock the cover by the special screw
using the hexagonal wrench attached after
installing the cover. For handling the locking screw,
refer to Figure 4.1.16.
Explosion protected types must be wired in
accordance with specific requirement (and, in
certain countries, legal regulations) in order to
preserve the effectiveness of their explosion
protected features.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 30
4.1.2 Power Cable/Output Cable (2) When waterproof property is necessary
(Wiring using waterproof glands)
JIS C 3401 control cable equivalent
JIS C 3312 power cable equivalent
14 AWG Belden 8720 equivalent IMPORTANT
Outer Diameter:
With no gland option: To prevent water or condensation from entering the
6.5 to 12 mm (0.26 to 0.47 in.) converter housing, waterproof glands are recommended.
With gland options EG, EU: Do not over-tighten the glands or damage to the cables
10.5 or 11.5 mm (0.41 to 0.45 in.) may result. Tightness of the gland can be checked by
With gland options EP: confirming that the cable is held firmly in place.
6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in.)
Nominal Cross Section: For working on the electric wire tubes or the flexible tubes
Single wire; 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (G1/2), remove the waterproof gland and attach them
Stranded wire; 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 directly to the wiring port.
NOTE
Gasket
For power cables, always use a crimp terminal Waterproof gland
with an insulation cover. Cable F0401.ai
Use crimp tools from the manufacturer of the crimp Figure 4.1.1 Waterproof Gland (Optional code EG)
terminal you want to use to connect the crimp
terminal and cable.
Use crimp tools that are appropriate for the
diameter of the cable to be connected.
Gasket
4.1.3 Wiring Ports for Integral Flowmeter
This instrument is of watertight construction as stipulated
G1/2
in JIS C 0920. It is shipped with a wiring bracket
(waterproof gland or waterproof gland with union) or a Washer
plastic gland attached, only in cases where an optional Tightening gland
specification is selected for the wiring port.
Cable
In case of the explosion proof type, refer to Chapter 10.
When working on conduit pipes or flexible pipes (G1/2 only)
The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not water-proof) that Figure 4.1.3 Plastic Gland (Optional code EP)
must be removed before wiring. At this time, handle the
wiring port in accordance with the JIS C 0920 mentioned
above. Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 31
(3) Conduit Wiring (2) Terminal Configuration
When wiring the conduits, pass the conduit through the When the cover is removed, the connection terminals will
wiring connection port, and utilize the waterproof gland to be visible.
prevent water from flowing in. Place the conduit pipe on
an angle as shown in Figure 4.1.4.
+ L/ + N / -
SUPPLY
POWER
Install a drain valve at the low end of the vertical pipe, and
open the valve regularly.
+-
DO
+-
DIO
-
Drain valve Terminal Label
F0406.ai
(Back side)
F0404.ai
Figure 4.1.4 Conduit Wiring Figure 4.1.6 Terminal Configuration for Integral Flowmeter
Wiring
remove the cover by turning it in the direction of the arrow N/
Power supply
as shown below. L/+
I+
Current output 4 to 20mA DC
I
DO+
Pulse output/Alarm output/ Status output
DO
DIO+
Alarm output/Status output Status input
DIO
1 2
Protective grounding (Outside of the terminal)
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 32
Wiring Procedure for Integral Flowmeter 3) Setting Power Supply Frequency
1. Turn the instruments power off.
2. Wire the power supply cable and the functional IMPORTANT
grounding cable to the power supply terminals.
Functional grounding cable
Set the local commercial power frequency in order to
eliminate the effect of induction noise from the power
+ L/+ N/ -
supply.
SUPPLY
POWER
01E20C02-01E).
+
Power supply
DO
F0407.ai
(5) Grounding
Figure 4.1.7 Electric Cable Wiring for Integral Flowmeter
796 (2610)
Allowable cable
length m(ft)
796 (2610)
796 (2610)
Protective grounding
200 ( 660)
terminals
0
20.4 22 24 26 28.8
Usable range E (V)
Cable cross section area: 1.25 mm2
Cable cross section area: 2 mm2 F0409.ai
F0408.ai
Figure 4.1.9Protective Grounding Terminal Location for
Figure 4.1.8Supply Voltage and Cable Length for Integral Integral Flowmeter
Flowmeter
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 33
(6) Connecting to External Instruments
IMPORTANT
Improper grounding can have an adverse effect on WARNING
the flow measurement. Ensure that the instrument is
properly grounded. Before wiring with external instruments, be sure to turn
off the magnetic flowmeter and any external instruments.
The electromotive force of the magnetic flowmeter
is minute and it is easily affected by noise, and the Connect the AXF integral flowmeter terminal to external
reference electric potential is the same as that of the instruments, giving attention to the following points.
measuring fluid. Therefore, the reference electric For FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, refer to IM 01E20F02-
potential (terminal potential) of the flowtube and converter 01E.
also need to be the same as that of the measuring fluid. For PROFIBUS PA protocol, refer to IM 01E20F12-01E.
Moreover, the potential must be the same as the ground.
The magnetic flowmeter is equipped with an grounding 4 to 20 mA DC Current Output
ring that makes a connection with the charge of the
AXF integral flowmeter
measured fluid for grounding and protects the lining. Be l+
sure to ground the flowmeter according to Figure 4.1.10. Receiver
l- Instrument
600 V vinyl-insulated cable
(2 mm2 or larger) Resistive load max. 750
Communication Resistive load
BRAIN 250 to 450
HART 250 to 600 F0411.ai
Pulse Output
grounding ring 4
IMPORTANT
Wiring
Class D requirements (grounding resistance, 100 or less).
Optional code A (lightning protector): Class C requirements As this is a transistor contact (insulated type), give
(grounding resistance, 10 or less).
TIIS Flameproof type: Class C requirements (grounding resistance, 10 attention to proper voltage and polarity when wiring.
or less) or class A requirements (grounding resistance, 10 or less). Do not apply a voltage larger than 30V DC or
Explosion proof type except TIIS: Domestic electrical requirements as
regulated in each country.
a current larger than 0.2A in order to prevent
damage to the instrument.
When input filter constant of the electronic counter
is large in relation to the pulse width, the signal will
decrease and the count will not be accurate.
If the input impedance of the electronic counter is
large, an induction noise from the power supply
may result in inaccurate counts. Use a shield cable
or sufficiently reduce the input impedance of the
In case grounding rings In case grounding rings are not used. electronic counter within the magnetic flowmeter
are used. (Available only for metal piping)
F0410.ai
pulse output specification range.
Figure 4.1.10 Grounding for Integral Flowmeter The active pulse output (Optional code EM) cannot
be used in conjunction with the standard pulse
output.
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM) is
selected, do not be short-circuit between the DO+
and DO terminals to avoid damaging the instrument.
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM)
is selected, the range of pulse rate must be set to 2
pps maximum.
To avoid communication (BRAIN/ HART) failure, it
is recommended to use the shield cable.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 34
Status Output / Alarm Output
NOTE
For pulse output from the DO terminals, parameters
IMPORTANT
must be set. Refer to Parameter Description in
Since this is an isolated transistor output, be careful
the users manual of the AXF Integral Flowmeter
of voltage and polarity when wiring. Do not apply a
[Software Edition] (IM 01E20C02- 01E).
voltage larger than 30V DC or a current larger than
0.2A in order to prevent damage to the instrument.
AXF integral flowmeter DO+ Protective diode
This output cannot switch an AC load. To switch an AC
PULSE OUT Mechanical Counter load, an intermediate relay must be inserted as shown
DO- in Figure 4.1.15.
1 2
DIO-
NOTE
F0416.ai
For status input to the DIO terminals, parameters must Figure 4.1.16Installing the Terminal Box Cover for Integral
be set. Refer to Parameter Description in the users Flowmeter
manual of the AXF Integral Flowmeter
[Software Edition] (IM 01E20C02-01E).
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 35
4.2 Wiring the Remote Flowtube 4.2.1 Wiring Precautions
This section describes the wiring of the remote flowtube Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring:
only. For information relating to the wiring of the converter,
refer to Section 4.3 or Section 4.4 of this manual. CAUTION
In cases where the ambient temperature exceeds
WARNING 50C (122F), use external heat-resistant wiring
with a maximum allowable temperature of 70C
The wiring of the magnetic flowmeter must be (158F) or above.
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. Do not connect cables outdoors in wet weather in
No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures order to prevent damage from condensation and to
relating to wiring. protect the insulation, e.g. inside the terminal box
of the flowtube.
Do not splice the cable between the flowtube terminal
CAUTION and the converter if it is too short. Replace the short
cable with a cable that is the appropriate length.
Once all wiring is complete, check the connections All the cable ends must be provided with round
before applying power to the instrument. Improper crimp-on terminals and be securely wired.
arrangements or wiring may cause a unit malfunction The signal cables must be routed in separate steel
or damage. conduit tubes 16 (JIS C 8305) or flexible conduit
tubes 15 (JIS C 8309).
Keep conduits or flexible tubes watertight using
sealing tape.
Ground the remote flowtube and the converter
separately. 4
Cover each shield of the signal cable with vinyl
tube or vinyl tape to avoid contact between two
Wiring
shields or between a shield and a case.
When waterproof glands or union equipped
waterproof glands are used, avoid tightening the
glands with an excessive torque.
Be sure to turn the power off before opening the
terminal box cover.
Before turning the power on, tighten the terminal
box cover securely.
The terminal box cover is locked by the special
screw. In case of opening the terminal box cover,
use the hexagonal wrench attached. For handling
the locking screw, refer to Figure 4.2.8.
Be sure to lock the cover by the special screw
using the hexagonal wrench attached after
installing the cover. For handling the locking screw,
refer to Figure 4.2.16.
Explosion protected types must be wired in
accordance with specific requirement (and, in
certain countries, legal regulations) in order to
preserve the effectiveness of their explosion
protected features.
When submersible type or optional code DHC is
selected, waterproof glands, signal and excitation
cables are attached. In order to preserve the
effectiveness of waterproof features, the terminal
box cover and waterproof glands must not be
detached from flowmeter.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 36
IMPORTANT CAUTION
Prepare the signal cable and the excitation cable
As crimp terminals A, B, SA, SB and C have their
almost the same length. It is recommended to lay
own electrical potentials, securely insulate them so
them together closely.
as not to come in contact with one another.
To prevent a shield from coming in contact with
another shield or the case, cover each shield with
4.2.2 Cables
a vinyl tube or wrap it in vinyl tape.
(1) Dedicated Signal Cable (AXFC)
Conductors (A and B)
Shields (SA and SB)
NOTE
Tape
Conductors A and B carry the signal from the
Outer jacket 10.5 (0.413 in.) electrodes, and C is at the potential of the liquid (signal
common). Shields SA and SB are kept at the same
potentials as the individual electrodes (these are
Shield (C)
Insulation actively driven shields). This is done to reduce the
Insulation F0417.ai effect of the distributed capacitance of the cable at
Figure 4.2.1 Dedicated Signal Cable AXFC long cable length.
Note that, since the signals from the individual
The flow signal is transmitted via this dedicated cable. electrodes are impedance converted inside the
The cable is constructed with double shielding over the converter, errors will result if they come in contact with
two conductors, and heat-resistant vinyl is used for the any other component. Great care must be taken in the
outer jacket material. cable end treatment.
Finished diameter: 10.5 mm (0.413 in.)
Maximum length: (2) Excitation Cable
Combination with the AXFA11 converter: 200 m (660 ft)
Combination with the AXFA14 converter: 100 m (330 ft) JIS C 3401 control cable equivalent
Maximum temperature: 80C (176F) JIS C 3312 power cable equivalent
14 AWG Belder 8720 equivalent
Outer Diameter:
IMPORTANT With no gland option:
If the cable is longer than required, cut off any extra 6.5 to 12 mm (0.26 to 0.47 in.)
length rather than coiling it up, and terminate the With gland options EG, EU and EW:
conductors as shown in Figure 4.2.2. 10.5 or 11.5 mm (0.41 to 0.45 in.)
Avoid using junction terminal boards to extend the With gland options EP:
cable length, as this will interrupt the shielding. 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in.)
Nominal Cross Section:
Unit : mm (approx. inch) Single wire; 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
Stranded wire; 0.5 to 1.5 mm2
55 (2.17)
25 (0.98)
Unit : mm
A
(approx. inch)
A
50 (1.97)
SA
SB
Crimp terminal
60 (2.36)
90 (3.54)
90 (3.54)
C
70 (2.76)
EX1
EX2
EX2
EX1
85 (3.35) 85 (3.35)
8 (0.3) max.
8(0.3) max.
1505
1505
(5.9)
(5.9)
On the On the
converter flowtube
side side
On the converter side On the flowtube side
10.5 (0.4)
L (Specified Dimensions)
20 (0.8)
AXFC
F0418.ai
F0419.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 37
NOTE
For excitation cables, always use a crimp terminal Washer
with an insulation cover.
Use crimp tools from the manufacturer of the crimp
terminal you want to use to connect the crimp
terminal and cable. Gasket
Use crimp tools that are appropriate for the Waterproof gland
diameter of the cable to be connected. Cable F0420.ai
IMPORTANT
Washer
The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not waterproof). Tightening gland
Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port.
Cable
If waterproof property is necessary, apply a blanking
plug to the unused wiring port. When working on conduit pipes or flexible pipes (G1/2 only)
4
The blanking plug may not be attached depending on F0421.ai
Wiring
the specification. Figure 4.2.5Waterproof Gland with Union Joint
If it is necessary, contact YOKOGAWA. (Optional code EU)
Drain valve
F0423.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 38
4.2.4 Wiring Connections for Remote (3) Wiring the Remote Flowtube (General-
Flowtube Purpose Use, Submersible Type, Sanitary
Type) with Converters
WARNING 1) Connection with the AXFA11 converter
Connect wiring as shown in the figure below.
Before wiring, be sure that the power supply for
AXFA11 or AXFA14 converter has been turned off to I+ I
CURRENT OUT
SO1+ SO2+ COM
STATUS OUT
AL+ AL
ALARM OUT
C SA A
SIGNAL
B SB
EX2
Excitation cable
C
AXFC dedicated
F0424.ai signal cable SA
Figure 4.2.8Removing the Terminal Box Cover for Remote A
Flowtube
B
(2) Terminal Configuration SB
When the cover is removed, the connection terminals Converter
Remote
flowtube
Terminal SA Taping*
Symbols Description
A A
A A EX2 B B
B Flow signal output B
SB Taping*
C C
C
EX1 EX1
EX1
Excitation current input EX1 EX2 EX2
EX2 C * Individually tape and insulate
Protective grounding Remote flowtube the shields corresponding to
(Outside of the terminal) SA and SB on the remote
flowtube side. F0428.ai
F0425.ai
Figure 4.2.12 Wiring Diagram
Figure 4.2.9Terminal Configuration for Remote Flowtube
(General-Purpose Use, Submersible Type,
Sanitary Type) (4) Wiring the Remote Flowtube (Explosion
Proof Type) with Converters
Terminal
Symbols Description
A
B Flow signal output
IMPORTANT
C
EX1 In case of ATEX, IECEx or TIIS certified AXF remote
Excitation current input
EX2 flowtube , it is only approved to be combined with
Functional grounding
(Only for explosion proof type)
AXFA14 converter.
Protective grounding
(Oitside of the terminal)
F0426.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 39
1) Connection with the AXFA11 converter (5) Grounding
In case of FM or CSA certified AXF remote flowtube,
connect wiring as shown in the figure below.
CAUTION
In case of the explosion proof type, the protective
grounding of remote flowtube must be connected Be sure to connect the protective grounding of the
to a suitable IS grounding system. In that case, AXF remote flowtube with a cable of 2mm2 or larger
(functional grounding terminal) need not be cross section in order to avoid electrical shock to the
connected. operators and maintenance engineers and to prevent
the influence of external noise.
I+ I
CURRENT OUT
SO1+ SO2+ COM
STATUS OUT
AL+ AL
ALARM OUT
C SA A
SIGNAL
B SB Connect the grounding wire to the mark. The
FUSE
AXFA11 converter grounding should satisfy Class D requirements
(grounding resistance, 100 or less). In case of TIIS
2.5A 250V
N/ L/+ EX1 EX2 P+ P SI1+ SI2+ COM
POWER SUPPLY EXCIT ATION PULSE OUT STATUS IN
Wiring
2) Connection with the AXFA14 converter minute and it is easy to be affected by noise. And also that
In case of ATEX, FM, CSA, IECEx or TIIS certified reference electric potential is the same as the measuring
fluid potential. Therefore, the reference electric potential
AXF remote flowtube, connect wiring as shown in the
(terminal potential) of the flowtube and the converter also
figure below.
need to be the same as the measuring fluid. Moreover,
In case of the explosion proof type, the protective that the potential must be the same with ground. The
grounding of remote flowtube must be connected magnetic flowmeter is equipped with a grounding ring that
to a suitable IS grounding system. In that case, makes a connection with the charge of the measured fluid
(functional grounding terminal) need not be for grounding and protects the lining.
connected. Be sure to ground according to Figure 4.2.15.
AXFA14 converter EX1 600 V vinyl insulated
electric cable
EX2 (2 mm2 or larger)
Excitation cable
C
AXFC dedicated
signal cable SA
A
Grounding ring
B
Class D requirements (grounding resistance. 100 or less).
SB
TIIS Flameproof type: Class C requirements (grounding resistance, 10
Converter
Remote or less) or Class A requirements (grounding resistance, 10 or less)
flowtube Explosion proof type except TIIS: Domestic electrical requirements as
SA Taping*
regulated in each country.
A A
A B B
B EX2 SB Taping*
C C
EX1 EX1
EX2 EX2
C EX1
* Individually tape and insulate
Remote flowtube the shields corresponding to
SA and SB on the remote
flowtube side. F0430.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 40
(6) Installing the Cover 4.3.1 Wiring Precaution for AXFA14
Install the cover to the flowtube by turning it in the Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring:
direction of the arrow as shown below. Tighten the
cover locking screw counterclockwise using a hexagonal
wrench (nominal size 3) to lock the cover. CAUTION
In cases where the ambient temperature exceeds
50C (122F), use external heat-resistant wiring
with a maximum allowable temperature of 70C
(158F) or above.
Do not connect cables outdoors in wet weather in
order to prevent damage from condensation and
to protect the insulation.
Do not splice the cable between the flowtube
terminal and the converter if it is too short.
Replace the short cable with a cable that is the
appropriate length.
All the cable ends must be provided with round
F0432.ai crimp-on terminals and be securely wired.
Figure 4.2.16Installing the Terminal Box Cover for Remote The signal cables must be routed in separate steel
Flowtube conduit tubes 16 (JIS C 8305) or flexible conduit
tubes 15 (JIS C 8309).
Always route the power and output signal cables
4.3 Wiring the AXFA14 Remote in separate steel conduit tubes, except when the
power supply voltage is 24 V and four-core cables
Converter are used for wiring. Keep conduits or flexible tubes
This section describes the wiring on the AXFA14 remote watertight using sealing tape.
converter side only. For information relating to wiring on Ground the remote flowtube and the converter
the flowtube side, refer to Section 4.2 of this manual. separately.
Cover each shield of the signal cable with vinyl
tube or vinyl tape to avoid contact between two
WARNING shields or between a shield and a case.
When waterproof glands or union equipped
The wiring of the magnetic flowmeter must be waterproof glands are used, avoid tightening the
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. glands with an excessive torque.
No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures When the power supply voltage is 24V, it comes
relating to wiring. with a blanking plug. Use this plug to cover the
unused wiring port when wiring the instrument with
only one, four-core cable.
Be sure to turn power off before opening the cover.
CAUTION Before turning the power on, tighten the cover
securely.
Once all wiring is complete, check the connections The terminal box cover is locked by the special
before applying power to the instrument. screw. In case of opening the terminal box cover,
Improper arrangements or wiring may cause a unit use the hexagonal wrench attached. For handling
malfunction or damage. the locking screw, refer to Figure 4.3.5.
Be sure to lock the cover by the special screw
using the hexagonal wrench attached after
installing the cover. For handling the locking screw,
refer to Figure 4.3.15.
Explosion protected types must be wired in
accordance with specific requirement (and, in
certain countries, legal regulations) in order to
preserve the effectiveness of their explosion
protected features.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 41
(1) When waterproof property is unnecessary
IMPORTANT (When there are no particular optional
specifications)
Prepare the signal cable and the excitation cable
almost the same length. It is recommended to lay The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not water-proof) that
them together closely. must be removed before wiring. At this time, handle the
wiring port in accordance with the JIS C 0920 mentioned
above. Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port.
4.3.2 Power Cable/Output Cable
(2) When waterproof property is necessary
JIS C 3401 control cable equivalent (Wiring using waterproof glands)
JIS C 3312 power cable equivalent
14 AWG Belden 8720 equivalent IMPORTANT
Outer Diameter:
With no gland option: To prevent water or condensation from entering the
6.5 to 12 mm (0.26 to 0.47 in.) converter housing, waterproof glands are recommended.
With gland options EG, EU: Do not over-tighten the glands or damage to the cables
10.5 or 11.5 mm (0.41 to 0.45 in.) may result. Tightness of the gland can be checked by
With gland options EP: confirming that the cable is held firmly in place.
6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in.)
Nominal Cross Section: For working on the electric wire tubes or the flexible tubes
Single wire; 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (G1/2), remove the waterproof gland and attach them
Stranded wire; 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 directly to the wiring port.
In case of power cable, Green/Yellow covered conductor
shall be used only for connection to PROTECTIVE
CONDUCTOR TERMINALS. Conform to IEC227,
IEC245 or equivalent national authorization. 4
Washer
Wiring
NOTE
For power cables, always use a crimp terminal Gasket
with an insulation cover. Waterproof gland
Use crimp tools from the manufacturer of the crimp Cable F0433.ai
terminal you want to use to connect the crimp Figure 4.3.1 Waterproof Gland (Optional code EG)
terminal and cable.
Use crimp tools that are appropriate for the
diameter of the cable to be connected.
Gasket
4.3.3 Wiring Ports for AXFA14
This instrument is of watertight construction as stipulated
G1/2
in JIS C 0920. It is shipped with a wiring bracket
Washer
(waterproof gland or waterproof gland with union) or a
Tightening gland
plastic gland attached, only in cases where an optional
specification is selected for the wiring port. Cable
In case of the explosion proof type, refer to Chapter 10. When working on conduit pipes or
flexible pipes (G1/2 only) F0434.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 42
(3) Conduit Wiring (2) Terminal Configuration
When wiring the conduits, pass the conduit through the When the cover is removed, the connection terminals will
wiring connection port, and utilize the waterproof gland to be visible. The terminal configuration labels are attached
prevent water from flowing in. Place the conduit pipe on in the locations shown in Figure 4.3.6.
an angle as shown in Figure 4.3.4.
Install a drain valve at the low end of the vertical pipe, and
open the valve regularly.
Drain valve
F0436.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 43
2) Required Power Supply Voltages
WARNING
Ensure that the power supply is OFF in order to
IMPORTANT
prevent electric shocks.
When using a 24 V power supply, the specification
Ensure the protective grounding terminal is
for the supply voltage is 24 V (15% to +20%),
grounded before turning the power on.
but the input voltage of the converter drops due to
Use insulating sleeve crimp terminals (for 4-mm
cable resistance therefore it must be used within the
screws) for the power supply wiring and protective
following ranges.
grounding wiring.
Install an external switch or circuit breaker as a
0
20.4 22 24 26 28.8
Wiring Procedure for AXFA14 Usable range E (V)
Cable cross section area: 1.25 mm2
1. Turn the instruments power off.
Cable cross section area: 2 mm2 F0440.ai
2. Wire the power supply cable and the functional
Figure 4.3.8Supply Voltage and Cable Length for AXFA14
grounding cable to the power supply terminals. Remote Converter
Functional grounding cable
Wiring
Power supply
cable
Set the local commercial power frequency in order to
F0439.ai eliminate the effect of induction noise from the power
Figure 4.3.7Electric Cable Wiring for AXFA14 Remote supply.
Converter
Refer to Parameter Description in the users manual
of the AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote
(4) DC Power Connection Converter [Hardware Edition/ Software Edition] (IM
01E20C02-01E).
When using DC power as the power supply for the Parameter No.: J30 and J31
converter, give attention to the following points.
IMPORTANT CAUTION
Do not connect power supply with reversed polarities. Be sure to connect the protective grounding of the
L/+ terminal: connect + AXFA14 Remote Converter with a cable of 2mm2 or
N/ terminal: connect larger cross section in order to avoid electrical shock
to the operators and maintenance engineers and to
prevent the influence of external noise.
IMPORTANT Connect the grounding wire to the mark.
The grounding should satisfy Class D requirements
Do not connect power supply with 100 to 240 V (grounding resistance, 100 or less).
AC or 100 to 120 V DC in the case of a 24 V power In case of TIIS Flameproof type, the grounding should
supply version (power supply code 2). satisfy Class C requirements (grounding resistance,
It will give a damage to the converter. 10 or less) or class A requirements (grounding
resistance, 10 or less).
For explosion proof type except TIIS, follow the
domestic electrical requirements as regulated in each
country.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 44
Pulse Output
IMPORTANT
When optional code A (lightning protector) is selected, IMPORTANT
the ground should satisfy Class C requirements
As this is a transistor contact (insulated type),
(grounding resistance, 10 or less).
give attention to proper voltage and polarity when
wiring.
The protective grounding terminals are located on Do not apply a voltage larger than 30V DC or
the inside and outside of the terminal area. a current larger than 0.2A in order to prevent
Either terminal may be used. damage to the instrument.
Use 600 V vinyl insulation wires as the grounding When input filter constant of the electronic counter
wires. is large in relation to the pulse width, the signal will
decrease and the count will not be accurate.
If the input impedance of the electronic counter is
large, an induction noise from the power supply
may result in inaccurate counts. Use a shield cable
or sufficiently reduce the input impedance of the
electronic counter within the magnetic flowmeter
pulse output specification range.
The active pulse output (Optional code EM) cannot
be used in conjunction with the standard pulse
output.
Protective grounding terminals
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM)
F0441.ai
is selected, do not be short-circuit between the
Figure 4.3.9Protective Grounding Terminal Location for
AXFA14 Remote Converter DO+ and DO terminals to avoid damaging the
instrument.
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM)
(6) Connecting to External Instruments is selected, the range of pulse rate must be set to 2
pps maximum.
WARNING To avoid communication (BRAIN/ HART) failure, it
is recommended to use the shield cable.
Before wiring with external instruments, be sure to turn
off the power supply for AXFA14 Remote Converter
and any external instruments. NOTE
For pulse output from the DO terminals, parameters
Connect the AXFA14 Remote Converter terminal to must be set. Refer to Parameter Description in the
external instruments, giving attention to the following users manual of the AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter
points. Remote Converter [Hardware Edition/ Software
For FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, refer to IM 01E20F02- Edition] (IM 01E20C02-01E).
01E.
For PROFIBUS PA protocol, refer to IM 01E20F12-01E.
Protective diode
4 to 20 mA DC Current Output AXFA14 DO+
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 45
*The alarm output operates from open (normal) to closed
AXFA14 Protective diode
DO+ (alarm occurrence) by factory default setting. Changes
Mechanical Counter can be made via the parameter settings.
PULSE OUT DO-
IMPORTANT NOTE
For status and alarm outputs from the DO or
Status inputs are designed for use with no-voltage
DIO terminals, parameters must be set. Refer to
(dry) contacts. Be careful not to connect the status to
Parameter Description in the users manual of the
any signal source carrying voltage.
AXFA14G/C Magnetic Flowmeter Remote Converter
Applying voltage may damage the input circuit.
[Hardware Edition/ Software Edition] (IM 01E20C02-
01E). 4
Closed: Less than 200
Open: More than 100 k
Wiring
AXFA14
DIO+ (7) Installing the Cover
Install the cover to the AXFA14 Remote Converter by
turning it in the direction of the arrow as shown below.
DIO-
Tighten cover locking screw 2 counterclockwise using a
hexagonal wrench (nominal size 3) to lock the cover.
No-voltage status input
F0445.ai
NOTE 1 2
F0447.ai
IMPORTANT
Since this is an isolated transistor output, be careful of
voltage and polarity when wiring.
Do not apply a voltage larger than 30V DC or a current
larger than 0.2A in order to prevent damage to the
instrument.
This output cannot switch an AC load. To switch an AC
load, an intermediate relay must be inserted as shown
in Figure 4.3.14.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 46
4.4 Wiring the AXFA11 Remote
Converter CAUTION
This section describes the wiring of the AXFA11 Remote In cases where the ambient temperature exceeds
Converter side only. For information relating to wiring on 50C (122F), use external heat-resistant wiring
the flowtube side, refer to Section 4.2 of this manual. with a maximum allowable temperature of 70C
(158F) or above.
Do not connect cables outdoors in wet weather in
WARNING order to prevent damage from condensation and
to protect the insulation.
The wiring of the magnetic flowmeter must be Do not splice the cable between the flowtube
performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. terminal and the converter if it is too short.
No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures Replace the short cable with a cable that is the
relating to wiring. appropriate length.
All the cable ends must be provided with round
crimp-on terminals and be securely wired.
The signal cables must be routed in separate steel
CAUTION conduit tubes 16 (JIS C 8305) or flexible conduit
tubes 15 (JIS C 8309).
Once all wiring is complete, check the connections Always route the power and output signal cables
before applying power to the instrument. in separate steel conduit tubes, except when the
Improper arrangements or wiring may cause a unit power supply voltage is 24 V and four-core cables
malfunction or damage. are used for wiring. Keep conduits or flexible tubes
watertight using sealing tape.
Ground the remote flowtube and the converter
4.4.1 Wiring Precaution for AXFA11 separately.
Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring: Cover each shield of the signal cable with vinyl
tube or vinyl tape to avoid contact between two
shields or between a shield and a case.
When waterproof glands or union equipped
waterproof glands are used, avoid tightening the
glands with an excessive torque.
Be sure to turn power off before opening the cover.
Before turning the power on, tighten the cover
securely.
IMPORTANT
Prepare the signal cable and the excitation cable
almost the same length. It is recommended to lay
them together closely.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 47
In case of power cable, Green/Yellow covered conductor For working on the electric wire tubes or the flexible tubes
shall be used only for connection to PROTECTIVE (G1/2), remove the waterproof gland and attach them
CONDUCTOR TERMINALS. Conform to IEC227, directly to the wiring port.
IEC245 or equivalent national authorization.
NOTE
Washer
For power cables, always use a crimp terminal
with an insulation cover.
Use crimp tools from the manufacturer of the crimp
terminal you want to use to connect the crimp
terminal and cable. Gasket
Waterproof gland
Use crimp tools that are appropriate for the
Cable F0448.ai
diameter of the cable to be connected.
Figure 4.4.1 Waterproof Gland (Optional code EG)
IMPORTANT Gasket 4
Tightening gland
The wiring port is sealed with a cap (not waterproof).
Wiring
Cable
Do not remove the cap from the unused wiring port. When working on conduit pipes or flexible pipes (G1/2 only)
If waterproof property is necessary, apply a blanking F0449.ai
plug to the unused wiring port. Figure 4.4.2Waterproof Gland with Union Joint
(Optional code EU)
The blanking plug may not be attached depending
on the specification. If it is necessary, contact
YOKOGAWA.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 48
(3) Conduit Wiring
When wiring the conduits, pass the conduit through the
wiring connection port, and utilize the waterproof gland to
prevent water from flowing in. Place the conduit pipe on
an angle as shown in Figure 4.4.5.
Install a drain valve at the low end of the vertical pipe, and
open the valve regularly.
Drain valve
N/ L/+ EX1 EX2 P+ P SI1+ SI2+ COM
F0452.ai POWER SUPPLY EXCITATION PULSE OUT STATUS IN
AL+
ALARM OUT Alarm output
AL-
SO1+
STATUS OUT SO2+ Status output (Two output)
COM
F0453.ai I+
CURRENT OUT Current output 4 to 20mA DC
I-
Figure 4.4.6Removing the Front Cover for AXFA11
Remote Converter Sl1+
STATUS IN Sl2+ Status input (Two input)
COM
(2) Terminal Configuration P+
PULSE OUT Pulse output
P-
When the cover is removed, the connection terminals
will be visible as shown in Figure 4.4.7. The terminal EX1
EXCITATION Excitation current output
EX2
configuration labels are attached in the position shown in
L /+
Figure 4.4.8. The description of the terminal symbols is POWER SUPPLY Power supply
N/-
shown in Table 4.4.1.
Functional grounding
IMPORTANT
Do not wire the terminal without terminal symbols in
I+ I SO1+ SO2+ COM AL+ AL C SA A B SB
terminal layout labels.
N/ L/+ EX1 EX2 P+ P SI1+ SI2+ COM
F0454.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 49
(3) Precautions for Wiring of Power Supply (4) DC Power Connection
Cables When using DC power as the power supply for the
When connecting to the power supply, observe the points converter, give attention to the following points.
below. Failure to comply with these warnings may result
in an electric shock or damage to the instrument. 1) Connecting Power Supply
WARNING IMPORTANT
Ensure that the power supply is OFF in order to Do not connect power supply with reversed polarities.
prevent electric shocks. L/+ terminal: connect +
Ensure the protective grounding terminal is N/ terminal: connect
grounded before turning the power on.
Use insulating sleeve crimp terminals (for 4-mm
screws) for the power supply wiring and protective IMPORTANT
grounding wiring.
To prevent electric shocks, ensure the electrical Do not connect power supply with 100 to 240 V
wiring cover (transparent) is attached. AC or 100 to 120 V DC in the case of a 24 V power
Install an external switch or circuit breaker as a supply version (power supply code 2).
means to turn the power off (capacitance; 15A, It will give a damage to the converter.
conforming to IEC60947-1 and IEC60947-3).
Locate this switch either near the instrument or
in other places facilitating easy operation. Affix a 2) Required Power Supply Voltages
Power Off Equipment label to this external switch
or circuit breaker. IMPORTANT
When using a 24 V power supply, the specification 4
for the supply voltage is 24 V (15% to +20%),
Wiring Procedure for AXFA11
but the input voltage of the converter drops due to
Wiring
1. Turn the instruments power off, and remove the cable resistance therefore it must be used within the
wiring cover (transparent). following ranges.
2. Wire the power supply cable and the functional
grounding cable to the power supply terminals.
Allowable cable length m(ft)
796 (2610)
600 (1970)
I+ I SO1+ SO2+ COM AL+ AL C SA A B SB
CUR OUT STATUS OUT ALARM OUT SIGNAL
446 (1460)
N/ L/+ EX1 EX2 P+ P SI1+ SI2+ COM
POWER SUPPLY EXCITATION PULSE OUT STATUS IN
200 ( 660)
Functional Power supply cable
0
grounding cable 20.4 22 24 26 28.8
Usable range E (V)
Cable cross section area: 1.25 mm2
Cable cross section area: 2 mm2 F0457.ai
F0456.ai
Figure 4.4.10Supply Voltage and Cable Length for AXFA11
Figure 4.4.9Electric Cable Wiring for AXFA11 Remote
Remote Converter
Converter
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 50
(5) Grounding (6) Connecting to External Instruments
CAUTION WARNING
Be sure to connect the protective grounding of the Before wiring with external instrument, be sure to turn
AXFA11 with a cable of 2mm2 or larger cross section off the power supply for AXFA11 converter and any
in order to avoid electrical shock to the operators and external instruments.
maintenance engineers and to prevent the influence
of external noise. Connect the grounding wire to the Connect the AXFA11 terminal to external instruments,
mark (100 or less). giving attention to the following points.
Pulse Output
IMPORTANT
As this is a transistor contact (insulated type),
give attention to proper voltage and polarity when
wiring.
Do not apply a voltage larger than 30V DC or
a current larger than 0.2A in order to prevent
damage to the instrument.
When input filter constant of the electronic counter
is large in relation to the pulse width, the signal will
decrease and the count will not be accurate.
If the input impedance of the electronic counter is
large, an induction noise from the power supply
may result in inaccurate counts. Use a shield
Protective grounding terminals F0458.ai cable or sufficiently reduce the input impedance of
Figure 4.4.11Protective Grounding Terminal Location for the electronic counter within the electromagnetic
AXFA11 Remote Converter flowmeter pulse output specification range.
The active pulse output (Optional code EM) cannot
be used in conjunction with the standard pulse
output.
When the active pulse output (Optional code
EM) is selected, do not be short-circuit between
the P+ and P terminals to avoid damaging the
instrument.
When the active pulse output (Optional code EM)
is selected, the range of pulse rate must be set to 2
pps maximum.
To avoid communication (BRAIN/ HART) failure, it
is recommended to use the shield cable.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<4. Wiring> 51
Status Output / Alarm Output
Protective diode
AXFA11 P+
Wiring
AXFA11
SO1+ Relay
Status Input Protective
Electromagnetic
diode valve
Load
AL-
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 52
NOTE
Always use the setting switches with the cover
closed.
Use these switches with them covered by the
glass window.
If dirt, dust or other substances surfaces on the
display panel glass, wipe them clean with a soft
dry cloth.
The operation with dirty gloves may cause a switch
response error.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 53
(3) Display items
: Display, : Not display
Displayed items and reversed-character Disp Select2
Content Disp Select1
indication Disp Select3
Instantaneous flow rate: % FR Displays the instantaneous flow rate for the span as a percentage.
Actual instantaneous flow rate FR Displays the actual reading for instantaneous flow rate.
Instantaneous flow rate: mA FR Displays the instantaneous flow rate for the span as a current output value.
Displays the instantaneous flow rate for the span as a percentage using bar
Bar graph indicating instantaneous flow rate None
graph.
Totalized forward-direction flow rate FTL Displays the totalized value for flow rate in the forward direction.
Totalized reverse-direction flow rate RTL Displays the totalized value for flow rate in the reverse direction.
Displays the differential totalized value for flow rate between forward
Totalized differential flow rate DTL
totalization and reverse totalization.
Tag number TAG Display the tag number (using up to 16 characters).
Displays the adhesion condition in the form of a bar graph. (See the
Diagnosis of electrode adhesion ADH description for parameters K10 through K15 from Chapter 8: Parameter
Description for more details.)
Communication type COM Displays the communication type.
+ +
Select No
Setting modes
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 54
5.3.1 Display Mode Setting Mode
NOTE
Display Mode will be adopted when the power is turned
on, and the Setting Mode can be activated using the
When the operations except and switches
following procedure.
are carried out, the system will automatically return to
1st line: Actual instantaneous
the Display Mode.
flow rate [FR]
When no operations in this display are carried out for
2nd line: Bar graph indicating
20 seconds, the system will automatically return to the
100.000 instantaneous flow rate
Display Mode.
0
3rd line: Totalized forward flow
rate [FTL]
Hold the switch for 2 In order to request confirmation,
seconds. Then, this display is the entire display flashes on
F0507.ai
F0504.ai
NOTE
When no operations in the flashed display are carried
NOTE out for 20 seconds, the system will automatically
return to the Display Mode.
When other operations are carried out, the system
When the operations except switch are carried
will automatically return to the Display Mode.
out, the system will automatically return to the Display
When no operations in this display are carried
Mode.
out for 20 seconds, the system will automatically
return to the Display Mode.
The Major Item Parameter which is set just before The system enters Setting Mode.
will be shown when entering the Setting Mode Parameters to be set can be
again within 1 minute after returning from Setting selected.
Mode to Display Mode.
F0505.ai
When the Setting Mode has been activated using the
procedure from Section 5.3.1, parameters can be
When [Yes] has been selected,
selected for setting.
touch the switch.
Setting Mode
NOTE
No
Yes If no operations are carried out for a period of 10
minutes in Setting Mode, the system will automatically
return to the Display Mode.
F0506.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 55
Format for Parameter Data Major item Sub-item Parameter
B:Easy Setup
Depending on the type of parameter, data is formatted in 50:Auto Zero Exe Search Mode has been
Sub-item
one of the following three ways. 10:Language
parameter accessed
20:Flow Damping
in this screen.
Format Typical display Content 2 Touch the switch
F0513.ai
to move the cursor to
The desired data item is B21: Base Flow Unit.
(i) Selection-
selected from a predefined
type
list. Major item B:Easy Setup The cursor has been
F0509.ai
20:Flow Damping moved to B21: Base
Sub-item
21:Base Flow Unit
Data is set using the values selection (A)
22:Base Time Unit Flow
(ii) Numeric-
in each digit and using the Unit in this screen. (Sub-
type
decimal point.
item selection screen (A))
F0510.ai
F0514.ai
Data is composed using
C10:Tag No alphanumeric characters
Sub-item B21:Base Flow Unit In this screen, Parameter
FI-1101 (in the case of tag numbers, m3
(iii) Alphanumeric- Current unit setting Replacement Mode has
FI-1201 special units, and the like). m3
type Available selections kl(Kiloliter)
With this format, setting can been called up using the
F0511.ai be carried out using up to
switch.
16 characters shown below. F0515.ai
F0518.ai
NOTE
The and symbols to the left of the parameters
indicate that additional setting items to those being
currently displayed may also be selected. Use the
switch to cycle through these items.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 56
5.4.2 Setting Example for Numeric-Type Modify the value to 120 l/
Data: Flow rate span min as follows:
This example describes the setting of the flow rate span Touch the switch
for the numeric-type parameter B23: Flow Span from to move the cursor to
100 l/min to 120 l/min. the position for multiples
Now, the system is in the Setting Mode. Parameters to be of 10. Then, touch the
set can be selected. switch to change
Setting mode Setting Mode Touch the switch the value at this position
P:Protect
Major item
B:Easy Setup to access B: Easy F0524.ai from 0 to 2.
parameter
C:Basic Setup Setup. When the value of 120
F0519.ai
has been setup, touch
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 57
NOTE IMPORTANT
Communication signal is superimposed on analog
B23:Flow Span
100 l/min output signal. It is recommended to set a low-pass
Incorrect setting: 1200000 l/min filter (approximately 0.1s) to the receiver in order
Rng:0.00001 32000
to reduce the output effect from communication
Out of range. signal. Before online-communication, confirm that
Touch any key.
communication signal does not give effect on the
upper system.
F0528.ai
Magnetic flowmeter
terminal box Receiving
resistance
250 to 450
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<5. Basic Operating Procedures> 58
5.5.2 Connecting the HART Configuration
Tool NOTE
The HART Configuration Tool can interface with the Before updating any setting, remember to always
magnetic flowmeter from the control room, the magnetic check the data content you want to change as
flowmeter site, or any other wiring termination point in the described in Chapter 8.
loop, provided there is a minimum load resistance of 250 For details, refer to Parameter Description of the
between the connection and the receiving instrument. appropriate manual which can be downloaded from
To communicate, it must be connected in parallel with the our website.
magnetic flowmeter, and the connections must be non-
polarized. Figure 5.5.2 illustrates the wiring connections
for a direct interface at the magnetic flowmeter site. The
HART Configuration Tool can be used for remote access
NOTE
from any terminal strip as well. In case of HART Configuration, the parameters are
4 to 20mA DC Control room
shignal displayed in English only.
transmission line Terminal Receiving
instrument
Relaying terminals board Even if the language with the exception of English is
selected at Language setting display, the parameters
Magnetic flowmeter USB are displayed in English upon HART Configuration
terminal box FieldMate Receiving Tool.
modem resistance
250 to 450
USB
PC/FieldMate
F0530.ai
WARNING
Be sure to set parameters as "Protect" on the write
protect function after finish of parameter setting work.
Under extremely rare case, the infra-red switches may
respond unexpectedly in such conditions as sticking
ball of water or extraneous substances on the surface
of display panel glass according to the principle of
infra-red switch operation.
Its probability rises in such cases as sticking rain water
by storm or other similar situation and washing up
work near flowmeter installation place.
Either to illuminate or stop illuminating the infra-red
switches by the flashlight may cause the mis-reaction.
For details, refer to Parameter Description of the
appropriate manual which can be downloaded from
our website.
IMPORTANT
Restrictions exist with regard to the distance over
which communication is possible.
Refer to OUTLINE of the appropriate manual
which can be downloaded from our website.
If the power of magnetic flowmeter is turned off
within 30 seconds after parameters have been set,
these settings will be canceled. Accordingly, keep
the power on for at least 30 seconds after setting
parameters.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<6. Operation> 59
Sub-item
M:Adjustment
accurate flow signal from its terminals as soon as flow of Replacement Mode.
Zero adjustment is carried out to ensure that the output Touch the switch
for zero flow is 0% (i.e., 4 mA). Although adjustment to to select the Execution.
zero is performed at the manufacturing plant prior to
shipment, this procedure must be carried out once again
following the installation of piping in order to match the F0604.ai
magnetic flowmeter to its operating conditions.
In order to request
This section describes the zero adjustment procedure
confirmation, the entire
using display unit switches from the converter. Also, it
display flashes on and
can be operated using the BT200 Handheld Terminal.
Accordingly, one of these methods should be selected off. Touch the
Operation
the flashing state, the system will automatically return
Zero adjustment should only be carried out when to the Sub-item Parameter Search Mode.
the flowtube has been filled with measurement
When the operations except switch are carried
fluid and the fluid velocity is completely zero by
out, the parameter cannot be set.
closing the valve.
Each time that the fluid being measured is
Auto zero adjustment
changed, it will be necessary for zero adjustment
Now Auto Zero function is being
to be carried out for the new fluid. Executing...
executed
F0606.ai (about 30 seconds).
Major item use the switch to The results of M10: Auto Zero Exe can be displayed
parameter
move the cursor to M: using M11: Magflow Zero. Alternatively, if the
Adjustment. results of the automatic zero adjustment exceed the
rated value, the warning 82: Auto Zero Wng will be
Touch the switch
F0601.ai displayed.
to access Sub-item
Parameter Search Mode.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<6. Operation> 60
6.3 Write Protect Switch (3) Set the switches. There are two switches (See Figure
6.3.2). One is for burnout setting and the other for
By setting the write protect function to Protect it is write protect setting, located adjacent to each other.
possible to prevent the overwriting of parameters. (4) Taking care not to entangle the cables, install the
Write protection can be carried out using either the cover to the flowmeter by turning it in the backward
hardware switch on the CPU board (i.e., Switch 2) (See direction of the arrow as shown Figure 6.3.1.
Figure 6.3.2) or software parameter settings. If either (5) Tighten cover locking screw 1 counterclockwise
of these items is set to Protect, the overwriting of using a hexagonal wrench (nominal size 3) to lock the
parameters will be prohibited. cover.
Low High
NOTE
Switch 1 2 Burnout setting switch
If the hardware switch is set to Protect, it will not Switch 2 1 Write protect setting switch
be possible to overwrite parameters; furthermore, Enable Protect
this condition will be maintained until the switch is
set to Enable.
In the case of fieldbus communication type, setting
of the hardware switch (Enable or Protect) is
ineffective and write protection can be carried out
only by software parameter settings.
NOTE
6.3.1 Setting Hardware Switch of Integral
Magnetic Flowmeter or AXFA14 Re- On the amplifiers CPU board, the burnout setting
mote Converter switch (i.e., Switch 1) and the write protect switch
(i.e., Switch 2) are located adjacent to each other.
IMPORTANT Accordingly, special care should be taken when
making switch settings.
To preserve the safety, do not touch the electrical
circuit and the cables except the setting switches.
6.3.2 Setting Hardware Switch of AXFA11
(1) Turn off the power. Remote Converter
(2) Loosen cover locking screw 1 clockwise using a
hexagonal wrench (nominal size 3) to unlock the IMPORTANT
cover. (Upon shipment from the manufacturing
plant, the cover is locked.) Hold the flowmeter with To preserve the safety, do not touch the electrical
your hand and remove the cover by turning it in the circuit and the cables except the setting switches.
direction of the arrow as shown below.
(1) Turn off the power.
(2) While supporting the front of the cover with your hand,
flip the connecting screw protective cover over, and
remove the four connecting screws.
(3) Loosen the amplifier assemblys two screws while
1 2
supporting it with your hand (See Figure 6.3.3).
Cover locking
screws
F0608.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<6. Operation> 61
Display unit mounting
screws (x2)
F0610.ai
Low High
Operation
Converter
(5) Set the switches. There are two switches (See Figure
6.3.4). One is for burnout setting and the other for
write protect setting, located adjacent to each other.
(6) Taking care not to entangle the cables, install the
display unit with two mounting screws.
(7) Install the cover.
NOTE
On the amplifiers CPU board, the burnout setting
switch (i.e., Switch 1) and the write protect switch
(i.e., Switch 2) are located adjacent to each other.
Accordingly, special care should be taken when
making switch settings.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<7. Errors and Countermeasures for Display unit and BRAIN protocol> 62
The table below shows a summary of error messages for Display unit and BRAIN protocols. Note: :Alphabet
System Alarms (Device breakdown or inability to obtain correct measurements.)
Alarm countermeasure message
Display unit/BRAIN (60) content Alarm description Countermeasure
on display unit
10:uP Fault Contact nearest office or service Microprocessor (CPU) failure Contact your nearest Yokogawa office
center or service center.
11:EEPROM Fault Contact nearest office or service EEPROM failure
center
12:A/D(H) Fault Contact nearest office or service A/D converter failure
center
13:A/D(L) Fault Contact nearest office or service
center
14:A/D(Z) Fault Contact nearest office or service
center
15:Coil Open Cut the power and check coil & EX Flowtube coil is open-circuit Turn off the AXFA11 or the AXFA14
cable power supply and examine the
excitation cable for breakage. If there
is no breakage, contact your nearest
Yokogawa office or service center.
16:EEPROM Dflt Contact nearest office or service EEPROM default values Contact your nearest Yokogawa office
center or service center.
Process Alarms (Device is normal but process-related errors make correct measurement impossible.)
Alarm countermeasure message
Display unit/BRAIN (60) content Alarm description Countermeasure
on display unit
30:Sig Overflow Check signal cable and grounding Input signal error Carry out an investigation as follows:
C h e c k t h e s i g n a l c a b l e f o r
breakage.
Check for contact between signal
cable, power cable, and excitation
cable.
Check for stray currents in the
fluid.
Check the grounding.
31:Empty Pipe Fill flow tube with fluid Flowtube is not filled with fluid Fill the flowtube with fluid.
32:HH/LL Alm Check flow rate and setting value Flow rate alarm for greater than High- Check the flow rate and setting value
High limit value or less than Low-Low of High High limit and Low Low limit.
limit value.
33:Adhesion Alm Clean electrodes Electrode adhesion alarm Clean the electrodes.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<7. Errors and Countermeasures for Display unit and BRAIN protocol> 63
Setting Alarms (Device is normal but errors have been made in the setting of parameters.)
Alarm countermeasure message
Display unit/BRAIN (60) content Alarm description Countermeasure
on display unit
50:Span > 10m/s Check parameter C40, C41, and C42 Span flow velocity setting is 11 m/s or Check whether parameters C40, C41,
more and C42 are correct. In case that
multiple range or forward and reverse
51:Span < 0.1m/s Check parameter C40, C41, and C42 Span flow velocity setting is 0.05 m/s flow measurement functions is used,
or less check whether parameters F30
through F34 {F36} are correct.
52:TTL>10000p/s Check parameter D10 and D11 Totalization rate is 11000 pps or more Check whether parameters D10 and
53:TTL<0.0001p/s Check parameter D10 and D11 Totalization rate is 0.00005 pps or less D11 are correct.
54:4-20 Lmt Err Check parameter J11and J12 The condition [4-20 low limit (J11) < Check whether parameters J11 and
4-20 high limit (J12)] is not satisfied. J12 are correct.
55:Multi Rng Err Check parameter F30 to F34 {F36} The condition [No. 1 range < No. 2 Check whether parameters F30
range < No. 3 range < No. 4 range] is through F34 {F36} are correct.
not satisfied for multiple ranges.
56:H/L HH/LL Set Check parameter G10 to G14 The condition [High Alarm (G11) Low Check whether parameters G10
Alarm (G10) > H/L Alarm Hys (G14)] through G14 are correct.
or the condition [High High Alarm
(G13) Low Low Alarm (G12)
> H/L Alarm Hys (G14)] is not satisfied.
57:Dens Set Err Check parameter C40, C45, and C46 Mass units have been selected for Check whether parameters C40, C45,
Base Flow Unit (C40) but density is and C46 are correct.
set to 0.
60:PLS > 10000p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 11000 pps or more with Check whether parameters E10, E11,
50% duty selection. and E12 are correct.
Pulse rate is 10000 pps or more with
0.05 ms selection.
61:PLS > 5000p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 5000 pps or more with 0.1
ms selection.
62:PLS > 1000p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 1000 pps or more with 0.5
ms selection.
63:PLS > 500p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 500 pps or more with 1
ms selection.
64:PLS > 25p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 25 pps or more with 20
ms selection.
65:PLS > 15p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 15 pps or more with 33
ms selection.
66:PLS > 10p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 10 pps or more with 50
ms selection.
67:PLS > 5p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 5 pps or more with 100
ms selection.
70:PLS<0.0001p/s Check parameter E10, E11, and E12 Pulse rate is 0.00005 pps or less. 7
71:Meas Mod Set Check parameter C20 Measure Mode (C20) is set to Check whether parameter C20 is
Enhanced DF without selecting an correct.
Note: In case of the AXFA11 Remote Converter, parameter number is values in brackets { }.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 64
8. Parameter Summary
NOTE IMPORTANT
For FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, refer to IM Make sure to keep the instruments power on at least
01E20F02-01E. For PROFIBUS PA protocol, refer to for 30 seconds after you set the parameters.
IM 01E20F12-01E. For HART protocol, refer to the If you turn the power off immediately after the
applicable users manuals which can be downloaded parameters are set, the settings will be canceled.
from our website.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 65
Parameter No.
R/W (*3) Data (*4)
(BRAIN protocol)
Device setup Detailed Setup Function Set Status Function SO1 Function (*1) W F10 u/d
PV SO2 Function (*1) W F11 u/d
PV AO SI1 Function (*1) W F12 u/d
PV Span SI2 Function (*1) W F13 u/d
SO1/2 Active Mode (*1) W F14 u/d
SI1/2 Active Mode (*1) W F15 u/d
DO Function (*2) W F20 u/d
DIO Function (*2) W F21 u/d
DO Active Mode (*2) W F22 u/d
DIO Active Mode (*2) W F23 u/d
Forward Span2 W F30 u/d
Forward Span3 W F31 u/d
Forward Span4 W F32 u/d
Reverse Span1 W F33 u/d
Reverse Span2 W F34 u/d
Reverse Span3 (*1) W F35 u/d
Reverse Span4 (*1) W F36 u/d
Auto Range Hys W F40 u/d
Bi Direction Hys W F41 u/d
Alarm Low Alarm W G10 u/d
High Alarm W G11 u/d
Low Low Alarm W G12 u/d
High High Alarm W G13 u/d
H/L Alarm Hys W G14 u/d
Alm Out Act Mode (*1) W G20 u/d
4-20 Alarm Out W G21 u/d
4-20 Burn Out R G22 -
Alm-Setting W G30 u/d
Alm-Sig Over W G31 u/d
Alm-Emp Pipe W G32 u/d
Alm-HH/LL W G33 u/d
Alm-Adhesion W G34 u/d
Alm Record Operation Time R G40 P
Alm Record1 R G41 P
Alm Record Time1 R G42 P
Alm Record2 R G43 P
Alm Record Time2 R G44 P
Alm Record3 R G45 P
Alm Record Time3 R G46 P
Alm Record4 R G47 P
Alm Record Time4 R G48 P
Display Set Display Select1 W H10/B40 u/d
Display Select2 W H11/B41 u/d
Display Select3 W H12/B42 u/d
Display Cycle W H20 u/d
Language W H30/B10 u/d
Aux 4-20mA Low Cut W J10 u/d
4-20mA Low Lmt W J11 u/d
4-20mA High Lmt W J12 u/d
Flow Direction W J20 u/d
Rate Limit W J21 -
Dead Time W J22 -
Pulsing Flow W J23 -
T/P Damp Select W J24 -
Power Synch W J30 -
Power Frequency R/W J31 P
Memo 1 W J40 -
Memo 2 W J41 -
Memo 3 W J42 -
Software Rev No R J50 -
HART output Poll addr W - -
Num req preams R - -
Burst mode
Burst option PV
W
W
-
-
-
- 8
% range/current W - -
Process vars/crnt W - -
Parameter Summary
Device info Field device info Manufacturer R - -
Tag W - u/d
Descriptor W - u/d
Message W - u/d
Date W - u/d
Dev id R - -
Write protect R - P
Revision #s Universal rev R - -
Fld dev rev R - -
Software rev R - -
Model specific Use W - -
Lining W - -
Electrode Material W - -
Electrode Struct W - -
Grounding Ring W - -
Process Connect W - -
Lay Length W - -
Electrical Conn W - -
Sensor Serial No W - -
Review Review1 R - -
Review2 R - -
Review3 R - -
Review4 R - -
Hot key PV Span W B23/C42 u/d
Wrt Protect Menu Write protect R P20 P
Enable Wrt 10min W P21 -
New Password W P22 -
Software Seal R P23 -
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 66
Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Review 4
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 67
8.2 Parameter List (BRAIN)
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
A00 Display
(DISPLAY)
A10 FR R -110.0 to 110.0 % 1 For Display Mode only
(FLOW RATE (%))
A20 FR R -999999 to 999999 B21/B22 0 to 3 For Display Mode only
(FLOW RATE) (C40/C41)
A21 FR R 2.400 to 21.600 mA 3 For Display Mode only
(FLW RATE (mA))
A30 FTL R 0 to 99999999 B30 0 to 7 For Display Mode only
(TOTAL) (D10)
A31 RTL R 0 to 99999999 B30 0 to 7 For Display Mode only
(REV TOTAL) (D10)
A32 DTL R -99999999 B30 0 to 7 For Display Mode only
(DIF TOTAL) to 99999999 (D10)
A60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
B00 Easy Setup
(EASY SETUP)
B10 Language W English English Selects the language used for the
(LANGUAGE) Japanese display unit. Linked with H30.
French
German
Italian
Spanish
B20 Flow Damping W 0.1 to 200.0 s 1 3.0 s Sets damping time. Linked with C11.
(FLOW DAMPING)
B21 Base Flow Unit W Ml(Megaliter) m (*) Selects flow units for the flow rate span.
(FLOW UNIT) m3 Linked with C40.
kl (Kiloliter)
l (Liter)
cm3
m
t
kg
g
kcf
cf
mcf
Mgal (US)
kgal (US)
gal (US)
mgal (US)
kbbl (US Oil)
bbl (US Oil)
mbbl (US Oil)
ubbl (US Oil)
8
kbbl (US Beer)
bbl (US Beer)
Parameter Summary
mbbl (US Beer)
ubbl (US Beer)
ft
klb (US)
lb (US)
B22 Base Time Unit W /d /s (*) Selects time units for the flow rate span.
(TIME UNIT) /h Linked with C41.
/min
/s
B23 Flow Span W 0.0001 to 32000 B21/B22 0 to 4 1 m/s (*) Sets flow rate span (with units from B21
(FLOW SPAN) (C40/C41) and B22). Linked with C42.
B24 Flow Decimal Pnt W Auto Auto (*) Selects decimal point position for the
(FLOW DECIMAL) 0 display unit's instantaneous flow rate.
1 Linked with C43.
2
3
B30 Total Unit W n Unit/P Pulse/s (*) Selects the flow rate unit per one pulse
(TOTAL UNIT) u Unit/P as used for totalization display. Linked
m Unit/P with D10.
Unit/P
k Unit/P
M Unit/P
Pulse/s
B31 Total Scale W 0 to 32000 B30 0 to 4 0 (*) Sets the flow rate per one pulse for the
(TOTAL SCALE) (D10) totalization display.Linked with D11.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 68
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
B32 Pulse Unit W n Unit/P Pulse/s (*) Selects the flow rate unit per one pulse
(PULSE UNIT) u Unit/P as used for pulse output. Linked with
m Unit/P E10.
Unit/P
k Unit/P
M Unit/P
Pulse/s
B33 Pulse Scale W 0 to 32000 B32 0 to 4 0 (*) Sets the flow rate per one pulse as used
(PULSE SCALE) (E10) for pulse output. Linked with E11.
B40 Display Select1 W Flow Rate(%) Flow Rate Selects content of the first line for
(DISP SELECT1) Flow Rate Display Mode. Linked with H10.
Flow Rate(mA)
Forward Total
Reverse Total
Dif Total
B41 Display Select2 W Off Off Selects content of the second line for
(DISP SELECT2) Flow Rate(%) Display Mode. Linked with H11.
Flow Rate
Flow Rate(mA)
Flow Rate(Bar)
Forward Total
Reverse Total
Dif Total
Tag No
Adhesion Check
Communication
B42 Display Select3 W Same as B41 Off Selects content of the third line for
(DISP SELECT3) (Display Select2) Display Mode. Linked with H12.
B50 Auto Zero Exe W No Execution No Execution Selects whether or not automatic zero
(AUTOZERO EXE) Execution adjustment is carried out. Linked with
M10.
B60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
C00 Basic Setup
(BASIC SETUP)
C10 Tag No W ASCII 16 characters Sets Tag number up to 16 characters.
(TAG NO)
C11 Flow Damping W 0.1 to 200.0 s 1 3.0 s Sets damping time. Linked with B20.
(FLOW DAMPING)
C20 Measure Mode W Standard DF Standard DF Selects measurement mode for dual
(MEASURE MODE) Enhanced DF frequency excitation
C21 Low MF W 0.0100 to 3.0000 4 1.0000 (*) Sets low-frequency meter factor for
(LOW MF) standard dual frequency excitation
C22 High MF W 0.0100 to 3.0000 4 1.0000 (*) Sets high-frequency meter factor for
(HIGH MF) standard dual frequency excitation
C23 Low MF(EDF) W 0.0000 to 3.0000 4 1.0000 (*) Sets low-frequency meter factor for
(LOW MF(EDF)) enhanced dual frequency excitation
C24 High MF(EDF) W 0.0000 to 3.0000 4 1.0000 (*) Sets high-frequency meter factor for
(HIGH MF(EDF)) enhanced dual frequency excitation
C30 Select Flow Tube W ADMAG AXF ADMAG AXF Selects the flowtube's model name.
(*1) (FLOW TUBE) ADMAG Note: Select ADMAG AXF for ADMAG
ADMAG AE AXW flowtube.
ADMAG SE
YEWMAG
Calibrator
Other
C31 Nominal Size Unit W mm mm Selects the nominal size units for the
(SIZE UNIT) inch inch flowtube.
C32 Nominal Size W 0.99 to 3000.1 mm 0 to 2 100 (*) Sets flowtube nominal size in selected
(NOMINAL SIZE) 0.01 to 120.1 inch unit at C31.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 69
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
C40 Base Flow Unit W Ml(Megaliter) m (*) Selects flow units for the flow rate span.
(FLOW UNIT) m3 Linked with B21.
kl(Kiloliter)
l(Liter)
cm3
m
t
kg
g
kcf
cf
mcf
Mgal (US)
kgal (US)
gal (US)
mgal (US)
kbbl (US Oil)
bbl (US Oil)
mbbl (US Oil)
ubbl (US Oil)
kbbl (US Beer)
bbl (US Beer)
mbbl (US Beer)
ubbl (US Beer)
ft
klb (US)
lb (US)
C41 Base Time Unit W /d /s (*) Selects time units for the flow rate span.
(TIME UNIT) /h Linked with B22.
/min
/s
C42 Flow Span W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 m/s (*) Sets flow rate span (with units from C40
(FLOW SPAN) (B21/B22) and C41). Linked with B23.
C43 Flow Decimal Pnt W Auto Auto (*) Selects decimal point position for the
(FLOW DECIMAL) 0 display unit's instantaneous flow rate.
1 Linked with B24.
2
3
C44 Velocity Check R 0.000 to 99.999 m/s 3 Display of the span setting using flow
(VELOCITY CHK) velocity (m/s).
3 3
C45 Density Unit W kg/m kg/m Sets units for density when mass flow
(DENSITY UNIT) lb/gal rate is selected.
lb/cf
C46 Mass Flow Density W 0 to 32000 C45 0 to 4 0 Sets density when mass flow rate is
(MASS DENSITY) selected (with units from C45).
C47 User Span Select W No No Selects whether or not special units are
(USER SPN SEL) Yes used for flow rate units.
C48 Flow User Unit
(FL USER UNIT)
W 8 alphanumeric
characters
ALL SPACE Sets the special flow rate units. 8
C49 Flow User Span W 0.0001 to 32000 C48 0 to 4 100 Sets span when using special flow rate
Parameter Summary
(FL USER SPAN) units.
C60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
D00 Total Set
(TOTAL SET)
D10 Total Unit W n Unit/P Pulse/s (*) Selects the flow rate unit per one pulse
(TOTAL UNIT) u Unit/P as used for totalization display. Linked
m Unit/P with B30.
Unit/P
k Unit/P
M Unit/P
Pulse/s
D11 Total Scale W 0 to 32000 D10 0 to 4 0 (*) Sets the flow rate per one pulse for the
(TOTAL SCALE) (B30) totalization display.Linked with B31.
D12 Total Decimal Pnt W 0 0 Selects position of decimal point for
(TL DECIMAL) 1 totalization display
2
3
4
5
6
7
D13 Total Low Cut W 0 to 100 % 0 3% Sets the range in vicinity of 0% within
(TOTAL LOWCUT) which the totalization display will be
halted.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 70
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
D20 Total Execution W Start Start E xe cu te s Sta rt o r Sto p o f th e
(TOTAL EXEC) Stop totalization function, or executes Preset
Preset Total Total or Preset Rev Total.
Preset Rev Total
D21 Ttl Set Val Lower W 0 to 999999 0 0 Sets the totalization preset value in the
(TL SET VAL L) lower 6 digits of the 8-digit totalized
value.
D22 Ttl Set Val Upper W 0 to 99 0 0 Sets the totalization preset value in the
(TL SET VAL U) upper 2 digits of the 8-digit totalized
value.
D23 Ttl Switch Lower W 0 to 999999 0 0 Sets the totalization switch value in the
(TL SWITCH LO) lower 6 digits of the 8-digit totalized
value.
D24 Ttl Switch Upper W 0 to 99 0 0 Sets the totalization switch value in the
(TL SWITCH UP) upper 2 digits of the 8- digits totalized
value.
D30 Ttl User Select W No No Selects whether or not special units are
(TL USER SEL) Yes used as totalized units.
D31 Ttl User Unit W 8 alphanumeric ALL SPACE Sets the special totalized units.
(TL USER UNIT) characters
D60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
E00 Pulse Set
(PULSE SET)
E10 Pulse Unit W n Unit/P Pulse/s (*) Selects the flow rate unit per one pulse
(PULSE UNIT) u Unit/P as used for pulse output. Linked with
m Unit/P B32.
Unit/P
k Unit/P
M Unit/P
Pulse/s
E11 Pulse Scale W 0 to 32000 E10 0 to 4 0 (*) Sets the flow rate per one pulse as used
(PULSE SCALE) (B32) for pulse output. Linked with B33.
E12 Pulse Width W 50% Duty 50% Duty Selects the pulse width for pulse output.
(PULSE WIDTH) 0.05 ms
0.1 ms
0.5 ms
1 ms
20 ms
33 ms
50 ms
100 ms
E13 Pulse Low Cut W 0 to 100 % 0 3% Sets the range in vicinity of 0% within
(PULSE LOWCUT) which pulse output will be halted.
E20 Pulse Active Mode W Closed(On) Act Closed(On) Act Selects whether pulse output will be set
(*1) (PLS ACT MODE) Open(Off) Act to On Active or Off Active.
E60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
F00 Status Function
(STATUS FUNC)
F10 SO1 Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the SO1 terminal
(*1) (SO1 FUNCTION) Warning Output
Total Switch
H/L Alarm
HH/LL Alarm
Fwd/Rev Ranges
Auto 2 Ranges
Auto 3 Ranges
Auto 4 Ranges
Ext 2 Answer
Ext 3 Answer
Ext 4 Answer
F11 SO2 Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the SO2 terminal
(*1) (SO2 FUNCTION) Warning Output
Total Switch
H/L Alarm
HH/LL Alarm
Fwd/Rev Ranges
Auto 2 Ranges
Auto 3 Ranges
Auto 4 Ranges
Ext 2 Answer
Ext 3 Answer
Ext 4 Answer
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 71
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
F12 SI1 Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the SI1 terminal
(*1) (SI1 FUNCTION) 0% Singal Lock
Ext Auto Zero
Ext Ttl Preset
Ext Rev Ttl Set
Ext 2 Ranges
Ext 3 Ranges
Ext 4 Ranges
F13 SI2 Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the SI2 terminal
(*1) (SI2 FUNCTION) 0% Singal Lock
Ext Auto Zero
Ext Ttl Preset
Ext Rev Ttl Set
Ext 2 Ranges
Ext 3 Ranges
Ext 4 Ranges
F14 SO1/2 Active Mode W Closed(On) Act Closed(On) Act Selects whether SO1/SO2 output will be
(*1) (SO ACT MODE) Open(Off) Act set to On Active or Off Active.
F15 SI1/2 Active Mode W Short Active Short Active Selects whether SI1/SI2 input will be set
(*1) (SI ACT MODE) Open Active to Short Active or Open Active.
F20 DO Function W No Function Pulse Output Selects function for the DO terminal
(*2) (DO FUNCTION) Pulse Output
Alarm Output
Warning Output
Total Switch (O)
H/L Alarm (O)
HH/LL Alarm (O)
Fwd/Rev Rngs (O)
Auto 2 Rngs (O)
Auto 3 Rngs (O)
Auto 4 Rngs (O)
Ext 2 Answer (O)
F21 DIO Function W No Function No Function Selects function for the DIO terminal
(*2) (DIO FUNCTION) Alarm Output
Warning Output
Total Switch (O)
H/L Alarm (O)
HH/LL Alarm (O)
Fwd/Rev Rngs (O)
Auto 2 Rngs (O)
Auto 3 Rngs (O)
Auto 4 Rngs (O)
Ext 2 Answer (O)
0% Singal Lock (I)
Ext Auto Zero (I)
Ext Ttl Set (I)
Ext R Ttl Set (I)
Ext 2 Ttl Set (I)
F22 DO Active Mode W Closed(On) Act Closed(On) Act Selects whether DO terminal will be set 8
(*2) (DO ACT MODE) Open(Off) Act to On Active or Off Active.
F23 DIO Active Mode W Closed/Short Act Closed/Short Act Selects whether DIO terminal will be set
Parameter Summary
(*2) (DIO ACT MODE) Open/Open Act to Closed/Short Active orOpen/Open
Active.
F30 Forward Span2 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for forward No. 2
(FWD SPAN2) range
F31 Forward Span3 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for forward No. 3
(FWD SPAN3) range
F32 Forward Span4 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for forward No. 4
(FWD SPAN4) range
F33 Reverse Span1 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for reverse No. 1
(REV SPAN1) range
F34 Reverse Span2 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for reverse No. 2
(REV SPAN2) range
F35 Reverse Span3 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for reverse No. 3
(*1) (REV SPAN3) range
F36 Reverse Span4 W 0.0001 to 32000 C40/C41 0 to 4 1 Sets flow rate span for reverse No. 4
(*1) (REV SPAN4) range
F40 Auto Range Hys W 0 to 15 % 0 10 % Sets hysteresis width for automatic
(AUTO RNG HYS) range switching
F41 Bi Direction Hys W 0 to 8 % 0 2% Sets hysteresis width for forward/
(BI DIREC HYS) reverse switching
F60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 72
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
G00 Alarm
(ALARM)
G10 Low Alarm W -110 to 110 % 0 -110 % Sets level setting value for low flow rate
(LOW ALARM) limit (L)
G11 High Alarm W -110 to 110 % 0 110 % Sets level setting value for high flow rate
(HIGH ALARM) limit (H)
G12 Low Low Alarm W -110 to 110 % 0 -110 % Sets level setting value for low- low flow
(LO LO ALARM) rate limit (LL)
G13 High High Alarm W -110 to 110 % 0 110 % Sets level setting value for high- high
(HI HI ALARM) flow rate limit (HH)
G14 H/L Alarm Hys W 0 to 10 % 0 5% Sets hysteresis width for high-low flow
(H/L ALM HYS) rate limit alarm
G20 Alm Out Act Mode W Closed(On) Act Open(Off) Selects whether alarm output will be set
(*1) (ALM OUT ACT) Open(Off) Act Act to On Active or Off Active.
G21 4-20mA Alarm Out W 2.4mA or Less 21.6mA or More Selects the current output during alarm
(4-20 ALM OUT) 4.0mA occurrence.
Hold
21.6mA or More
G22 4-20mA Burn Out R High Low Displays the current output during a
(4-20 BURNOUT) CPU failure.
G30 Alm-Setting W No Yes Selects whether a setting alarm is to be
(ALM-SETTING) Yes specified as an alarm.
G31 Alm-Sig Over W No Yes Selects whether a signal overflow alarm
(ALM-SIG OVER) Yes is to be specified as an alarm.
G32 Alm-Emp Pipe W No Yes Selects whether an empty pipe alarm is
(ALM-EMP PIPE) Yes to be specified as an alarm.
G33 Alm-HH/LL W No No Selects whether a flow rate high-high or
(ALM-HH/LL) Yes low-low alarm is to be specified as an
alarm.
G34 Alm-Adhesion W No No Selects whether an electrode adhesion
(ALM-ADHESION) Yes alarm is to be specified as an alarm.
G40 Operation Time R 0D 00:00 to Operation time
(OPERATE TIME) 99999D 23:59
G41 Alm Record1 R 10:uP Fault Displays the content of the most recent
(ALM RECORD1) 11:EEPROM Fault alarm.
12:A/D(H) Fault
13:A/D(L) Fault
14:A/D(Z) Fault
15:Coil Open
16:EEPROM Dflt
18:Power Off
19:Inst Pwr Fail
28:WDT
30:Sig Overflow
31:Empty Pipe
33:Adhesion Alm
G42 Alm Record Time1 R 0D 00:00 to Displays the operation time at the
(ALM TIME 1) 99999D 23:59 occurrence of the most recent alarm.
G43 Alm Record2 R Same as G41 Displays the content of the second most
(ALM RECORD2) (Alm Record 1) recent alarm.
G44 Alm Record Time2 R 0D 00:00 to Displays the operation time at
(ALM TIME 2) 99999D 23:59 occurrence of the second most recent
alarm.
G45 Alm Record3 R Same as G41 Displays the content of the third most
(ALM RECORD3) (Alm Record 1) recent alarm.
G46 Alm Record Time3 R 0D 00:00 to Displays the operation time at the
(ALM TIME 3) 99999D 23:59 occurrence of the third most recent
alarm.
G47 Alm Record4 R Same as G41 Displays the content of the fourth most
(ALM RECORD4) (Alm Record 1) recent alarm.
G48 Alm Record Time4 R 0D 00:00 to Displays the operation time at the
(ALM TIME 4) 99999D 23:59 occurrence of the fourth most recent
alarm.
G60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
H00 Display Set
(DISP SET)
H10 Display Select1 W Flow Rate(%) Flow Rate Selects content of the first line for
(DISP SELECT1) Flow Rate Display Mode. Linked with B40.
Flow Rate(mA)
Forward Total
Reverse Total
Dif Total
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 73
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
H11 Display Select2 W Off Off Selects content of the second line for
(DISP SELECT2) Flow Rate(%) Display Mode. Linked with B41.
Flow Rate
Flow Rate(mA)
Flow Rate(Bar)
Forward Total
Reverse Total
Dif Total
Tag No
Adhesion Check
Communication
H12 Display Select3 W Same as H11 Off Selects content of the third line for
(DISP SELECT3) (Display Select2) Display Mode. Linked with B42.
H20 Display Cycle W 200ms 400ms Selects the display cycle.
(DISP CYCLE) 400ms
1s
2s
4s
8s
H30 Language W English English Selects the language used by the
(LANGUAGE) Japanese display unit. Linked with B10.
French
German
Italian
Spanish
H60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
J00 Aux
(AUX)
J10 4-20mA Low Cut W 0 to 10 % 0 0% Sets the range in vicinity of 0% within
(4-20 LOW CUT) which the current output will be 4 mA
J11 4-20mA Low Lmt W -20.0 to 100.0 % 1 -20.0 % Sets the low limit for current output
(4-20 LOW LMT)
J12 4-20mA High Lmt W 0.0 to 120.0 % 1 120.0 % Sets the high limit for current output
(4-20 HI LMT)
J20 Flow Direction W Forward Forward Selects the flow direction.
(FLOW DIRECT) Reverse
J21 Rate Limit W 0 to 10 % 0 5% Sets the level to reduce output
(RATE LIMIT) fluctuation.
J22 Dead Time W 0 to 15 s 0 0s Sets the dead time to reduce output
(DEAD TIME) fluctuation. When 0 is set, rate limit
function is not available.
J23 Pulsing Flow W No No Selects whether pulsing flow is to be
(PULSING FLOW) Yes supported.
J24 T/P Damp Select W Damping Damping Selects whether the flow rate value
(T/P DAMP SEL) No Damping obtained through damping calculation
for total/pulse or the instantaneous flow
rate value (no damping) for total/pulse is
8
to be used.
Parameter Summary
J30 Power Synch W No Yes Selects whether or not the internal
(POWER SYNCH) Yes frequency is to be synchronized with the
power supply frequency.
J31 Power Frequency R/W 47.00 to 63.00 Hz 2 50.00 Displays the power-supply frequency
(POWER FREQ) (for Power Synch = Yes), or sets the
power-supply frequency (for Power
Synch=No).
J40 Memo 1 W ASCII 16 characters ALL SPACE Memo field
(MEMO 1)
J41 Memo 2 W ASCII 16 characters ALL SPACE Memo field
(MEMO 2)
J42 Memo 3 W ASCII 16 characters ALL SPACE Memo field
(MEMO 3)
J50 Software Rev No R Software revision number
(SOFTWARE REV)
J60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
K00 Diagnosis
(DIAGNOSIS)
K10 Adhesion Check W No No Selects whether or not to perform
(ADHESION CHK) Yes diagnosis of adhesion to the electrode.
K11 Adhesion Level1 W 0.00 to 100.00 M 2 0.10 Sets the resistance value for adhesion
(ADH LEVEL1) Level 1 to the electorode.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<8. Parameter Summary> 74
Name R/W Data range Position of Default value (*):
Item Units Description
Display unit (BRAIN) (*3) Display unit/BRAIN decimal point Indicated item
K12 Adhesion Level2 W 0.00 to 100.00 M 2 0.50 Sets the resistance value for adhesion
(ADH LEVEL2) Level 2 to the electorode.
K13 Adhesion Level3 W 0.00 to 100.00 M 2 1.00 Sets the resistance value for adhesion
(ADH LEVEL3) Level 3 to the electorode.
K14 Adhesion Level4 W 0.00 to 100.00 M 2 3.00 Sets the resistance value for adhesion
(ADH LEVEL4) Level 4 to the electorode.
K15 Adh Measure Value R M 2 Displays the resistance value for
(ADH MEAS VAL) adhesion to the electrode.
K60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
M00 Adjustment
(ADJUSTMENT)
M10 Auto Zero Exe W No Execution No Execution Selects whether or not automatic zero
(AUTOZERO EXE) Execution adjustment is carried out. Linked with
B50.
M11 Magflow Zero R/W -99.999 to 99.999 3 0.000 Displays the result of the automatic zero
(MAGFLOW ZERO) adjustment, or sets the zero point.
M60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
N00 Test
(TEST)
N10 Test Mode W Normal Normal Selects whether mode will be set to
(TEST MODE) Test Normal or Test.
N11 Test Output Value W -10 to 110 % 0 0% Sets the test output value.
(TEST OUT VAL)
N20 Test SO1 W Open(Off) Open(Off) Selects the test condition for SO1
(*1) (TEST SO1) Closed(On) terminal.
N21 Test SO2 W Open(Off) Open(Off) Selects the test condition for SO2
(*1) (TEST SO2) Closed(On) terminal.
N22 Test Alarm Out W Open(Off) Closed(On) Selects the test condition for alarm
(*1) (TEST ALM OUT) Closed(On) output terminal.
N23 Test SI1 R Open Displays the test condition for SI1
(*1) (TEST SI1) Short terminal.
N24 Test SI2 R Open Displays the test condition for SI2
(*1) (TEST SI2) Short terminal.
N30 Test DO W Open(Off) Open(Off) Selects the test condition for DO
(*2) (TEST DO) Closed(On) terminal.
Pulse
N31 Test DIO (O) W Input Mode Input Mode Selects the test condition for DIO
(*2) (TEST DIO (O)) Open(Off) terminal used for output.
Closed(On)
N32 Test DIO (I) R Open Displays the test condition for DIO
(*2) (TEST DIO (I)) Short terminal used for input.
N60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
P00 Protect
(PROTECT)
P10 Key Code W 0 to 9999 0 Parameter of the display restriction
(KEY CODE)
P20 Write Protect R No No Displays whether or not overwriting of
(W PROTECT) Yes parameter data is prohibited.
P21 Enable Wrt Passwd W ASCII 8 characters Sets the correct password so that write
(ENABLE WRITE) protection function will be released.
P22 New Password W ASCII 8 characters Sets the password for write protection
(NEW PASSWORD) funcion
P23 Software Seal R Break Keep Displays whether or not a Joker
(SOFT SEAL) Keep password was used (Break).
P60 R Good See Chapter 7.
(SELF CHECK) Error
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<9. Approvals> 75
9. Approvals
This chapter describes further requirements and notices Sanitary Type
concerning the approval. The description in this chapter is DN PS PS DN CATEGORY
MODEL
prior to other description in this Users Manual. (mm) (*1) (MPa) (*1) (MPa mm) (*2) (*4)
Sound Engineering
AXF015H 15 1 15
Practice (SEP) (*3)
(1) PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) Sound Engineering
AXF025H 25 1 25
(AXF Integral Flowmeter), Practice (SEP) (*3)
AXF032H 32 1 32 I
(AXF Remote Flowtube) AXF040H 40 1 40 I
AXF050H 50 1 50 I
AXF065H 65 1 65 I
Technical Data AXF080H 80 1 80 I
AXF100H 100 1 100 I
Module: H AXF125H 125 1 125 II
Type of Equipment: Piping *1: PS: Maximum allowable pressure for Flowtube
Type of Fluid: Liquids and gas DN: Nominal size
Group of Fluid: 1 and 2 (*4) *2: For details, refer to the following.
Table 6 covered by ANNEX II of Directive 97/23/EC
General-purpose Use / Submersible Type / Explosion Proof (until July 18th, 2016)
Type Table 6 covered by ANNEX II of Directive 2014/68/EU
DN PS PS DN CATEGORY (from July 19th, 2016)
MODEL *3: Article 3, paragraph 3 of Directive 97/23/EC
(mm) (*1) (MPa) (*1) (MPa mm) (*2) (*4)
AXF002G Sound Engineering (until July 18th, 2016)
2.5 4 10
AXF002C Practice (SEP) (*3) Article 4, paragraph 3 of Directive 2014/68/EU
AXF005G
5 4 20
Sound Engineering (from July 19th, 2016)
AXF005C Practice (SEP) (*3) *4: Models classified in categories I or II shall not be used for
AXF010G Sound Engineering unstable gases of Group 1.
10 4 40
AXF010C Practice (SEP) (*3)
AXF015G Sound Engineering Installation
AXF015C 15 4 60
AXF015W Practice (SEP) (*3)
AXF025G Sound Engineering
AXF025C
AXF025W
25 4 100
Practice (SEP) (*3) WARNING
AXF032G
AXF032C 32 4 128 II Tighten the bolts of the piping joints according to
AXF032W
AXF040G the prescribed torque values.
AXF040C 40 4 160 II Take measures to protect the flowmeters from
AXF040W
AXF050G
forces caused by vibration channeled through the
AXF050C 50 4 200 II piping.
AXF050W
AXF065G
AXF065C 65 2 130 II Operation
AXF065W
AXF080G
AXF080C
AXF080W
80 2 160 II
WARNING
AXF100G
AXF100C
AXF100W
100 2 200 II
The instrument should be operated with the 9
AXF125G temperature and pressure of the fluid under
Approvals
AXF125C 125 2 250 II normal operating conditions.
AXF125W
AXF150G The ambient temperature should be that of normal
AXF150C 150 2 300 II operating conditions.
AXF150W
AXF200G Take measures to prevent excessive pressure
AXF200C 200 2 400 III such as water hammer, etc. To avoid water
AXF200W
AXF250G hammer prevent the pressure from exceeding the
AXF250C 250 2 500 III PS (maximum allowable pressure) by setting the
AXF250W
AXF300G systems safety valves, etc. appropriately.
AXF300C 300 2 600 III Should external fire occur, take safety measures at
AXF300W
AXF350G
the device itself or system-wide prevent it having
AXF350C 350 1 350 II an effect on the flowmeters.
AXF350W Avoid using fluids exceeding the corrosion proof
AXF400G
AXF400C 400 1 400 III limitations of the lining and electrodes.
AXF400W Take measures not to abrade the metal pipe, and
avoid abrading the lining by using fluids such as
slurry and sand are contained.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<9. Approvals> 76
(2) Safety Requirement Standards
EN61010-1
EN61010-2-030
Altitude at installation site: Max. 2000 m above sea level
Installation category (Overvoltage category): II
Pollution degree: 2
Indoor/Outdoor use
CAUTION
This instrument is a class A product, and it is designed
for use in the industrial environment.
Please use this instrument in the industrial
environment only.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 77
NOTE
NOTE
For ATEX explosion proof type specification, refer to
When describing the model name like AXFC in IM 01E20A01-11EN.
this manual, means any of the following.
002, 005, 010, 015, 025, 032, 040, 050, 065, 080, 100,
125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
10.2 FM
(1) Technical Data
WARNING
(AXF Integral Flowmeter), (AXF Remote Flowtube)
Magnetic flowmeters with the model name Applicable Standard:
AXFC magnetic flowmeter and AXFA14C FM3600, FM3610, FM3615,
remote converter are products which have been FM3810, ANSI/NEMA 250
certified as explosion proof type instruments. Strict (AXF Integral Flowmeter)
limitations are applied to the structures, installation Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
locations, external wiring work, maintenance and D.
repairs, etc. of these instruments. Sufficient care must Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division1, Groups E, F
be taken, as any violation of the limitations may cause & G.
dangerous situations. Intrinsically safe (electrodes) for Class I, Division 1,
Be sure to read this chapter before handling the Groups A, B, C & D.
instruments. SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES
For explosion proof type instrument, the description in WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
this chapter is prior to other description in this users Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
manual. Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc
For ATEX or IECEx explosion proof type, be sure to Excitation Circuit: 140V max
read IM 01E20A01-11EN. Enclosure: NEMA 4X
For TIIS explosion proof type, be sure to read Temperature Code: T6
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS Note: Temperature Code T5 to T3 included in the scope of
FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT at the end of application and its approval
this manual. Refer to following table;
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process
Code Temperature Temperature
T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
WARNING T4
T3
+120C (+248F)
+130C (+266F)
40C (40F)
40C (40F)
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 78
(AXF Remote Flowtube) (2) Electrical Connection
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
The type of electrical connection is stamped near the
D.
electrical connection port according to the following
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division1, Groups E, F
codes.
& G.
(AXF Integral Flowmeter)
Intrinsically safe (electrodes) for Class I, Division 1,
Screw Size Marking
Groups A, B, C & D. ISO M20x1.5 female M
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES ANSI 1/2NPT female N
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
Excitation Circuit: 170V max
Enclosure: NEMA 4X
Temperature Code: T6
Note: Temperature Code T5 to T3 included in the scope of
application and its approval (AXF Remote Flowtube)
Refer to following table; Screw Size Marking
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process ISO M20x1.5 female M
Code Temperature Temperature ANSI 1/2NPT female N
T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F)
T3 +150C (+302F) 40C (40F)
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
(AXFA14 Remote Converter)
F1009.ai
Applicable Standard:
FM3600, FM3615, FM3810, ANSI/NEMA 250 (AXFA14 Remote Converter)
Screw Size Marking
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
ISO M20x1.5 female M
D. ANSI 1/2NPT female N
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F
& G.
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc
Excitation Circuit: 140V max
F1010.ai
Enclosure: NEMA 4X
Temperature Code: T6
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 79
(3) Installation (5) Maintenance and Repair
WARNING WARNING
All wiring shall comply with National Electrical The instrument modification or parts replacement
Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and Local Electrical Code. by other than authorized representative of
In hazardous locations, wiring to be in conduit as Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and
shown in Figure 10.2 will void the approval of Factory Mutual Research
When installed in Division 2, SEALS NOT Corporation.
REQUIRED In case the electrodes and/or grounding rings are
In case the electrodes and/or grounding rings are made of titanium, the flowtube should be kept
made of titanium, the flowtube should be kept away from impacts and frictions in hazardous
away from impacts and frictions in hazardous locations.
locations.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Conduit Sealing Fitting
Magnetic Flowmeter
(4) Operation
WARNING
OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING
COVERS.
SEALS ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES in
hazardous locations.
When installed in Division 2, SEALS NOT
REQUIRED
Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
hazardous locations.
In case the electrodes and/or grounding rings are
made of titanium, the flowtube should be kept 10
away from impacts and frictions in hazardous
Explosion Protected Type Instrument
locations.
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 80
10.3 CSA Temperature Code:
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process
Code Temperature Temperature
(1) Technical Data T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F)
(AXF Integral Flowmeter), (AXF Remote Flowtube) T3 +130C (+266F) 40C (40F)
Applicable Standard: Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
For CSA C22.2 Series;
(AXF Remote Flowtube)
C22.2 No 0, C22.2 No 0.4, C22.2 No 0.5,
For CSA C22.2 Series
C22.2 No 25, C22.2 No 30, C22.2 No 94,
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
C22.2 No 157, C22.2 No.61010-1-12,
D.
C22.2 No.61010-2-030-12
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F
For CSA E79 Series;
& G.
CAN/CSA-E79-0, CAN/CSA-E79-1,
Intrinsically safe (electrodes) for Class I, Division 1,
CAN/CSA-E79-7, CAN/CSA-E79-11,
Groups A, B, C & D.
CAN/CSA-E79-18
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 50 cm OF THE
Certificate: 1481213
ENCLOSURE
Process Sealing Certification:
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
Dual Seal certified by CSA to the requirements of
Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
ANSI/ISA 12.27.01.
Excitation Circuit: 170V max
No additional sealing required.
Enclosure: Type 4X
Primary seal failure annunciation;
Temperature Code:
Deterioration of the flowrate output at nonzero
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process
flow point. Code Temperature Temperature
Unstable flowrate output at zero flow point. T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F)
(AXF Integral Flowmeter) T3 +150C (+302F) 40C (40F)
For CSA C22. 2 Series
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
D. For CSA E79 Series
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F Flameproof for Zone 1, Ex dme [ia] IIC T6...T3
& G. Intrinsically safe (electrodes), Ex ia IIC T6...T3
Intrinsically safe (electrodes) for Class I, Division 1, Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
Groups A, B, C & D. Excitation Circuit: 170V max
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 50 cm OF THE Enclosure: IP66, IP67
ENCLOSURE Temperature Code:
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process
Code Temperature Temperature
Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F)
Excitation Circuit: 140V max T3 +150C (+302F) 40C (40F)
Enclosure: Type 4X Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
Temperature Code:
Temperature Maximum Process Minimum Process (AXFA14 Remote Converter)
Code Temperature Temperature Applicable Standard:
T6 +70C (+158F) 40C (40F)
T5 +85C (+185F) 40C (40F)
For CSA C22.2 Series;
T4 +120C (+248F) 40C (40F) C22.2 No 0, C22.2 No 0.4, C22.2 No 0.5,
T3 +130C (+266F) 40C (40F)
C22.2 No 25, C22.2 No 30, C22.2 No 94,
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F) C22.2 No 61010-1-12, C22.2 No 61010-2-030-12
For CSA E79 Series For CSA E79 Series;
Flameproof for Zone 1, Ex dme [ia] IIC T6...T3 CAN/CSA-E79-0, CAN/CSA-E79-1
Intrinsically safe (electrodes), Ex ia IIC T6...T3 Certificate: 1481213
Electrode Circuit Um: 250 Vac/dc
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc
Excitation Circuit: 140V max
Enclosure: IP66, IP67
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 81
For CSA C22.2 Series (3) Operation
Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D.
For CSA C22.2 Series
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F
& G.
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 50 cm OF THE WARNING
ENCLOSURE
WARNING : OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV. 2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED
COVER.
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc
OUVRIR LE CIRCUIT AVANT
Excitation Circuit: 140V max
DENLEVER LE COUVERCLE.
Enclosure: Type 4X
Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
Temperature Code: T6
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
hazardous locations.
For CSA E79 Series
Flameproof for Zone 1, Ex d IIC T6 For CSA E79 Series
Maximum power supply voltage: 250 Vac/130 Vdc (AXF Integral Flowmeter),
Excitation Circuit: 140V max (AXFA14 Remote Converter)
Enclosure: IP66, IP67
Temperature Code: T6
Ambient Temp.: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F)
WARNING
(2) Installation WARNING : AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 20
MINUTES BEFORE OPENING.
For CSA C22.2 Series APRS POWER-OFF, ATTENDRE 20
MINUTES AVANT DOUVRIR.
WARNING Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical hazardous locations.
Code Part I and Local Electrical Codes.
In hazardous location, wiring shall be in conduit as
(AXF Remote Flowtube)
shown in Figure 10.3
WARNING : SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 50cm
OF THE ENCLOSURE. WARNING
UN SCELLEMENT DOIT TRE
WARNING : DE-ENERGIZE BEFORE OPENING.
INSTALL MOINS DE 50cm DU
OUVRIR LE CIRCUIT AVANT
BOTIER.
DENLEVER LE COUVERCLE.
When installed in Division 2, SEALS NOT
Take care not to generate mechanical spark when
REQUIRED
access to the instrument and peripheral devices in
hazardous locations.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Magnetic Flowmeter Conduit Sealing Fitting
WARNING 10
50 cm Max.
F1012.ai
Explosion Protected Type Instrument
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 82
10.5 TIIS Flange Type (PFA lining only);
Lining / Process Integral Flowmeter Remote Flowtube
Connection PFA PFA
CAUTION code Lining Lining
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 83
Gas Group and Temperature Class: IIC T4 (2-1)Wiring Cable through Flameproof
Ambient Temperature: 20 to 60C Packing Adapter
Fluid Temperature: 120C max
Electrode Circuit: 250 V AC/DC
Grounding: JIS Class C (grounding resistance 10 or WARNING
less) or JIS Class A (grounding resistance
For the TIIS flameproof type with wiring using a
10 or less)
flameproof packing adapter, wire cables through the
(AXFA14 Remote Converter) packing adapters approved by Yokogawa (optional
Certificate: TC16678 code G12, G11, G14 or G13).
Construction: Ex d IIC T6 In case that optional code G11 or G13 is selected, it
: Explosion proof comes with a blanking plug.
Gas Group and Temperature Class: IIC T6 Then always apply it to the unused wiring port.
Ambient Temperature: 20 to 60C (power supply
code 1) Unit : mm
: 20 to 50C (power supply T1 (Approx. inch)
Adapter body(M. Screw)
code 2) O-Ring
Maximum power supply voltage: 250V AC/130V DC 16.5(0.65)
Packing case
Hexagon socket set screw
Grounding: JIS Class C(grouding resistance 10V or 18(0.71)
Packing *
Hexagon socket set screw
less) or JIS Class A(grounding resistance F L
O-Ring
O-Ring
10V or less) G Washer C
Union nut
Packing gland
*Packing Clamp ring
(Choose from the table below Clamp nut D
WARNING depend on cable outside diameter) T2 O-Ring
B.coupling
Cable(user's scope)
In case that ambient temperature exceeds 50C, Nominal diameter Dimension Packing diameter Weight
Identification Parts
use heat-resistant cables with maximum allowable T1 T2 C D L
Cable outer diameter
F G mark
kg
(lb)
No.
temperature of 70C or above. G 1/2 G 1/2 35 39 94.5 8.0 to 10.0 (0.31 to 0.39) 10.0(0.39) 20.0 16 8-10 0.26
(1.38) (1.54) (3.72) 10.0 to 12.0 (0.39 to 0.47) 12.0(0.47) (0.79) 16 10-12 (0.57) G9601AM
F1021.ai
Drain plug
F1022.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<10. Explosion Protected Type Instrument> 84
Follow the procedure below when a flameproof packing (2-2)Cable Wiring Using Flameproof Metal
adapter (optional code G12, G11, G14 or G13) is applied. Conduit
Refer to Figure 10.5.3.
A seal fitting must be installed near the terminal box
If a blanking plug is applied, follow the same procedure
connection port for a sealed construction.
when the flameproof packing adapter is applied.
Apply a non-hardening sealant to the threads of the
terminal box connection port, flexible metal conduit
CAUTION and seal fitting for waterproofing.
Before tighting, confirm cable length from terminal to Every wiring port must apply the same wiring as
flameproof packing adapter when setting. Once it is Figure 10.5.4.
tightened, loosening and re-tightening may damage its Apply a blanking plug to the unused wiring port of a
sealing performance. 24V power supply version when a four-wire cable is
used for both power input and signal output.
If the blanking plug is necessary, always purchase it
(a) Loosen the locking screw and remove the terminal (parts number: G9330DP) from Yokogawa.
box cover.
Apply a non-hardening
(b) Measure the cable outer diameter in two directions to sealant to the threads
within 0.1 mm. Non-hazardous of these fittings for
area waterproofing
(c) Calculate the average of the two diameters, and use
packing with an internal diameter nearest to this value
(see the table of Figure 10.5.1). Hazardous
area Apply a blanking
(d) Screw the flameproof packing adapter into the plug to the unused
terminal box until the O-ring touches the wiring port Gas sealing wiring port
device
(at least 6 full turns), and firmly tighten the lock nut.
Flameproof Flameproof flexible
(e) Insert the cable through the union cover, the union metal conduit
heavy-gauge
coupling, the clamp nut, the clamp ring, the gland, the steel conduit
washer, the rubber packing, and the packing box, in Seal fitting
Tee
that order. After wiring, impregnate the
Drain plug fitting with a compound to seal tubing.
(f) Insert the end of the cable into the terminal box. F1024.ai
(g) Tighten the union cover to grip the cable. When Figure 10.5.4Typical Wiring Using Flameproof Metal
tightening the union cover, tighten approximately Conduit
one turn past the point where the cable will no longer
move up and down.
Proper tightening is important. If it is too tight, a circuit
break in the cable may occur; if not tight enough, the
flameproof effectiveness will be compromised.
(h) Fasten the cable by tightening the clamp nut.
(i) Tighten the lock nut on the union cover.
(j) Connect the cable wires to each terminal.
Wrench Union coupling
Lock nut Clamp nut
Clamp ring
Gland
Washer
Cable Rubber packing
Wrench
Union cover
Lock nut
Packing box
F1023.ai
IM 01E20A01-01EN
<INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT> 85
Flameproof Type of Explosion- Note: The permissible sizes of gaps between joint surfaces,
the path length of a joint surface and the number of joint
Protected Construction threads are determined by such factors as the enclosures
internal volume, joint and mating surface construction,
Electrical apparatus which is of flameproof construction and the explosion classification of the specified gases and
vapours.
is subjected to a type test and certified by the Japanese
Ministry of Labour aiming at preventing explosion caused
by electrical apparatus in a factory or any location where
inflammable gases or vapours may be present. The
flameproof construction is of completely enclosed type
EX-B03E
<INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT> 86
4. Installation of Flameproof Specific cables shall be used as recommended by
the USERS GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations
Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry,
published in 1994.
(1) Installation Area In necessary, appropriate protective pipes (conduit
Flameproof apparatus may be installed, in accordance or flexible pipes), ducts or trays shall be used for
with applicable gases, in a hazardous area in Zone 1 or 2, preventing the cable run (outside the cable glands)
where the specified gases are present. Those apparatus from damage.
shall not be installed in a hazardous area in Zone 0. To prevent explosive atmosphere from being
propagated form Zone 1 or 2 hazardous location
Note: Hazardous areas are classified in zones based upon to any different location or non-hazardous location
the frequency of the appearance and the duration of an
explosive gas atmosphere as follows: through the protective pipe or duct, apply sealing
Zone 0: An area in which an explosive gas atmosphere of the protective pipes in the vicinity of individual
is present continuously or is present for long boundaries, or fill the ducts with sand appropriately.
periods.
Zone 1: An area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is When branch connections of cables, or cable
likely to occur in normal operation. connections with insulated cables inside the conduit
Zone 2: An area in which an explosive gas atmosphere pipes are made, a flameproof or increased-safety
is not likely to occur in normal operation and if it
does occur it will exist for a short period only. connection box shall be used. In this case, flameproof
or increased-safety cable glands meeting the type of
(2) Environmental Conditions connection box must be used for cable connections to
The standard environmental condition for the installation the box.
of flameproof apparatus is limited to an ambient (2) Flameproof Metal Conduit Wiring
temperature range from 20C to +40C (for products
certified under Technical Criteria). However, some field- For the flameproof metal conduit wiring or insulated
mounted instruments may be certified at an ambient wires shall be used as recommended by the USERS
temperature up to +60C as indicated on the instrument GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive
nameplates. If the flameproof apparatus are exposed Gas Atmospheres in General Industry, published in
to direct sunshine or radiant heat from plant facilities, 1994.
appropriate thermal protection measures shall be taken. For conduit pipes, heavy-gauge steel conduits
conforming to JIS C 8305 Standard shall be used.
Flameproof sealing fittings shall be used in the vicinity
5. External Wiring for Flameproof of the wiring connections, and those fittings shall be
Apparatus filled with sealing compounds to complete sealing
of the apparatus. In addition, to prevent explosive
Flameproof apparatus require cable wiring or flameproof gases, moisture, or flame caused by explosion form
metal conduits for their electrical connections. For being propagated through the conduit, always provide
cable wiring, cable glands (cable entry devices for sealing fittings to complete sealing of the conduit in
flameproof type) to wiring connections shall be attached. the following locations:
For metal conduits, attach sealing fittings as close to (a) In the boundaries between the hazardous and
wiring connections as possible and completely seal the non-hazardous locations.
apparatus. All non-live metal parts such as the enclosure (b) In the boundaries where there is a different
shall be securely grounded. For details, see the USERS classification of hazardous location.
GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas For the connections of the apparatus with a conduit
Atmospheres in General Industry, published in 1994. pipe or its associated accessories, G-type parallel
(1) Cable Wiring pipe threads (JIS B 0202) shall be used to provide
a minimum of five-thread engagement to complete
For cable wiring, cable glands (cable entry devices tightness. In addition, since these parallel threads
for flameproof type) specified or supplied with the do not have sealing property, nonhardening sealant
apparatus shall be directly attached to the wiring such as liquid gaskets shall thus be applied to those
connections to complete sealing of the apparatus. threads for ensuring waterproofness.
Screws that connect cable glands to the apparatus If metal conduits need flexibility, use flameproof
are those for G-type parallel pipe threads (JIS B 0202) flexible fittings.
with no sealing property. To protect the apparatus
from corrosive gases or moisture, apply nonhardening
sealant such as liquid gaskets to those threads for
waterproofing.
EX-B03E
<INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT> 87
6. Maintenance of Flameproof (c) Unless otherwise specified, the electrical circuitry and
internal mechanisms may be repaired by component
Apparatus replacement, as this will not directly affect the
To maintain the flameproof apparatus, do the following. requirements for flameproof apparatus (however,
(For details, see Chapter 10 MAINTENANCE bear in mind that the apparatus must always be
OF EXPLOSION-PROTECTED ELECTRICAL restored to its original condition). If you attempt to
INSTALLATION in the USERS GUIDELINES for repair the flameproof apparatus, company-specified
Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in components shall be used.
General Industry.) (d) Before starting to service the apparatus, be sure
to check all parts necessary for retaining the
(1) Maintenance servicing with the power on. requirements for flameproof apparatus. For this,
Flameproof apparatus shall not be maintenance-serviced check that all screws, bolts, nuts, and threaded
with its power turned on. However, in cases where connections have properly been tightened.
maintenance servicing is to be conducted with the power (3) Prohibition of specification changes and
turned on, with the equipment cover removed, always modifications
use a gas detector to check that there is no explosive
gas in that location. If it cannot be checked whether an Do not attempt to change specifications or make
explosive gas is present or not, maintenance servicing modifications involving addition of or changes in
shall be limited to the following two items: external wiring connections.
(a) Visual inspection
Visually inspect the flameproof apparatus, metal 7. Selection of Cable Entry
conduits, and cables for damage or corrosion, and
other mechanical and structural defects. Devices for Flameproof Type
(b) Zero and span adjustments
These adjustments should be made only to the extent
that they can be conducted from the outside without CAUTION
opening the equipment cover. In doing this, great care
must be taken not to cause mechanical sparks with The cable glands (cable entry devices for flameproof
tools. type) conforming to IEC Standards are certified
(2) Repair in combination with the flameproof apparatus.
So, Yokogawa-specified cable entry devices for
If the flameproof apparatus requires repair, turn off flameproof type shall be used to meet this demand.
the power and transport it to a safety (non-hazardous)
location. Observe the following points before attempting
to repair the apparatus. References:
(a) Make only such electrical and mechanical repairs
(1) Type Certificate Guide for Explosion-Protected
as will restore the apparatus to its original condition.
Construction Electrical Machinery and Equipment
For the flameproof apparatus, the gaps and path
(relating to Technical Standards Conforming to
lengths of joints and mating surfaces, and mechanical
International Standards), issued by the Technical
strength of enclosures are critical factors in explosion
Institution of Industrial Safety, Japan
protection. Exercise great care not to damage the
(2) USERS GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations
joints or shock the enclosure.
for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry
(b) If any damage occurs in threads, joints or mating
(1994), issued by the Japanese Ministry of Labour,
surfaces, inspection windows, connections between
the Research Institute of Industrial Safet
the transmitter and terminal box, shrouds or clamps,
or external wiring connections which are essential
in flameproofness, contact Yokogawa Electric
Corporation.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to re-process threaded connections or
refinish joints or mating surfaces.
EX-B03E
88
Revision Information
Title : AXF Series Magnetic Flowmeter Installation Manual
Manual No. : IM 01E20A01-01EN
IM 01E20A01-01EN
YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Headquarters
2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 JAPAN
Phone : 81-422-52-5555
Branch Sales Offices
Osaka, Nagoya, Hiroshima, Kurashiki, Fukuoka, Kitakyusyu
YOKOGAWA EUROPE B. V.
Euroweg 2, 3825 HD Amersfoort, THE NETHERLANDS
Phone : 31-88-4641000 Fax : 31-88-4641111
Printed in Japan
1.3InstructionManualforpHAnalyzer
ApplicableModel Area
FLXA21DPDABS1NNANLANNN/UM
FU20FNPT/NSS PRASEDIMENTASI
WU11M905WPV
FLXA21DPDABS1NNANLANNN/UM
FU20FNPT/NSS RESERVOIRIPA
WU11M905WPV
Users
Manual Model FLXA202 / FLXA21
2-Wire Analyzer
IM 12A01A02-01E
IM 12A01A02-01E
8th Edition
i
u Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the FLXA202/FLXA21 2-Wire Analyzer.
Please read the following respective documents before installing and using the FLXA202/
FLXA21.
When the FLXA21 with the output of FOUNDATION Fieldbus or PROFIBUS PA Communication
is used, please refer to the Users Manual, IM 12A01A02-71E or IM 12A01A02-72E, too.
Users Manual
Contents Document number Note
FLXA202/FLXA21
IM 12A01A02-12E
Start-up Manual
Attached to the product
FLXA202/FLXA21
IM 12A01A02-20E
Safety Precautions
FLXA202/FLXA21 This manual
IM 12A01A02-01E
Users Manual This is included In attached CD-ROM
FLXA21
IM 12A01A02-71E
FOUNCATION Fieldbus Communication
These are included In attached CD-ROM
FLXA21
IM 12A01A02-72E
PROFIBUS PA Communication
* the E in the document number is the language code.
Please read the General Specifications for Checking the model and suffix code. The General
Specifications includes it.
n Drawing Conventions
Some drawings may be partially emphasized, simplified, or omitted, for the convenience of
description.
Some screen images depicted in the users manual may have different display positions or
character types (e.g., the upper / lower case). Also note that some of the images contained in this
users manual are display examples.
Media No. IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 2015 (YK) IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00
All Rights Reserved Copyright 2010, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ii
u Safety Precautions
n Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
In order to protect the system controlled by the product and the product itself and ensure
safe operation, observe the safety precautions described in this users manual. We assume
no liability for safety if users fail to observe these instructions when operating the product.
If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this users manual, the protection
provided by this instrument may be impaired.
If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the product or for
the product itself, prepare it separately.
Be sure to use the spare parts approved by Yokogawa Electric Corporation (hereafter
simply referred to as YOKOGAWA) when replacing parts or consumables.
Modification of the product is strictly prohibited.
The following safety symbols are used on the product as well as in this manual.
WARNING
This symbol indicates that an operator must follow the instructions laid out in this manual in order
to avoid the risks, for the human body, of injury, electric shock, or fatalities. The manual describes
what special care the operator must take to avoid such risks.
CAUTION
This symbol indicates that the operator must refer to the instructions in this manual in order to
prevent the instrument (hardware) or software from being damaged, or a system failure from
occurring.
CAUTION
This symbol gives information essential for understanding the operations and functions.
NOTE
This symbol indicates information that complements the present topic.
This symbol indicates Function Ground Terminal. Do not use this terminal as the protective
ground terminal.
FLXA202-D-*-
*1
*2
Type:-CB
*1: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of IECEx.
*2: This marking conforms to Intrinsic safety of ATEX.
*1
*2 *1
*3 *6 *2
*4 *3 *6
*7 *4
*5 *7
*5
*6
*1 *7
*2
*3
*4
*5
*4
*1
*6
*2
*3 *5 *7
n FLXA202/FLXA21
The FLXA202/FLXA21 should only be used with equipment that meets the relevant IEC,
American, Canadian, and Japanese standards. Yokogawa accepts no responsibility for the
misuse of this unit.
Dont install general purpose type instruments in the hazardous area.
The Instrument is packed carefully with shock absorbing materials, nevertheless, the
instrument may be damaged or broken if subjected to strong shock, such as if the
instrument is dropped. Handle with care.
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge
The FLXA202/FLXA21 contains devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
When servicing this equipment, please observe proper procedures to prevent such damage.
Replacement components should be shipped in conductive packaging. Repair work should
be done at grounded workstations using grounded soldering irons and wrist straps to avoid
electrostatic discharge.
CAUTION
Do not use an abrasive or organic solvent in cleaning the instrument.
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Division 2.
Do not remove or replace while circuit is live unless area is known to be non hazardous.
Explosion Hazard Do not disconnect equipment unless area is known to be non
hazardous.
Do not reset circuit breaker unless power has been removed from the equipment or the area
is known to be non hazardous.
CAUTION
This instrument is a EN61326-1 Class A product, and it is designed for use in the industrial
environment. Please use this instrument in the industrial environment only.
The HART communication may be influenced by strong electromagnetic field.
In this case another trial of the HART communication and/or operation with FLXA202/
FLXA21 touch screen can be carried out.
CAUTION
When you open the front panel, make sure the screws are completely out of the screw holes, and
then open the front panel slowly in order not to damage the threaded parts on the housing. If the
threaded parts are damaged and the screws cannot be tightened, the waterproof performance
will deteriorate.
CAUTION
Be careful to touch the concentrated sulfuric acid.
Notice: The symbol means they shall be sorted out and collected as ordained in
ANNEX II in DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC.
l Product Disposal:
The instrument should be disposed of in accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.
WARNING
Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the generation
of electrostatic charge, e.g., rubbing with a dry cloth. Because the enclosure of the FLXA21
2-Wire Analyzer, if it is mounted in an area where the use of category 1 G Zone 0 apparatus is
required, it must be installed such, that, even in the event of rare incidents, ignition sources due
to friction sparks are excluded.
FLEXA, FLXA and SENCOM are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
Adobe, Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other company and product names mentioned in this users manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
We do not use TM or mark to indicate those trademarks or registered trademarks in this users
manual.
CONTENTS
u Introduction.....................................................................................................i
u Safety Precautions.......................................................................................iii
1. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION................................... 1-1
1.1 Instrument check............................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Screen operation................................................................................................ 1-5
1.3 Passwords........................................................................................................ 1-10
1.4 Regulatory Compliance................................................................................... 1-10
2. WIRING AND INSTALLATION................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Installation site................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2 Removing the wiring cover............................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Installing the cable glands................................................................................ 2-5
2.4 Wiring the power supply................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.1 Grounding........................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2 Connection of the power supply......................................................... 2-9
2.4.3 Wiring cover...................................................................................... 2-10
2.5 Sensor wiring................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.1 Wiring the pH/ORP sensor............................................................... 2-15
2.5.2 Wiring the conductivity (SC) sensor.................................................. 2-18
2.5.3 Wiring the inductive conductivity (ISC) sensor................................. 2-18
2.5.4 Wiring the dissolved oxygen (DO) sensor........................................ 2-19
2.5.5 Wiring the SENCOM pH/ORP sensor.............................................. 2-19
2.6 Mounting methods........................................................................................... 2-20
2.7 Operation.......................................................................................................... 2-21
3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP.......................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Change language............................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Quick setup......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Home display, Main display and Monitor display........................................... 3-4
3.4 Zooming in on details........................................................................................ 3-5
3.5 Trend graphics................................................................................................. 3-10
3.6 Instrument status screen................................................................................ 3-11
3.7 Calibration and Commissioning.................................................................... 3-12
4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Sensor setup...................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Measurement setup........................................................................................... 4-3
This manual describes how to use the FLXA202/FLXA21 with Yokogawas or other companies
sensors. Please read carefully this manual and the instruction manual of the relevant sensor
before using this instrument.
For the specifications of the FLXA202/FLXA21, please refer to the General Specifications (GS
12A01A02-01E) in the attached CD-ROM.
When using with the pH/ORP SENCOM sensor, please refer to the section 15, 16 and 17 of this
manual for the operation, commissioning and calibration respectively.
The first module (The second module if any
Jumper holder is installed here.)
(provided only for
pH measurement)
LCD display
PH
SC
Cable entry holes Terminal block
for power supply
ISC
1 2
Reboot switch
Front view (Do not use it) Front view with the front panel opened
DO
Figure 1.1 FLXA202 Parts names and descriptions
SENCOM
Wiring cover 2
(for the second module)
Jumper holder
(provided only for
pH measurement)
Front panel
Front view Front view with the front panel opened
Reboot switch
(Do not use it)
1 2
ONON
Terminal block
for power supply
Nameplate
l FLXA202
Make sure the model and suffix code on the nameplate affixed to the left side of the housing.
NOTE
Be sure to apply correct power to the unit , as detailed on the nameplate.
-D-B-D-AB-P1-P1
-A-N-LA-N-N/U/H6
l FLXA21 SC
Loosen four front panel screws of the FLXA21, open the panel to the left, and make sure the
model and suffix code on the nameplate affixed to the back side of the front panel agrees with ISC
your order.
DO
CAUTION
When you open the front panel, make sure the screws are completely out of the screw holes, and
then open the front panel slowly in order not to damage the threaded parts on the housing. If the SENCOM
threaded parts are damaged and the screws cannot be tightened, the waterproof performance
will deteriorate.
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the four front panel screws.
-D-P-S-AA-P1-NN-AN-L1N-NN
/UM/SCT/H6
S1.01
J312FA012 2012.01
NOTE
Rule of The Serial Number is as follows.
Confirms the input; for example, the selected menu item or setting value. ISC
NOTE DO
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display or the Home display when the MONITOR display is disabled).
SENCOM
n Monitor display
C
10.38 pH
A
Monitor display
The Monitor display appears upon startup when the MONITOR display is enabled.
When the measurement value (primary value) on the main or home display is pressed, the
monitor display appears.
A: Measurement value
B: Unit
C: Sensor No.
n Main display
F E G
Tag:PH
10.38
Go to Home (Figure 1.8)
D
TEXT_PH1 pH Go to Information (Figure 1.12)
B 25.0 C WASH
TEXT_TEMP1
C 19 mV HOLD
TEXT_ORP1 Go to Execute & Setup (Figure 1.13)
4mA PH1 20mA
J
K H L M
Figure 1.6 Example of main display
Main display
The Main display appears upon startup when one sensor is connected and the MONITOR
display is disabled.
A: Measurement value: Primary value (large characters/user selectable)
B, C: Measurement value: Second and tertiary values (small characters)
D: Unit for the primary value
E: Tag No. (user programmable)
F: Sensor No. *
G: Sensor wellness indicator (More indicate the better condition.)
H: Hold/Wash indicators (appear only during the Hold/Wash operations)
J: Analog output display and parameter * (ex.: PH1PH=Parameter, 1=sensor number)
K: Additional text (set in alphanumeric characters/user programmable)
L: Function buttons (Home, Zoom, Status, Execute & Setup)
M: Fault/Warning indicators (indicated in blinking only during Fault/Warning status)
0.03
Differential pH Sensor
1
10.38 pH Sensor
1
Sensor Sensor
4mA Diff-pH 20mA 2 4mA PH1 20mA 2
10.38
B 25.0 C E
C 19 mV A
G H
Tag:PH pH
6.35
24.9 C K
24 mV
Home display
The Home display appears upon startup when two sensors are connected and the MONITOR
display is disabled.
(Home display is not available when only one sensor is connected)
A: Measurement value: Primary value (large characters/user selectable)
B, C: Measurement value: Secondary and tertiary values (small characters)
D: Unit for the primary value
E: Tag No. (user programmable) PH
F: Sensor No.
G: Sensor wellness indicator (More indicate the better condition.) SC
H: Hold/Wash indicators (appear only during the Hold/Wash operations)
J: Analog output display and parameter (ex.: PH1PH=Parameter, 1=sensor number)
K: Fault/Warning indicators (indicated in blinking only during Fault/Warning status)
ISC
C Calculated data pH R(1) Redundant system pH
DO
0.03 10.38 SENCOM
Tag:PH pH Tag:PH pH
6.35 10.38
24.9 C 25.0 C
24 mV 19 mV
Figure 1.9 Example of home display of calculated data and redundant system
n Zoom display
mA HOLD
20
FAIL
12
WASH
4
15.00
Next Next
Figure 1.10 Example zoom display
The zoom display appears when the Zoom button on the main display is pressed.
The Zoom display shows an easy-to-read graphical display of the output status. Pressing Next
displays the contact state if communication is set to PH201G distributor. Pressing Next again
displays the status information of the instrument.
n Trend display
C D F
TagPH pH1
Measurement value (pH)
12.00 9.10pH
Maximum value on this display
Current process value
8.40
5.60
Minimum value on this display
2.50
Trend display
The Trend display appears when the Trend button on the Zoom display is pressed.
A: X axis; Time axis (user programmable from 15 minutes to 14 days)
B: Y axis; Measurement value axis (user programmable)
C: Tag No.
D: Current measurement value with unit
E: Trend (maximum, minimum and average values during the display update time)
F: Icon (current measurement value, and maximum and minimum values until the display
update)
G: Fault/Warning indicators (indicated in blinking only during Fault/Warning status)
n Information button
1
Diagnosis information on converters and sensors appears.
No malfunction detected.
Warning
When a warning icon appears, maintenance is required. Pressing this icon displays an
error message, and pressing the message displays the troubleshooting guidelines.
Fault
This icon indicates a malfunction. Pressing this icon displays an error message, and
pressing the message displays the troubleshooting guidelines.
For some errors concerned with setting, a message on the remedy can jump to the relevant
setting directly.
Setup:
Commissioning DO
Change language
Start Quick Setup
1.3 Passwords
Passwords can protect the FLXA202/FLXA21 from other persons access except a right
operators.
Execute operation and Commissioning operation can be separately protected by each password.
When the Execute password is set, execution of Calibration(/Wash), HOLD or Temporary output
needs to enter the password to start each execution. When the Commissioning password is set,
Commissioning and Start Quick Setup needs to enter the password to start the setting-up.
Refer to the section 4.6.3, 7.5.3, 10.5.3, 13.6.3 or 16.6.3 for details of setting passwords.
l FLXA202
Intrinsic safety (suffix code Type : -CB):
ATEX Intrinsic safety approval
Applicable standard
Explosive Atmospheres
EN 60079-0: 2012/A11: 2013 Equipment - General requirements
EN 60079-11: 2012 Equipment protection by Intrinsic safety i
EN 60079-26: 2007 Equipment with equipment protection level (EPL) Ga
EN 60529: 1992 Degrees of protectionprovided by enclosures (IP Code)
FLXA21/FLXA202 Analyzer
Housing Assembly
Supply + +
Sensor 1 Measuring module 1 Associated Apparatus
Supply - -
Sensor 2 Measuring module 2
Supply +, Supply
Ui: 30 V
Ii: 100 mA
Pi: 0.75 W
Ci: 13 nF
Li: 0 mH
Measuring Module 1, 2
Type of Measuring Module
PH
pH, SC, DO ISC SENCOM
Uo 11.76 V 11.76 V 5.36 V
Io 116.5 mA 60.6 mA 106.16 mA SC
Po 0.3424 W 0.178 W 0.1423 W
Co 100 nF 100 nF 31 F
Lo 1.7 mH 8 mH 0.45 mH ISC
Specific Conditions of Use
- When the enclosure of FLXA21/202 Analyzer is made of aluminum alloy, and when it is DO
used in an explosive atmosphere requiring equipment of Category 1 G or EPL Ga, the
Analyzer must be installed in such a way that, even in the event of rare incidents, an ignition
source due to impact friction sparks is excluded. SENCOM
- Precautions shall be taken to minimize the risk from electrostatic discharge of non-metallic
parts of the enclosure or painted parts of the metallic enclosure.
Notes:
1. The associated apparatus must be a linear source.
2. Measuring Module 2 is not necessarily installed. As for ISC module and SENCOM module,
only one module is permitted to be installed at a time.
3. Sensor 1 and Sensor 2 may be simple apparatus or intrinsically safe apparatus.
4. WARNING POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD SEE USERS
MANUAL
Sensor module
Model code Sensor module type Explosion proof type
K9698EA pH/ORP module Intrinsic safety type
K9698FA SC module T4: for Ta: -20 to 55C
K9698GA ISC module T6: for Ta: -20 to 40C
K9698HA DO module
K9698JA SENCOM module Intrinsic safety type
T4: for Ta: -20 to 55C
ATEX and IECEx only
(*)
FM
Control Drawing (for 4-20mA type)
Following contents refer DOC. No. IKE039-A12
Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D PH
Class I, Zone 0 and 1, Group IIC
T4 for Ta = 55C, T6 for Ta = 40C
Hazardous Location Non Hazardous Location
2 wire analyzer SC
Measuring module 1 Supply + +
Sensor 1
Housing Assembly Safety Barrier
DO
Note: The measuring module on this drawing means
the sensor module on this General Specifications.
CSA
Control Drawing (for 4-20mA type)
Intrinsically Safe Non-incendive
Group IIC, Zone 0 Class I, Division 2,
Class I, Division 1 Groups A, B, C, D
Hazardous Location Non Hazardous Location
2 wire analyzer
Measuring module 1 Supply + +
Sensor 1
Housing Assembly Safety Barrier
Supply - Refer to Note
Sensor 2 Measuring module 2 -
(Refer to Note 7)
(*1)
Not use safety barrier but
Note: The measuring module on this CSA certified equipment
drawing means the sensor module use in Non-incendive
on this General Specifications.
NEPSI
Control Drawing (for 4-20mA type)
Hazardous Location Non Hazardous Location
(*)
PH
Note: The measuring module on this drawing means
the sensor module on this General Specifications.
WARNING
Installation and wiring
The FLXA202/FLXA21 should only be used with equipment that meets the relevant IEC,
American or Canadian standards. Yokogawa accepts no responsibility for the misuse of this unit.
WARNING
Dont install general purpose type instruments in the hazardous area.
CAUTION
The Instrument is packed carefully with shock absorbing materials, nevertheless, the instrument
may be damaged or broken if subjected to strong shock, such as if the instrument is dropped.
Handle with care.
CAUTION
This instrument is a Class A product, and it is designed for use in the industrial environment.
Please use this instrument in the industrial environment only.
CAUTION
When you open the front panel, make sure the screws are completely out of the screw holes, and
then open the front panel slowly in order not to damage the threaded parts on the housing. If the
threaded parts are damaged and the screws cannot be tightened, the waterproof performance
will deteriorate.
CAUTION
The HART communication may be influenced by strong electromagnetic field.
In this case another trial of the HART communication and/or operation with FLXA202/FLXA21
touch screen can be carried out.
WARNING
Do not use an abrasive or organic solvent in cleaning the instrument.
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Division 2.
Do not remove or replace while circuit is live unless area is know to be non hazardous.
Explosion Hazard Do not disconnect equipment unless area is known to be non
hazardous.
Do not reset circuit breaker unless power has been removed from the equipment or the area
is known to be non hazardous.
WARNING
1
Electrostatic discharge
The FLXA202/FLXA21 contains devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
When servicing this equipment, please observe proper procedures to prevent such damage.
Replacement components should be shipped in conductive packaging. Repair work should
be done at grounded workstations using grounded soldering irons and wrist straps to avoid
electrostatic discharge.
PH
SC
ISC
DO
SENCOM
*1 L N
Sensor
+ a c e Power supply
*3 b d f
20 to 130V DC
or
80 to 138V AC, 47 to 63Hz
*2 HOLD WASH
WTB10 or BA10 FAIL
Terminal box *6 Case of Distributor
SDBT
+ B + H
A F
L N
Power supply
+
1 20 to 130V DC
2 or
(*3) 80 to 138V AC, 47 to 63Hz
*1: Use a 2-wire shielded cable with an outside diameter of 6 to 12 mm.
*2: Connect the analyzer to ground. (Class D ground: 100 ohm or less)
*3: This line is connected to a distributor or 24V DC power supply.
*4: Terminal numbers for each sensor module are shown below.
*5: Two modules of the same kind of measurement/sensor type can be installed. When measuring inductive
conductivity or pH/ORP with the SENCOM sensor, only one module can be installed.
*6: The terminal box may be necessary depending on the sensor cable length and the distance between the
analyzer and the sensor.
The SENCOM sensor is to be connected directly to the analyzer without a terminal box.
*7: Two outputs, output 1 and output2, of PH201G or SDBT are same signals. PH
11 12 14 18 13 17 19 15 16
PH Module PH
SC
11 12 13 14 15 16 NC
SC Module SC
ISC
11 12 13 17 14 16 15
ISC Module ISC
DO
11 12 16 15 13 14 17 18 NC
DO Module DO
SENCOM
NC 82 83 84 NC 86 87
SENCOM Module SENCOM
*1 L N
Sensor
+ a c e Power supply
*3 b d f
20 to 130V DC
or
80 to 138V AC, 47 to 63Hz
*2 *2 HOLD WASH
WTB10 or BA10 FAIL
(Stainless steel (Plastic housing)
Terminal box *6 Case of Distributor
housing)
SDBT
+ B + H
A F
L N
Power supply
+
1 20 to 130V DC
2 or
*1: Use a 2-wire shielded cable with an outside diameter of 6 to 12 mm. (*3) 80 to 138V AC, 47 to 63Hz
*2: Connect the analyzer to ground. (Class D ground: 100 ohm or less)
The way of connecting the grounding cable varies depending on the plastic housing and stainless steel
housing.
In the case of the plastic housing, connect the grounding cable to the terminal of the power module inside,
and in the case of the stainless steel housing, connect the grounding cable to the terminal of the housing.
Use a cable with an outside diameter of 3.4 to 7 mm for the grounding line of the plastic housing.
The minimum cross sectional area of the protective grounding cable should be 0.75 mm2.
Although, on the stainless steel housing, the ground terminal symbol is (protective ground), the ground is
really functional ground.
*3: This line is connected to a distributor or 24V DC power supply.
*4: Terminal numbers for each sensor module are shown below.
*5: Two modules of the same kind of measurement/sensor type can be installed. When measuring inductive
conductivity or pH/ORP with the SENCOM sensor, only one module can be installed.
*6: The terminal box may be necessary depending on the sensor cable length and the distance between the
analyzer and the sensor.
The SENCOM sensor is to be connected directly to the analyzer without a terminal box.
*7: Two outputs, output 1 and output2, of PH201G or SDBT are same signals.
11 12 14 18 13 17 19 15 16
PH Module PH
11 12 13 14 15 16 NC
SC Module SC
11 12 13 17 14 16 15
ISC Module ISC
11 12 16 15 13 14 17 18 NC
DO Module DO
NC 82 83 84 NC 86 87
SENCOM Module SENCOM
Select an installation site where the ambient temperature and humidity are within the limits of the
instrument specifications (see chapter 2). If the instrument is installed outside and exposed to
direct sunlight, a sun shade hood should be used.
Ambient Operating Temperature: -20 to +55 C
Storage Temperature: -30 to +70 C
Humidity: 10 to 90% RH at 40C (Non-condensing)
PH
SC
ISC
DO
SENCOM
l FLXA202
Remove wiring covers 1 and 2 by raising the circled area in Figure 2.3.
NOTE
Wiring covers are required intrinsic safety (Type is -C*).
In the case of other types, the cover is not attached to the FLXA202.
l FLXA21
Remove all the wiring covers. They are fixed at the places marked with (circle) and (triangle)
in Figure 2.4. Be careful not to damage the pawls when removing the covers.
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the wiring cover screws.
FLXA202 Housing
CAUTION SC
Be careful not to be injured by the sharp hole edges on the housing.
ISC
Install the supplied cable gland as shown in Figure 2.6. When using an adapter for conduit work,
see Figure 2.7.
DO
SENCOM
Gaskets
Washer
O-ring
Gable gland
Close up plug
(rubber)
FLXA202 Housing
Gaskets
O-ring
Washer
The unused cable glands should be sealed with the supplied close up plug.
CAUTION
When installing cable glands, hold cable glands and tighten cable gland nuts to a torque of 6
Nm. If cable glands, not gland nuts, are tightened, O-rings may be come out from the proper
positions.
CAUTION
When using a cable conduit, use a flexible conduit to avoid stress on the conduit adapter.
The stress on the conduit adapter may damage the housing.
Load resistance ()
R=
V - 11.5
R=
V - 11.5 SC
0.022 0.022
1000 1000
Except SENCOM
ISC
600 600
516
DO
Digital Communication Digital Communication
Range (HART) 304 Range (HART)
250 250
Open the front panel and remove the wiring covers to make the terminal block accessible.
The cable leading to the distributor (power supply) supplies the power to and transmits the output
signal from the FLXA202/FLXA21.
Use a two conductor shielded cable with a minimum cross sectional area of 1.25 mm2 and an
outside diameter of 6 to 12 mm. The cable gland supplied with the instrument is compatible with
these diameters.
Terminal screw size is M4, and torque of screw up is 1.2 Nm.
Pin terminal, ring terminal and spade terminal can be used for the power supply terminals in the
plastic housing and the stainless housing, and the grounding terminal in the plastic housing. For
the grounding terminal on the stainless steel case, ring terminal should be used.
Pin terminal: pin diameter: max. 1.9 mm
Ring and spade terminal: width: max. 7.8 mm
CAUTION
Cables that withstand temperatures of at least 60C should be used for wiring.
CAUTION
Always place the shield cover over the power supply and contact terminals for safety reasons
and to avoid interference.
2.4.1 Grounding
The method to connect the grounding terminal is different for the FLXA202 and FLXA21 stainless
steel housing and the FLXA21 plastic housing.
For the safety of the user and to protect the instrument against interference, the converter
housing must always be connected to a class D ground (a ground resistance of 100 ohm or less).
A: FLXA202 housing
(External grounding)
(Functional ground)
B: FLXA21 Plastic housing C: FLXA21 Stainless steel housing
(Internal grounding) (External grounding)
Figure 2.9 Grounding
SC
ISC
DO
FLXA202 FLXA21
SENCOM
Figure 2.10 Power terminal
Housing
Wiring cover 2 Wiring cover 1
(when using the second module)
Figure 2.11 FLXA202 Wiring cover
NOTE
Wiring covers are required intrinsic safety (Type is -C*).
In the case of other types, the cover is not attached to the FLXA202.
l FLXA21
After grounding and connecting the power supply, check the wiring and then close the wiring
cover 3 (Figure 2.4).
When closing the cover, engage the positions marked with in Figure 2.4 and fasten the cover
with the screw at the position marked with .
CAUTION
The screw in the area marked with should be tightened to a torque of 0.35 to 0.45 Nm.
If a second module is used, wire the sensor for the second module and attach the wiring cover
(refer to figure 2.12).
Then, wire the sensor for the first module and attach the wiring cover (refer to figure 2.11).
The sensor wiring is shown in section 2.4.
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the wiring cover screws.
NOTE
When input 2 is used, the upper-level module is for input 1. Be careful not to make a mistake
when wiring the modules.
l FLXA202
When wiring covers are available:
Attach wiring cover 1. If the second input is available, wire the second module in the lower
level, and attach wiring cover 2.
Finally, wire the first module.
If the second input is not available, attach wiring cover 1, and then wire the first input.
Note that if the second input is not available, wiring cover 2 is not included.
When wiring covers are not available:
If the second input is available, wire the second module in the lower level first.
Then, wire the first module.
If the second input is not available, wire only the first input.
NOTE
Wiring covers are required intrinsic safety (Type is -C*).
In the case of other types, the cover is not attached to the FLXA202. PH
When all the detector wiring is complete, close the FLXA202 front cover, and turn the power on. SC
Check that the screen displays normally.
ISC
CAUTION
Do not tighten up four front panel screws one by one.
DO
Each front panel screw should be tightened up in two times of screwing. And, firstly the screw at
the upper left should be screwed a bit, the next is at the lower right, third is at the upper right, and
fourth is at the lower left. The second round is the same sequence again to tighten up four screws. SENCOM
Do not use an electric screwdriver with high revolutions. If an electric screwdriver is used for
these front panel screws, the revolutions of the electric screwdriver should be less than 400 rpm.
Four screws should be tightened to the following torque;
0.8 to 0.9 Nm (for the plastic housing)
1.5 to 1.6 Nm (for the stainless steel housing)
NOTE
When the wiring of sensors is finished, be sure to attach the wiring covers. Furthermore, make
sure the module is locked with the mechanisms on the left and right of the module.
NOTE
Confirm that all locking-tabs (including for BLANK slots) are Locked position when close the
front panel.
If locking-tabs are Unlock position, the front panel may be interfered with locking-tabs.
Lock Unlock
Figure 2.12 Locking the module
When all sensor wiring is completed, close the front panel of the FLXA21, and turn on the power.
Make sure that the display is normal.
CAUTION
Do not tighten up four front panel screws one by one.
Each front panel screw should be tightened up in two times of screwing. And, firstly the screw at
the upper left should be screwed a bit, the next is at the lower right, third is at the upper right, and
fourth is at the lower left. The second round is the same sequence again to tighten up four screws.
Do not use an electric screwdriver with high revolutions. If an electric screwdriver is used for
these front panel screws, the revolutions of the electric screwdriver should be less than 400 rpm.
Four screws should be tightened to the following torque;
0.8 to 0.9 Nm (for the plastic housing)
1.5 to 1.6 Nm (for the stainless steel housing)
SC
Board Terminals
Sensor Measurement Remark
82 83 84 86 87
FU20F pH, pH & ORP, rH 82 83 84 86 87 WU11 Cable ISC
DO
SENCOM
TC REF Liquid PH
Earth
In addition to the wiring of the sensor, insure that a jumper for low-impedance sensor inputs is
installed. The jumpers can be found on the plastic sensor module cover and can be stored in the
lower level module wiring cover.
pH Glass Electrode is a high impedance sensor input
Standard reference electrodes and an ORP/REDOX electrode are low impedance sensor
inputs
Special electrodes using 2 glass sensor (example: Pfaudler, SC24V) do not need jumpers.
Terminals 15-16 are identified as input 1 (High Impedance) and terminals 13-17 are defined as
input 2 (Low Impedance). For conventional pH sensors, the jumper is placed as illustrated:
11 12 14 18 13 17 19 15 16
PH
Input 2 Input 1
PH
Glass sensor on Input 1.
Reference sensor on Input 2.
SC
Store jumpers that you do not use in the jumper holder (see Figures 1.1 and 1.2).
ISC
DO
SENCOM
n ORP Measurement
The ORP measurement uses the same sensor input module as the pH measurement. It is not
uncommon to measure ORP as process variable and a pH Glass electrode as reference. This is
the case with rH measurement and with pH compensated ORP measurement.
11 Temperature
12 Temperature
13 Reference
14 Solution ground
15 Metal (measure)
16 Shield
17 Shield
PH
Input 2 Input 1
TC PH Liquid ORP
Earth
PH
Input 2 Input 1
For sensor systems using a single cable, like the FU20/FU24 and the PR10, PD20, PF20 and
PS20, the standard gland will accommodate the cable adequately. Single cables between
approximately 6 mm and 12 mm (0.24 and 0.47) can be sealed properly with these glands and
the standard tule.
Remove
standard tule
Sensor
Grommet set
PH
SC
ISC
DO
SENCOM
15 V+
16 i+
The above diagram shows wiring for 4-electrode conductivity sensors, such as SC42-SP34
large bore series. For 2-electrode conductivity sensors, such as SC42-SP36 small bore series,
jumpers must be installed between terminals 13-14 and between terminals 15-16, as shown in
the diagram below.
FLXA202/FLXA21
11 + Temp
12 -
13 V-
14 i-
15 V+
16 i+
15 Drive coil
16 shield
The sensors are supplied with integral cables and each individual wire is marked with the
corresponding terminal numbers.
The DO30G sensor comes with integral cable and the wires are labeled with the corresponding
terminal numbers.
Input M9 Connector
Shield 82 4
Data+ 83 1
Data- 84 2
Supply Gnd 86 5 PH
Supply 87 6
SC
Connect the WU11 SENCOM cable terminal to the SENCOM module. ISC
Since the WU11 cable is thin, attach the included grommet in place of the cable gland standard
packing before wiring.
DO
SENCOM
Grommet
Detector
Figure 2.14
138 +1
0
Bracket
195
Fixing screws (x2)
185
* Tighten the four screws to a torque of 2 Nm.
Spacing panel cutout
Wall mounting
Bracket mounting screws*
Note: The attached hardware is the same
Wall as that for the pipe mounting.
Only the bracket is used for the
wall mounting.
Wall mounting holes (x3)
Bracket
See General Specifications (GS 12A01A02-01E) for the dimensions of the FLXA202/FLXA21
and mounting hardware.
2.7 Operation
When all wiring is completed, turn on the power of the instrument. Make sure that the LCD
screen turns on. Then, the screen changes to the Quick Setup display. If the instrument is not
configured, an error indicator may be displayed, or the measurement values displayed may be
incorrect. Check the initial settings and change them to suit your purpose. 2
NOTE
After turning on the power, it takes occasionally more than 1 minute to change to the Quick Setup
display.
NOTE
A current of 12 mA is output for several seconds after power-on. This is the specification.
l Change language
When the power is turned on, the Quick setup display appears.
Upon delivery, the display language is set to English. If you want to use a language other than
English, select your desired language.
(1) (2) (3)
Quick setup Change language Warning
Start quick setup? Chinese
The instrument will restart
Czech
Yes English Are you sure? Yes
No French
German
Change language Italian
Japanese
Korean
Polish
Portuguese
Portuguese
Russian
Russian
Spanish
Spanish
PH
Figure 2.16 Changing the language
3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP
This chapter describes the screen operations of pH/ORP, the object to be measured.
Further details of screen operations can also be found in section 1.2.
Tag:PH
10.38 pH
3
25.0 C
19 mV Calibration
4mA PH1 20mA pH 5.1 Calibration pH
ORP 5.3 Manual 5.1.1 pH Manual
Temperature 5.2 Automatic5.1.2 Zero/Slope
Sample 5.1.3 Zero/Slope/ITP(3point)
Execute &Setup Zero/Slope1,2(3point)
Execute:
Calibration/Wash HOLD 5.4 Calibration ORP
HOLD Manual pH Automatic
Temporary output Sample Zero/Slope
Temporary output 5.5 Zero/Slope/ITP(3point)
Setup: Zero/Slope1,2(3point)
Comissioning
Change language Change language 2.7
Start Quick Setup
Quick setup Date/Time Seneor setup Measurement setup
3.2 4.6.4 4.1 4.2.1
Buffers
Select buffer set:
Impedance setup Free programmable Free programmable
Input 1 impedance: Low Buffer table 1 Buffer table 1
Input 2 impedance: Low Buffer table 2 Enter values
Buffer table 3
Figure 3.1 Menu structure of pH/ORP (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)
IM 12A01A02-01E 8th Edition : Oct. 01, 2015-00
<3. OPERATION OF pH/ORP> 3-2
NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display or the Home display when the MONITOR display is disabled).
3
Quick setup Sensor setup mA(output)
Start quick setup? Sensor type pH+ORP Process parameter pH1
pH pH1 Temperature1
Yes ORP
ORP1
No pH+ORP
rH1
pH2
Chanage language 0% value 0.00Temperature2
pH
100% value 14.00pH
ORP2
rH2
Next Finish
*1 Next
Finish
Date/Time Measurement setup
Format YYYY/MM/DD Measurement pH+ORP Monitor display
YYYY/MM/DD
pH
MM/DD/YYYY
Date 2010/03/03 ORP
DD/MM/YYYY
pH+ORP
Time 17:04:07 pH+rH
rH
Next Next
Next
Next
Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000 Pt1000
Pt100
Unit C 3kBalco
C
8k55
F
PTC10k
6k8
500
PH
Next
*2 Next
*1: The Measurement setup screen appears only when pH + ORP is selected on the Sensor setup screen.
*2: If two sensors are connected, the second sensor can also be set up.
Figure 3.2 Quick setup
n Date/Time
The date display format can be selected from among the three types.
Enter the date or time of day by using the numerical keys.
For details, see section 4.6.4.
n Sensor setup
Select a suitable electrode from among the displayed electrode types and set it up.
For details, see section 4.1.
n Measurement setup
Select a suitable measurement parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
Measurement parameter setup can be made only when pH + ORP is selected on the Sensor
setup screen.
For details, see section 4.2.1.
n Temperature settings
Select a suitable temperature element from among those displayed and set it up.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 4.2.2.
n mA (output)
Select a suitable process parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
For example, the mA output of pH has been set to 0 14 pH at factory shipment. If the resolution
needs to be improved, set a suitable value for the process.
For details, see section 4.3.
If two sensors are connected, pressing on the Main display changes the display to the
Home display shown in Figure 3.4.
If only one sensor is connected, is grayed out and disabled on the Main display.
Tag:PH
10.38 pH
25.0 C
19 mV
4mA PH1 20mA
Tag:PH pH
10.38
25.0 C
19 mV
Tag:PH pH
6.35
24.9 C
24 mV
On the Home display, pressing of the 1st sensor (top) or 2nd sensor (bottom) causes the
display of the selected sensor to appear on the Main display.
On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.
NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition 3
(see section 4.7.1). For example, on the default condition of pH measurement, the 1st display
item is pH, the 2nd display item is temperature, and the 3rd display item is empty.
When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 4.7.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.
Monitor display Tag:PH pH
10.38
25.0 C
10.38
19.00 mV
Home display
Tag:PH pH
6.35
24.9 C
6.35
24.40 mV
6.35
2nd display item 25.0 C pH
3rd display item 19.00 mV 24.9 C
24.40 mV
4mA pH1 20mA 4mA pH2 20mA
Tag:PH Tag:PH PH
25.0 C
19.00 mV
10.38 pH 25.0 C
19.00 mV 10.38 pH
4mA pH1 20mA 4mA pH1 20mA
*
2010/02/15 16:04:07
HOLD Last calibrated at
-------- ------
FAIL Calibration due at
-------- ------
WASH Projected maintenance
-- (no meaning)
Projected replacement
-- (no meaning)
Next Next
HOUSING ASSY:
Module Pdn No. BBBB2222
Software Revision 2.10
HART Device Revision 2
(Fig.3.9)
Next
*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.
n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 4.3.
n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in
communication setup.
l Zero
= calibrated sensor offset in mV. Theoretically, the sensor reads 0 mV in a buffer solution of pH
7. The ZERO value indicates the condition of the sensor. The trend of ZERO drift of the sensor is
used to predict the lifetime of the sensor.
ZERO can also be displayed in pH units and then it represents the pH value where the sensor 3
output is 0 mV at 25C. Setting can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup
Calibration settings Zero and Slope units.
Setting of the zero value can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Zero/Slope/ITP. For details, see section 4.2.4.
l Slope
= calibrated efficiency of the sensor unit as a percentage of the theoretical slope of the sensor
unit. The theoretical slope follows the NERNST equation and is 59.16 mV/pH (at 25C). The
SLOPE can be calibrated only after a two-point calibration in buffer solutions with a different pH
value. A low slope indicates that the sensor is not clean or is faulty.
The SLOPE can also be displayed as a mV/pH value at 25C if the user has defined this variable
as mV/pH in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration settings Zero and Slope
units.
Setting of the slope value can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Zero/Slope/ITP. For details, see section 4.2.4.
+mV
Theoretical value
pH7, 0mV
pH0
pH14
Zero
PH
l Sensor
Represents the electromotive force of the sensor.
l Impedance 1
For a PH sensor, Impedance shows electrical resistance of the glass membrane electrode. The
FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the impedance to know damage of the electrode.
For an ORP sensor, Impedance shows electrical resistance of metal electrode.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the impedance to know the surface condition of smudge and
the snapping of sensor wires. In case of Input Impedance setting is High and the measured
input-1 impedance value is higher than 100 k, the display shows M RANGE. The measured
input-1 impedance value is lower than 100 k, display shows BAD.
l Impedance 2
Impedance shows the electrical resistance of the reference electrode liquid junction. The liquid
junction forms the electrolytic contact between the reference electrode and the measuring
electrode, so it must be kept clean and filled with conductive electrolyte. Otherwise the
measurement will suffer from instability, drift and measuring errors. The electrical impedance is
one of the most important.
In case of Input Impedance setting is High and the measured input-2 impedance value is
higher than 100 k,the display shows M RANGE. The measured input-2 impedance value is
lower than 100 k, display shows BAD.
If both impedance measurements are disabled (Error setting: Off), the display shows - - - - (bar).
If either impedance measurement 1 or 2 is enabled, the display shows both the impedance
values.
n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled.
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 4.2.7.
NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)
n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.
n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.
n Projected maintenance
The projected maintenance function predicts the date when the sensor unit will need recalibrating
for maintaining measurement accuracy. The function checks the input-2 impedance (reference
impedance) every 24 hours.
The function predicts the date when the input-2 impedance will cross the upper or lower limits,
and indicates the date and its status (the status is displayed in parentheses).
Upper limit
Value
Lower limit
3
Figure 3.8
The status shows the certainty of the projected maintenance date in terms of the correlation
coefficient R. Tables 3.1 and 3.2 show respective display patterns.
Table 3.1 Display pattern of the projected maintenance date
Projected date -- 0-1 month 1-3 months 3-6 months 6-12 months Over 1 year
- - : cannot be predictable due to insufficient data
Table 3.2 Display pattern of the status
(- - - - -) (Poor) (Reasonable) (Excellent)
Status
(R < 0.50) (0.50 R < 0.70) (0.70 R < 0.85) (0.85 R < 1.00)
n Projected replacement
The projected replacement function predicts the date when the sensor will need replacing for
maintaining the measurement accuracy, based on the pH zero and pH slope on each calibration,
and reference impedance (input-2 impedance) after each calibration. The projected replacement
date is predicted based on these parameters stored upon calibration, and displayed the same as
that of projected maintenance. For details, see the description about the projected maintenance.
Since three parameters (pH zero, pH slope, and input-2 impedance after calibration) are used for
this projection, the nearest coming day is selected as the projected replacement date from the
extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method. PH
n PH module (sensor)
With this screen, you can check the module productions number and software revision of the
installed module.
n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.
n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has two types of logbook per sensor to store history information on
events, such as changed settings and calibrations.
By selecting one of the logbooks that you wish to check, you can retrieve and check this
information. Storage of history information on each event in a logbook or which logbook to use for
storage can be set up on the Configure logbook screen. For details, see section 4.5.
To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered.
When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 4.6.3.)
Read Logbook:
(Fig.3.6)
logbook1-1
logbook1-1
logbook1-2
logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 Memorandum:
Power on **
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced
Finish
logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on
Enter?
No No
Yes
Finish
** When storing message manually.
Tag: PH pH1
Measurement value (pH)
12.00 10.38pH
Max. and min. values on this display
8.40
Current process value 3
5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum
Time
Figure 3.10 Trend screen
The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.
Tag: PH pH1
mA
20 12.00 10.38pH
8.40
12
5.60
4
15.00 2.50
Tag: PH Temperature1
12.00 25.0C
PH
8.40
5.60
2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup
Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press
to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD, Temporary output), read chapter 5, and for commissioning, read chapter
4.
4. COMMISSIONING OF pH/ORP
This chapter describes how to check and change settings from the Commissioning screen.
When you move to the Commissioning screen, the output is held.
Execute &Setup Commissioning
Execute: Sensor setup
Calibration/Wash Measurement setup
HOLD Output setup
Temporary output Error configuration
Logbook configuration
Setup: Advanced setup 4
Comissioning Display setup
Change language Calculated data setup
Start Quick Setup
Figure 3.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.
On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 4.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Sensor type first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options change
accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 4.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of pH/ORP in the
attached CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of pH/ORP and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
PH
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument.
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section 4.6.1).
NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 4.1) are crucial for measurement.
If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the parameters that may
initialize other values, see Appendix 1.
For best results, connect a liquid earth to terminal 14. For details of the wiring connections,
see Section 2.5.1. If there is no liquid earth, the sensor diagnostic function is disabled; set all of
Impedance 1 too high/low and Impedance 2 too high/low in Error configuration to Off so that
no related error is caused.
NOTE
The selection of Sensor type determines the menu structure throughout the instrument.
When pH + ORP is specified as the sensor type, the object under measurement will be displayed
at the top of Measurement setup.
If the sensor type is changed from pH to ORP, part of the relevant setup is reset, requiring
reconfiguration.
When ORP is specified, and when an ORP sensor doesnt have any temperature element,
set both of Temperature too high/low in Error configuration to Off so that no related error is
caused. (Refer to the section 4.4.) Without temperature input, a temperature shown on the Main
display or the Home display is the maximum or the minimum temperature of the temperature
elements range set on the Temperature settings. Setting in Display setup can make
temperature value on the display not to be displayed. (Refer to the section 4.7.)
PH
4.2 Measurement setup
This section describes how to set up various parameters relating to measurements.
Measurements are performed based on the measurement parameter setup.
For measurement setup, part of the menu structure of settable items changes depending on the
Sensor type selected in 4.1 Sensor setup.
4.2.1 Measurement
If pH or ORP is selected in Sensor type, a measurement type does not need to be selected
and it is not displayed.
If pH + ORP is selected in Sensor type, five measurement types can be selected for the
Measurement item at the top of the Measurement setup screen. Select a suitable measurement
type for the application.
Moreover, associated items are added to parameters in Error configuration, Display setup,
etc.; check the setting condition of each item.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix
n Temperature compensation
This compensation of pH value is performed on the Nernst equation.
Two methods can be used: Automatic and Manual. Select Automatic when a temperature
element is used, or select Manual when a manually set temperature is used.
NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should be
set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display or the Home display is this
manually set temperature.
n Reference temperature
Set a reference temperature to which the measured pH value must be compensated. Normally
25C is used, so this temperature is chosen as the default value.
l TC
This method uses the linear compensation function.
It is possible to adjust the temperature coefficient (TC) factor directly. If the temperature
coefficient factor of the sample liquid is known from laboratory experiments or has been
previously determined, it can be entered here.
This TC is a pH variation to 1 C (pH/T). Adjust the value between -0.1 to 0.1 pH/C.
In combination with the reference temperature setting, a linear compensation function is
obtained, which is suitable for all kinds of chemical solutions.
When the temperature or the precompensated pH value is out of the range of the temperature
compensation matrix, the temperature compensation error (warning) will be issued. This is not a
device error.
In this case, however, the temperature compensation is performed by extrapolation.
4
NOTE
To display the precompensated pH value, set the Process Temp. Compensation to None.
Select Measurement setup Temp. compensation Process Temp. Compensation.
l NEN6411
This algorithm takes into account the dissociation of water in strong acid and strong alkaline
solutions. It is particularly useful for pH measurement of boiler feed water.
n pH settings
l Zero and Slope units
Zero is an alternative to Asymmetry Potential. The method of zero (aspot) unit conforms to the
DIN standard for IEC 60746-2 instruments. Zero is defined in pH or mV.
The unit of Slope (sensitivity) is mV/pH or % (with the theoretical value as 100%).
l Zero/Slope/ITP
You can enter Zero (aspot), Slope (sensitivity), and ITP values directly in the screen displayed.
These data can be obtained from the manufacturer of the probe, by the users laboratory, etc.
NOTE
It is not necessary to enter this data. In most cases, as the FLXA202/FLXA21 automatically does
this while performing calibration, the feature is used in the case of special electrode systems or
where calibration in the process environment is not possible. See Chapter 5.
a: Actual change
d b: Zero and slope calculated from
the calibration data
c: Zero and slope calculated from
Zero, Slope
b
c
Calibration
Time
Figure 4.3 Auto correct
n ORP settings
l Limits and timing
Zero High/Low
Zero (aspot) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new zero exceeds
these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures and
calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be adjusted to
suit the application and the users criterion.
Slope High/Low
Slope (sensitivity) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new slope
exceeds these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures
and calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be
adjusted to suit the application and the users criterion. PH
Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this setpoint, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.
Stabilization time
During calibration, the stability of the ORP value is constantly monitored. When variations of the
ORP value are within a value set in Step Range over this stabilization time set here, the value
is regarded as being stable. If the ORP value does not stabilize within 10 minutes, calibration is
aborted.
Calibr. interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will be notified according to the setting in Calib. time exceeded in the error
configuration.
l Zero/Slope
You can enter zero and slope values directly.
4.2.6 Concentration
Generally pH values are not converted into concentrations. Following linear conversion is not
suitable for a lot of measurements.
by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.
The setting parameters include Input 1 imp., Input 2 imp., Progress time, and Heat cycle.
When input impedance is set High (section 4.2.5), FINE value can be changed. When input 4
impedance is set Low, its High limit and Low limit will be the limits for diagnostic.
It is also possible to set the Bad limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle
temp and Heat cycle time of the heat cycle.
l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.
Process parameter
The available process parameters depend on the selected Sensor type on the Sensor setup
and the selected Measurement type on the Measurement setup.
The output of the selected process parameter is shown as a bar on the bottom of the Main
display or the Home display. And its parameter symbol (for example, PH1 or Diff-pH) is shown
above the bar, too. When a selected process parameter is displayed as a measurement value,
the top left number or character is turned to be white number or character on black background
(for example, or ). (Refer to the section 1.3.)
PH
Calculated data and Redundant system are available when two modules are installed on the
instrument. And, these functions are available when the pH (or the parameter including pH)
or the ORP is selected on the Sensor type setting and the Measurement type setting. The
parameter for the 1st module and the 2nd module should be the same. For wrong selection, an
error is given.
When the process parameter is set at Calculated of Redundant, dont change the Sensor
type or the Measurement type. If it is changed, the process parameter will go back to the
default.
Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered.)
Burn
Select the designated output in case of a fault from among Off, Low, and High. See 4.4 Error
configuration to set the output.
Off: Output depends on the measured value.
Low: Output is fixed to 3.6 mA
High: Output is fixed to 22.0 mA.
Damping time
This is the time taken for a response to a step input change to reach 90% of the final value
(attenuation time). Set this time in sec.
l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.
n Configure Hold
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 5.4.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.
During the Commissioning or the Quick Setup, the mA output is automatically held. The preset
value depends on a setting on the Last or fixed.
Last: The preset value is a value measured just before hold condition.
Fixed: The preset value is a value set in the Fixed value mA.
When the Fixed is selected, set a mA value in the Fixed value mA.
4
Selection on the Hold during Calibration/Wash decides to activate or deactivate the hold
function automatically during calibration or wash.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
Disabled: No automatic hold function
Only when the PH201G is selected on the Communication, the message of Hold during
Calibration/Wash is displayed. On other selections, the message of Hold during Calibration is
displayed.
This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (4.3 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting PH
is appropriate.
The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/3 to 3/3
screens.
CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.
NOTE
The Impedance 1 too high/too low and Impedance 2 too high/too low error items are displayed
in the Error configuration screen. In general, for a pH sensor, Impedance 1 means glass
electrode, and for an ORP sensor, it means metal electrode. Impedance 2 represents the
reference electrode in all cases. The Impedance 1 too high/too low and Impedance 2 too high/
too low errors are applied to sensors with a liquid earth. Sensors with a liquid earth include
PH8EFP, PH8ERP, PH8EHP, OR8ERG, OR8EFG, etc. For sensors not equipped with a liquid
earth, these errors should all be set to Off; these sensors include HA405, HA406, DPA406,
DPA405, DPAS405, HF405, HA485, DPA485, etc. Moreover, for measuring a solution with low
conductivity such as when using a pH meter for pure water, set the Impedance 2 too high error
to Off. Otherwise, no impedance can be detected.
NOTE
When ORP is specified as a sensor type in Sensor setup, and when an ORP sensor, such as
OR8ERG and OR8EFG, doesnt have any temperature element, set both of Temperature too
high/low in Error to Off so that no related error is caused. Due to the open input of temperature
signal, a false error may happen as if temperature goes over a high limit or a low limit.
NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1 or 2-1. This logbook may be
full earlier. It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2 or 2-2.
For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1 or 1-2 can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (maximum 13 pages).
NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.
NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.
To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the
menu message.
parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
4.6.2 Tag
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is PH or FLXA21-PH. When two sensor modules are installed,
each module can have their own tag numbers.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main and home displays.
4.6.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.
When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.
4.6.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.
4.6.5 Communication
In Communication, select the communication setting from among None, HART, and PH201G.
The burn down current value is 3.6 mA.
NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.
In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value.
n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and
FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)
l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple 4
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.
l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.
l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.
If blank is selected for a parameter, items below that parameter must all be set to blank. If an item
is blank, those below it cannot be set to a status other than blank.
For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.
n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, Fail contact, and Wash
contact.
l Hold contact PH
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.
l Fail contact
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 4.4 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.
Tint Tint
Tw Tr Tw Tr
Tint Tint
Tw Tw Tr Tw Tw Tr
Figure 4.5
The instrument has a function for checking whether measurements are normally made after
wash, allowing you to check a sensor response.
The wash recovery check is performed by making use of the time to recover half the wash-cycle
pH change. The half the wash-cycle pH change recovery time replaces the relaxation time by the
recovery time.
Whether to conduct the wash recovery check can be set on the Error settings 2/3 screen. Half the
wash-cycle pH change refers to half the value (1/2pH) of the difference (pH) between the pH
value during normal measurement of an example in Figure 4.6 and the pH value detected during
wash. If the pH value during wash is greater than 1/2pH when 1/3 tR has elapsed, the electrode
is assumed to be good. If it is smaller than 1/2pH, then the electrode is assumed to be bad.
Good Electrode
4
pH
1/2pH
Bad Electrode
pH
1/3tR
tW : Wash Time tR : Recovery Time
Figure 4.6
NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.
PH
NOTE
Settable items differ depending on settings in Sensor setup and Measurement setup.
Figure 4.7 Display setup screens for a single module (left) and two modules (right)
l Main display
When one module is installed on the instrument, only the Main display is available.
Three measurement values can be set to display on the Main display as a primary value (1st
line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value (3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.
l Dual display
This screen is used to set items to be displayed in the top part (1st row) and bottom part (2nd
row) of the Home display. These settings are available when two sensors are installed in the
instrument.
When the Empty is selected for the 2nd row, the Home display can not be displayed.
l Individual display
When two modules are installed on the instrument, display items on the Main display for each
module can be set on these settings.
On the PH1 display or PH2 display screen, three measurement values can be set to display
on each Main display as a primary value (1st line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value
(3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.
4.7.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).
l X-axis: Timing
Select the X-axis timings time span on the trend graph display from a list.
4
l Y-axis: Limits
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.
NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.
NOTE
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.
PH
4.7.4 Adjust contrast
The LCD screen contrast can be adjusted.
Pressing the keys adjusts the contrast in 11 levels from +5 to 5 (including the default value
of 0).
To display the calculated result, select Calculated on the Dual display screen (Section 4.7.1).
(The setting on the Individual display has no effect.)
While displaying a calculated data, measurement value of the sensor 1 or sensor 2 can be
Sensor Sensor
1 2
checked on the each sensors display with pressing or at the lower right on the Main
display.
5. CALIBRATION OF pH/ORP
Before pH measurement, calibrate the pH sensor with the standard solution.
Before ORP measurement, check the electrode as a part of regular maintenance.
NOTE
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
4.7.3.)
5
Only when pH + ORP is selected
on the Sensor setup screen
Execute & Setup Calibration pH Calibration
Execute: Manual pH
Calibration Automatic ORP
HOLD Sample or Temperature
Temporary output Temperature calibration
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup
Press to select Execute: Calibration, choose the item to be calibrated, configure the
calibration settings, then perform calibration.
NOTE
Note the following when performing calibration with buffer solutions.
PH
1. Before starting a calibration, make sure the electrode system is properly cleaned and
the electrodes are fully functional. They must then be rinsed with clean water to avoid
contamination of the calibration solution(s).
2. Always use fresh buffer solution to avoid the risk of introducing errors from contaminated or
old solutions. Buffers supplied as liquids have a limited shelf life, especially alkaline buffers,
which absorb CO2 from the air.
3. Yokogawa strongly recommends NIST/DIN 19266 buffer standards for the best accuracy
and buffer capacity. Commercially adjusted buffers (e.g., pH 7.00, 9.00 or 10.00) are a
compromise as a standard, and are often supplied without a temperature dependency
curve. Their stability will never be as good as NIST (JIS equivalent) solutions.
Always ensure that the sensors are properly conditioned, clean and filled with the correct
electrolyte solution (if appropriate) before starting a calibration. Refer to the sensor instructions
for details.
5.1 pH calibration
There are the Manual, Automatic, and Sample modes of pH calibration.
NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)
l zero/slope
This calibration type is one-point or two-point calibration.
One-point calibration performs the zero adjustment only. Two-point calibration performs the zero
and slope adjustments.
l zero/slope/ITP(3point)
This calibration type is ITP-type three-point calibration.
If ITP does not have pH 7, three-point calibration is performed to obtain the zero (asymmetry),
slope (sensitivity), and ITP (isothermal point) for calibration.
Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The 2nd buffer solution should be pH 7 2.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperatures of the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be at least 20C higher or lower
than the temperature of the 1st buffer solution.
To calculate the pH value of the 3rd buffer solution (pH3cal), insert the pH and temperature
values of the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions and the temperature value of the 3rd buffer
solution into the following equation.
( tt
3 - t1
2 - t1
t -t
(273.15 + t2)(ITP - pH2) + (1 - 3 1 ) x (273.15 + t1)(ITP - pH1)
t2 - t1 )
pH3cal = ITP -
(273.15 + t3)
pHn: pH value of n-th buffer solution
Tn: Temperature of n-th buffer solution (C)
ITP: ITP value displayed in calibration settings (see section 4.2.4)
Assign 7.00 as the ITP value when a specific value is not available or for the first
calibration of a sensor.
Do not use the 3rd solution whose pH value is within pH3cal 1.
l zero/slope1,2(3point)
5
This calibration type is the line-segment type three-point calibration.
If the relation between electromotive force and pH is not in proportion for a wide range, divide the
relevant range into two sections and obtain the zero (asymmetry) and slope (sensitivity) in each
section to perform calibration.
Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)
l zero/slope/ITP(3point)
Calibration is performed in the sequence of the sequence selection menu (Table 5.1) of the
solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings. Perform calibration
by following the prompts on the screen.
Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The 2nd buffer solution in the buffer table in the Free programmable screen should be pH 7
2 (at 25C).
Either of the following conditions should be met.
- The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperature of the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions is at least 20C higher or lower than the
temperature of the 3rd buffer solution.
- The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperature of the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions is at least 20C higher or lower than the
temperature of the 1st buffer solution.
l zero/slope1,2(3point)
Calibration is performed in the sequence of the sequence selection menu (Table 5.1) of the
solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings. Perform calibration
by following the prompts on the screen.
Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
Table 5.1 Selection of Buffer Solutions in Three-point Calibration
Buffer settings Buffer sequence selection menus
NIST/DIN 19266 PH1.7PH6.9PH9.2
PH4.0PH6.9PH9.2
PH9.2PH6.9PH1.7
PH9.2PH6.9PH4.0
DIN 19267 PH4.7PH6.8PH9.2
PH9.2PH6.8PH4.7
US PH4.0PH7.0PH10.0
PH10.0PH7.0PH4.0
User defined buffer table1table2table3
able3table2table1
NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)
NOTE
PH
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 3.9.)
5.4 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last).
Use this menu to hold the output.
Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF.
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:PH
10.38 pH
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA PH1 20mA
Figure 5.2 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled
HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.
Press to select Execute: Temporary output and then choose the process parameter to be
assigned on the Temporary output screen.
When process parameter assignment has been modified, the indication at the upper left of the
screen changes to .
The feature is disabled the moment the screen returns to the Main display, and the setting
(process parameter in mA output setting) returns to the original condition.
6. OPERATION OF SC (Conductivity)
This chapter describes the screen operations of SC, the object to be measured.
Further details of screen operations can also be found in section 1.2.
Tag:SC
Advanced setup
Settings 7.5.1
Measurement setup Tag 7.5.2
Configure sensor 7.1.2 Passwords 7.5.3
Temperature settings 7.1.3 Date/Time 7.5.4
Temp. compensdation 7.1.4 Communication
Communication 7.5.5
Calibration settings 7.1.5
Concentration 7.1.6
Factory setup7.5.6
HART
PH201G SC
Sensor diag. settings 7.1.7
Display setup Main display
Main display 7.6.1 Additional text
Temp. comp. Dual display
Compensation: Manual Individual display Individual display
Method Trend 7.6.2 SC1 SC1 display
Temp.comp.1: TC SC2 Additional text
Auto Return 7.6.3
Matrix Matrix 1
Adjust contrast 7.6.4
User defined 1 Trend
Temp.comp.2: TC MONITOR display 7.6.5
User defined 2 x-axis: Timing
Matrix
Y-axis: Limits
User defined 1
Concentration Enter values
Define table Concentr. table
Enter values
Figure 6.1 Menu structure of SC (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)
NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display or the Home display when the MONITOR display is disabled).
Next Conduct2-TC2
Next
Next
Next
Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000 Pt1000
Pt100
Unit C
C Ni100
F 8k55
Pb36(JIS6k)
SC
Next
*1 Next
*1: If two sensors are connected, the second sensor can also be set up.
Figure 6.2 Quick setup
n Date/Time
The date display format can be selected from among the three types.
Enter the date or time of day by using the numerical keys.
For details, see section 7.5.4.
n Measurement setup
Select a suitable measurement parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
Measurement parameter setup can be made only when SC is selected on the Sensor setup
screen.
For details, see section 7.1.1.
n Configure sensor
From among the sensor types displayed on this screen, select an appropriate electrode for the
sensor used. The measurement units can also be selected from among /cm and /m.
The cell constant (factory default) is determined by factory calibration made during
manufacturing.
The cell constant is indicated on the sensor. If a new sensor is used, the cell constant indicated
here should be changed. When this value is changed, the real cell constant will also be changed.
For details, see section 7.1.2.
n Temperature settings
Select a suitable temperature element from among those displayed and set it up.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 7.1.3.
n mA (output)
Select an appropriate process parameter from among those displayed and set it. The mA output
has been set to 0 500 S/cm or 0 to 20 cm at factory shipment. If a high resolution is required
in a consistent measurement process, set this parameter to a value suitable for the process.
For details, see section 7.2.
If two sensors are connected, pressing on the Main display changes the display to the
Home display shown in Figure 6.4.
If only one sensor is connected, is grayed out and disabled on the Main display.
Tag:SC
10.38 mS/cm
25.0 C
Tag:SC mS/cm
10.38
25.0 C
Tag:SC mS/cm
6.35
24.9 C
6
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA
On the Home display, pressing of the 1st sensor (top) or 2nd sensor (bottom) causes the
display of the selected sensor to appear on the Main display.
On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.
NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition
(see section 7.6.1). In the default condition, the 1st display item is conductivity, the 2nd display
item is temperature, and the 3rd display item is empty.
When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 7.6.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.
10.38
25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm
10.38
Home display
Tag:SC mS/cm
6.35
24.9 C
6.35
24.40 mS/cm
6.35
2nd display item 25.0 C mS/cm
3rd display item 19.00 mS/cm 24.9 C
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA 24.40 mS/cm
4mA Conduct2-TC2 20mA
Tag:SC Tag:SC
25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm
10.38 mS/cm 25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm 10.38 mS/cm
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA 4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA
4
15.00 Reset welness data Yes
Next Next No
*
2010/02/15 16:04:07
HOLD Last calibrated at
-------- ------
FAIL Calibration due at
-------- ------
Projected Calibration
-- (no meaning)
Next
Next
Next Next
HOUSING ASSY:
Module Pdn No. 23456789
Software Revision 2.10
HART Device Revision 2
(Fig. 6.8)
Next
*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.
n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 7.2.
n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in 6
communication setup.
n c.c. (factory)
This parameter displays the cell constant (factory setting).
The cell constant (factory setting) is determined by factory calibration made during sensor
manufacturing. This value can be set in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor setup.
The cell constant is indicated on the sensor or cable label.
n c.c. (adjusted)
This parameter displays the cell constant (adjusted).
The cell constant (adjusted) is a cell constant that has been calibrated and is set by calibration
action.
When the systems cell constant is adjusted on-line by calibration using a process solution or
buffer solution, a new cell constant is logged here. The difference between this value and the
default value set at factory shipment will not be large. If there is a large difference between them,
check whether the sensor is broken or contaminated.
n Temp. comp. 1
This parameter shows the temperature compensation method for 1st measurement. The setting
is made in Commissioning Measurement setup Temp. comp.
n Temp. comp. 2
This parameter shows the temperature compensation method for 2nd measurement. The setting SC
is made in Commissioning Measurement setup Temp. comp.
2nd measurement does not imply that two measurements can be made individually, but it means
that two types of compensation methods can be configured, which enables two phases to be
monitored accurately in the same process. An example is monitoring the switching between
process and washing solutions.
n Polarization
This parameter indicates the degree of polarization of the sensor. It is an index of the degree
of sensor contamination (adherents). The greater the value, the more the polarization has
progressed. If the value is high, maintenance should be performed on the sensor as soon as
possible.
n Sensor Ohm
This parameter represents the non-compensated resistance of the sensor.
n USP
USP stands for United States Pharmacopeia and indicates the margin of safety for the water for
injection (WFI) conductivity at each temperature as a percentage.
n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled.
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 7.1.7.
The Reset wellness data button can reset wellness data.
When a sensor is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 6.8.)
n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.
n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.
n Projected replacement
The projected maintenance function predicts the date when the sensor unit will need cleaning or
recalibrating for maintaining measurement accuracy. This function checks the cleanliness of the
sensor by monitoring the polarization of the electrodes every 24 hours and the cell constant after
the calibration. Clean the sensor before the predicted date.
The function predicts the following two dates:
When the cell constant crosses the upper or lower limits
When the value of the polarization of the electrodes reaches the alarm point (15% or more).
The function displays the earlier date with the status (the status is displayed in parentheses).
As shown in Figure 6.7, the date is predicted based on the intersection point of the upper or lower
limits and the extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method.
Upper limit
Value
Lower limit
Figure 6.7
Status
(- - - - -) (Poor) (Reasonable) (Excellent) 6
(R < 0.50) (0.50 R < 0.70) (0.70 R < 0.85) (0.85 R < 1.00)
n SC module (sensor)
With this screen, you can check the module productions number and software revision of the
installed module.
n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.
n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has two types of logbook per sensor to store history information on
events, such as changed settings and calibrations.
By selecting one of the logbooks that you wish to check, you can retrieve and check this
information. Storage of history information on each event in a logbook or which logbook to use for
storage can be set up on the Configure logbook screen. For details, see section 7.4.
History information on events are automatically stored on the preset conditions.
In addition to this storing, following three messages can be manually stored in the logbook;
"Sensor washed by hand", "Module replaced", "Sensor replaced"
To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered. SC
When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 7.5.3.)
Read Logbook:
(Fig.6.6)
logbook1-1
logbook1-1
logbook1-2
logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 Memorandum:
Power on **
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced
Finish
logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on
Enter?
No No
Yes
Finish
** When storing message manually.
NOTE
Updating the trend screen setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.
Tag: SC Conduct1-TC1
5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum 6
Time
Figure 6.9 Trend screen
The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.
Tag: SC Conduct1-TC1
mA
20 12.00 10.38mS/cm
8.40
12
5.60
4
15.00 2.50
Tag: SC Temperature1
12.00 25.0C
8.40
5.60
2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40 SC
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup
Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press
to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD, Temporary output), read chapter 8, and for commissioning, read chapter
7.
7. COMMISSIONING OF SC
(Conductivity)
This chapter describes how to check and change settings from the Commissioning screen.
When you move to the Commissioning screen, the output is held.
Figure 6.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.
On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 7.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Measurement and Sensor type first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options
change accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 7.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of SC in the attached
CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of SC and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument. SC
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section 7.5.1).
NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 7.1) are crucial for measurement.
If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the parameters that may
initialize other values, see Appendix 2.
7.1.1 Measurement
Select a measurement parameter from Conductivity, Resistivity, Concentration, and Conduct.
+ Concentr. The setting of the measurement parameter changes the menu structure in Error
configuration, Display setup, etc. accordingly.
7
7.1.2 Configure sensor
This section describes how to configure the sensor to be connected.
l Sensor type
Choose the sensor type from 2-electrode and 4-electrode.
Two-electrode sensors are usually used for conductivity and/or resistivity measurements.
However, polarization of the electrodes may occur at high conductivity ranges, which may cause
an error in conductivity measurement. To avoid this, use 4-electrode sensors.
l Measuring unit
Either /cm or /m can be chosen here.
The process values will be expressed in S/cm or S/m in conductivity mode or .cm or .m in
resistivity mode, respectively.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix
NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should be
set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display or the Home display is this
manually set temperature.
l Reference temperature
Set a reference temperature to which the measured value must be compensated. Normally 25C
is used, so this temperature is chosen as the default value.
l TC
This method uses the linear compensation function.
For how to calculate a temperature coefficient of the compensation function, see l
Temperature compensation coefficient (TC) on page App.2-1.
l NaCl
This method uses the standard temperature compensation function with NaCl solution.
For details, see l NaCl (standard temperature compensation) on page App.2-1.
l Matrix
This method uses the temperature compensation matrix, which is a table of the conductivity
values at different temperatures and concentrations for a specific solution. The measured
conductivity is compensated based on this matrix to the conductivity at the reference
temperature.
Prepared matrixes and user-defined matrixes can be used. Two different user-defined
matrixes are available.
For details, see l Matrix on page App.2-3.
When the measured temperature or the precompensated conductivity is out of the range, the
temperature compensation error (warning) will be issued. This is not a device error.
For more details, see Temperature compensation error on App. 2-8.
Any two of these three methods can be set for conductivity measurement as Temp.comp.1 and
Temp.comp.2. The result of either method can be output or displayed (see 7.2 Output setup or
7.6 Display setup).
When Measurement is set to Conduct. + Concentr. for the Measurement, only one method
can be set.
l c.c. high
High limit of the cell constant expressed as a % of the nominal value. During calibration this value
is used to check if the calibrated cell constant remains within reasonable limits.
l c.c. low
Low limit of the cell constant expressed as a % of the nominal value. During calibration this value
is used to check if the calibrated cell constant remains within reasonable limits.
l Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this set value, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.
SC
l Stabilization time
During calibration, the stability of the measurement is constantly monitored. When variations of
the value are within a value set in Step Range over this stabilization time set here, the value is
regarded as being stable. If the value does not stabilize within 10 minutes, calibration is aborted.
l Calibration interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will be notified according to the setting in Calib. time exceeded in the error
configuration.
7.1.6 Concentration
The Concentration can be set only when Conduct. + Concentr. or Concentration is selected
for the Measurement in the Measurement setup menu.
The corresponding concentration given by a measured conductivity can be shown on the Main
display or the Home display.
by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.
The setting parameters include Progress time and Heat cycle. It is also possible to set the Bad
limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle temp and Heat cycle time of the
heat cycle.
l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.
Process parameter
Available process parameters depend on the selected Measurement item in Measurement
setup. Refer to Table 7.2.
Calculated data and Redundant system are available when two modules are installed on
the instrument. And, these functions are available when the Conductivity (or the parameter
including conductivity) or the Resistivity is selected on the Measurement type setting. The
parameter for the 1st module and the 2nd module should be the same. For wrong selection, an
error is given.
When the process parameter is set at Calculated of Redundant, dont change the
Measurement type. If it is changed, the process parameter will go back to the default.
<Calculated>
For details, see section 7.7.
<Redundant >
On the Redundant system, when a sensor (Sensor 1) of the 1st module fails, the output is SC
automatically switched to the output of the 2nd module.
After repairing the Sensor 1, manual reset of redundant system is necessary to return to the
output of 1st module from the output of the 2nd module.
Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered.)
Burn
Select the designated output in case of a fault from among Off, Low, and High. See 7.3 Error
configuration to set the output.
Off: Output depends on the measured value.
Low: Output is fixed to 3.6 mA
High: Output is fixed to 22.0 mA.
Damping time
This is the time taken for a response to a step input change to reach 90% of the final value
(attenuation time). Set this time in sec.
l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.
n Configure Hold
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 8.7.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.
Selection on the Hold during Calibration decides to activate or deactivate the hold function
automatically during calibration.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
7
Disabled: No automatic hold function
This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (7.2 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting
is appropriate.
The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/3 to 3/3
screens.
Table 7.3 Error configuration
Display item Description Default
Conductivity too high
Conductivity or resistivity is lower than the minimum limit. Warn.
(or Concentration)
Conductivity too low
Conductivity or resistivity is higher than the maximum limit. Warn. SC
(or Concentration)
Temperature too high Measured process temperature is higher than the maximum limit. Warn.
Temperature too low Measured process temperature is lower than the minimum limit. Warn.
Polarization detec Polarization of the electrodes is detected. Off
Calibr. time exceeded Calibration time exceeds the calibration interval (see Section 7.1.5). Off
USP Conductivity exceeds the USP limit. Off
Configuration error:
The temperature compensation matrix is not defined properly (see
1st comp. matrix Fault
Section 7.1.4).
2nd comp. matrix
Concentration table The concentration table is not defined properly (see Section 7.1.6). Fault
CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.
NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued. See For all temperature compensation on App. 2-8.
l USP
The suitable error category for USP<645> monitoring can be set. When this is set, it is checked
whether the non-temperature-compensated conductivity is higher than the limit value directed on
the stage 1 of the procedure described on USP<645>. (Refer to the App.2)
NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1 or 2-1. This logbook may be
full earlier. It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2 or 2-2.
For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1 or 1-2 can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (maximum 13 pages).
NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.
7.5.1 Settings
In Settings, select an item to be set as the default value from among No action, Load factory
settings, Save user settings, and Load user settings. 7
When the default values are loaded, the instrument will be restarted. (In the case of Save user
settings, it will not be restarted.)
The following parameters are not included in the defaults:
Tag
The contents of all logbooks
NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.
To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the
menu message.
If you select Load factory settings, the instrument will be set to the default settings at factory
shipment.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the factory settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
When Save user settings is selected, the current settings can be saved as the defaults.
When this item is selected, the user settings will start to be saved immediately. After saving the
parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults. SC
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
7.5.2 Tag
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is SC or FLXA21-SC. When two sensor modules are installed,
each module can have their own tag numbers.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main and home displays.
7.5.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.
When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.
7.5.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.
7.5.5 Communication
In Communication, select the communication setting from among None, HART, and PH201G.
The burn down current value is 3.6 mA.
NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.
In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value.
n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and
FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)
l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.
l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.
l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.
If blank is selected for a parameter, items below that parameter must all be set to blank. If an item
is blank, those below it cannot be set to a status other than blank.
For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.
n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, and Fail contact.
l Hold contact
7
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.
l Fail contact
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 7.3 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.
NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.
NOTE SC
Settable items differ depending on settings in Measurement setup.
Figure 7.3 Display setup screens for a single module (left) and two modules (right)
l Dual display
This screen is used to set items to be displayed in the top part (1st row) and bottom part (2nd
row) of the Home display. These settings are available when two sensors are installed in the
instrument.
When the Empty is selected for the 2nd row, the Home display can not be displayed.
l Individual display
When two modules are installed on the instrument, display items on the Main display for each
module can be set on these settings.
On the SC1 display or SC2 display screen, three measurement values can be set to display
on each Main display as a primary value (1st line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value
(3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.
7.6.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).
l X-axis: Timing
Select the X-axis timings time span on the trend graph display from a list.
l Y-axis: Limits
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.
NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.
NOTE
7
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.
To display the calculated result, select Calculated on the Dual display screen. (Section 7.6.1.)
(The setting on the Individual display has no effect.)
While displaying a calculated data, measurement value of the sensor 1 or sensor 2 can be
Sensor Sensor
1 2
checked on the each sensors display with pressing or at the lower right on the Main
display.
8. CALIBRATION OF SC (Conductivity)
The cell constant of a conductivity meter does not change during operation, as long as it remains
undamaged, and clean. Therefore, it is vital that in any calibration check, the first step should be
to clean the sensor, or at least to check its cleanliness. After cleaning, ensure that the sensor is
carefully rinsed in distilled water to remove all traces of the cleaning medium.
The cell constant is indicated on the nameplate or cable label of the SC sensor.
For input of the cell constant, see section 7.1.2.
NOTE
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
8
8.6.3.)
Calibration for conductivity can be selected from Cell constant (manual), Cell constant
(automatic), Air calibration, and Sample. In most cases, Air calibration is not required.
NOTE
The standard instrument to be used in calibration with a process solution should always be
accurate. Yokogawa recommends that the Model SC72 pocket conductivity meter be used for
this purpose. SC
Where temperature compensation 1 (SC1) and temperature compensation 2 (SC2) have been
configured, the configured temperature compensation is effective even during calibration.
Therefore, the reading is the value converted to a conductivity value at the reference temperature
set in Temperature settings.
There are temperature compensation 1 (SC1) and temperature compensation 2 (SC2), but this
does not mean that calibration is required twice. It means that either SC1 or SC2 temperature
compensation should be selected and calibration should be made once to obtain the cell
constant. The cell constant after calibration can be checked on the Detail screen.
NOTE
When a sensor is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 6.9.)
NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued. See For all temperature compensation on App. 2-8.
8.4 Sample
With the sensor in situ, a sample can be taken for laboratory analysis. Sample calibration records
the time and reading, and holds these in memory until the analysis has been completed. The
laboratory data can then be entered regardless of the current process value, without the need for
calculations.
When sample calibration is made with temperature compensation activated, the types of
temperature compensation for laboratory analysis equipment should be matched. Use of a
different type of temperature compensation between equipment causes an error. The standard
conductivity meter to be used should always be based on the accurate and same temperature
compensation calculation method. Yokogawa recommends that the Model SC82 pocket
conductivity meter be used for this purpose.
Press [Take Sample] to record a collected sample value in memory. Re-enter the Sample Cal.
screen and press [Start calibration] to perform a sample calibration. This updates the recorded
data.
8.7 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last).
Use this menu to hold the output.
Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF. SC
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:SC
10.00 mS/cm
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA
Figure 8.8 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled
HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.
Press to select Execute: Temporary output and then choose the process parameter to be
assigned on the Temporary output screen.
When process parameter assignment has been modified, the indication at the upper left of the
screen changes to .
The feature is disabled the moment the screen returns to the Main display, and the setting
(process parameter in mA output setting) returns to the original condition.
TC
Setup: SC1(Temp.comp.1)
Commissioning SC2(Temp.comp.2)
Change language Change language 2.7
Start Quick Setup
Quick setup Date/Time Measurement setup Configure sensor
9.2 10.5.4 10.1.1 10.1.2
Figure 9.1 Menu structure of ISC (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)
NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display when the MONITOR display is disabled).
Next Finish
Next
Finish
Time 17:04:07
Next
Next
Next
Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000 Pt1000
NTC30k
Unit C C
F
Next
Next
n Measurement setup
Select a suitable measurement parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
Measurement parameter setup can be made only when ISC is selected on the Sensor setup
screen.
For details, see section 10.1.1.
n Configure sensor
The measurement units can also be selected from among /cm and /m.
The cell constant (factory default) is determined by factory calibration made during
manufacturing.
The cell constant is indicated on the sensor. If a new sensor is used, the cell constant indicated
here should be changed. When this value is changed, the real cell constant will also be changed.
For details, see section 10.1.2.
n Temperature settings
Select a suitable temperature element from among those displayed and set it up.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 10.1.3.
n mA (output)
Select an appropriate process parameter from among those displayed and set it. The mA output
has been set to 0 500 S/cm or 0 to 20 cm at factory shipment. If a high resolution is required
in a consistent measurement process, set this parameter to a value suitable for the process.
For details, see section 10.2.
10.38 mS/cm
25.0 C
On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.
NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition
(see section 10.6.1). In the default condition, the 1st display item is conductivity, the 2nd display
item is temperature, and the 3rd display item is empty.
When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 10.6.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.
10.38 mS/cm
Monitor display
Tag:ISC
Tag:ISC Tag:ISC
25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm
10.00 mS/cm 25.0 C
19.00 mS/cm 10.00 mS/cm
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA 4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA
4
15.00 Reset welness data Yes
Next Next No
*
2010/02/15 16:04:07
HOLD Last calibrated at
-------- ------
FAIL Calibration due at
-------- ------
Projected Calibration
>12months (no meaning)
Next Next
Next Next
HOUSING ASSY:
Module Pdn No. 23456789
Software Revision 2.10
HART Device Revision 2
(Fig.9.7)
Next
*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.
n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 10.2.
n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in
communication setup.
n c.c. (factory)
This parameter displays the cell constant (factory setting).
The cell constant (factory setting) is determined by factory calibration made during sensor
manufacturing. This value can be set in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor setup.
The cell constant is indicated on the sensor or cable label.
n c.c. (adjusted) 9
This parameter displays the cell constant (adjusted).
The cell constant (adjusted) is a cell constant that has been calibrated and is set by calibration
action.
When the systems cell constant is adjusted on-line by calibration using a process solution or
buffer solution, a new cell constant is logged here. The difference between this value and the
default value set at factory shipment will not be large. If there is a large difference between them,
check whether the sensor is broken or contaminated.
n Temp. comp. 1
This parameter shows the temperature compensation method for 1st measurement. The setting
is made in Commissioning Measurement setup Temp. comp.
n Temp. comp. 2
This parameter shows the temperature compensation method for 2nd measurement. The setting
is made in Commissioning Measurement setup Temp. comp.
2nd measurement does not imply that two measurements can be made individually, but it means
that two types of compensation methods can be configured, which enables two phases to be
monitored accurately in the same process. An example is monitoring the switching between
process and washing solutions.
n Sensor Ohm
This parameter represents the non-compensated resistance of the sensor.
n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled. ISC
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 10.1.7.
The Reset wellness data button can reset wellness data.
When a sensor is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 9.7.)
n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.
n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.
n Projected replacement
The projected maintenance function predicts the date when the sensor unit will need cleaning or
recalibrating for maintaining measurement accuracy. The function checks the cleanliness of the
sensor by monitoring the cell constant after calibration. Clean the sensor before the predicted
date.
The function predicts the dates when the cell constant will cross the upper or lower limits and
displays the predicted date with the status (the status is displayed in parentheses).
As shown in Figure 9.6, the date is predicted based on the intersection point of the upper or lower
limits and the extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method.
Upper limit
Value
Lower limit
Figure 9.6
The status shows the certainty of the projected maintenance date in terms of the correlation
coefficient R. Tables 9.1 and 9.2 show respective display patterns.
Table 9.1 Display pattern of the projected maintenance date
Projected date -- 0-1 month 1-3 months 3-6 months 6-12 months Over 1 year
- - : cannot be predictable due to insufficient data
Table 9.2 Display pattern of the status
(- - - - -) (Poor) (Reasonable) (Excellent)
Status
(R < 0.50) (0.50 R < 0.70) (0.70 R < 0.85) (0.85 R < 1.00)
n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.
n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has two types of logbook per sensor to store history information on
events, such as changed settings and calibrations.
By selecting one of the logbooks that you wish to check, you can retrieve and check this
information. Storage of history information on each event in a logbook or which logbook to use for
storage can be set up on the Configure logbook screen. For details, see section 10.4.
History information on events are automatically stored on the preset conditions. 9
In addition to this storing, following three messages can be manually stored in the logbook;
"Sensor washed by hand", "Module replaced", "Sensor replaced"
To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered.
When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 10.5.3.)
Read Logbook:
(Fig.9.5)
logbook1-1
logbook1-1
logbook1-2
logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 Memorandum:
Power on **
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced
Finish
logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on ISC
Enter?
No No
Yes
Finish
** When storing message manually.
NOTE
Updating the trend screen setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.
Conduct1-TC1
Measurement value (mS/cm)
Tag: ISC
12.00 10.38mS/cm
Max. and min. values on this display
Current process value
8.40
5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum
Time
The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.
8.40
12
5.60
4
15.00 2.50
8.40
5.60
2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup
Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press
to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD), read chapter 11, and for commissioning, read chapter 10.
ISC
Figure 9.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.
On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 10.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Measurement first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options change
accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 10.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of ISC in the attached
CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of ISC and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument.
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section
10.5.1). ISC
NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 10.1) are crucial for
measurement. If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the
parameters that may initialize other values, see Appendix 3.
10.1.1 Measurement
Select a measurement parameter from Conductivity, Concentration, and Conduct. + Concentr.
The setting of the measurement parameter changes the menu structure in Error configuration,
Display setup, etc. accordingly.
l Measuring unit 10
Either /cm or /m can be chosen here.
The process values will be expressed in S/cm or S/m.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix
NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should
be set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display is this manually set
temperature.
l Reference temperature
The temperature compensation function converts the measured conductivity value to that at the
reference temperature. The reference temperature can be changed. The default value is 25C.
l TC
This method uses the linear compensation function.
For how to calculate a temperature coefficient of the compensation function, see l
Temperature compensation coefficient (TC) on page App.3-1.
l NaCl
This method uses the standard temperature compensation function with NaCl solution.
For details, see l NaCl (standard temperature compensation) on page App.3-1.
l Matrix
This method uses the temperature compensation matrix, which is a table of the conductivity
values at different temperatures and concentrations for a specific solution. The measured
conductivity is compensated based on this matrix to the conductivity at the reference
temperature.
Prepared matrixes and user-defined matrixes can be used. Two different user-defined
matrixes are available.
For details, see l Matrix on page App.3-3.
When the measured temperature or the precompensated conductivity is out of the range, the
temperature compensation error (warning) will be issued. This is not a device error.
For more details, see Temperature compensation error on App. 3-8.
Any two of these three methods can be set for conductivity measurement as Temp.comp.1 and
Temp.comp.2. The result of either method can be output or displayed (see 10.2 Output setup
or 10.6 Display setup).
When Measurement is set to Conduct. + Concentr. for the Measurement, only one method
can be set.
NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued.
Perform a zero-calibration using a dry sensor to prevent the cable from affecting the
measurement. If a terminal box (BA20) and extension cable (WF10) are used, perform the zero-
calibration while they are connected.
As the calibration is performed in air, the resistivity is infinite (open connection). Higher
conductivity values than the air adjust limit indicate that the cell is not in air or is still wet. To
prevent wrong air calibrations, a limit must be given here.
l c.c. high
High limit of the cell constant expressed as a % of the nominal value. During calibration this value
is used to check if the calibrated cell constant remains within reasonable limits.
l c.c. low
Low limit of the cell constant expressed as a % of the nominal value. During calibration this value 10
is used to check if the calibrated cell constant remains within reasonable limits.
l Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this set value, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.
l Stabilization time
During calibration, the stability of the measurement is constantly monitored. When variations of
the value are within a value set in Step Range over this stabilization time set here, the value is
regarded as being stable. If the value does not stabilize within 10 minutes, calibration is aborted.
l Calibration interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will be notified according to the setting in Calib. time exceeded in the error
configuration.
10.1.6 Concentration
The Concentration can be set only when Conduct. + Concentr. or Concentration is selected
for the Measurement in the Measurement setup menu.
The corresponding concentration given by a measured conductivity can be shown on the Main
display.
l Concentration table
Concentration can be calculated by using the temperature compensation matrix or the additional
concentration table.
By using the temperature compensation matrix ISC
Set the Additional table to Disabled. The concentration can be obtained from the
temperature compensation matrix (based on the relation between the conductivity at the
reference temperature and the concentration).
Select Temp. compensation Method, and then select Matrix. Next, choose a solution
or User defined 1 or 2 (see Section 10.1.4). The concentration cannot be obtained by any
other temperature compensation method (TC or NaCl).
By using the additional concentration table
The additional concentration table indicates the relation between the conductivity and the
concentration at the reference temperature. Set the Additional table to Enabled. The
concentration can be obtained from the additional concentration table.
After entering values, select Yes for Check values?. Values are interpolated into empty
cells. If any mandatory cells are left blank, an error will be issued. An error message is also
issued if there is any error in the concentration table.
After completing entering values in the additional concentration table, set Additional table
to Enabled.
by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.
The setting parameters include Progress time and Heat cycle. It is also possible to set the Bad
limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle temp and Heat cycle time of the
heat cycle.
l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.
Process parameter
Available process parameters depend on the selected Measurement item in Measurement
setup. Refer to Table 10.2.
The output of the selected process parameter is shown as a bar on the bottom of the Main
display. And its parameter symbol (for example, Conduct1-TC1) is shown above the bar, too.
When a selected process parameter is displayed as a measurement value, the top left number
or character is turned to be white number or character on black background (for example, ).
(Refer to the section 1.2.)
Table 10.2 List of Process Parameters
Sensor Measurement Process Parameters
Conduct1-TC1
Conductiivity Temperature1
Conduct1-TC2 Conduct1 - TC1 :
Conduct1-TC1
Conductivity of sensor 1
1 Concentration Temperature1
Temperature compensation 1
Concent1-TC2
Select the temperature compensation
Conduct1-TC1 method is section 10.1.4.
Conduct. + Concentr. Temperature1
Concent1-TC2
Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered.)
Damping time
This is the time taken for a response to a step input change to reach 90% of the final value 10
(attenuation time). Set this time in sec.
l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.
n Configure Hold
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 11.7.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.
During the Commissioning or the Quick Setup, the mA output is automatically held. The preset
value depends on a setting on the Last or fixed.
Last: The preset value is a value measured just before hold condition.
Fixed: The preset value is a value set in the Fixed value mA.
When the Fixed is selected, set a mA value in the Fixed value mA.
Selection on the Hold during Calibration decides to activate or deactivate the hold function
automatically during calibration.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
Disabled: No automatic hold function
This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status ISC
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (10.2 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting
is appropriate.
The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/3 to 3/3
screens.
CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.
NOTE
Use not Conductivity but (Conductivity x cell constant) to set the error limit for Conductivity too
high and Conductivity too low.
NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued.
NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1. This logbook may be full earlier.
It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2.
For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1 or 1-2 can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (maximum 13 pages).
NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.
10.5.1 Settings
In Settings, select an item to be set as the default value from among No action, Load factory
settings, Save user settings, and Load user settings. 10
When the default values are loaded, the instrument will be restarted. (In the case of Save user
settings, it will not be restarted.)
The following parameters are not included in the defaults:
Tag
The contents of all logbooks
NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.
To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the
menu message.
If you select Load factory settings, the instrument will be set to the default settings at factory
shipment.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the factory settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
When Save user settings is selected, the current settings can be saved as the defaults.
When this item is selected, the user settings will start to be saved immediately. After saving the
parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started. ISC
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
10.5.2 Tag
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is ISC or FLXA21-ISC.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main display.
10.5.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.
When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.
10.5.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.
10.5.5 Communication
Select a communication parameter from None, HART, or PH201G in Communication setup.
The burn down current is 3.9 mA when HART or PH201G is selected, and 3.6 mA when None is
selected.
NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.
In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value except that the burn down current is different.
n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)
l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.
l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.
l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.
If blank is selected for a parameter, items below that parameter must all be set to blank. If an item
is blank, those below it cannot be set to a status other than blank.
For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.
n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, and Fail contact.
l Hold contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.
l Fail contact
10
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 10.3 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.
NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.
NOTE
Settable items differ depending on settings in Measurement setup.
10.6.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).
l Y-axis: Limits
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.
NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.
NOTE
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.
NOTE
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
10.6.3.)
Calibration is carried out by measuring a solution which has a known conductivity and adjusting
the instrument to show the correct conductivity value.
Cell constant (manual), Cell constant (automatic)
A calibration solution can be prepared in the laboratory. A salt solution is prepared with a
known precise concentration. The temperature is stabilized to the reference temperature of the ISC
instrument (usually 25C). The actual conductivity of the solution is taken from literature data. The
typical calibration solutions include NaCl and KCl; see Appendix 3. To calibrate the instrument,
the sensor is removed from a process and suspended in the solution, the conductivity value from
the literature data is then entered and the calibration routine completed.
Make sure the sensor does not touch the sides of the container (see Figure 11.2).
Sample calibration
This calibration uses a process solution. In this method, the conductivity of the process solution
under measurement is measured with a standard instrument. In this case, care must be taken to
make the measurement at the reference temperature since differences in the type of temperature
compensation of the instruments may cause an error. With this method, it is not necessary to
remove the sensor from the process. Because the sensor is immersed in the process, errors
caused by the installation characteristics are compensated for.
Where temperature compensation 1 (SC1) and temperature compensation 2 (SC2) have been
configured, the configured temperature compensation is effective even during calibration.
Therefore, the reading is the value converted to a conductivity value at the reference temperature
set in Temperature settings.
There are temperature compensation 1 (SC1) and temperature compensation 2 (SC2), but this
does not mean that calibration is required twice. It means that either SC1 or SC2 temperature
compensation should be selected and calibration should be made once to obtain the cell
constant. The cell constant after calibration can be checked on the Detail screen.
NOTE
When a sensor is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 9.8.)
l Cell constant
The center value of the cell constant of the ISC40 sensor is 1.88 cm-1. The nominal cell constants
of individual sensors are indicated on the cable markers and the actual installation can change
this factor. If there is less than 30 mm spacing between a sensor and holder, in-situ calibration is
necessary to meet the specified accuracies.
If the sensor is installed in the stainless steel standard holder ISC40FFJ-S, the cell constant
is reduced by approximately 7%; enter a value 7% smaller than the value on the marker of
the sensor cable.
If the sensor is installed in the polypropylene standard holder ISC40FFJ-P, the cell constant
is increased by approximately 1%; enter a value 1% greater than the value on the sensor
cable marker.
If the sensor is installed in piping that is long in the axial direction with the cross section
as shown in Figure 11.3, the cell constant of the sensor installed in the piping (reference
data for a design center value of 1.88 cm-1) is as shown in Figure 11.3. A value obtained by
multiplying the value on the sensor cable marker and a value read from Figure 11.3 should
be entered.
X X
X= 30 mm (Min.)
Figure 11.2 Sensor in calibration solution
1.30
With the clean dry cell in open air, the reading should be zero. The air cal compensates for
excess cable capacitance, and gives a better accuracy at low readings. This should be done
when a sensor is installed or replaced. After some time in service, a dirty sensor may well show
a high zero offset because of fouling. Clean the sensor and try again. Moreover, air calibration
should be made in an environment free of electromagnetic interference.
Wait for the sensor to dry because air cal must be made with no current flow in the sensor, that is,
the sensor must be dried while being exposed to air.
NOTE
The temperature compensation is not performed around zero. In this case, a warning may be
issued.
Not being wet, the sensor measures the conductivity of air, which is close to zero. Because
zero conductivity is out of the range for temperature compensation (this range is based on the
temperature and conductivity of solutions and is preset to 0.033 S/cm at 20C), a warning may
be issued. This is not a device error.
The conductivity of air is zero and it does not have a temperature coefficient. Execute zero
calibration regardless of the warning.
11.4 Sample
With the sensor in situ, a sample can be taken for laboratory analysis. Sample calibration records
the time and reading, and holds these in memory until the analysis has been completed. The
laboratory data can then be entered regardless of the current process value, without the need for
calculations.
When sample calibration is made with temperature compensation activated, the types of
temperature compensation for laboratory analysis equipment should be matched. Use of a
different type of temperature compensation between equipment causes an error. The standard
conductivity meter to be used should always be based on the accurate and same temperature
compensation calculation method. Yokogawa recommends that the Model SC82 pocket
conductivity meter be used for this purpose.
Press [Take Sample] to record a collected sample value in memory. Re-enter the Sample Cal.
screen and press [Start calibration] to perform a sample calibration. This updates the recorded
data.
11.7 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last). 11
Use this menu to hold the output.
Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF.
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:ISC
10.00 mS/cm
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA Conduct1-TC1 20mA
Figure 11.10 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled
HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.
ISC
10.38 mg/L
12
25.0 C
Calibration
4mA Oxygen1 20mA Air calibration 14.1 Air calibration
Water Calibration 14.2 0%
Manual Slope Cal.14.3 100%
Temperature Cal. 14.4
Execute & Setup
Execute: Water calibration
Calibration HOLD 14.5 0%
HOLD 100%
Temporary output
Temporary output 14.6
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language Change language 2.7 Date/Time Measurement setup
13.6.4 13.2.1
Start Quick Setup
Quick setup Seneor setup Temperature settings
12.2 13.1 13.2.2
Figure 12.1 Menu structure of DO (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)
NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display or the Home display when the MONITOR display is disabled).
12
Next Finish
Next
Finish
Next
Next
Next
Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000
Pt1000
Unit C NTC22k
C
F
Next
*1 Next
*1: If two sensors are connected, the second sensor can also be set up.
Figure 12.2 Quick setup
n Date/Time DO
The date display format can be selected from among the three types.
Enter the date or time of day by using the numerical keys.
For details, see section 13.6.4.
n Sensor setup
Select a suitable electrode from among the displayed electrode types and set it up.
For details, see section 13.1.
n Configure sensor
On this screen, select the units and set the sensor sensitivity. If Polarograph is selected for the
sensor type, the polarograph application voltage can also be set. For details, see section 13.2.1.
For DO30G, set the sensor type to DO30G. The Available KOH parameter on the detail display
will be enabled.
n Temperature settings
Select a suitable temperature element from among those displayed and set it up.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 13.2.2.
n mA (output)
Select an appropriate process parameter from among those displayed and set it. If it is necessary
to improve the resolution, set it to a value suitable for the relevant process.
For details, see section 13.3.
If two sensors are connected, pressing on the Main display changes the display to the
Home display shown in Figure 12.4.
If only one sensor is connected, is grayed out and disabled on the Main display.
Tag:DO
10.38 mg/L
25.0 C
Tag:DO mg/L
10.38
25.0 C
Tag:DO mg/L
6.35
24.9 C
On the Home display, pressing of the 1st sensor (top) or 2nd sensor (bottom) causes the
display of the selected sensor to appear on the Main display.
On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.
NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition (see section
13.7.1). In the default condition, the 1st display item is oxygen, the 2nd display item is temperature, and the 3rd
display item is empty.
12
When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 13.7.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.
Monitor display Tag:DO mg/L
10.38
25.0 C
10.38
19.00 mg/L
Home display
Tag:DO mg/L
6.35
24.9 C
6.35
24.40 mg/L
6.35
2nd display item 25.0 C mg/L
3rd display item 19.00 mg/L 24.9 C
24.40 mg/L
4mA Oxygen1 20mA 4mA Oxygen2 20mA
Tag:DO Tag:DO
25.0 C
19.00 mg/L
10.38 mg/L 25.0 C
19.00 mg/L 10.38 mg/L
4mA Oxygen1 20mA 4mA Oxygen1 20mA
DO
12.4 Zooming in on details
Pressing on the Main display allows you to check detailed instrument information
(instrument information such as setup, sensor diagnosis, calibration, and module productions
number) through a transition of screens as shown in Figure 12.6.
In case of trouble, when you contact your nearest Yokogawa service center, please inform us
of the module and FLXA202/FLXA21 software revision displayed on the Detail screen and
other display information as well as the module productions number indicated on the nameplate
attached to the instrument.
4
15.00 Reset welness data Yes
Next Next No
*
2010/02/15 16:04:07
HOLD Last calibrated at
-------- ------
FAIL Calibration due at
-------- ------
WASH
Next Next
HOUSING ASSY:
Module Pdn No. 23456789
Software Revision 2.10
HART Device Revision 2
(Fig.12.7)
Next
*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.
n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 13.3.
n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in
communication setup.
n Zero Current
= The offset value of a calibrated sensor. This is the offset of the sensor and sensor circuit in the
zero oxygen condition.
n Slope
This parameter indicates the sensitivity of the sensor after calibration. It is indicated as a
percentage of the reference sensitivity based on the selection of the sensor or that has been
entered.
12
n Sensor Current
= The raw output of the sensor before it is calibrated and temperature compensated.
n Available KOH
When the sensor type under Configure sensor is set to DO30G, a number is displayed. When
set to Others, a bar (----) is displayed.
This parameter indicates the amount of available KOH remaining in the sensor. This amount
is calculated and displayed by totalizing the amount of KOH consumed by dissolved oxygen
measurements.
When replacing the solution in the sensor, calibration should be made to reset (clear) diagnostic
sensor data.
n Compensation
For compensation of measured value, salinity compensation and pressure compensation are
available. To use pressure compensation, enter the pressure level directly.
n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled.
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 13.2.7.
The Reset wellness data button can reset wellness data.
When a sensor or a membrane is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 12.7.) DO
n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.
n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.
n DO module (sensor)
With this screen, you can check the module productions number and software revision of the
installed module.
n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.
n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has two types of logbook per sensor to store history information on
events, such as changed settings and calibrations.
By selecting one of the logbooks that you wish to check, you can retrieve and check this
information. Storage of history information on each event in a logbook or which logbook to use for
storage can be set up on the Configure logbook screen. For details, see section 13.5.
History information on events are automatically stored on the preset conditions.
In addition to this storing, following three messages can be manually stored in the logbook;
"Sensor washed by hand", "Module replaced", "Sensor replaced"
To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered.
When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 13.6.3.)
Read Logbook:
(Fig.12.6)
logbook1-1
logbook1-1
logbook1-2
logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 Memorandum:
Power on **
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced
Finish
logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on
Enter?
No No
Yes
Finish
** When storing message manually.
NOTE
Updating the trend screen setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.
Tag: DO Oxygen1
Measurement value (mg/L)
12.00 9.10mg/L
Max. and min. values on this display
Current process value
8.40
5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum
Time
The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.
DO
Tag: DO Oxygen1
mA
20 12.00 10.38mg/L
8.40
12
5.60
4
15.00 2.50
Tag: DO Temperature1
12.00 25.0C
8.40
5.60
2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup
Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press
to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD, Temporary output), read chapter 14, and for commissioning, read chapter
13.
12
DO
Figure 12.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.
On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 13.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Sensor type first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options change
accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 13.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of DO in the attached
CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of DO and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument.
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section
13.6.1).
DO
NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 13.1) are crucial for
measurement. If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the
parameters that may initialize other values, see Appendix 4.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix
NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should be
set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display or the Home display is this
manually set temperature.
l Zero/Slope
You can enter zero and slope values directly.
Zero current values can be set only when the setting of Zero Calibration is Enabled.
l Zero Calibration
If zero calibration is required, select Enabled for this parameter. The default value is Disabled.
When this feature is enabled, Zero current values can be set in zero settings.
NOTE
When the zero calibration is set to disabled after performing the calibration, the result of the
calibration turns invalid (default).
by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.
The setting parameters include Progress time and Heat cycle. It is also possible to set the Bad
limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle temp and Heat cycle time of the 13
heat cycle.
l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.
Process parameter
For the available process parameters, see Table 13.2.
The output of the selected process parameter is shown as a bar on the bottom of the Main
display or the Home display. And its parameter symbol (for example, Oxygen1 or Diff-Oxygen1)
is shown above the bar, too. When a selected process parameter is displayed as a measurement
value, the top left number or character is turned to be white number or character on black
background (for example, or ). (Refer to the section 1.2.)
Table 13.2 List of Process Parameters
Number of sensors Process Parameters
1 Oxygen1 (2)
Temperature1 (2)
2 Oxygen1
Temperature1
Oxygen2
Temperature2
Calculated*1
Redundant*2 DO
*1: Refer to section 13.8, Calculated data setup.
*2: Refer to the <Redundant system> below.
Calculated data and Redundant system are available when two modules are installed on the
instrument.
<Redundant system>
On the Redundant system, when a sensor (Sensor 1) of the 1st module fails, the output is
automatically switched to the output of the 2nd module.
After repairing the Sensor 1, manual reset of redundant system is necessary to return to the
output of 1st module from the output of the 2nd module.
Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered. For the default values, see Table 13.3)
Table 13.3 Table of Default Values
% 0.000 5.000 10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00 35.00 40.00 45.00 50.00
Oxygen (mg/L) 0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00
Oxygen (ppm) 0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00
Oxygen (ppb) 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0
Oxygen (%sat) 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0
Temperature (C) 0.0 2.5 5.0 7.5 10.0 12.5 15.0 17.5 20.0 25.5 25.0
% 55.00 60.00 65.00 70.00 75.00 80.00 85.00 90.00 95.00 100.0
Oxygen (mg/L) 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00
Oxygen (ppm) 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00
Oxygen (ppb) 55.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 80.0 85.0 90.0 95.0 100.0
Oxygen (%sat) 55.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 80.0 85.0 90.0 95.0 100.0
Temperature (C) 27.5 30.0 32.5 35.0 37.5 40.0 42.5 45.0 47.5 50.0
Burn
Select the designated output in case of a fault from among Off, Low, and High. See 13.4 Error
configuration to set the output.
Off: Output depends on the measured value. (No fixed output is produced.)
Low: Output is fixed to 3.6 mA
High: Output is fixed to 22.0 mA.
l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.
n Configure Hold 13
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 14.5.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.
During the Commissioning or the Quick Setup, the mA output is automatically held. The preset
value depends on a setting on the Last or fixed.
Last: The preset value is a value measured just before hold condition.
Fixed: The preset value is a value set in the Fixed value mA.
When the Fixed is selected, set a mA value in the Fixed value mA.
Selection on the Hold during Calibration/Wash decides to activate or deactivate the hold
function automatically during calibration or wash.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
Disabled: No automatic hold function
Only when the PH201G is selected on the Communication, the message of Hold during
Calibration/Wash is displayed. On other selections, the message of Hold during Calibration is
displayed.
This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (13.3 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
DO
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting
is appropriate.
The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/2 and
2/2 screens.
CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.
In Logbook configuration, the user can select Off, 1-1, or 1-2 for each item of interest to be
logged. (For sensor 2, select Off, 2-1, or 2-2.) This can be done for items displayed on the
Settings logbook 1/3 to 3/3 screens. Assigning 1-1 or 1-2 to each item allows information to be
organized and logged in a logbook.
NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1 or 2-1. This logbook may be
full earlier. It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2 or 2-2.
For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1 or 1-2 can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (maximum 13 pages).
NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.
13.6.1 Settings
In Settings, select an item to be set as the default value from among No action, Load factory
settings, Save user settings, and Load user settings. 13
When the default values are loaded, the instrument will be restarted. (In the case of Save user
settings, it will not be restarted.)
The following parameters are not included in the defaults:
Tag
The contents of all logbooks
NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.
To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the
menu message.
If you select Load factory settings, the instrument will be set to the default settings at factory
shipment.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the factory settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
When Save user settings is selected, the current settings can be saved as the defaults.
When this item is selected, the user settings will start to be saved immediately. After saving the
parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
13.6.2 Tag DO
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is DO or FLXA21-DO. When two sensor modules are installed,
each module can have their own tag numbers.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main and home displays.
13.6.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.
When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.
13.6.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.
13.6.5 Communication
In Communication, select the communication setting from among None, HART, and PH201G.
The burn down current value is 3.6 mA.
NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.
In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value.
n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and
FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)
l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.
l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.
l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.
For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.
n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, Fail contact, and Wash
contact. 13
l Hold contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.
l Fail contact
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 13.4 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.
l Wash contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, items for a wash can be set on the Wash settings screen.
In the Wash settings screen, set the interval time, wash time, and recovery time and setup of
various washes.
Interval time: Set the wash interval in hours.
Wash time/measure time: Set the wash time in minutes. In a continuous wash, wash time is
replaced by measure time.
Recovery time: Set the recovery time in minutes.
Manual wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, a wash cycle can be activated manually. On the
Calibration/Wash screen, press the Start manual wash cycle to perform a
manual wash.
Imp2 wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, a wash cycle can be started if the Impedance 2
too high error occurs with respect to the reference electrode. DO
Continuous wash: Select Disabled or Enabled.
A continuous wash cycle is started at the instant when this item is enabled.
In a continuous wash, the Measure time and Interval time are reversed
(see Figure 13.3).
Tint Tint
Tw Tr Tw Tr
Tint Tint
Tw Tw Tr Tw Tw Tr
Figure 13.3
NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.
Figure 13.4 Display setup screens for a single module (left) and two modules (right)
l Main display
When one module is installed on the instrument, only the Main display is available.
l Dual display 13
This screen is used to set items to be displayed in the top part (1st row) and bottom part (2nd
row) of the Home display. These settings are available when two sensors are installed in the
instrument.
When the Empty is selected for the 2nd row, the Home display can not be displayed.
l Individual display
When two modules are installed on the instrument, display items on the Main display for each
module can be set on these settings.
On the DO1 display or DO2 display screen, three measurement values can be set to display
on each Main display as a primary value (1st line), a second value (2nd line) and a third value
(3rd line) respectively.
On the Additional text, a text of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be assigned to each
measurement value.
Additional texts are displayed on the Main display, and are useful for identifying measurements.
In some cases, not all 12 characters can be displayed due to the letters; check the texts
displayed on the Main display after setting. If a part of the text is missing, adjust the number of
characters.
13.7.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).
l X-axis: Timing
Select the X-axis timings time span on the trend graph display from a list.
l Y-axis: Limits DO
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.
NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.
NOTE
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.
To display the calculated result, select Calculated on the Dual display screen. (Section 13.7.1.)
(The setting on the Individual display has no effect.)
While displaying a calculated data, measurement value of the sensor 1 or sensor 2 can be
Sensor Sensor
1 2
checked on the each sensors display with pressing or at the lower right on the Main
display.
NOTE
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
13.7.3.)
14
The calibration items include Air calibration, Water Calibration, Manual Slope Cal, and
Temperature Cal.
When Zero Calibration is set Enabled (see section 13.2.6), Manual Offset Cal. is available.
Press to select Execute: Calibration, choose the calibration object, and configure the
calibration to perform it. Calibration is made stepwise; follow the prompts displayed on the screen
to carry it out.
A stability check is conducted at each measurement point. Proceed to the next step only after the
reading has stabilized.
NOTE
While CHECKING STABILITY is indicated, the instrument automatically checks the stability
of the measurement (input value). If the stability is not confirmed within 60 min, an error is issued DO
and the procedure is aborted. Change the parameters in the stabilization time and step range as
necessary (see Section 13.2.6), and then recalibrate the sensor.
NOTE
When a sensor or a membrane is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 12.9.)
Set the sensor in the maintenance mode. Wash off any stain on the membrane and use a soft
tissue to wipe off any remaining water from the membrane.
Leave the sensor in an environment without temperature fluctuation or air flow for about 10
minutes, such as in an empty container. After confirming that the reading is stable, calibrate the
sensor.
l Air-saturated water
Pour water (without salt content) into a beaker or other container, and place it on a magnetic
stirrer or other agitator. Put a stirring bar in it and agitate the water, and send air from a pump
(bubbling). It takes 15 to 30 minutes until the water is fully saturated. Then put the sensor in this
water which is still agitated and bubbling, and calibrate it. Keep the sensor at least 3 cm above
the bottom of the beaker to prevent the membrane from directly contacting the air bubbles.
NOTE
Dissolve sodium sulfite in the water and wait until the reading becomes stable before calibrating
the sensor. Even a healthy sensor needs 40 to 50 minutes. Leave the sensor in the solution.
l Salinity compensation
To compensate salinity, select Enabled in Measurement setup Salinity compensation
Compensation (see Section 13.2.4).
Perform calibration by referring to Table 1 in Appendix 4.
Example:
When the atmospheric pressure is 101.325 kPa, the solution temperature is 22.5C, and the
salinity is 30 g/kg (3 wt% seawater equivalent):
(1) Calculate the saturated concentration of desalinated water.
According to Table 1 in Appendix 4, the saturated concentration is 8.74 mg/l at 22C and
8.58 mg/l at 23C.
The value at 22.5C is calculated as follows:
8.74 + (8.58 8.74) (22.5 22) = 8.66 mg/l
(2) Compensate the value for salinity.
The compensation value for 30 g/kg salinity at 22.5C is calculated as follows:
0.0453 + (0.0443 0.0453) (22.5 22) = 0.0448 mg/l
0.0448 30 = 1.34 mg/l
(3) Calculate the saturated concentration of the solution (for calibration).
The saturated concentration for 30 g/kg salinity at 22.5C is calculated as follows:
8.66 1.34 = 7.32 mg/l
DO
14.5 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last).
Use this menu to hold the output.
Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF.
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:DO
10.38 mg/L
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA Oxygen1 20mA
Figure 14.6 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled
HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.
Press to select Execute: Temporary output and then choose the process parameter to be
assigned on the Temporary output screen.
When process parameter assignment has been modified, the indication at the upper left of the
screen changes to .
The feature is disabled the moment the screen returns to the Main display, and the setting
(process parameter in mA output setting) returns to the original condition.
10.38 pH
15
25.0 C
19 mV Calibration
4mA PH1 20mA pH 17.1 Calibration pH
ORP 17.3 Manual 17.1.1 pH Manual
Temperature 17.2 Automatic17.1.2 Zero/Slope
Sample 17.1.3 Zero/Slope/ITP(3point)
Execute & Setup Zero/Slope1,2(3point)
Execute:
Calibration HOLD 17.4 Calibration ORP
HOLD Manual pH Automatic
Sample Zero/Slope
Zero/Slope/ITP(3point)
Setup: Zero/Slope1,2(3point)
Commissioning
Change language Change language 2.7
Start Quick Setup
Quick setup Date/Time Seneor setup Measurement setup
15.2 16.6.4 16.1 16.2.1
Advanced setup
Measurement setup Settings 16.6.1
Temperature settings 16.2.2 Tag 16.6.2
Temp. compensation 16.2.3 Passwords 16.6.3
Calibration settings 16.2.4 Date/Time 16.6.4
Impedance settings 16.2.5 Communication
Communication 16.6.5
HART
Concentration 16.2.6 Factory setup16.6.6
PH201G PH201G setup
Sensor diag. settings 16.2.7
Wash contact: Enabled
Buffers
Select buffer set:
Impedance setup Free programmable Free programmable
Input 1 impedance: Low Buffer table 1 Buffer table 1
Input 2 impedance: Low Buffer table 2 Enter values
Buffer table 3
Figure 15.1 Menu structure of SENCOM pH/ORP (the number after the item refers to the relevant section)
NOTE
When no operation is performed for 10 minutes or 60 minutes (depending on the setting of Auto
Return), the display except Trend display automatically changes to the Monitor display (or to the
Main display when the MONITOR display is disabled).
NOTE
The display may show ---- (bar) when starting measurement, which means the sensor is not
ready to measure. But the temperature is displayed normally. Wait until measurement values are
displayed.
While a bar (----) is displayed, as for the mA output, in the case of Off or Low, [Burn] of the
Output setup (see section 16.3) is fixed 3.6mA, and, in the case of High, 22.0mA becomes
fixed.
15
Next Finish
*1 Next
Finish
Date/Time Measurement setup
Format YYYY/MM/DD Measurement pH+ORP Monitor display
YYYY/MM/DD
pH
MM/DD/YYYY
Date 2010/03/03 ORP
DD/MM/YYYY
pH+ORP
Time 17:04:07 pH+rH
rH
Next Next
Next
Next
Temperature settings
Temp.element Pt1000
Unit C
C
F
Next
Next
*1: The Measurement setup screen appears only when pH + ORP is selected on the Sensor setup screen.
Figure 15.2 Quick setup
n Date/Time
The date display format can be selected from among the three types.
Enter the date or time of day by using the numerical keys. SENCOM
For details, see section 16.6.4.
n Sensor setup
Select a suitable electrode from among the displayed electrode types and set it up.
For details, see section 16.1.
n Measurement setup
Select a suitable measurement parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
Measurement parameter setup can be made only when pH + ORP is selected on the Sensor
setup screen.
For details, see section 16.2.1.
n Temperature settings
In the case of temperature sensors, the temperature parameter is automatically set when
connection is made.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature scale can be selected.
For details, see section 16.2.2.
n mA (output)
Select a suitable process parameter from among those displayed and set it up.
For example, the mA output of pH has been set to 0 14 pH at factory shipment. If the resolution
needs to be improved, set a suitable value for the process.
For details, see section 16.3.
10.38 pH
25.0 C
19 mV
4mA PH1 20mA
On the Main display, pressing of the 2nd or 3rd display item causes the 1st display item to
be replaced by the selected item.
NOTE
Measured values to be displayed in the 1st to 3rd display items depend on the user definition
(see section 16.7.1). For example, on the default condition of pH measurement, the 1st display
item is pH, the 2nd display item is temperature, and the 3rd display item is empty.
When the MONITOR display is enabled (see section 16.7.5), pressing the 1st display item on the
home display or the main display changes the display to the Monitor display with the enlarged
font of the measured value.
10.38 mS/cm
Monitor display
15
Tag:SENCOM
Tag:SENCOM Tag:SENCOM
25.0 C
19.00 mV
10.00 pH 25.0 C
19.00 mV 10.00 pH
4mA pH1 20mA 4mA pH1 20mA
SENCOM
2013/02/21 16:04:07
pH: Zero 0.000mV SENCOM module: Last calibrated at
Slope 100.0 % Module Pdn No. AAAA1111 -------- ------
Sensor 1.234 mV Software Revision 1.10 Calibration due at
ORP: Zero 0.000 mV -------- ------
Slope 100.0 % Projected maintenance
Sensor -1.567 mV -- (no meaning)
Impedance 1 BAD Projected replacement
Impedance 2 124.6 k -- (no meaning)
Next Next Next
Next Next
*: This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in communication setup.
Figure 15.5 Detail display
n Current output mA
= current output in mA. The range and function of this mA output can be set in Commissioning
Output setup mA.
For details, see section 16.3.
n Contact status
This screen is displayed only if the PH201G distributor is used and PH201G is selected in
communication setup.
l Slope
= calibrated efficiency of the sensor unit as a percentage of the theoretical slope of the sensor
unit. The theoretical slope follows the NERNST equation and is 59.16 mV/pH (at 25C). The
SLOPE can be calibrated only after a two-point calibration in buffer solutions with a different pH
value. A low slope indicates that the sensor is not clean or is faulty.
The SLOPE can also be displayed as a mV/pH value at 25C if the user has defined this variable
as mV/pH in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration settings Zero and Slope
units.
Setting of the slope value can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Zero/Slope/ITP. For details, see section 16.2.4.
+mV
Theoretical value
pH7, 0mV
pH0
pH14
Zero
l Sensor
Represents the electromotive force of the sensor.
l Impedance 1
For a PH sensor, Impedance shows electrical resistance of the glass membrane electrode. The SENCOM
FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the impedance to know damage of the electrode.
For an ORP sensor, Impedance shows electrical resistance of metal electrode.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 checks the impedance to know the surface condition of smudge and
the snapping of sensor wires. In case of Input Impedance setting is High and the measured
input-1 impedance value is higher than 100 k, the display shows M RANGE. The measured
input-1 impedance value is lower than 100 k, display shows BAD.
If both impedance measurements are disabled (Error setting: Off), the display shows - - - - (bar).
If either impedance measurement 1 or 2 is enabled, the display shows both the impedance
values.
n Sensor wellness
At the Sensor wellness window, the soundness of a module is displayed. A larger number of n
in each gauge indicates that the parameter concerned is sound. A gauge is indicated for only
those parameters whose sensor wellness setting is enabled, while a bar (----) is displayed if the
sensor wellness setting is disabled.
Sensor wellness setup can be made in Commissioning Measurement setup Sensor diag.
settings. For details, see section 16.2.7.
NOTE
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 15.9.)
n Last calibrated
= date on which the last sensor calibration was performed. The displayed value of the Zero is the
result of this calibration. The displayed value of Slope was calibrated on this date only if the last
calibration was a 2-point calibration.
n Calibration due
= the date when the calibration must be done next according to the settings of the calibration
interval. The calibration intervals are set in Commissioning Measurement setup Calibration
settings Limits and timing.
n Projected maintenance
The projected maintenance function predicts the date when the sensor unit will need recalibrating
for maintaining measurement accuracy. The function checks the input-2 impedance (reference
impedance) every 24 hours.
The function predicts the date when the input-2 impedance will cross the upper or lower limits,
and indicates the date and its status (the status is displayed in parentheses).
As shown in Figure 15.7, the date is predicted based on the intersection point of the upper or
lower limits and the extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method.
Upper limit
Value
Lower limit
15
Current Projected Day
date maintenance date F0310.ai
Figure 15.7
The status shows the certainty of the projected maintenance date in terms of the correlation
coefficient R. Tables 15.1 and 15.2 show respective display patterns.
Table 15.1 Display pattern of the projected maintenance date
Projected date -- 0-1 month 1-3 months 3-6 months 6-12 months Over 1 year
- - : cannot be predictable due to insufficient data
Table 15.2 Display pattern of the status
(- - - - -) (Poor) (Reasonable) (Excellent)
Status
(R < 0.50) (0.50 R < 0.70) (0.70 R < 0.85) (0.85 R < 1.00)
n Projected replacement
The projected replacement function predicts the date when the sensor will need replacing for
maintaining the measurement accuracy, based on the pH zero and pH slope on each calibration,
and reference impedance (input-2 impedance) after each calibration. The projected replacement
date is predicted based on these parameters stored upon calibration, and displayed the same as
that of projected maintenance. For details, see the description about the projected maintenance.
Since three parameters (pH zero, pH slope, and input-2 impedance after calibration) are used for
this projection, the nearest coming day is selected as the projected replacement date from the
extrapolated line of the values obtained by the least squares method.
Sterilization
Displays the number of times the temperature remains above the preset value for at least the
prescribed time period (min.). For the setting of these parameters, see Section 16.2.7.
Figure 15.8 shows an example of sterilization.
Temperature (C)
User-defined a b c
sterilization
temperature
Time
(min)
F1510.ai
a: This event is not counted because the duration does not reach the prescribed sterilization
time.
b: This event is counted because the duration exceeds the prescribed sterilization time.
c: This event is counted because the duration exceeds the prescribed sterilization time.
However long the event lasts, it is counted as one.
The date and time of the last count is displayed as the last date of sterilization.
The number of counts is up to 9999. Even after that, the last date of sterilization is updated if the
event meets the conditions.
n SENCOM module
This screen enables operators to check the module production number and software revision of
the installed model.
n SENCOM sensor
This screen enables operators to check the information of the connected sensor, including the
model code, software revision, assembly revision, serial number, and manufacturing date.
n HOUSING ASSY
With this screen, you can check the module productions number, software revision, and HART
device revision of the housing assembly.
n Read logbook
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has three types of logbook per sensor to store history information
regarding the setting changes and calibration.
By selecting a desired logbook, you can retrieve and check the information. The Configure
logbook screen is used to set whether to store history information of each event and which
logbook to use for storage. The SENCOM logbook cannot be designated. For details, see
Section 16.5. 15
The logbook automatically records events such as calibration and errors.
Fixed messages can be manually stored in logbook1-1 and logbook1-2.
To store these messages, press and select one of three messages from the Item on the
Memorandum screen. Its event date/time will be the time when a message is selected and
entered.
When a password for Commissioning is set on the passwords setup, pressing requires
entering the password. (Refer to the section 16.6.3.)
(Fig.15.5)
logbook1-1 1/1
Read Logbook:
logbook1-1
logbook1-1 logbook SENCOM
logbook1-2
logbook SENCOM
Finish
logbook1-1 1/1
2010/02/15 15:15 ** Memorandum:
Power on
Item
Sensor washed by hand
Sensor washed by hand
Enter?
Module replaced
No
Sensor replaced
Finish
logbook1-1 1/1
Memorandum: 2010/02/15 17:04
Sensor replaced
Item 2010/02/15 15:15
Sensor replaced Power on
Enter? SENCOM
No No
Yes
Finish
** When storing message manually.
Figure 15.9 Detail display (continued)
NOTE
Updating the trend screen setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.
12.00 10.38pH
Max. and min. values on this display
Current process value
8.40
5.60
Maximum
2.50 Average
12:00 12:20 12:40
Minimum
Time
Figure 15.10 Trend screen
The 1st display item data on the Main display is shown as a graph. Touching any point on the
display changes the display to the 2nd display item data (and to the 3rd display item data if set)
and then returns to the Main display.
8.40
12
5.60
15
4
15.00 2.50
8.40
5.60
2.50
12:00 12:20 12:40
SENCOM
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup
Browse through the menu items by pressing until you find the desired menu and then press
to enter that menu. It is also possible to enter a desired menu by pressing the symbol
beside the menu item.
For calibration (HOLD), read chapter 17, and for commissioning, read chapter 16.
Figure 15.1 shows the commissioning procedure. Before changing any parameters, read the
relevant sections in this document and understand how the change of parameters affects the
performance of this instrument. If you set a wrong value, return it to the default setting or value
and then set it again.
On the first startup, the parameters are all default values configured at the factory. Check the
parameters in Table 16.1 and change any of them if necessary depending on the sensors to be
connected and the purpose of use.
Set Sensor type first. Some measurement parameters and relevant options change
accordingly. The underlined parameters in Table 16.1 are used for the quick setup.
The default values and setting ranges are listed in the User setting table of SENCOM in the
attached CD-ROM.
After confirming that the instrument operates normally with the parameters, print out the User
setting table of SENCOM and write down these parameters in the column of User Settings.
All user parameters can also be saved in the instrument.
Select Commissioning Advanced setup Settings Save user settings (see Section
16.6.1).
SENCOM
NOTE
All the parameters for the quick setup (underlined ones in Table 16.1) are crucial for
measurement. If you change any of them, other parameters may be initialized. For the
parameters that may initialize other values, see Appendix 1.
NOTE
The default of [Sensor type] is pH+ORP. Change this setting for your sensors. Not all sensor
types are available for some SENCOM sensors. For example, pH cannot be selected when an
ORP sensor is connected.
NOTE
The selection of Sensor type determines the menu structure throughout the instrument.
When pH + ORP is specified as the sensor type, the object under measurement will be displayed
at the top of Measurement setup.
If the sensor type is changed from pH to ORP, part of the relevant setup is reset, requiring
reconfiguration.
When ORP is specified, and when an ORP sensor doesnt have any temperature element,
set both of Temperature too high/low in Error configuration to Off so that no related error is
caused. (Refer to the section 16.4.) Without temperature input, a temperature shown on the Main
display is the maximum or the minimum temperature of the temperature elements range set on
the Temperature settings. Setting in Display setup can make temperature value on the display
not to be displayed. (Refer to the section 16.7.)
SENCOM
For measurement setup, part of the menu structure of settable items changes depending on the
Sensor type selected in 16.1 Sensor setup.
16.2.1 Measurement
If pH or ORP is selected in Sensor type, a measurement type does not need to be selected and
it is not displayed.
If pH + ORP is selected in Sensor type, five measurement types can be selected for the
Measurement item at the top of the Measurement setup screen. Select a suitable measurement
type for the application.
Moreover, associated items are added to parameters in Error configuration, Display setup,
etc.; check the setting condition of each item.
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) temperature units are available. If the unit is changed, the
following values are also recalculated automatically to the new unit:
Manual temp.
Reference temp.
Temp. coefficient
Temp. ranges in the matrix
n Temperature compensation
This compensation of pH value is performed on the Nernst equation.
Two methods can be used: Automatic and Manual. Select Automatic when a temperature
element is used, or select Manual when a manually set temperature is used.
NOTE
When Manual is selected on the Temperature compensation, a process temperature should
be set in the Manual temp. A temperature shown on the Main display is this manually set
temperature.
n Reference temperature
Set a reference temperature to which the measured pH value must be compensated. Normally
25C is used, so this temperature is chosen as the default value.
l TC
This method uses the linear compensation function. 16
It is possible to adjust the temperature coefficient (TC) factor directly. If the temperature
coefficient factor of the sample liquid is known from laboratory experiments or has been
previously determined, it can be entered here.
This TC is a pH variation to 1 C (pH/T). Adjust the value between -0.1 to 0.1 pH/C.
In combination with the reference temperature setting, a linear compensation function is
obtained, which is suitable for all kinds of chemical solutions.
l Matrix
Matrix means a temperature compensation which uses the temperature compensation
matrix. The temperature compensation matrix is a table of pH values at various temperatures
corresponding to the pH values at the standard temperature. For details, see Appendix 1.
When the temperature or the precompensated pH value is out of the range of the temperature
compensation matrix, the temperature compensation error (warning) will be issued. This is not a
device error.
In this case, however, the temperature compensation is performed by extrapolation.
NOTE
To display the precompensated pH value, set the Process Temp. Compensation to None.
Select Measurement setup Temp. compensation Process Temp. Compensation.
l NEN6411
This algorithm takes into account the dissociation of water in strong acid and strong alkaline
solutions. It is particularly useful for pH measurement of boiler feed water.
SENCOM
n pH settings
l Zero/Slope/ITP
You can enter Zero (aspot), Slope (sensitivity), and ITP values directly in the screen displayed.
These data can be obtained from the manufacturer of the probe, by the users laboratory, etc.
NOTE
It is not necessary to enter this data. In most cases, as the FLXA202/FLXA21 automatically does
this while performing calibration, the feature is used in the case of special electrode systems or
where calibration in the process environment is not possible. See Chapter 17.
a: Actual change
d b: Zero and slope calculated from
the calibration data
c: Zero and slope calculated from
Zero, Slope the calibration data and shifted
using the latest calibration data
d: Data from calibration
a
b
c
Calibration
Time
Figure 16.3 Auto correct
n ORP settings
l Limits and timing
Zero High/Low
Zero (aspot) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new zero exceeds
these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures and
calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be adjusted to
suit the application and the users criterion.
Slope High/Low
Slope (sensitivity) high and low limits. During calibration, it is checked whether the new slope
exceeds these high and low limits. Narrowing the band will prevent bad calibration procedures
and calibration of bad sensors, resulting in higher accuracy. The default values should be
adjusted to suit the application and the users criterion.
Step Range
Set the range over which the stability of a measured value is checked. If variations of a measured
value over the stabilization time are within this setpoint, the measured value is judged to have
stabilized.
Stabilization time
This is the time over which the stability of an ORP value is monitored during calibration. When
variations of the ORP value are within the value set in Step Range over this stabilization time
set here, the value is regarded as being stable. If the value has not stabilized within 10 minutes,
calibration is aborted.
Calibr. interval
Set the interval in which a new calibration must take place. If the interval set here is exceeded,
the instrument will give a warning or fault according to the setting on the Error configuration
screen.
l Zero/Slope
You can enter zero and slope values directly.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has an impedance check, which is capable of monitoring the impedance
of various sensor systems.
The system can be set to measure the impedances of glass (input 1 impedance: high) and
reference (input 2 impedance: low) electrodes. In applications that tend to leave deposits on the
electrodes or to clog the reference sensor junction, the impedance check (set error configuration)
on the reference sensor can be used to initiate an alarm, or to initiate the wash cleaning process,
if one of the limits is exceeded.
16.2.6 Concentration
Generally pH values are not converted into concentrations. Following linear conversion is not
suitable for a lot of measurements.
by pressing .
Gauges are displayed for only parameters that have been enabled in Sensor diag. settings.
Parameters set to Disable are provided with a bar display.
SENCOM
The setting parameters include Input 1 imp., Input 2 imp., Progress time, and Heat cycle.
When input impedance is set High (section 16.2.5), FINE value can be changed. When input
impedance is set Low, its High limit and Low limit will be the limits for diagnostic.
For FU20F sensors, Impedance 1 is High and Impedance 2 is Low.
It is also possible to set the Bad limits of the progress time and heat cycle and the Heat cycle
temp and Heat cycle time of the heat cycle.
l Output
The output signal is a current value specified by the following parameters.
Process parameter
The available process parameters depend on the selected Sensor type on the Sensor setup
and the selected Measurement type on the Measurement setup.
The output of the selected process parameter is shown as a bar on the bottom of the Main
display. And its parameter symbol (for example, PH1) is shown above the bar, too. When
a selected process parameter is displayed as a measurement value, the top left number or
character is turned to be white number or character on black background (for example, ). (Refer
to the section 1.2.)
Setup
Select one of the output methods: Linear and Table.
Linear: Set the 0% and 100% values.
Table: This allows the configuration of an output curve by 21 points (5% intervals).
(The 0% and 100% values must be entered.)
Burn
Select the designated output in case of a fault from among Off, Low, and High. See 16.4 Error
configuration to set the output.
Off: Output depends on the measured value.
Low: Output is fixed to 3.6 mA
High: Output is fixed to 22.0 mA.
Damping time
This is the time taken for a response to a step input change to reach 90% of the final value
(attenuation time). Set this time in sec.
l Simulate
When this function is selected, an output of the instrument will be a fixed current value set in % of
the output span. The output span range is -2.5% to 112.5% (3.6 mA to 22.0 mA).
When Simulate is selected, regardless of hold setting, the output is always simulated value.
n Configure Hold
On the Configure Hold, settings are performed to hold of the mA output at a preset value. (Refer
to the section 17.4.) This is enabled only if mA is Output.
During the Commissioning or the Quick Setup, the mA output is automatically held. The preset
value depends on a setting on the Last or fixed.
Last: The preset value is a value measured just before hold condition.
Fixed: The preset value is a value set in the Fixed value mA.
When the Fixed is selected, set a mA value in the Fixed value mA.
16
Selection on the Hold during Calibration/Wash decides to activate or deactivate the hold
function automatically during calibration or wash.
Enabled: Activation of the automatic hold function
Disabled: No automatic hold function
Only when the PH201G is selected on the Communication, the message of Hold during
Calibration/Wash is displayed. On other selections, the message of Hold during Calibration is
displayed.
This allows the system to notify the user of the occurrence of an error according to the status
categories in the Error configuration.
Select a status category from among Off, Warn. (Warning), and Fault.
Fault automatically performs burn-out. When Burn has been set to Off (16.3 Output setup), only
the error message is displayed.
Warn. displays an error message.
When selecting PH201G in the communication setting, make sure that the Fail contact setting
is appropriate.
The settable causes of errors are determined based on the settings of the Sensor setup and
Measurement setup, and a status category is set to the causes displayed in the Errors 1/3 to 3/3
screens.
SENCOM
CAUTION
If canceling an error configuration could be risky, do not cancel it as a dangerous situation may
result.
NOTE
The Impedance 1 too high/too low and Impedance 2 too high/too low error items are displayed
in the Error configuration screen. In general, for a pH sensor, Impedance 1 means glass
electrode, and for an ORP sensor, it means metal electrode. Impedance 2 represents the
reference electrode in all cases.
NOTE
Before using sensors which do not have any temperature measuring elements, set both of
Temperature too high and Temperature too low to Off on the Error setting screen. Due to the
open input of temperature signal, a false error may happen as if temperature goes over a high
limit or a low limit.
NOTE
Some events such as power-on are saved into the logbook 1-1. This logbook may be full earlier.
It is recommended that important information be saved into the logbook 1-2.
16
For Erase logbook, a specified logbook 1-1, 1-2 or SENCOM can be erased individually.
When the Warn if logbook full is set to Yes, a warning is given when the logbook come to near
full (up to 3 pages for the SENCOM logbook, up to 13 pages for others).
NOTE
When the logbook gets full, the oldest information is erased automatically.
16.6.1 Settings
In Settings, select an item to be set as the default value from among No action, Load factory
settings, Save user settings, and Load user settings.
When the default values are loaded, the instrument will be restarted. (In the case of Save user
settings, it will not be restarted.)
The following parameters are not included in the defaults:
Tag
The contents of all logbooks
NOTE
When the Save user setting is only selected, save of the user-set parameters will start at once.
To avoid wrong selection, operation in this Settings must be done by , not by touching the SENCOM
menu message.
If you select Load factory settings, the instrument will be set to the default settings at factory
shipment.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the factory settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
parameters, press or to change the display because this save doesnt have restart
function.
If Load user settings is selected, the settings saved as user settings can be set as the defaults.
When this item is selected, a screen prompting whether to restart is displayed. If this is no
problem, press Yes. Then the Loading message appears and blinks and loading is started.
When the user settings have been loaded, the instrument will be restarted.
16.6.2 Tag
A tag provides a symbolic reference to an instrument and is generally defined to be unique
throughout the control system at one plant site. A tag can contain up to 12 alphanumeric
characters. The default value is SENCOM.
The tag is displayed at the top of the main display.
16.6.3 Passwords
Calibration and commissioning operations can be separately protected by each password. To
protect execute operations, enter a password in Executes input field. To protect commissioning
operations, enter a password in Commissionings input field. By default, both input fields are
empty. When a password input field is empty, operation is not password-protected. A password
can contain up to 8 characters.
When a password is set, input of the password is necessary to enter the password-protected
operation. After inputting the password, the display will change to an operator ID input display.
When an operator ID is input, its operation is recorded into a logbook. The input of an operator ID
is not necessary to enter the operation. An operator ID can contain up to 4 characters.
16.6.4 Date/Time
The Logbooks and trend graphs use the clock/calendar as a reference. The current date and
time is set here. The time display format can be selected from among three types.
16.6.5 Communication
In Communication, select the communication setting from among None, HART, and PH201G.
The burn down current value is 3.6 mA.
NOTE
To make the change of Communication valid, turn off the power supply once, and reboot.
In the case of None, there is not the problem even if you do not change it as HART of default
value.
n HART
Select this menu when HART communication is made.
In the HART setup screen, specify the network address and set up parameters for SV, TV, and
FV.
(PV is linked with the process parameter setting in Output settings and cannot be changed
here.)
l Network address
For 1-to-1 communication, leave the default value [0] unchanged. For multi-drop where multiple 16
HART devices are connected on a bus, set addresses in 1 to 15. In this case, the mA output will
be fixed to 4 mA.
l PV
PV is a parameter selected for analog output; it cannot be changed here.
l SV, TV, FV
The SV, TV, and FV parameters are items that the user must set up. Selectable items differ
depending on the sensor type in Sensor setup and settings in Measurement setup.
If blank is selected for a parameter, items below that parameter must all be set to blank. If an item
is blank, those below it cannot be set to a status other than blank.
For more information on HART communication, see the Technical Information (TI 12A01A02-
60E) in the attached CD-ROM.
n PH201G
Select this menu if the PH201G distributor is connected to the instrument.
In the PH201G setup screen, make settings for Hold contact, Fail contact, and Wash
contact.
l Hold contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, the output will be held according to the setting of Hold type on the
Hold setup screen.
l Fail contact
Select a status from among Fail + Warn, Fail only, and Disabled.
This setting depends on the error configuration. See 16.4 Error configuration.
Fail corresponds to Fault.
SENCOM
l Wash contact
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When this item is enabled, items for a wash can be set on the Wash settings screen.
In the Wash settings screen, set the interval time, wash time, and recovery time and setup of
various washes.
Interval time: Set the wash interval in hours.
Tint Tint
Tw Tr Tw Tr
Tint Tint
Tw Tw Tr Tw Tw Tr
Figure 16.4
The instrument has a function for checking whether measurements are normally made after
wash, allowing you to check a sensor response.
The wash recovery check is performed by making use of the time to recover half the wash-cycle
pH change. The half the wash-cycle pH change recovery time replaces the relaxation time by the
recovery time.
Whether to conduct the wash recovery check can be set on the Error settings 2/3 screen. Half
the wash-cycle pH change refers to half the value (1/2pH) of the difference (pH) between the
pH value during normal measurement of an example in Figure 16.5 and the pH value detected
during wash. If the pH value during wash is greater than 1/2pH when 1/3 tR has elapsed, the
electrode is assumed to be good. If it is smaller than 1/2pH, then the electrode is assumed to be
bad.
However, for applications where the pH during wash shows almost the same value as the normal
pH, the difference will be approximately zero. In such a case, disable the wash recovery check.
An example of such applications is the monitoring of waste water pH. If you select water jet
cleaning in such a case, the normal pH as well as the washing time pH will be around pH 7; the
difference will be approximately zero, so the recovery time check will not work normally.
This function is available either for ORP measurement only.
Good Electrode
pH
1/2pH
Bad Electrode
pH
1/3tR
tW : Wash Time tR : Recovery Time
16
Figure 16.5
NOTE
This menu is for service engineers only. This section is protected by a password. Attempting to
change data in the factory adjustment menu without the proper instructions and equipment could
result in corruption of the instrument setup and damage the performance of the unit.
NOTE
Settable items differ depending on settings in Sensor setup and Measurement setup.
16.7.2 Trend
This screen is used to make settings for the Trend Graph Screen.
Set the process parameters to be displayed for each trend. They can be set for the 1st to 3rd
trends. When all three process parameters are set Empty, there is no trend display (no trend
button).
l X-axis: Timing
Select the X-axis timings time span on the trend graph display from a list.
l Y-axis: Limits
Set the Y-axis high and low limits on the trend graph display on a Trend screen basis.
NOTE
Updating the trend display setup resets the current trend graph and starts a new one.
NOTE
A default is 10 min. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much time is performed,
60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected.
NOTE
Do not disconnect the sensor during calibration.
NOTE 17
A default is 10 min for Auto Return. When maintenance like a calibration that may take much
time is performed, 60 min or Disable is recommended to be selected. (Refer to the section
16.7.3.)
Setup:
Commissioning
Change language
Start Quick Setup
Press to select Execute: Calibration, choose the item to be calibrated, configure the
calibration settings, then perform calibration.
NOTE
Note the following when performing calibration with buffer solutions.
1. Before starting a calibration, make sure the electrode system is properly cleaned and
the electrodes are fully functional. They must then be rinsed with clean water to avoid
contamination of the calibration solution(s).
2. Always use fresh buffer solution to avoid the risk of introducing errors from contaminated or
old solutions. Buffers supplied as liquids have a limited shelf life, especially alkaline buffers, SENCOM
which absorb CO2 from the air.
3. Yokogawa strongly recommends NIST/DIN 19266 buffer standards for the best accuracy
and buffer capacity. Commercially adjusted buffers (e.g., pH 7.00, 9.00 or 10.00) are a
compromise as a standard, and are often supplied without a temperature dependency
curve. Their stability will never be as good as NIST (JIS equivalent) solutions.
Always ensure that the sensors are properly conditioned, clean and filled with the correct
electrolyte solution (if appropriate) before starting a calibration. Refer to the sensor instructions
for details.
17.1 pH calibration
There are the Manual, Automatic, and Sample modes of pH calibration.
NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 15.11.)
l zero/slope
This calibration type is one-point or two-point calibration.
One-point calibration performs the zero adjustment only. Two-point calibration performs the zero
and slope adjustments.
l zero/slope/ITP(3point)
This calibration type is ITP-type three-point calibration.
If ITP does not have pH 7, three-point calibration is performed to obtain the zero (asymmetry),
slope (sensitivity), and ITP (isothermal point) for calibration.
Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The 2nd buffer solution should be pH 7 2.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperatures of the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be at least 20C higher or lower
than the temperature of the 1st buffer solution.
To calculate the pH value of the 3rd buffer solution (pH3cal), insert the pH and temperature
values of the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions and the temperature value of the 3rd buffer
solution into the following equation.
( tt
3 - t1
2 - t1
t -t
(273.15 + t2)(ITP - pH2) + (1 - 3 1 ) x (273.15 + t1)(ITP - pH1)
t2 - t1 )
pH3cal = ITP -
(273.15 + t3)
pHn: pH value of n-th buffer solution
Tn: Temperature of n-th buffer solution (C)
ITP: ITP value displayed in calibration settings (see section 16.2.4)
Assign 7.00 as the ITP value when a specific value is not available or for the first
calibration of a sensor.
Do not use the 3rd solution whose pH value is within pH3cal 1.
l zero/slope1,2(3point)
17
This calibration type is the line-segment type three-point calibration.
If the relation between electromotive force and pH is not in proportion for a wide range, divide the
relevant range into two sections and obtain the zero (asymmetry) and slope (sensitivity) in each
section to perform calibration.
Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
l zero/slope/ITP(3point)
Calibration is performed in the sequence of the sequence selection menu (Table 17.1) of the
solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings. Perform calibration
by following the prompts on the screen.
Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The 2nd buffer solution in the buffer table in the Free programmable screen should be pH 7
2 (at 25C).
Either of the following conditions should be met.
- The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperature of the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions is at least 20C higher or lower than the
temperature of the 3rd buffer solution.
- The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 5C or less.
The temperature of the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions is at least 20C higher or lower than the
temperature of the 1st buffer solution.
l zero/slope1,2(3point)
Calibration is performed in the sequence of the sequence selection menu (Table 17.1) of the
solution that works with the buffer solution selected in calibration settings. Perform calibration
by following the prompts on the screen.
Limitations
Three different buffer solutions whose difference in pH value between buffer solutions is 1
pH or more should be used.
(1st buffer < 2nd buffer < 3rd buffer or 1st buffer > 2nd buffer > 3rd buffer)
The temperature difference between the 1st and 2nd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
The temperature difference between the 2nd and 3rd buffer solutions should be 20C or
less.
Table 17.1 Selection of Buffer Solutions in Three-point Calibration
Buffer settings Buffer sequence selection menus
NIST/DIN 19266 PH1.7PH6.9PH9.2
PH4.0PH6.9PH9.2
PH9.2PH6.9PH1.7
PH9.2PH6.9PH4.0
DIN 19267 PH4.7PH6.8PH9.2
PH9.2PH6.8PH4.7
US PH4.0PH7.0PH10.0
PH10.0PH7.0PH4.0
User defined buffer table1table2table3
able3table2table1
NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 15.11.)
17
NOTE
When a sensor or an electrode is exchanged or replaced, sensor wellness data should be reset.
When a sensor is replaced, the replacement can be recorded manually into a logbook. (Refer to
the figure 15.11.)
SENCOM
17.4 HOLD
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a function to hold the mA output at a preset value (default: Last).
Use this menu to hold the output.
Press to select Execute: HOLD and then choose Manual Hold ON or Manual Hold OFF.
This allows you to set up manual hold.
Tag:SENCOM
10.38 pH
25.0 C
HOLD
4mA PH1 20mA
Figure 17.2 Example of the display with the manual hold enabled
HOLD
To cancel manual hold, press the lit section on the Main display.
18. MAINTENANCE
n Periodic maintenance
The FLXA202/FLXA21 requires very little periodic maintenance, except to make sure the front
window is kept clean in order to permit a clear view of the display and allow proper operation of
the touchscreen. If the window becomes soiled, clean it using a soft damp cloth or soft tissue.
To deal with more stubborn stains, a neutral detergent may be used.
When you must open the front cover and/or glands, make sure that the seals are clean and
correctly fitted when the unit is re-assembled in order to maintain the housings weatherproof
integrity against water and water vapor.
The pH measurement uses high impedance sensors and may otherwise be prone to problems
caused by exposure of the circuitry to condensation.
18
CAUTION
Never use harsh chemicals or solvents. In the event that the window does become heavily
stained or scratched, refer to the parts list for replacement part numbers.
l Battery
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a logbook feature that uses a clock to provide the timings. The
instrument contains a lithium cell (battery) to continue the clock function while the power is turned
off. Although the cell has an expected working life of 10 years, this is not guaranteed. When this
cell needs replacing, contact your nearest Yokogawa service center.
l Predictive maintenance
The FLXA202/FLXA21 has a unique prediction function (wellness check). PH
By making settings concerning the sensor wellness check, you can grap the condition of the
sensor in the gauge display in the Detail screen and carry out predictive maintenance.
SC
See section 4.2.7, 7.1.7, 10.1.7, 13.2.7, or 16.2.7, Sensor diag. settings.
ISC
DO
SENCOM
19. TROUBLESHOOTING
When a or indicator is displayed on the Main display, detailed error information can
be given by pressing this indicator-button.
4mA 20mA
PH
4mA 20mA
ISC
DO
SENCOM
CAUTION
Turn off the power supply to the analyzer before replacement of modules.
Lock Unlock
Figure 19.3 Locking the module
Do not hold the upper fine part when pulling out the module.
First, unlock the module by releasing the lock mechanism on the left and right of the module.
Use a slotted (flat head) screwdriver to pull-out the module. Before pull-out the module, loose a
terminal screw to hook a screwdriver.
NOTE
When the wiring of sensors is finished, be sure to attach the wiring covers. Furthermore, make
sure the module is locked with the mechanisms on the left and right of the module.
NOTE
Confirm that all locking-tabs (including for BLANK slots) are Locked position when close the
front panel.
If locking-tabs are Unlock position, the front panel may be interfered with locking-tabs.
CAUTION
Intrinsic safety type or type n or nonincendive housing assembly /sensor module are certified
independently.
So they must be combined appropriately.
CAUTION
Dont use General Purpose housing assembly / sensor module as Intrinsic safety type module.
19
PH
SC
ISC
DO
SENCOM
The freely programmable table is populated with a basic set of data to provide a start for the
user configuration. This table is intended for the user to be able to choose his buffer solutions to
suit his own preference. The data concerning the pH temperature characteristic will need to be
obtained from the supplier of the buffers. PH
NOTE
Yokogawa recommend the use of NIST (primary buffer standards) rather than buffers which have
been adjusted by the addition of acid or alkaline materials to the buffer composition. In this way
the customer gets a recognized standard, as well as the best buffer capacity (the ability to resist
pH change with contamination).
SENCOM
l User setting
Delete the matrix and then enter new values as shown in Table 6. Gray areas are mandatory.
Other areas can be omitted.
Table 6 Example of user setting (Reference temperature (Tref.): 25.0C)
Temp. range Solution 1 Solution 2 Solution 3 Solution 4 Solution 5
(Min.) (Max.)
Tref. (25.0C) 6.40 pH 7.00 pH 7.30 pH 7.60 pH 9.00 pH
Tmin. (T1) 5.0C 6.42 pH 7.38 pH 7.94 pH 8.31 pH 9.74 pH
T2 25.0C 6.40 pH 7.00 pH 7.30 pH 7.60 pH 9.00 pH
T3 45.0C 6.34 pH 6.70 pH 6.86 pH 7.06 pH 8.40 pH
T4 65.0C 6.23 pH 6.45 pH 6.54 pH 6.67 pH 7.91 pH
Tmax. (T5) 85.0C 6.11 pH 6.25 pH 6.31 pH 6.40 pH 7.51 pH
Note: The gray areas must be entered.
The reference temperature is set in the Temperature Compensation menu (default: 25.0C).
After entering all values, select Check values? to verify that there is no error. This function
checks if the matrix is consistently incremental or decremental. If any error is found, its location is
specified.
When there is no error, the matrix is compensated linearly and the blanks of the table (if any) are
filled. If some areas are left empty without running Check values?, a 1st/2nd comp. matrix error
will be issued.
l Checking procedure
(1) Pour 50 to 100 ml of the solution into a clean 200-ml beaker.
(2) Remove the ORP sensor from the holder. Flush the measurement solution remaining on the
sensor with water and wipe off the water. If the detecting part and liquid outlet of the sensor
are stained, clean them with water.
(3) Immerse the tip of the ORP sensor into the solution. Read the ORP value after the reading
becomes stable (usually 5 to 10 minutes).
Measure the solution temperature and check if the ORP value at the temperature is in the
tolerable range.
CAUTION
Be careful to touch the concentrated sulfuric acid.
Figure 1 shows the ORP values of the checking solutions prepared with Yokogawas reagents. SENCOM
If the measured ORP value is in the tolerable range, the electrode of the ORP sensor is working
normally.
If the ORP value is out of the range, calibrate the sensor. If the ORP value is slightly out of range,
verify whether the checking solution has been properly prepared.
Quinhydrone solution
300
Tolerable range
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature (C)
Figure 1 Oxidation-reduction Potential Given by Checking Solution
Kt - Kref
100
= X
T - Tref K ref
= Temperature compensation factor in %/C
T = Measured temperature in C
Kt = Conductivity at T
Tref = Reference temperature
Kref = Conductivity at Tref
B. Calculation of temperature coefficient factor (with two known conductivity values at
different temperatures)
Measure the conductivity of the liquid at two temperatures, one below the reference and
above the reference temperature with the temperature coefficient set to 0,00%/C and use
the following equation to calculate a temperature coefficient ().
KT
K ref =
1+ ( T - Tref)
K1 K2
K ref= =
1+ ( T1 - Tref) 1+ ( T2 - Tref)
K1 (1 + ( T2 - Tref)) = K2 (1 + ( T1 - Tref))
K1 ( T2 - Tref) - K2 ( T1 - Tref) = K2 - K1
K2 - K1
=
K1( T2 - Tref) - K 2 ( T1 - Tref)
Where T1, T2: liquid temperature (C)
K1: conductivity at T1 (C)
K2: conductivity at T2 (C)
((
( )
Figure 1 Conductivity
When the temperature coefficient already set is accurate, the conductivity to be displayed
must be constant regardless of liquid temperature. The following check will make sure that the
temperature coefficient already set is accurate.
If, when the liquid temperature is lowered, a larger conductivity value is indicated, the
temperature coefficient already set is too small.
The opposite also applies. If a smaller conductivity value is indicated, the temperature coefficient
already set is too large. In either case, change the temperature coefficient so that the conductivity
no longer changes.
l Matrix
Matrix means temperature compensation with the temperature compensation matrix.
The temperature compensation matrix is a table of conductivity values at different temperatures
and concentrations.
Ready-made matrixes and user-defined matrixes are available.
<Ready-made matrixes>
App.
Ready-made temperature compensation matrixes are available for common inorganic acids and
bases. Those for ammonia and morpholine are also available.
Table 2 Ready-made temperature compensation matrixes
Compound to Temp. compensation
Matrix Concentration Details
be measured range
Ammonia 0..50ppb Ammonia 0 to 50 ppb 0 to 90C Table A
Ammonia 15..30% Ammonia 15 to 30% 10 to 50C Table B
Morpholine 0..500ppb Morpholine 0 to 500 ppb 0 to 90C Table C
Sulfunic acid 0..27% H2SO4 0 to 27% 0 to 100C Table D
SC
Sulfunic acid 39..85% H2SO4 39 to 85% -18 to 116C Table E
Sulfunic acid 93..100% H2SO4 93 to 100% 10 to 90C Table F
NaOH 0..15% NaOH 0 to 15% 0 to 100C Table G
NaOH 25..50% NaOH 25 to 50% 0 to 80C Table H
HCl 0..200ppb HCl 0 to 200 ppb 0 to 100C Table I
HCl 0..18% HCI 0 to 18% -10 to 65C Table J
HCl 24..44% HCI 24 to 44% -20 to 65C Table K
HNO3 0..25% HNO3 0 to 25% 0 to 80C Table L
HNO3 35..80% HNO3 35 to 80% -16 to 60C Table M
<User-defined matrixes>
The user-defined temperature compensation matrix is a matrix defined by users. Enter values as
shown in Table 3. The gray areas must be entered.
Table 3 Example of user-defined matrix (Reference temperature (Tref.): 25.0 C, Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu-
(Conc.) Min. Max. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9
Temp.ranges 0% 15 % 1% 3% 4% 5% 6% 8% 10 % 12 %
Tref. (25.0 C) 0.013 0.410 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381
Tmin. 0 C 0.009 0.215 0.035 0.087 0.113 0.133 0.150 0.176 0.195 0.206
Tmax. 100 C 0.025 1.13 0.119 0.315 0.407 0.495 0.574 0.717 0.850 0.967
2. 10 C 0.010 0.293 0.042 0.109 0.140 0.167 0.190 0.226 0.255 0.274
3. 18 C 0.012 0.357 0.047 0.125 0.163 0.195 0.221 0.267 0.303 0.327
4. 25 C 0.013 0.410 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381
5. 30 C 0.014 0.468 0.056 0.153 0.200 0.242 0.278 0.338 0.389 0.424
6. 40 C 0.015 0.551 0.067 0.179 0.233 0.281 0.323 0.396 0.458 0.502
7. 50 C 0.017 0.645 0.070 0.201 0.265 0.320 0.368 0.454 0.527 0.580
8. 60 C 0.018 0.742 0.080 0.223 0.293 0.355 0.410 0.507 0.592 0.658
9. 80 C 0.021 0.936 0.100 0.270 0.350 0.425 0.493 0.612 0.721 0.814
Note: This table is as shown on the screen. The gray areas must be entered.
Set the reference temperature in the Temp. comp. screen (default: 25.0C).
All cells of two user-defined matrixes are blank as a default. If any cells are not blank, clear them.
After entering all values, select Check values? to verify that there is no error.
This function checks if the matrix is consistently incremental or decremental. If any error is found,
its location is specified.
If there is no error, the matrix is compensated linearly and the blanks of the table (if any) are filled.
If some areas are left empty without running Check values?, a 1st/2nd comp. matrix error will be
issued.
l TC
The error is issued when:
(measured temperature reference temperature) < 90/compensation coefficient
The default of the temperature compensation coefficient is 2.10%/C.
For example, when the reference temperature is 25C, the temperature compensation coefficient
is 2.10%/C and the measured temperature is lower than 17.9C, the error will be issued.
Temperature compensation is performed even while an alarm is being issued.
l Matrix
The error is issued when the temperature or the precompensated conductivity is out of the range
of the temperature compensation matrix.
In this case, however, the temperature compensation is performed by extrapolation even while
an alarm is being issued.
l All
When the conductivity is around zero, the temperature compensation error may be issued. In this
case, the temperature compensation is not performed, and the precompensated conductivity is
displayed.
Whether the conductivity is around zero or not is determined by the temperature and conductivity
of solutions. For example, when the temperature is 20C and the conductivity is lower than 0.033
S/cm, the conductivity is determined to be around zero.
When measuring the conductivity around zero in air calibration or when the conductivity to be
measured is around zero, an alarm may be issued. App.
NOTE
To display the precompensated conductivity, set the Method to None.
Select Measurement setup Temp. compensation.
SC
n TDS readings
The concept of Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) is widely used as an indication of the total solute
concentration in water and is a widely accepted water quality standard. The determination is
simply made by evaporation and weighing the residue. As the heat treatment converts the
chemical properties of the solution, some solutes that contribute to the total conductivity will not
be found in the residue. Also some combinations of solutes will become volatile at the drying
temperature. The same applies for those solutes that do not contribute to the conductivity but do
end up in the residue. When one (or a few) solute is dominant in the solution, these problems
may be neglected and TDS will have a direct correlation with the conductivity.
Next is a graph that shows the correlation between the specific conductance and concentrations
(by weight) for six salts. The factor by which the conductivity should be multiplied to come to
a TDS reading ranges from 0.4 to 0.7 up to a conductivity of 500 S/cm. At a conductance of
approximately 3000 S/cm the range would be from 0.5 and 1.0.
The FLXA202/FLXA21 measures conductivity. This value can be used to display TDS values on
the main display. One should use the additional concentration table. The unit for the TDS reading
can be set to ppm or ppb.
NaCI KCI
6000 CaCI2
Conductivity (S/cm, 25C)
MgCI2 Na2SO4
5000
4000
MgSO4
3000
2000
1000
A calibration check, however, is another matter. When the objective is clearly defined as a
diagnostic exercise a regular check can bring an extra level of security and confidence to the
measurement.
Sensor damage, and/or coatings can be difficult to see and the calibration check can confirm
their presence, by a deviation from the known solution conductivity. The remedial action should
be to clean the sensor, and carefully check for blockage or damage (not simply to recalibrate).
Higher conductivity solutions should be used where possible. The lower the conductivity of the
test solution, the easier it is to contaminate. Carbon dioxide from the air can be quickly absorbed
to cause an error. All containers must be suitably clean, and all materials suitably pure. Outside of
a well-equipped laboratory these conditions are hard to meet.
Also note that the check must be performed with due regard to the cell constant of the sensor,
as it limits the effective working range. The documentation provided with the sensor should be
consulted to determine its maximum working value. By using a checking solution close to the
upper range limit of the sensor, the detection of contamination is better. A slightly contaminated
sensor may read perfectly at lower conductivity, but show significant errors at higher values. This
is caused by the early onset of polarization, the factor that limits the upper range of the sensor
in any case. Polarization is seen in contaminated sensors, and it is for this reason that there is a
sophisticated polarization check built into the FLXA202/FLXA21.
If it is more convenient, the user may make solutions from Sodium Chloride (NaCl or common
table salt) with the help of the following relationship table. This table is derived from the IEC norm
60746-3.
Table 5 NaCl values at 25 C
Weight % mg/kg Conductivity
0.001 10 21.4 S/cm
0.003 30 64.0 S/cm
0.005 50 106 S/cm
0.01 100 210 S/cm
0.03 300 617 S/cm
0.05 500 1.03 mS/cm
0.1 1000 1.99 mS/cm
0.3 3000 5.69 mS/cm
0.5 5000 9.48 mS/cm
1 10000 17.6 mS/cm
3 30000 48.6 mS/cm
5 50000 81.0 mS/cm
10 100000 140 mS/cm App.
For resistivity measurement the standard resistivity units of the calibration solution can be
calculated as follows:
R = 1000/G (kcm if G = S/cm)
Example: 0.001% weight R = 1000/21.4 = 46.7 kcm
Kt - Kref
100
= X
T - Tref K ref
= Temperature compensation factor in %/C
T = Measured temperature in C
Kt = Conductivity at T
Tref = Reference temperature
Kref = Conductivity at Tref
B. Calculation of temperature coefficient factor (with two known conductivity values at
different temperatures)
Measure the conductivity of the liquid at two temperatures, one below the reference and
above the reference temperature with the temperature coefficient set to 0,00%/C and use
the following equation to calculate a temperature coefficient ().
KT
K ref =
1+ ( T - Tref)
K1 K2
K ref= =
1+ ( T1 - Tref) 1+ ( T2 - Tref)
K1 (1 + ( T2 - Tref)) = K2 (1 + ( T1 - Tref))
K1 ( T2 - Tref) - K2 ( T1 - Tref) = K2 - K1
K2 - K1
=
K1( T2 - Tref) - K 2 ( T1 - Tref)
Where T1, T2: liquid temperature (C)
K1: conductivity at T1 (C)
K2: conductivity at T2 (C)
((
( )
Figure 1 Conductivity
When the temperature coefficient already set is accurate, the conductivity to be displayed
must be constant regardless of liquid temperature. The following check will make sure that the
temperature coefficient already set is accurate.
If, when the liquid temperature is lowered, a larger conductivity value is indicated, the
temperature coefficient already set is too small.
The opposite also applies. If a smaller conductivity value is indicated, the temperature coefficient
already set is too large. In either case, change the temperature coefficient so that the conductivity
no longer changes.
l Matrix
Matrix means temperature compensation with the temperature compensation matrix.
The temperature compensation matrix is a table of conductivity values at different temperatures
and concentrations.
Ready-made matrixes and user-defined matrixes are available.
<Ready-made matrixes>
App.
Ready-made temperature compensation matrixes are available for common inorganic acids and
bases. Those for ammonia and morpholine are also available.
Table 2 Ready-made temperature compensation matrixes
Compound to Temp. compensation
Matrix Concentration Details
be measured range
Sulfunic acid 1..5% H2SO4 1 to 5% 0 to 100C Table A
Sulfunic acid 1..27% H2SO4 1 to 27% -1 to 99C Table B
Sulfunic acid 39..85% H2SO4 39 to 85% -18 to 116C Table C
Sulfunic acid 93..100% H2SO4 93 to 100% 10 to 90C Table D
HCl 0..5% HCl 0 to 5% 0 to 60C Table E
HCl 0..18% HCI 0 to 18% -10 to 65C Table F
HCl 24..44% HCI 24 to 44% -20 to 65C Table G
ISC
HNO3 1..5% HNO3 1 to 5% 0 to 80C Table H
HNO3 0..25% HNO3 0 to 25% 0 to 80C Table I
HNO3 35..85% HNO3 35 to 85% -16 to 60C Table J
NaOH 1..5% NaOH 1 to 5% 0 to 100C Table K
NaOH 0..15% NaOH 0 to 15% 0 to 100C Table L
NaOH 25..50% NaOH 25 to 50% 0 to 80C Table M
<User-defined matrixes>
The user-defined temperature compensation matrix is a matrix defined by users. Enter values as
shown in Table 3. The gray areas must be entered.
Table 3 Example of user-defined matrix (Reference temperature (Tref.): 25.0 C, Conductivity unit: S/cm)
Solutions Solut. Solut. Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu- Solu-
(Conc.) Min. Max. tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 tion 9
Temp.ranges 0% 15 % 1% 3% 4% 5% 6% 8% 10 % 12 %
Tref. (25.0 C) 0.013 0.410 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381
Tmin. 0 C 0.009 0.215 0.035 0.087 0.113 0.133 0.150 0.176 0.195 0.206
Tmax. 100 C 0.025 1.13 0.119 0.315 0.407 0.495 0.574 0.717 0.850 0.967
2. 10 C 0.010 0.293 0.042 0.109 0.140 0.167 0.190 0.226 0.255 0.274
3. 18 C 0.012 0.357 0.047 0.125 0.163 0.195 0.221 0.267 0.303 0.327
4. 25 C 0.013 0.410 0.052 0.142 0.183 0.222 0.256 0.313 0.355 0.381
5. 30 C 0.014 0.468 0.056 0.153 0.200 0.242 0.278 0.338 0.389 0.424
6. 40 C 0.015 0.551 0.067 0.179 0.233 0.281 0.323 0.396 0.458 0.502
7. 50 C 0.017 0.645 0.070 0.201 0.265 0.320 0.368 0.454 0.527 0.580
8. 60 C 0.018 0.742 0.080 0.223 0.293 0.355 0.410 0.507 0.592 0.658
9. 80 C 0.021 0.936 0.100 0.270 0.350 0.425 0.493 0.612 0.721 0.814
Note: This table is as shown on the screen. The gray areas must be entered.
Set the reference temperature in the Temp. comp. screen (default: 25.0C).
All cells of two user-defined matrixes are blank as a default. If any cells are not blank, clear them.
After entering all values, select Check values? to verify that there is no error.
This function checks if the matrix is consistently incremental or decremental. If any error is found,
its location is specified.
If there is no error, the matrix is compensated linearly and the blanks of the table (if any) are filled.
If some areas are left empty without running Check values?, a 1st/2nd comp. matrix error will be
issued.
l TC
The error is issued when:
(measured temperature reference temperature) < 90/compensation coefficient
The default of the temperature compensation coefficient is 2.10%/C.
For example, when the reference temperature is 25C, the temperature compensation coefficient
is 2.10%/C and the measured temperature is lower than 17.9C, the error will be issued.
Temperature compensation is performed even while an alarm is being issued.
l Matrix
The error is issued when the temperature or the precompensated conductivity is out of the range
of the temperature compensation matrix.
In this case, however, the temperature compensation is performed by extrapolation even while
an alarm is being issued.
l All
When the conductivity is around zero, the temperature compensation error may be issued. In this
case, the temperature compensation is not performed, and the precompensated conductivity is
displayed.
Whether the conductivity is around zero or not is determined by the temperature and conductivity
of solutions. For example, when the temperature is 20C and the conductivity is lower than 0.033
S/cm, the conductivity is determined to be around zero.
When measuring the conductivity around zero in air calibration or when the conductivity to be
measured is around zero, an alarm may be issued. App.
NOTE
To display the precompensated conductivity, set the Method to None.
Select Measurement setup Temp. compensation.
A calibration check, however, is another matter. When the objective is clearly defined as a
diagnostic exercise a regular check can bring an extra level of security and confidence to the
measurement.
Sensor damage, and/or coatings can be difficult to see and the calibration check can confirm
their presence, by a deviation from the known solution conductivity. The remedial action should
be to clean the sensor, and carefully check for blockage or damage (not simply to recalibrate).
Higher conductivity solutions should be used where possible. The lower the conductivity of the
test solution, the easier it is to contaminate. Carbon dioxide from the air can be quickly absorbed
to cause an error. All containers must be suitably clean, and all materials suitably pure. Outside of
a well-equipped laboratory these conditions are hard to meet.
If it is more convenient, the user may make solutions from Sodium Chloride (NaCl or common
table salt) with the help of the following relationship table. This table is derived from the IEC norm
60746-3.
Table 5 NaCl values at 25 C
Weight % mg/kg Conductivity
0.001 10 21.4 S/cm
0.003 30 64.0 S/cm
0.005 50 106 S/cm
0.01 100 210 S/cm
0.03 300 617 S/cm
0.05 500 1.03 mS/cm
0.1 1000 1.99 mS/cm
0.3 3000 5.69 mS/cm
0.5 5000 9.48 mS/cm
1 10000 17.6 mS/cm
3 30000 48.6 mS/cm
5 50000 81.0 mS/cm
10 100000 140 mS/cm
n Measurement principle
Contrary to contact electrode conductivity, the EXA ISC Series analyses the conductivity with
out any contact between electrodes and process fluid. The measurement is based on inductive
coupling of 2 ring trans form ers (Toroids) by the liquid.
V3 V1
Receive coil drive coil
N3 N1
I=V2G
The converter supplies a reference volt age at a high frequency to the drive coil. The core of this
coil is of a high permeability mag net ic material, and a strong magnetic field is generated in the
toroid.
The liquid passes through the hole in the toroid and can be considered as a one turn secondary
winding.
The magnetic field will induce a voltage in this secondary winding. The induced cur rent in the
liquid winding is proportional to this volt age and the conductance of the liquid one turn winding
is according to Ohms law.
App.
ISC
The sensors used in FLXA202/FLXA21 use the membrane electrode method to measure the
dissolved oxygen.
Two methods are available: galvanic cell method and polarographic method.
n Compensation
There are three compensation methods for FLXA202/FLXA21: temperature compensation,
salinity compensation, and process pressure compensation.
Salinity and temperature compensations meet ISO 5814 (see Table 1).
There is no need to change the setting for normal usage.
Use the salinity compensation when measuring a solution containing salt (see Section 13.2.4).
For operation at high altitude, adjust the pressure value for the process pressure compensation
(see Section 13.2.5).
Table 1 Solubility of oxygen in water as a function of temperature and salinity
Solubility of oxygen in water in Correction to be subtracted for each degree of salinity
Temperature
equilibrium with air at 101.325 kPa expressed in g/kg of total salts (NaCl) in water
(C)
(mg/l) (mg/l)
0 14.62 0.0875
1 14.22 0.0843 App.
2 13.83 0.0818
3 13.46 0.0789
4 13.11 0.0760
5 12.77 0.0739
6 12.45 0.0714
7 12.14 0.0693
8 11.84 0.0671
9 11.56 0.0650
10 11.29 0.0632
11 11.03 0.0614
12 10.78 0.0593
13 10.54 0.0582
14 10.31 0.0561
15 10.08 0.0545
16 9.87 0.0532
17 9.66 0.0514 DO
18 9.47 0.0500
19 9.28 0.0489
20 9.09 0.0475
21 8.91 0.0464
22 8.74 0.0453
23 8.58 0.0443
24 8.42 0.0432
25 8.26 0.0421
26 8.11 0.0407
27 7.97 0.0400
28 7.83 0.0389
29 7.69 0.0382
30 7.56 0.0371
ISO 5814:1990(E)
1 5
2 4 3
8
7 6 10
9
11 12 13 14 15
K9698ER 1 pH/ORP Sensor module assembly (General purpose, 12(Jumper) and 13(Grommet set) are included.)
K9698FR 1 SC Sensor module assembly (General purpose)
K9698GR 1 ISC Sensor module assembly (General purpose)
K9698HR 1 DO Sensor module assembly (General purpose)
K9698JS 1 SENCOM Sensor module assembly (General purpose and Intrinsic safety, 14(Grommet) is included.)
2 - 1 Shield plate
3 - 1 Shield assembly
4 - 1 Shield plate
5 Y9304LU 4 Screw
6 - - Cable gland assembly
K9698WF 1 For plastic housing (1 sensor) (cable gland x3, sleeve x1)
K9698WA 1 For plastic housing (2 sensors) (cable gland x4, sleeve x1)
K9698ZL 1 For stainless steel housing (cable gland x3, close up plug (rubber plug) x1)
7 K9334CN 1 Rubber plug (for auxiliary component)
8 - - Conduit adapter set
11 - - Hood assembly
K9698WK 1 Stainless steel (option code: /H6)
K9698WL 1 Stainless steel + urethane coating (option code: /H7)
K9698WH 1 Stainless steel + epoxy coating (option code: /H8)
12 A1525JT 2 Jumper (only for pH)
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2010 Yokogawa Electric Corporation. CMPL 12A01A02-01E
Subject to change without notice. 10th Edition: Oct. 2015 (YK)
Customer FLXA202
Maintenance 2-Wire Analyzer
Parts List
4 14 3
1 2
7
6 5 9
8
10 11 12 13
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2015 Yokogawa Electric Corporation. CMPL 12A01A03-01EN
Subject to change without notice. 1st Edition: Oct. 2015 (YK)
i
Revision Record
Manual Title : Model FLXA202 / FLXA21 2-Wire Analyzer
Manual No. : IM 12A01A02-01E
IM 12B07K02-01E
IM 12B07K02-01E
3rd Edition
<INTRODUCTION> i
INTRODUCTION
This users manual provides information for the installation and use of the FU20 pH/ORP sensor.
The FU20 is the choice for the majority of typical waste water and process applications.
Upon delivery, unpack the sensor carefully and inspect it to ensure it was not damaged during
shipment. If damage is found, retain the original packing materials (including outer box) and then
immediately notify the carrier and the relevant Yokogawa sales office. Make sure the Model Code
on the sensor is the same as on the packing list. For details of the Model Code, refer to Sec. 1.2.
Media No. IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov. 2015 (YK) IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition : Nov.10,2015-00
All Rights Reserved Copyright 2000, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
<INTRODUCTION> ii
n Signal Words
The following words are used in this manual.
CAUTION
This symbol gives information essential for understanding the operations and functions.
NOTE
This symbol indicates information that complements the present topic.
After-sales Warranty
n Do not modify the product.
n During the warranty period, for repair under warranty consult the local sales representative
or service office. Yokogawa will replace or repair any damaged parts. Before consulting for
repair under warranty, provide us with the model name and serial number and a description
of the problem. Any diagrams or data explaining the problem would also be appreciated.
If we replace the product with a new one, we wont provide you with a repair report.
Yokogawa warrants the product for the period stated in the pre-purchase quotation
Yokogawa shall conduct defined warranty service based on its standard. When the
customer site is located outside of the service area, a fee for dispatching the maintenance
engineer will be charged to the customer.
Returned goods that have been in contact with process fluids must be decontaminated
and disinfected prior to shipment. Goods should carry a certificate to this effect, for the
health and safety of our employees. Material Safety Data sheets must be included for all
components of the process to which the sensor have been exposed.
n In the following cases, customer will be charged repair fee regardless of warranty period.
Failure of components which are out of scope of warranty stated in instruction manual.
Failure caused by usage of software, hardware or auxiliary equipment, which Yokogawa
Electric did not supply.
Failure due to improper or insufficient maintenance by user.
Failure due to modification, misuse or outside-of-specifications operation which Yokogawa
does not authorize.
Failure due to power supply (voltage, frequency) being outside specifications or abnormal.
Failure caused by any usage out of scope of recommended usage.
Any damage from fire, earthquake, storms and floods, lightning, disturbances, riots, warfare,
radiation and other natural changes.
n Yokogawa does not warrant conformance with the specific application at the user site.
Yokogawa will not bear direct/indirect responsibility for damage due to a specific application.
n Yokogawa Electric will not bear responsibility when the user configures the product into
systems or resells the product.
n Maintenance service and supplying repair parts will be covered for five years after the
production ends. For repair for this product, please contact the nearest sales office
described in this instruction manual.
Model FU20
pH/ORP Sensor
IM 12B07K02-01E 3rd Edition
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................i
For the safe use of this equipment..............................................................ii
After-sales Warranty....................................................................................iii
1. Specification.............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Standard Specifications.................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Model and Suffix codes..................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 External Dimensions......................................................................................... 1-2
2. Installation and Wiring.............................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Installation.......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Wiring.................................................................................................................. 2-1
3. Maintenance............................................................................................... 3-1
Revision Information................................................................................................i
1. Specification
The Model FU20 offers a simple and cost effective solution for a wide variety of waste water and
process applications. This all-in-one sensor provides simultaneous measurement of pH, ORP
and temperature. The rugged Ryton body is designed for easy installation into on-line via the 3/4
inch tapered threaded connections provided on both ends of the sensor.
NOTE
Cautions for using the FU20 sensor
Note that the FU20 sensor has limited life which depending on installation process.
Be careful not to allow liquid junction and glass of the pH sensor to dry out.
When storing the sensor, be sure to attach the protective cap (supplied with it on shipment) to its tip.
The sensing glass membrane of the pH sensor gradually deteriorates during storage.
A virgin pH sensor may become unusable because of its deterioration. Avoid storing the sensor
for a long time (Use within a year is recommended).
11 12 13 14 15 16
Cable length (5 m or 10 m)
6.5
PG7
19.6
3/4 inch
tapered thread
(Note)
150
Sensor body
(PPS resin)
22.5 19.6
3/4 inch
tapered thread
(Note) (Note) Can be fixed to 3/4NPT female screw.
25.9
IM 12B07K02-01E
< 2. Installation and Wiring > 2-1
2.1 Installation
For optimum measurement results, the FU20 should be installed in a location that offers an
acceptable representation of the process composition and DOES NOT exceed the specifications
of the sensor.
This sensor should be installed rain-proof or drip-proof area where rainwater cannot get inside
through the cable inlet/outlet, because insulation of sensor will be decreased due to exposure to
rain or due to condensation at a high humid place.
Take care that screw-in force is not too large.
Special orderis needed for using with PH8HG drop-in guide pipe.
n In-line Installation
The FU20 sensor is designed for in-line installation, via a bypass loop as an immersion assembly.
For best results the FU20 should be mounted with the process coming towards the sensor and
positioned at least 15 above the horizontal plane to eliminate air bubbles in the glass bulb.
The FU20 can be mounted using the threads on the sensor body (Figure 2.1).
Apply Teflon tape to the appropriate threaded end, then install in the process.
How to apply Teflon tape: Apply seven turns or more Teflon tape from the thread end in piles
(thickness of tape: approximately 0.1 mm, width of tape: approximately 13 mm).
Apply more turns of Teflon tape for leakage.
Screw-in torque of sensor is approximately 4 Nm.
PG7
PG7
FU20
FU20
Teflon tape
2.2 Wiring
Mark band of sensor is shown by numeral and pin terminals are used, connect each core wire to
the corresponding terminals of transmitter or converter. For details of wiring, refer to relevant IMs
of transmitter or converter.
PG7
For pH measurement
FLXA202/FLXA21/PH450G
Wire Marking
(11) TEMPERATURE
11
(12) TEMPERATURE
12
(13) REFERENCE
13
(14) SOLUTION GROUND
14
(15) GLASS (Measure)
15
(16) GE SHIELD
16
(17)
PG7
(*1) (11)
11
(*1) (12)
12
(13) REFERENCE (*2)
13
(14) SOLUTION GROUND
14
(*1) (15) ORP (Measure)
15
(*1) (16) SHIELD
16
(17)
PG7
*1: Wires of 11, 12, 15 and 16 are not used, wrap these wires with an insulating
tape or related protection.
*2: For ORP measurement not all numbers are correct, look at the wiring diagram
and short terminals (13) and (14) of converter.
3. Maintenance
The sensor has limited life. If buffer solution calibration becomes impossible due to deterioration
of the sensor, replace it with a new one. After the sensor is replaced, always carry out a buffer
solution calibration.
NOTE
A glass electrode whose glass membrane has dried out does not provide stable readings until
it gets used to the solution. Place in advance the glass electrode in the 3 mol/L KCl solution for
several hours. When storing the sensor, use a sensor cap (supplied with it on shipment) to its tip.
CAUTION
Avoid using non-polar solvent like tri-chloro ethylene, toluene or hexane. Cleaning with iso-
propanol or methanol is acceptable.
The non-polar solvents will break up the gel-layer on the glass bulb and requires that the
electrode to be soaked in water for at least 12 hours before functioning normally again.
The Teflon (PTFE) diaphragm of the sensor can sometimes be regenerated by putting it in hot
(approx. 70C) 3 molar Potassium Chlorine (KCl) solution and letting it cool to room temperature.
Revision Information
Title : Model FU20 pH/ORP Sensor
Manual No. : IM 12B07K02-01E
n If you want to have more information about Yokogawa products, you can visit
Yokogawas home page at the following web site.
Home page: http://www.yokogawa.com/an
IM 12B06W02-03E-E
4th Edition
2.3 Connector materials 3 Wiring 2 1
Housing :P olybutylene terephthalate
UL94V-0, color: black.
O-ring : Nitrilbutadieenrubber,
color: black.
Nut : Brass.
Contact finishing : Gold plated. 3 5
2.4 Electrical specifications
Twisted pair cables :C apacity < 50 pF/m
Resistance < 100 /km 4
Characteristic Impedance 120 Figure 2. Front view female connector
Connector : Maximum rated current 5 A
Maximum voltage 125 V 3.1 Definition connector pin to cable
D d WP
3.2 Connection cable to FLXA analyzer
MODEL CODE
L
Description color number terminal
Figure 1. Cable dimensions. Supply + brown 87 87
Length (L) :2 , 3, 5, 10, 20 and 30m Supply Gnd white 86 86
(6.6, 9.8, 16.4, 32.8, 65.6, 98.4 ft) Data + green 84 84
Dia. connector (D) : 10.6 0.2 mm Data - yellow 83 83
(0.417 0.008 inch) Shield black 82 82
Dia. cable (d) : 5.8 0.1 mm
(0.228 0.004 inch) 4 Model and Suffix Codes
Wire pins : 8 x 1.3 mm
(0.31 x 0.05 inch) Model Suffix Description
WU11 SENCOM cable
2.7 Cable installation Conn. type -M9 M9 female connector for sensor conn.
Procuring a smooth bend radius allows the cable to Cable length -02 2 meter only available with CN finishing
absorb the impact of bending and thereby increasing its -03 3 meter only with WP
life cycle. Minimum bend radius is approx. 5 cm (2). -05 5 meter only with WP
-10 10 meter only with WP
When using cable ties, do not pinch or deform the cable. -20 20 meter only with WP
-30 30 meter only available with CN finishing
When connected cable is subjected to any motion Finishing -WP Wire pin for terminal connection
between two points, stress on the cable can be prevented -CN Straight plug for M9 female connector
by an adequate cable length or using a cable loop. Jacket material -V PVC
YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC ASIA Pte. LTD. Yokogawa has an extensive sales and
World Headquarters 5 Bedok South Road
9-32, Nakacho 2-chome, Musashino-shi Singapore 469270 distribution network.
Tokyo 180-8750 Singapore
Japan www.yokogawa.com/sg Please refer to the European website
www.yokogawa.com (www.yokogawa.com/eu) to contact your
YOKOGAWA CORPORATION OF AMERICA YOKOGAWA CHINA CO. LTD. nearest representative.
2 Dart Road 3F Tower D Cartelo Crocodile Building
Newnan GA 30265 No.568 West Tianshan Road Changing District
USA Shanghai, China
www.yokogawa.com/us www.yokogawa.com/cn
IM 12X0X0-E-E
IM 12B06W02-03E-E
Subject to change without notice Printed in The Netherlands, 00-000 (A) I
Copyright
Subject to change without notice Printed in The Netherlands, 04-1506
Copyright
1.4InstructionManualforTurbidityAnalyzer
ApplicableModel Area
TB750GNTUSTN1NNNN3NN/U PRASEDIMENTASIAREA
SS7 RESERVOIRIPAAREA
<<Contents>> <<Index>>
General
There are increasing demands for good quality water
for both industrial-use and drinking water applications
because of rapid industrial development and consumer
demands for better quality of life. A large amount
of the waste water from both applications has been
drained or discharged into rivers, causing pollution to
worsen year after year. This has caused serious social
problems. Therefore, turbidimeters, conventionally
used for the operation and control of water purification
plants, are nowadays being required to measure
the amount of matter suspended in various sorts of
industrial waste water and to measure the turbidity of
chemical processes.
Since their sales began in 1959, Yokogawas
turbidimeters have been continuously developed and
improved using various measurement principles suited System Configuration
for various applications. With its many achievements, Example: Typical system
Yokogawa has earned its customers confidence.
Developed based on years of experience and Analog
output TB750G
applications in process fields, the TB750G Turbidity Converter
Measuring System using right angle light scattering Serial Sample water outlet
method provides highly reliable measurement and commu-
nication RS-422
improved maintainability which improve upon what or RS-232C
Contact
previous models could offer. A wide range of options output
are available to meet users various needs. Range contact
output Light
TB750G Light Drain
Contact source Detector receiver
input
Features Power
Highly reliable measurement with excellent linearity supply Sample water inlet
and repeatability
Linearity: 2% of reading or 0.01 NTU, whichever
is greater
Repeatability: 1% of reading or 0.002 NTU, Sample water
whichever is greater Drain F01.ai
Display resolution: 0.001 NTU
Easy-to-clean cell Example: System with ultrasonic oscillator and
Compact, lightweight converter and detector zero turbidity filter
User configurable measuring range
Measuring range: 0-0.2 NTU to 0-100 NTU Analog
Measuring range switching (2 or 3 ranges) output TB750G TUS400G should be purchased separately.
Enhanced self-diagnostic function as standard Serial Converter TUS400G
Light source failure, input element failure, calibration commu- Ultrasonic
nication RS-422 Oscillator Sample water outlet
failure, various circuit failures, etc. Contact or RS-232C
Detector structure to remove sudden reading output
change caused by bubbles Range contact
output
A wide range of measurement conditions Contact TB750G Light
Light
Low flow rate: 0.05 to 20 l/min input source Detector receiver
Drain
High pressure: 500 kPa maximum Power
Temperature: 0 to 50C supply Head Sample water inlet
Detector can be connected for in-line analysis tank
2 analog outputs, 3 relay contact outputs, and 1 Sample
serial communication water
Many options available Drain for washing
Tap
Ultrasonic transducer and oscillator for ultrasonic water
cleaning Zero turbidity filter Drain
Various head tanks to accommodate application
Zero sample
requirements
Zero turbidity filter should be purchased separately. F02.ai
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Nov. 25, 2014-03
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 3
Pressure: 500 kPa max. Zero turbidity filter
Mounting: Pipe, wall, rack or panel mounting When measuring range is 2.0 NTU or greater: 1 m
Piping connection (detector): When measuring range is below 2.0 NTU:
Sample water inlet: Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT (optional) 1 m + 0.2 m
Sample water outlet: Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT (optional) 2. TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator
Drain port: Rc1 or 1NPT (optional) Combination device: Turbidity converter (TB750G)
Cable inlet port (detector and converter): Special cable (3-conductor shielded cable)
DIN Pg 13.5 cable gland Cleaning method: Continuous ultrasonic emission
Cable OD.: 6 to 12 mm (Frequency sweep method)
Dimensions: Oscillation frequency: Approx. 170 to 200 kHz (sweeping
Detector: 378W x 174H x 265D mm frequency: Approx. 160 to 250 kHz)
Converter: 144W x 144H x 142D mm Output voltage: Approx. 40 to 80 V
Material (main): Power supply: 100/110/115/200/220/240 V AC 10%,
Detector: Aluminum alloy casting, modified PPE resin 50/60 Hz
Wetted parts: Modified PPE resin, glass, fluoric Power consumption: Approx. 30 VA
rubber, silicon rubber, SUS 316 Insulation resistance:
Converter: Aluminum alloy casting, Polycarbonate resin Power supply-G: 100 M or more / 500 V DC
Construction: JIS C 0920, IP65 Water-tight Output terminals-G: 100 M or more / 500 V DC
Finish: Withstand voltage:
Detector, converter: Power supply-G: 1000/1500 V AC for 1 min.
Baked polyurethane resin coating (standard) Output terminals-C: 1000/1500 V AC for 1 min.
Baked epoxy resin coating (optional) Ambient temperature: -10 to 50C (hood may be
Color: fitted as option)
Detector: Spring Black (Munsell 3.3PB2.5/0.5 Storage temperature: -25 to 70C
or equivalent), Mint green (Munsell Construction: JIS C 0920 Water-tight (NEMA 4
5.6BG3.3/2.9 or equivalent) equivalent waterproof construction)
Converter: Silver Gray (Munsell 3.2PB7.4/1.2 or Material: Case: Aluminum alloy casting
equivalent) Window: Polycarbonate
Weight: Finish: Baked polyurethane resin coating
Detector: Approx. 5.8 kg (standard)
Converter: Approx. 1.5 kg Baked epoxy resin coating (optional)
Power supply: 100 to 240 VAC -15%/+10%, 50/60 Hz Color:
Grounding: Class D grounding Case: Frosty white (Munsell 2.5Y8.4/1.2 or
Grounding resistance of 100 or less equivalent)
Power consumption: Cover: Deep sea-moss green (Munsell
Converter + Detector: 50 VA max. 0.6G3.1/2.9 or equivalent)
Regulatory Compliance Mounting: Pipe mounting, wall or rack mounting or
EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New panel mounting
Zealand Mounting material: Stainless steel
EN 55011 Class A, Group 1 Cable inlet port: 22.7 hole x 2
Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard Class A DIN Pg16 watertight plastic gland
Cable/terminal: For 7 to 12 mm, M4 screw
Conduit adapter: Power supply side (optional)
Characteristics Material: Polycarbonate resin
Standard performance Connection: G1/2 or 1/2NPT
(under normal operating conditions) Weight:
Repeatability: 1% of reading or 0.002 NTU, Body: Approx. 2.0 kg
whichever is greater Mounting: Approx. 0.7 kg
Linearity: 2% of reading or 0.01 NTU, Dimension:162W x 180H x 115D mm
whichever is greater Note: 1. Output of ultrasonic oscillator changes with
Response time: Within 2 minutes (90% response, power supply voltage. The output is lower when
sample water flow rate 3 l/min) the voltage is lower.
Optional Specifications 2. Output of ultrasonic oscillator changes with
Head tank: connected cable. The output is lower when the
Simple head tank length of the cable is longer.
Application: Turbidity is 10 NTU or less. To Noise filter assembly: (for TUS400G-NN-RC, -KC)
remove relatively large air bubbles. Ambient temperature: -10 to 50C
Sample water conditions: Flow rate: 1 to 10 l/min (no dew condensation allowed)
Turbidity: 2 to 10 NTU Strage temperature: -25 to 70C
Pressurized head tank for low turbidity Construction: JIS C 0920 Watertight (IP53)
Application: Turbidity is 2 NTU or less. To remove air Regulatory Compliance
bubbles and to prevent them from occurring. (for TUS400G-NN-RC)
Sample water conditions: EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and
Flow rate; 0.05 to 10 l/min New Zealand
Turbidity; 2 NTU or less EN 55011 Class A, Group 1
Pressure; 20 to 500 kPa (for TUS400G-NN-KC)
Transducer for ultrasonic cleaning (TUS400G Ultrasonic Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard Class A
Oscillator should be purchased separately.)
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 4
Model and Codes
1. TB750G Right Angle Scattered Light Turbidimeter
Model Suffix Code Option Code Description
TB750G ............................................... ............. Right angle scattered light turbidimeter
Turbidity standard and -NTU ............. Formazin, 0-0.2 NTU to 0-100 NTU
measuring range
Application -ST ............. Standard
Output -N1 ............. 4 to 20 mA DC, RS-422
-N2 ............. 4 to 20 mA DC, RS-232C
Sampling system -NN ............. Without sampling system
Sampling system material and mounting NN ............. Without sampling system
Cable length between converter and -1 ............. 1m
detector -2 ............. 2m
-3 ............. 3m
___ Always -NN
-NN .............
Option Detector process connection /NPT ANSI standard connection *1
Mounting hardware /U Pipe mounting hardware (SUS)
/R Rack or wall mounting hardware (SUS)
/PM Panel mounting hardware (SUS)
/TBC Mounting hardware for Model 8562 or Model TB500G replacement (SUS) *2
Conduit adapter /AFTG G1/2 *3
/ANSI 1/2NPT *3
Head tank /D1 Pressurized head tank for low turbidity (recommended for 2.0 NTU or less)
/D2 Simple head tank
Tag plate /SCT Stainless steel tag plate
Special painting /X1 Epoxy painting *4
Ultrasonic transducer /US Transducer for ultrasonic cleaning *5
*1: When option /NPT is specified, the piping connections of sample water inlet, sample water outlet, and drain port are 1/2NPT, 1/2NPT, and
1NPT respectively. Unless option /NPT is specified, they are Rc1/2, Rc1/2, and Rc1 respectively.
*2: This bracket is also available to the detector of Turbidimeter 1720E and 1720D manufactured by HACH. It is separate type, each for detector
and converter.
*3: Conduit adapter is for power supply, output and input wiring provided by customer.
*4: Converter and detector case are painted with epoxy resin.
*5: Specify option /US (ultrasonic transducer) for ultrasonic cleaning. Also TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator should be purchased separately.
Note: When ultrasonic cleaning is continuously used after the Model 8562 Turbidity Transmitter has been replaced with the TB750G Turbidimeter,
this /US option must be specified.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 5
Dimensions
1. TB750G Right Angle Scattered Light Turbidimeter
Converter
141.5 Unit: mm
144 132 4-M6 screws
(141.5)
150 min.
(144)
144
80
150 min.
50
min.
80 Maintenance space
6- Cable inlets
(30)
Detector connecting
cable inlet DIN Pg13.5 Grounding terminal
Cable gland (M4 screw)
Dedicated cable (1/2/3 m)
to Detector F03.ai
Detector
Unit: mm
Front view Side view
500 min.
500 min.
265
(265.3)
250 min. (297) 250 min. 200 min.
(378) (265)
174
41
63
Cable gland
49
Adapter
G1/2 (/AFTG) or 1/2NPT (/ANSI) F12.ai
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 6
Pipe mounting (option code: /U)
Converter
195 Unit: mm
144 132
Detector
Mounting 2-inch pipe (60.5 OD) Unit: mm
20 84
Sample water outlet
12
Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
48
180
202
25
47
20 113 102
Sample water inlet Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. Drain Rc1 or 1NPT F06.ai
154.5 Unit: mm
144 132
144
224
70
70 4-10
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F07.ai
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 7
Detector (The dedicated mounting bracket is not attached. Install the detector with four M5 screws.)
20 38 Unit: mm
2-6 (fixing holes) Sample water outlet
Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
60
160 (for fixing hole)
7
174
180
R3
R3
41
63
6 6
Sample water inlet Drain
20 Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
113 56 Rc1 or 1NPT
100 (for fixing hole)
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F08.ai
138 +2
0
195 min.
100
Detector (The dedicated mounting bracket is not attached. Install the detector with four M5 screws.)
20 38 Unit: mm
2-6 (fixing holes) Sample water outlet
Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
60
160 (for fixing hole)
7
174
180
R3
R3
41
63
6 6
Sample water inlet Drain
20 Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
113 56 Rc1 or 1NPT
100 (for fixing hole)
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F08.ai
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 8
Mounting for Model 8562 or Model TB500G replacement (option code: /TBC)
Converter
154.5 Unit: mm
144 132
144
224
70
70 4-10
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F07.ai
Detector
R3
Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT
(for detector fixing screw)
(20)
139
174
160
41
31
63
20 Sample water inlet
Rc1/2 or 1/2NPT Drain
70 (for fixing hole) 113 56
Rc1 or 1NPT
(Note) Dedicated cable is omitted. F09.ai
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 9
Pressurized head tank for low turbidity (option code: /D1)
Unit: mm
Approx. 127
Drain
6/4 PE tube coupling
Approx. 332
123 5 Unit: mm
102 5 67 5
66 5
205 5
Drain
Tube size 19 ID 4-6
Hose coupling
390 (for fixing hole)
210.55
1505
26
Sample water outlet 95.5 5 64.5
(to detector)
Rp1/2 Drain
TS socket type
Nominal 20A (26.2 ID) F11.ai
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 10
2. TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator
50
Hood
130
(optional)
180
30
66.5
96
Red
U1 White
U1
U2 Black
U2
U3 U3
Cable length: L
Approx. 80 (L=1/5/10/15 m) Approx. 60
or 180 F13.ai
75
L2 White
70 G Green
Approx. 80
152
Weight of noise filter assembly: Approx. 2 kg Weight of power cable: Approx. 0.2 kg
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 11
Pipe mounting (option code: /PS)
27 8
Hood
110
(optional) 2-inch (60.5 OD)
pipe (vertical mounting)
30
203
2-inch (60.5 OD)
288
48
F14.ai
6.5 x 13 hole
Pipe mounting bracket 1
75
2- 5.5 holes
200
2-9 holes
35
M8 nut 2
4-10 holes
15
70
100 (10) (92) (54) 2-inch pipe (vertical
Weight: Approx. 0.7 kg mounting OD 60.5)
138
30
60
121
38 80 3.9 185
206
<Panel cutout dimensions> F15.ai
100 Unit: mm
2-5.5 holes
700.2
(for hood)
56 0.2
8
27
13
30
60
185
2-6.6 holes
27
15
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 12
70 5- 6.5 holes
8
6.5 x13 hole
4-M6 screw
(customers
scope)
4- 10 holes
15
70
100 (10) (92) 13
Weight: Approx. 0.7 kg
Cable gland
49
Adapter
G1/2 (/AFTG) or 1/2NPT (/ANSI) F12.ai
IN
80
115
121
Filter
F17.ai
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 13
Wiring
TB750G Turbidity detector TB750G Turbidity converter
(Terminal: M4) (Terminal: M3)
Power L CONVERTER Dedicated cable (1/2/3 m)
supply *5 N POWER SENSOR
G G G NO
Grounding *1 S1 Contact
NC
RUOHVV L output S1
Serial commu- RX+ COM
N TUS RX-
G U1 U2 nication *3 *4 NO
Grounding *1 (RS-422) TX+ RS-422 S2 Contact
NC
RUOHVV TX- output S2
COM
Power supply SG
cable Ultrasonic transducer G NO
connecting cable FAIL Contact
Noise filter NC
(maximum length: 15 m) output FAIL
assembly *6 (customer wiring) IN1 COM
Contact input IN2 INPUT
TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator *5 A
COM Range
RANGE B
L2 U1 C contact output
L1 U2 Analog output 1 + mA1
(4-20 mA DC) *3 COM
U3 -
S Analog output 2 + mA2 OUTPUT Grounding *1
(4-20 mA DC or - RUOHVV
0-20 mA DC) *3 G
Grounding *2
RUOHVV
(Note) Dotted wiring is external wiring. Use cable with 6 to 12 mm OD for wiring.
3RZHUWHUPLQDO*RQGHWHFWRUGHWHFWRUFDVHDQGFRQYHUWHUFDVHPXVWEHJURXQGHGJURXQGUHVLVWDQFHRUOHVV
([WHUQDOJURXQGLQJWHUPLQDORIXOWUDVRQLFRVFLOODWRUPXVWEHJURXQGHGJURXQGUHVLVWDQFHRUOHVV
*3 Use 2-conductor shielded cable for analog output wiring and serial communication wiring.
*4 The wiring configuration is described below in case that RS-232C serial communication is selected.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 13, 2014-02
<<Contents>> <<Index>> 14
Enquiry Specifications Sheet for Model TB750G Right Angle Scattered Light Turbidimeter
For enquires on the Yokogawa sampling system, please tick () the appropriate box and write down the relevant
information in the blanks.
1. General Information
Company name;
Contact Person; Department;
Plant name;
Measurement location;
Purpose of use; Indication, Recording, Alarm, Control
Power supply; V AC, Hz
2. Measurement Conditions
(1) Sample water temperature; to , Normally [C]
(2) Sample water pressure; to , Normally [kPa]
(3) Sample water flow rate; to [l/min]
(4) Slurry or contaminations; No, Yes
(5) Components of sample water;
(6) Others;
3. Installation Site
(1) Ambient temperature; approx. [C]
(2) Location; Indoors
(3) Others;
4. Requirements
(1) Measuring range; to NTU
(2) System configuration selection; Pressurized head tank for low turbidity measurement
(recommended if turbidity is 2.0 NTU or less.),
Simple head tank, TUS400G Ultrasonic Oscillator
Zero turbidity filter(1 m), Zero turbidity filter (0.2 m)
(3) Cable length between converter and detector: 1 m, 2 m, 3 m
(4) Others;
All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 12E01A06-01E 4th Edition Mar. 04, 2014-00
Subject to change without notice.
Catalog Number DOC026.53.00769
Hach Company, 2006. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. te/kt
Visit us at www.hach.com
Table of Contents
3
Table of Contents
4
Section 1 Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice
Repeatability Better than 1.0% of reading or 0.04 NTU, whichever is greater for each range.
Sample flow required 1.0 to 2.0 L/min (0.3 to 0.5 gal/min) (15 to 30 gal/hr)
Sensor storage
20 to 80 C (4 to 140 F); 95% relative humidity, non-condensing.
temperature
sc100: 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) for one SS7 sc on an sc100; 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) for one
SS7 sc and another smart sensor that consumes less than 5 watts on a single sc100
Operating temperature (provided by sc100). See Figure 1 on page 6.
sc1000: 20 to 55 C (4 to 131 F); 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
0 to 50 C (32122 F);
Sample temperature range HST model0 to 70 C, intermittent 70 to 80 C. (An approved heat exchanger is available to
reduce sample temperature.)
Operating humidity 5 to 95% non-condensing
sc100: 12 VDC 5%, 20 watts maximum
Power requirements sc1000: 100240 V 10 VAC, 50/60 Hz from 75 VA standard to a maximum of 2000 VA (only
when sc analyzers are connected), Category II or 24 VDC (1830 VDC), maximum 75 W
Sample inlet fitting -in. NPT female
AIr purge fitting -in. quick-connect compression fitting; 050SCFH airflow of clean instrument air
Signal average (filter) time No averaging, 6, 30, 60 and 90 seconds, user selectable. Default is 30 seconds.
Sensor cable length 2 m (6.6 ft); Optional 7.62 m (25 ft) extension cable. Maximum cable length is 9.62 m (31.6 ft).
Cable: 105 C, 300 V, PVC jacket
Sensor cable rating
Wires: 22 AWG, PVC jacket
Mounting options Wall
SS7 sc15.8 kg (34.8 lb);
Shipping weight
SS7 sc-HST18 kg (39.6 lb)
Calibration method Formazin user-prepared primary or wet calibration of the instrument
Standardization plates with approximate values of 100 or 1000 NTU. Unique value is assigned
Verification (dry) method when dry verification is done immediately after calibration and is used with pass/fail criteria for
subsequent verifications.
Mandatory before calibration
Recommended cleaning
Optional before verification
intervals
Mandatory upon verification failure
English (default), German, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, Polish, Korean,
Languages
Chinese, Japanese
Installation environment Indoor
Primary compliance
USEPA 180.1; Hach Method 8195; ASTM D 6698; Standard Methods 2130B
method
5
Specifications
6
Specifications
Temp
58
56
54
sc 1000 Ambient T (C)
52
50
48
46
44
42
40
38
20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58
7
Visit us at www.hach.com
Section 2 General information
DANGER
Indicates a potentially or imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that may result in
minor or moderate injury.
Important Note: Information that requires special emphasis.
Note: Information that supplements points in the main text.
This symbol, if noted on the instrument, references the instruction manual for operation and/or safety information.
Electrical equipment marked with this symbol may not be disposed of in European public disposal systems after 12
August of 2005. In conformity with European local and national regulations (EU Directive 2002/96/EC), European
electrical equipment users must now return old or end-of life equipment to the Producer for disposal at no charge to
the user.
Note: For return for recycling, please contact the equipment producer or supplier for instructions on how to return
end-of-life equipment, producer-supplied electrical accessories and all auxiliary items for proper disposal.
This symbol, when noted on a product enclosure or barrier, indicates that a risk of electrical shock and/or
electrocution exists.
This symbol, if noted on the product, indicates the need for protective eye wear.
This symbol, when noted on the product, identifies the location of the connection for Protective Earth (ground).
This symbol, when noted on the product, identifies the location of a fuse or current limiting device.
This symbol, when noted on the product, identifies a risk of chemical harm and indicates that only individuals
qualified and trained to work with chemicals should handle chemicals or perform maintenance on chemical delivery
systems associated with the equipment.
This symbol, when noted on the product, indicated the presence of devices sensitive to Electro-static Discharge
(ESD) and indicated that care must be taken to prevent damage with the equipment.
9
General information
DANGER
The SS7 sc and SS7 sc-HST Turbidimeters are not designed
for use with samples that are flammable or explosive in nature.
If any sample solution other than water is used in this product,
test the sample/product compatibility to assure user safety
and proper product performance.
DANGER
The SS7 sc/sc controller platform product configuration is not
intended for installation in hazardous locations. See the
sc controller platform installation control drawing 58600-78 for
approved hazardous location sensors.
10
General information
2.2.1.1 Controller
The SS7 sc and SS7 sc-HST operate in conjunction with an
sc controller platform. The controller enclosure houses the keypad,
display, microprocessor board and power supply components.
Operating controls and indicators are on the controller. The
controller is used to program the instrument for turbidity level alarm
set points and to perform diagnostic self-tests and
programming operations.
Sample turbidity is displayed continually by the digital display
during normal operation. Because of the automatic decimal point
positioning, no range selection is needed. Indicators of turbidity
level alarm conditions, certain critical system malfunctions or other
possible malfunctions are also on the controller.
Programmable alarm circuits provide three relay closures, both
normally open and normally closed, for selectable turbidity alarm
level set points. Set points can be programmed by the operator
anywhere within the overall range. The alarm circuits can be
programmed for Alarm, Feeder Control, Event Control, PWM
Control, Frequency Control and Warning. Refer to the sc controller
platform manual for setup and use of these different settings. An
alarm relay can be programmed in the sc controller platform to
control the optional Auto Flush Kit.
The controller is designed to meet NEMA 4X water-tight
requirements. It is constructed of corrosion-proof materials. It is
suitable for indoor installation. Mounting hardware is included with
the sc controller platform to provide the capability to wall mount,
pipe mount and panel mount the controller without affecting the
environmental integrity of the case. Electrical access holes are
sized for -in. conduit.
11
General information
12
General information
13
General information
14
Section 3 Installation
DANGER
Only qualified personnel should conduct the tasks described
in this section of the manual. The SS7 sc/sc controller product
configuration is not intended for installation in
hazardous locations.
The tasks described in this section requires individuals to be
technically knowledgeable of the associated dangers. Burns,
shock, eye damage, fire and chemical exposure may occur if this
work is not done by qualified personnel. Always review appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) before working with
chemicals.
15
Installation
16
Installation
17
Installation
18
Installation
19
Installation
20
Installation
The sample in, body drain and overflow drain are connected to the
instrument as shown in Figure 5 on page 13. The sample inlet port
is fitted with a NPT female fitting with ID hose barb adapter
fitting. A ball valve is supplied with the instrument to drain the
turbidimeter body. Hose barb adapter fittings for sample in and both
drain fittings are also supplied.
A Bubble Trap/Head Regulator (Cat. No. 46680-00) is
recommended if the sample cannot be delivered bubble-free to the
analyzer. The device may also be used as to dampen fluctuations in
flow due to pulses from a pump and/or sample pressure.
Using the Bubble Trap/Head Regulator will increase response time
to changes in sample concentration. The increase in response time
may vary from 12 minutes at 2 L/min. For fastest response time,
use the highest flow practical for sample conditions. Higher flows
decrease the effectiveness of bubble removal. The need for fast
response time and bubble removal must be balanced for
optimum performance.
Install the Bubble Trap/Head Regulator so the overflow is at least
five inches above the top of the sample unit enclosure (Figure 12
on page 22). However, installation height can vary based on local
sample conditions and flow requirements. See the installation
instructions supplied with the Bubble Trap/Head Regulator for
more information.
21
Installation
22
Installation
23
Installation
DANGER
Always disconnect power to the sc controller when making
electrical connections.
24
Installation
Figure 14 Attaching the SS7 sc/SS7 sc-HST using the quick-connect fitting
25
Installation
26
Section 4 System startup
27
Visit us at www.hach.com
Section 5 Operation
29
Operation
CALIBRATE
PERFORM CAL Calibration using 4000 NTU stock solution
VERIFICATION Perform a verification, set the pass/fail criteria and view the verification history.
0 ELECTRONICS Zero electronics
View the last 12 entered calibrations. Confirm to move to the next history entry. See section 5.6
CAL HISTORY
on page 36 for more information.
CONFIGURE
BUBBLE REJECT Choose Yes or No to enable/disable bubble reject. Default: Yes
Choose no averaging or specify the amount of time for signal averaging. Available options are:
SIGNAL AVG
no averaging, 6 sec., 30 sec., 60 sec. or 90 sec. Default is 30 seconds.
Select the appropriate measurement units to display. Choose from mg/L, NTU, FTU and NO
MEAS UNITS
UNITS. Default: NTU
Enter up to a 12-digit name in any combination of symbols and alpha or numeric characters.
EDIT NAME Confirm when the entry is complete. The name will be displayed on the status line above the
measurement value on the main display. Default is SS7.
SET RESOLUTION Set the number of significant digits to display. Default is one significant digit.
Choose the amount of time between saving data points to the data log. Default: 15 min.;
DATALOG INTRVL Options: 5 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes,
30 minutes, 60 minutes or 4 hours.
30
Operation
DANGER
To become familiar with handling precautions, dangers and
emergency procedures, always review the Material Safety Data
Sheets prior to handling containers, reservoirs and delivery
systems that contain chemical reagents and standards.
Protective eye wear is always recommended when contact
with chemicals is possible.
Note: Due to the ease with which the calibration cylinder method
calibration can be performed, better accuracy can be maintained by
performing a calibration at monthly intervals instead of the standardization
check. Periodic calibration with a formazin primary standard is
recommended for best absolute accuracy.
5.5.2 Calibration
The manufacturer recommends calibrating the Surface Scatter 7 sc
instrument at least every three months or any time the light source
is replaced or adjusted. If calibration is performed with a formazin
standard, refer to section 5.5.2.1 on page 32.
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select CALIBRATE and confirm.
4. Select PERFORM CAL and confirm. Select the available
Output Mode (Active, Hold or Transfer) and confirm.
5. Enter the STD VALUE and confirm. Confirm to continue.
6. Follow the display prompt and place standard into the
calibration cup. Close the sensor door and confirm to continue.
7. The TURB value displayed is the standard value determined
using the gain from the previous calibration. Confirm to accept
and continue with the calibration.
31
Operation
32
Operation
33
Operation
34
Operation
6. Open the SS7 sc to remove the plate. Restart the sample flow
and close the door. Confirm to return the instrument to
measurement mode.
Note: After confirmation of return to measurement mode, the instrument
will equilibrate for 2 minutes before the output mode changes. Instrument
measurements will show on the display, but the value will flash and a OUT
MODE WARN warning will display until the 2-minute equilibration period
is complete.
35
Operation
36
Operation
37
Operation
38
Section 6 Maintenance
DANGER
Only qualified personnel should conduct the tasks described
in this section of the manual.
The nature of tasks described in this section of the manual requires
individuals to be technically knowledgeable of the associated
dangers. Burns, shock, eye damage, fire and chemical exposure
may occur if this work is not done by qualified personnel. Always
review appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) before
working with chemicals.
39
Maintenance
6.3.1 Cleaning
Sediment may collect in the turbidimeter body and on the overflow
weir. Algae may also form. The turbidimeter body should be drained
and flushedon a schedule determined by visual inspectionto
remove accumulated sediment. Algae can be removed with a large
bottle brush and a sterilizing solution such as dilute chlorine bleach.
Samples containing large amounts of settleable solids may cause
frequent accumulation of solids in the turbidimeter body. To
minimize cleaning frequency, the analyzer can be operated with the
drain ball valve partially or completely open and the sample flow
increased accordingly to provide continuous flushing of solids from
the turbidimeter body. If the drain is left partially open, the ball valve
supplied should be replaced with a valve designed for flow control.
Operating the ball valve in a partially open position may damage
the valve or cause plugging of the drain line.
When used in conjunction with the Auto-flush Kit (section 8.2 on
page 51), the flush cycle feature may be used to operate a solenoid
valve to divert sample and provide a periodic clear water flush.
The inside enclosure of the SS7 sc can be washed down with warm
water spray if deposits accumulate inside the unit. The vent cover
at the top of the SS7 sc-HST turbidimeter body can also be
removed for cleaning as necessary.
Note: Loosen the light source to remove or install the vent cover on the
SS7 sc-HST. Use the alignment plate included in the unit to check the
alignment of the light after installing the cover. Make sure the cover sits flat
on top of the slant tube when installed.
40
Maintenance
41
Maintenance
42
Maintenance
43
Maintenance
44
Maintenance
45
Maintenance
46
Section 7 Troubleshooting
7.2 Warnings
Warnings are indicated by a flashing measurement value and a
flashing warning icon. Warnings are defined in Table 6.
1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR DIAG and confirm.
2. If multiple sensors are attached to the controller, choose
SELECT SENSOR>SS7 SETUP and confirm.
3. Select WARNING LIST and confirm. All active warnings
will display.
Table 6 Warning Codes
Warning
Displayed Warning Definition/Resolution
Number
Dark reading detects too much light. Close the SS7 sc enclosure and perform
1 DARK WARNING
ZERO ELECTRONICS (under the CALIBRATION menu).
Sensor head internal temperature is higher than specified. Contact the
2 TEMP WARNING
Technical Support Department. (> 70 C)
Sensor data log is full. No additional data will be logged until sensor log is
3 DATA LOG FULL
downloaded into controller memory.
Sensor data log is full. No additional data will be logged until sensor log is
4 EVENT LOG FULL
downloaded into controller memory.
5 5 VOLT WARN Monitored voltage is outside the range of 4.55.5 V.
Monitored instrument input voltage from controller platform is outside the
range of 9.0814.3 V. Check cables. Make sure only one SS7 sc is connected
6 VIN WARN
to controller and if any other probe is connected it can only draw 4 watts
maximum.
7 LAMP VOLT WARN Monitored voltage is outside the range of 3.964.48 V.
8 LAMP CURR WARN Monitored current is outside the range of 1.672.75 Amps.
Activated when the sensor is not in normal measurement mode (such as when
9 OUTPUT MODE WARN
in calibration or verification mode).
10 AC UPDATE FAIL The application code update failed.
47
Troubleshooting
11 EXT FLASH FAIL External copy of the application code has failed. Self recovery should occur.
12 INT FLASH FAIL Internal copy of the application code has failed. Self-recovery should occur.
13 ENGLISH ONLY English only device driver file. Update the device driver with the latest version.
48
Troubleshooting
49
Troubleshooting
Device ID: 26
Manufacture ID: 0
Time Channel 1
50
Section 8 Replacement parts and accessories
8.2 Accessories
Description Cat. No.
Auto Flush Kit (120V) 46692-12
Auto Flush Kit (220V) 46692-22
Bubble Trap/Head Regulator 46680-00
Cable Extension for Sensor, 7.6 m (25 ft) 57960-00
DataCom (CD-rom) 59256-00
Formazin Stock Solution, 4000 NTU, 500 mL 2461-49
Heat Exchanger Unit (Sample cooler) 48551-00
Latch, replacement, SS6 44993-00
Manual, SS7 sc, English DOC026.53.00769
Manual, SS7 sc, Chinese DOC026.80.00769
Manual, SS7 sc, Japanese DOC026.81.00769
Manual, SS7 sc, Korean DOC026.84.00769
Power Cord, 125 VAC, 10A, 1.83 m (6 ft) 46306-00
Power Cord, 250 VAC, 10A, 1.83 m (6 ft) 46308-00
StablCal, 400 NTU, 500 mL 71216-49
Standardization Plate Kit, uncalibrated 23513-00
Sun Shield, Controller LZ961.54
Upgrade Kit, Converting Standard SS7 sc to a SS7 sc-HST (High Sample Temperature) 45000-43
51
Visit us at www.hach.com
Section 9 How to order
U.S.A. customers
By telephone:
6:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. MST
Monday through Friday
(800) 227-HACH (800-227-4224)
By fax:
(970) 669-2932
By mail:
Hach Company
P.O. Box 389
Loveland, Colorado 80539-0389 U.S.A.
Ordering information by e-mail: orders@hach.com
Information required
International customers
Hach maintains a worldwide network of dealers and distributors. To
locate the representative nearest you, send an e-mail to:
intl@hach.com or contact:
Hach Company World Headquarters; Loveland, Colorado, U.S.A.
Telephone: (970) 669-3050; Fax: (970) 669-2932
53
Section 10 Repair service
Authorization must be obtained from Hach Company before sending any items for
repair. Please contact the Hach Service Center serving your location.
In the United States:
Hach Company
Ames Service
100 Dayton Avenue
Ames, Iowa 50010
(800) 227-4224 (U.S.A. only)
FAX: (515) 232-3835
In Canada:
Hach Sales & Service Canada Ltd.
1313 Border Street, Unit 34
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3H 0X4
(800) 665-7635 (Canada only)
Telephone: (204) 632-5598
FAX: (204) 694-5134
E-mail: canada@hach.com
In Latin America, the Caribbean, the Far East,
Indian Subcontinent, Africa, Europe or the Middle East:
Hach Company World Headquarters,
P.O. Box 389
Loveland, Colorado, 80539-0389 U.S.A.
Telephone: (970) 669-3050
FAX: (970) 669-2932
E-mail: intl@hach.com
54
Section 11 Limited warranty
Hach Company warrants its products to the original purchaser against any defects that are due to faulty
material or workmanship for a period of two years from date of shipment unless otherwise noted in the
product manual.
In the event that a defect is discovered during the warranty period, Hach Company agrees that, at its
option, it will repair or replace the defective product or refund the purchase price excluding original
shipping and handling charges. Any product repaired or replaced under this warranty will be warranted
only for the remainder of the original product warranty period.
This warranty does not apply to consumable products such as chemical reagents; or consumable
components of a product, such as, but not limited to, lamps and tubing.
Contact Hach Company or your distributor to initiate warranty support. Products may not be returned
without authorization from Hach Company.
Limitations
This warranty does not cover:
Damage caused by acts of God, natural disaster, labor unrest, acts of war (declared or undeclared),
terrorism, civil strife or acts of any governmental jurisdiction
Any product not used in accordance with the instructions furnished by Hach Company
This warranty contains the sole express warranty made by Hach Company in connection with its
products. All implied warranties, including without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and fitness
for a particular purpose, are expressly disclaimed.
Some states within the United States do not allow the disclaimer of implied warranties and if this is true in
your state the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
This warranty constitutes the final, complete, and exclusive statement of warranty terms and no person
is authorized to make any other warranties or representations on behalf of Hach Company.
Limitation of remedies
The remedies of repair, replacement or refund of purchase price as stated above are the exclusive
remedies for the breach of this warranty. On the basis of strict liability or under any other legal theory, in
no event shall Hach Company be liable for any incidental or consequential damages of any kind for
breach of warranty or negligence.
55
Visit us at www.hach.com
Section 12 Certification
Hach Company certifies this instrument was tested thoroughly,
inspected and found to meet its published specifications when it
was shipped from the factory.
The Model sc100 with SS7 sc or SS7 sc-HST Sensor has been
tested and is certified as indicated to the following
instrumentation standards:
Product Safety
UL 61010A-1 Listed by ETL (cETLus safety mark)
CSA C22.2 No. 61010.1 Certified by ETL (cETLus safety mark)
Certified by Hach Co. to EN 61010-1 Amds. 1 & 2 (IEC1010-1) per
73/23/EEC, supporting test records by Intertek Testing Services.
Immunity
This equipment was tested for Industrial level EMC per:
EN 61326 (EMC Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory Use) per 2004/108/EC
EMC: Supporting test records and compliance certification by
Hach Company.
Standards include:
Emissions
This equipment was tested for Radio Frequency Emissions
as follows:
Per 2004/108/EC EMC: EN 61326:1998 (Electrical Equipment for
measurement, control and laboratory useEMC requirements)
Class A emission limits. Supporting test records by Hewlett
Packard, Fort Collins, Colorado Hardware Test Center (A2LA #
0905-01) and certified compliance by Hach Company.
Standards include:
57
Certification
58
Appendix A Modbus register
59
Visit us at www.hach.com
Appendix B Theory of operation
61
Visit us at www.hach.com
1.5InstructionManualforChlorineAnalyzer&
ResidualChlorineAnalyzer
ApplicableModel Area
AMICodesII RESERVOIRIPA
AMI Codes-II
Version 6.00 and higher
Operators Manual
A-96.250.571 / 220616
Customer Support
SWAN and its representatives maintain a fully trained staff of technical specialists
around the world. For any technical question, contact your nearest
SWAN representative, or the manufacturer:
SWAN ANALYTISCHE INSTRUMENTE AG
Studbachstrasse 13
8340 Hinwil
Switzerland
Internet: www.swan.ch
E-mail: support@swan.ch
Document Status
ID: A-96.250.571
Revision Issue
00 April 2010
01 June 2010
Table of Contents
1. Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1. Warning Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2. General Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3. Restrictions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2. Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1. Instrument Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2. Instrument Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.1. Installation Check List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.2. Mounting of Instrument Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.3. Connecting Sample and Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.1 FEP Tube at Sample Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.2 FEP Tube at Sample Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4. Installation of Flow Cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.5. Install the Option pH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5.1 pH as Option ex works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5.2 pH Option as Retrofit Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.6. Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6.1 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.6.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.7. Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.8. Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.8.1 Alarm Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.8.2 Relay 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.9. Signal Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.9.1 Signal Output 1 and 2 (current outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.10 Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.10.1 Signal Output 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.10.2 Profibus, Modbus Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.10.3 USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4. Instrument Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.1. Prepare Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.2. Peristaltic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.3. Establish Sample Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.4. Fill or Flush Reagent System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.5. Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.6. Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
A-96.250.571 / 220616 1
AMI Codes-II
5. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.1. Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.2. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.3. Software Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.4. Changing Parameters and values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.1. Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.2. Stop of Operation for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.3. Refill or replace Reagents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.3.1 Reagents for Free Chlorine, Chlorine Dioxide, Bromine and Iodine 46
6.3.2 Reagents for Measuring Monochloramine and Ozone . . . . . . . . . 48
6.4. Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.5. Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.6. Cleaning the protective Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.7. Cleaning the Photometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.8. Cleaning the Flow Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.8.1 Disassemble the Flow Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.8.2 Assemble the Flow Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.9. Maintenance of pH sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.10. Tube Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.10.1 Replace the Pump Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.10.2 Replace the Reagent Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.11. Replacing Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.12. Longer Stop of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.1. General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.2. Calibration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.2.1 Process calibration DIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.2.2 Process pH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.2.3 Standard pH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.3. Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8. Program Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.1. Messages (Main Menu 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.2. Diagnostics (Main Menu 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.3. Maintenance (Main Menu 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.4. Operation (Main Menu 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8.5. Installation (Main Menu 5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
9. Program List and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1 Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
2 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
10. Material Safety Data sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10.1. Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
11. Default Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
12. Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
13. Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
A-96.250.571 / 220616 3
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions
1. Safety Instructions
General The instructions included in this section explain the potential risks
associated with instrument operation and provide important safety
practices designed to minimize these risks.
If you carefully follow the information contained in this section, you
can protect yourself from hazards and create a safer work environ-
ment.
More safety instructions are given throughout this manual, at the
respective locations where observation is most important.
Strictly follow all safety instructions in this publication.
Target Operator: Qualified person who uses the equipment
audience for its intended purpose.
Instrument operation requires thorough knowledge of applications,
instrument functions and software program as well as all applicable
safety rules and regulations.
OM Location The AMI Operators Manual shall be kept in proximity of the instru-
ment.
Qualification, To be qualified for instrument installation and operation, you must:
Training read and understand the instructions in this manual as well as
the Material Safety Data Sheets.
know the relevant safety rules and regulations.
4 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Safety gloves
A-96.250.571 / 220616 5
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions
Corrosive
Harmful to health
Flammable
Warning general
Attention general
6 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions
WARNING
WARNING
A-96.250.571 / 220616 7
AMI Codes-II
Safety Instructions
WARNING
Health hazard
Some reagents are etching and can cause severe burns or eye
damage.
For safe handling of the reagents you must read and under-
stand the instructions in this manual, as well as the Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Download The current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for the below list-
MSDS ed Reagents are available for downloading at www.swan.ch.
OXYCON ON-LINE DPD
OXYCON ON-LINE Buffer
OXYCON ON-LINE KI
Buffer solution pH 4
Buffer solution pH 7
Buffer solution pH 9
8 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Product Description
2. Product Description
Application The AMI Codes-II analyzer is a complete monitoring system for the
Range automatic, continuous measurement and dosing control of chlorine
and other disinfectants based on the DPD colorimetric method
AWWA 4500 Cl-G and on EN ISO 7393-2.
It can be used for measuring disinfectants in:
Potable water
Swimming pools
Cooling water
Effluent
Seawater
It is also applicable for water containing additives like corrosion in-
hibitors, cyanuric acids and antiscalants.
For the determination of free chlorine, chlorine dioxide, bromine
and iodine the reagents:
Oxycon on-line DPD
Oxycon on-line Buffer
are needed.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 9
AMI Codes-II
Product Description
10 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Product Description
Fluidics The sample flows through the sample inlet [F] and the filter vessel
[G] into the constant head [A]. Adjust the flow regulating valve [D]
so that always a small part of the sample flows through the overflow
tube [B] into the drain [H].A part of the sample flows through the
photometer inlet [C] into the mixing chamber [E], where the re-
agents [J] and [K] are added by the peristaltic pump [O] and mixed
with the sample. The mixed sample flows through the photometer
[N] and disinfectant is measured. If KI and Buffer are mixed in the
reagent canister [K] monochloramine is measured.
After the measurement the sample flows through the outlet of the
photometer where it will be aerated through air inlet [P] to generate
bubbles. Then the sample flows through the bubble detector [M]
into the photometer drain [I].
A
Level
B
P
C
O
D
E
F
N G
M
L
K H
J I
A-96.250.571 / 220616 11
AMI Codes-II
Product Description
Time The measuring interval can be set between 1 and 12 minutes. The
interval of a time sequence of a measurement with a measuring interval of
measurement 5 min is shown in the diagram below.
The blue bar represents the sample which flows continuously
through the photometer. A short time before the measurement
starts, a zero point measurement is performed. Then the peristaltic
pump starts and a small portion of the reagents [J] and [K] is
pumped into the mixing chamber. Shortly after, if the mixture is in
the photometer, the sample is measured.
J
K
m
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Product Description
A-96.250.571 / 220616 13
AMI Codes-II
Product Description
400 mm / 15
13 mm /
374 mm / 14
13 mm /
6 x dia. 6.5 mm /
AMI Codes II
824 mm / 32 7/16
412 mm / 16
850 mm / 33
30 mm / 1 3 /16
14 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Product Description
A
G
B H
J
K
C
L
M
N
E
O
F P
A-96.250.571 / 220616 15
AMI Codes-II
Installation
3. Installation
16 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation
A-96.250.571 / 220616 17
AMI Codes-II
Installation
WARNING
Connect the 1/2 tubes [F] to the hose nozzles [E] and place it into
a pressure free drain with sufficient capacity.
18 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation
CAUTION
Fragile Part
Handle the constant head tube with care.
To avoid damage during the transport, the constant head tube [C] of
the AMI Codes-II is not installed.
A A Constant head cover
B Overflow tube
C Constant head tube
D Gasket
E Flow cell block
Level
C
D
A-96.250.571 / 220616 19
AMI Codes-II
Installation
D
E
F
1 Carefully pull off the protective cap [F] from the pH sensor [C]
by turning it clockwise.
2 Store the protective cap in safe place.
3 Rinse the pH sensor tip with clean water.
4 Insert the pH sensor into one of the holes in the constant head
cover [E].
5 Insert temperature sensor [D] into the small hole.
6 Remove the connector cap from the connector of the pH sen-
sor. Store it in safe place.
7 Screw the connector [B] onto the pH sensor.
20 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation
A B C
F E D
A-96.250.571 / 220616 21
AMI Codes-II
Installation
WARNING
1 Screw the clamps for calibration solution onto the panel. Use
the already drilled holes [A].
AMI Codes-II
4 Remove the constant head cover [A] and the constant head
tube [B] from the flow cell block [D].
5 Insert the short overflow tube [C] into the outlet hole leading to
the photometer.
6 Install the constant head tube and the constant head cover.
22 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation
A B C
A-96.250.571 / 220616 23
AMI Codes-II
Installation
WARNING
A B C
24 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation
WARNING
External Voltage.
External supplied devices connected to relay 1 or 2 or to the
alarm relay can cause electrical shocks
Make sure that the devices connected to the following con-
tacts are disconnected from the power before resuming in-
stallation.
relay 1
relay 2
alarm relay
WARNING
WARNING
A-96.250.571 / 220616 25
AMI Codes-II
Installation
CAUTION
Use only the terminals shown in this diagram, and only for the
mentioned purpose. Use of any other terminals will cause short
circuits with possible corresponding consequences to material
and personnel.
26 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation
WARNING
A
B
C
A-96.250.571 / 220616 27
AMI Codes-II
Installation
3.7. Input
NOTICE: Use only potential-free (dry) contacts.
The total resistance (sum of cable resistance and resistance of
the relay contact) must be less than 50 .
Terminals 30 and 31
If the signal output is set to hold, the measurement is interrupted if
input is active.
For programming see Menu Installation 5.3.4, p. 94.
1) usual use
28 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation
Relay Jumper
config. Terminals pos. Description Relay configuration
Normally 6/7: Relay 1 Inactive (opened) during
Open 8/9: Relay 2 normal operation and 6
loss of power.
Active (closed) when a 0V
programmed function is 7
executed.
Normally 6/7: Relay 1 Inactive (closed) during
Closed 8/9: Relay 2 normal operation and 6
loss of power.
Active (opened) when a 0V
programmed function is 7
executed.
A
B
A-96.250.571 / 220616 29
AMI Codes-II
Installation
CAUTION
Inductive load Small inductive loads (max 0.1A) as for example the coil of a power
relay can be switched directly. To avoid noise voltage in the
AMI Transmitter it is mandatory to connect a snubber circuit in par-
allel to the load.
A snubber circuit is not necessary if an AMI relaybox is used.
A A AC or DC power supply
B C B AMI Transmitter
C External power relay
D E D Snubber
E Power relay coil
Resistive load Resistive loads (max. 1A) and control signals for PLC, impulse
pumps and so on can be connected without further measures
A B A AMI Transmitter
B PLC or controlled pulse pump
C C Logic
Actuators Actuators, like motor valves, are using both relays: One relay con-
tact is used for opening, the other for closing the valve, i.e. with the
2 relay contacts available, only one motor valve can be controlled.
Motors with loads bigger than 0.1A must be controlled via external
power relays or an AMI relay box.
A A AC or DC power supply
B C B AMI Transmitter
C Actuator
30 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation
A-96.250.571 / 220616 31
AMI Codes-II
Installation
32 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Installation
ON
USB Interface
A-96.250.571 / 220616 33
AMI Codes-II
Instrument Setup
4. Instrument Setup
After installation according to checklist proceed as following:
A Turn to lock
B Occlusion frame
A
C Rotor
D Pump tube
B
C
D
34 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Instrument Setup
WARNING
Water pollution
The drain of the photometer outlet contains DPD.
At no means recirculate it into the water system.
A A Cover
B Constant head tube
B C Overflow tube
D Flow cell block
Level E Flow regulating valve
F Filter
G Filter vessel
C
D
E
1 Open the flow regulating valve (E) and wait until the flow cell is
completely filled.
2 Switch on power.
3 Adjust the sample flow so that always a small part of the sample
drains off through the overflow tube.
4 Start <Fill system>, see Fill or Flush Reagent System, p. 36.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 35
AMI Codes-II
Instrument Setup
Service 3.2.2
Navigate to menu< Maintenance /
Verification Service/Fill system>.
Fill System Press [Enter].
Cleaning
<Enter> to stop
Done
1 Check tubing and flow cell for leaks and repair if necessary.
2 Let the instrument run continuously for 1 hour.
4.5. Programming
Programming Program all parameters for external devices (interface, recorders,
etc.)
Program all parameters for instrument operation (disinfectant, lim-
its, alarms).
Program the DPD value of the Verikit in menu <Installation/
Sensors/Ref. Verification>.
If pH option is installed, program the two buffers you want to use for
calibration in menu <Installation/Sensors/Standards>.
See Program List and Explanations, p. 76.
36 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Instrument Setup
4.6. Calibration
1 Calibrate pH sensor (if option pH is installed).
See Standard pH, p. 52.
2 Perform process calibration.
See Process Calibration of DIS, p. 50
If ordered: The instrument should be operating for 1h before performing a pH
Calibration of calibration.
pH sensor Program the two buffers you want to use for calibration (Installation/
Sensors/Standards). Calibrate the pH sensor with two buffers, e.g.
pH 7.00 and pH 9.00. See chapter Calibration, p. 50 for details.
Process DIS Let the instrument run for 1 h.
Use CHEMATEST 25 (or equivalent photometer) to determine the
sample disinfectant concentration. Take the sample directly from
the flow cell. Determine the sample disinfectant value by 3 manual
DPD measurements. Calculate the average value. Compare this
value to the value, indicated by the AMI.
Keep in mind the accuracy of your manual measurement. Only cor-
rect the instrument if the difference is significant.
Perform process DIS if necessary. See chapter Calibration, p. 50
for details.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 37
AMI Codes-II
Operation
5. Operation
5.1. Keys
A B C D
Exit Enter
Program
RUN 14:10:45 Main Menu 1
Access, Exit Enter
R1 Messages
R2 0.15 ppm Diagnostics
Maintenance
Exit Operation
9 l/h 25.4C Installation
38 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Operation
5.2. Display
A B C D E
RUN 15:20:18
R1
F
R2
0.15 ppm
K 23 B/s 23 C G
I H
A-96.250.571 / 220616 39
AMI Codes-II
Operation
Main Menu 1
Messages
Diagnostics
Maintenance
Operation
Installation
Menu Messages 1
Messages 1.1
Pending Errors Reveals pending errors as well as an event history
Message List (time and state of events that have occurred at an
earlier point of time).
It contains user relevant data.
Menu Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 2.1
Identification Provides user relevant instrument and sample data.
Sensors
Sample
I/O State
Interface
Menu Maintenance 3
Maintenance 3.1
Calibration For instrument calibration, relay and signal output
Process Cal. simulation, and to set the instrument time.
Simulation It is used by the service personnel.
Set Time 23.09.06 16:30:00
Menu Operation 4
Operation 4.1
Sensors User relevant parameters that might need to be
Relay Contacts modified during daily routine. Normally password
Logger protected and used by the process-operator.
Subset of menu 5 - Installation, but process-related.
Menu Installation 5
Installation 5.1
Sensors For initial instrument set up by SWAN authorized
Signal Outputs person, to set all instrument parameters. Can be
Relay Contacts protected by means of password.
Miscellaneous
Interface
40 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Operation
Yes is highlighted.
Logger 4.1.3
Log interval
Save ?
6 Press [Enter] to save the new pa-
Clear logger no rameter.
Yes
No The system reboots, the new
parameter is set.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 41
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
6. Maintenance
WARNING
If pH option is installed:
42 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
If pH option is installed:
8 Remove the pH sensor [A] from the flow cell.
9 Fill the protective cap [B] with water.
10 Put the protective cap onto the sensor tip.
A pH sensor
B Protective cap
A-96.250.571 / 220616 43
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
WARNING
Health hazard
Some reagents can cause severe burns or eye damage.
For safe handling of the reagents you must read and under-
stand the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), see Material
Safety Data sheets, p. 104
44 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
WARNING
Oxycon On-line KI
CAUTION
A-96.250.571 / 220616 45
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
Canister set up
A A Screw cover
B Level detector
B
C Suction lance
D 2 L mark
E Canister Oxycon
on-line DPD
F Canister Oxycon
C on-line Buffer
D G Holder
E 2L 2L
F
OXYCON ON-LINE OXYCON ON-LINE
DPD-Reagenz Pufferlsung
DPD Ractif Tampon
DPD Reagent Buffer Solution
NOTICE: To mix the reagents use the screw cover without the
integrated suction lance and level detector.
Prepare 1 Rinse the canister [E] labelled OXYCON ON LINE DPD-Re-
Oxycon agent with demineralized water.
On-line DPD 2 Fill the canister up to the 2 liter mark [D] with demineralized wa-
ter.
3 Slowly pour the content of one bottle of concentrate Oxycon
On-line DPD (50 ml) into the canister.
Avoid splashing!
46 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
4 Close the canister with the screw cover and tighten it well.
5 Mix the demineralized water and the reagents well.
6 Put the canister [E] into the holder [G].
7 Remove the screw cover and insert the suction lance [C] com-
bined with level detector [B] and tighten the screw cover [A].
Prepare 1 Rinse the canister [F] labelled OXYCON ON LINE Buffer solu-
Oxycon tion with demineralized water.
On-line Buffer 2 Fill the canister up to the 2 liter mark [D] with demineralized wa-
ter.
3 Slowly pour the content of one bag of buffer Oxycon On-line
(240 gr) into the canister.
Avoid splashing!
4 Close the canister with the screw cover and tighten it well.
5 Mix the demineralized water and the reagents well.
6 Put canister [F] into holder [G].
7 Remove the screw cover and insert the suction lance [C] com-
bined with level detector [B] and tighten the screw cover [A].
8 Fill reagent system. See Fill or Flush Reagent System, p. 38
A-96.250.571 / 220616 47
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
NOTICE: To mix the reagents use the screw cover without the
integrated suction lance and level detector.
Prepare 1 Rinse the canister [E] labelled OXYCON ON LINE DPD-Re-
Oxycon agent with demineralized water.
On-line DPD 2 Fill the canister up to the 2 liter mark with demineralized water.
3 Slowly pour the content of a bottle of concentrate Oxycon On-
line DPD into the canister.
Avoid splashing!
4 Close the canister with the screw cover and tighten it well.
5 Mix the demineralized water and the reagents well..
6 Put the canister [E] into the holder [G].
7 Remove the screw cover and insert the suction lance [C] com-
bined with level detector [B] and tighten the screw cover [A].
Prepare 1 Rinse the canister [F] labelled OXYCON ON LINE Buffer solu-
Oxycon tion with demineralized water.
On-line Buffer 2 Fill the canister up to the 2 liter mark with demineralized water.
& KI
3 Slowly pour the content of one bag of Oxycon On-line Buffer
into the canister.
Avoid splashing!
4 Add the content of one bag Oxycon On-line KI to the same can-
ister.
5 Close the canister with the screw cover and tighten it well.
6 Mix the demineralized water and the reagents well.
7 Put the canister [F] into the holder [G].
8 Remove the screw cover and insert the suction lance [C] com-
bined with level detector [B] and tighten the screw cover [A].
9 Fill reagent system. See Fill or Flush Reagent System, p. 38.
48 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
6.4. Verification
The Verification kit for AMI Photometer is available as
an accessory. An optical window with a precisely deter-
mined absorbance value is placed into the light beam
of the photometer. The actual measured absorbance
will be compared to the reference value labeled on
each kit.
Set reference Prior to performing the verification the DPD reference value, e.g.
value: 0.255, needs to be set in menu 5.1.4
<Installation>\<Sensors>\<Ref. Verification>.
Verification Basically follow the dialog in menu 3.2.1
procedure: <Maintenance>\<Service>\<Verification>.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 49
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
6.5. Calibration
Process NOTICE: Perform process calibration for free chlorine / total
Calibration of residual chlorine only if:
DIS the sample concentration is close to the desired process
value (stable value)
you are sure that the reagents are mixed completely and
correctly
if the difference to the manual measurement is significant.
Keep in mind the accuracy of your manual measurement.
Use CHEMATEST 25 (or equivalent photometer) to determine the
sample disinfectant concentration. Determine the sample disinfec-
tant value by 3 manual DPD measurements. Calculate the average
value. Compare this value to the value, indicated by the AMI.
Enter process value (mg/l = ppm) under menu 3.1.1, p. 79 for Pro-
cess DIS
Calibration Successful
Press 3 x [Exit]
50 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
Process pH 3.1.2.4
A-96.250.571 / 220616 51
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
Display 1 Rinse and dry the pH sensor and put it into standard 1
instructions 2 Standard 1, current value (Progress is shown).
3 Rinse and dry the pH sensor and put it in standard 2
4 Standard 2, current value (Progress is shown)
5 Rinse and dry the pH sensor and put it into the flow cell
52 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
Normally the filter in your sample supply line will retain most debris.
If the filter shows deposits, proceed as follows:
A-96.250.571 / 220616 53
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
54 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
CAUTION
A-96.250.571 / 220616 55
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
Level
D
E
56 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
C
D
A-96.250.571 / 220616 57
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
A Connector
B pH sensor shaft
C Flow cell cover
A D Flow cell
58 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
CAUTION
A-96.250.571 / 220616 59
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
60 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
Q
1 2
3 1
4 2
J K
Nr. from to
1 Pump outlet: rear frame Flow cell block: connection 1
see Flow cell block side view Q
2 Pump outlet: front frame Flow cell block: connection 2
see Flow cell block side view Q
3 Reagent canister (J) Pump inlet: rear frame
Oxycon on-line DPD
4 Reagent canister (K) Pump inlet: front frame
Oxycon on-line Buffer / KI
A-96.250.571 / 220616 61
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
WARNING
External Voltage.
External supplied devices connected to relay 1 or 2 or to the
alarm relay can cause electrical shocks.
Make sure that the devices connected to the following con-
tacts are disconnected from the power before resuming in-
stallation.
relay 1
relay 2
alarm relay
When a fuse has blown, find out the cause and fix it before
replacing it with a new one.
Use tweezers or needle-nosed pliers to remove the defective fuse.
Use original fuses provided by SWAN only.
A B C D E F G
62 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Maintenance
If option pH is installed
10 Unscrew and remove the connector from the pH sensor.
11 Put the connector cap onto the sensor connector.
12 Fill 3.5 molar KCl (if not available: water) into the rubber cap.
13 Remove the pH sensor from the flow cell and place the rubber
cap on the tip of the sensor
CAUTION
Damage of pH sensor
Wrong storage will damage the pH sensor.
Never store the pH sensor dry.
Store the pH sensor with tip pointing downwards in a frost-
protected room.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 63
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting
7. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides some hints to make trouble shooting easier.
For any detailed information how to handle or clean parts please
see Maintenance, p. 42. For any detailed information how to pro-
gram the instrument please see Program List and Explanations, p.
76.
64 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting
7.2.2 Process pH
Possible error Offset error:
message
Possible cause Corrective Action
Manual measurement Repeat the manual measurement.
wrong.
Slope of last calibration Set default calibration values, see
wrong. 5.4.2, p. 95.
Repeat the calibration
pH sensor dirty, old or Clean or replace pH sensor, see
defect. Maintenance of pH sensor, p. 58.
Cable connector corroded. Replace cable and sensor.
7.2.3 Standard pH
Possible Offset error or Slope error:
error message
Possible cause Corrective Action
Old, dirty or wrong buffer Check buffers expiration date if
solutions. necessary order new buffer.
Verify programmed buffer Change programmed buffer values
values with the values of or use correct buffer solution.
the buffer solution used.
pH sensor dirty, old or Clean or replace pH sensor, see
defect. Maintenance of pH sensor, p. 58.
Cable connector corroded. Replace cable and sensor.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 65
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting
Main Menu 1
Reagent level low
Messages Indicates the remaining reagent in per-
Diagnostics cent.
Maintenance To see the pending Errors:
Operation Navigate to menu Messages.
Installation
Press [ENTER].
Messages 1.1 Navigate to menu Pending Errors.
Pending Errors Press [ENTER].
Maintenance List
Message List
66 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting
A-96.250.571 / 220616 67
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting
68 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Troubleshooting
A-96.250.571 / 220616 69
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview
8. Program Overview
For explanations about each parameter of the menus see Program
List and Explanations, p. 76.
70 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview
A-96.250.571 / 220616 71
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview
72 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview
A-96.250.571 / 220616 73
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview
74 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program Overview
A-96.250.571 / 220616 75
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
1 Messages
1.1 Pending Errors
1.1.5 Provides the list of active errors with their status (active,
acknowledged). If an active error is acknowledged, the alarm relay
is active again. Cleared errors are moved to the Message list.
1.2 Maintenance List
1.2.5 Demands necessary maintenance, e.g. preparing new reagents.
1.3 Message List
1.3.1 Shows the error history: Error code, date and time of issue and
status (active, acknowledged, cleared). 65 errors are memorized.
Then the oldest error is cleared to save the newest error (circular
buffer).
2 Diagnostics
In diagnostics mode, the values can only be viewed, not modified.
2.1 Identification
Designation: View the Designation of instrument.
Version: Firmware of instrument (e.g. V6.00-11/15)
2.1.3 Peripherals: PeriClip 1: Firmware of peristaltic pump (e.g. 1.03)
2.1.4 Factory Test: Test date of the Instrument, Motherboard and
Frontend. QC factory test.
2.1.5 Operating Time: Years/Days/Hours/Minutes/Seconds
2.2 Sensors
2.2.1 Photometer:
Current value: Shows the actual photometer signal [ppm].
Raw value: Shows the actual photometer signal [Hz].
Absorbance: Process value, depends on sample.
2.2.1.4 Cal. History: Shows the diagnostic values of the last calibrations.
Number: Calibration counter.
Date, Time: Date and time of the calibration.
Slope: Slope is a correction factor calculated on the basis of a
process calibration.
Range: 0,81.2
76 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
2.2.1.5 Ver. History: Shows the verification values of the last verifications:
Number: Verification counter.
Date, Time: Date and time of the verification.
Absorbance: Measured absorbance of the reference kit.
Reference value: True value of the reference kit according to label.
2.2.2 pH Electrode: Only available if option pH is installed.
Current Value: Shows the actually measured pH value.
Raw value: Shows the actual electrode voltage in mV.
2.2.2.5 Cal. History: Shows the calibration values of the last pH sensor
calibrations. Offset in mV and slope in mV/pH.
Number: Calibration counter.
Date, Time: Date and time of the calibration.
Offset: Vertical shift above or below the zero point.
Slope: Characteristic of the pH sensor expressed in mV/pH.The
calculated slope is used for the entire measuring range of the
electrode.
Typical offset of pH electrode: < +/- 30 mV.
Max. tolerated offset: < +/- 60 mV
Typical slope of pH electrode: 5565 mV/pH unit.
Max. limits: 4065 mV/pH
2.2.3 Miscellaneous:
2.2.3.1 Case Temp: Shows the current temperature in [C] inside the
transmitter.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 77
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
2.3 Sample
2.3.1 Sample ID: Shows the identification assigned to a sample. This
identification is defined by the user to identify the location of the
sample.
Sample Flow: Shows the actual sample flow in B/s (bubbles per
second)]. The Sample flow must be above 5 B/s.
Temperature: Actual temperature in C and in Ohm (NT5K)
2.4 I/O State
Shows current status of all in- and outputs.
2.4.1/2.4.2
Alarm Relay: Active or inactive
Relay 1 and 2: Active or inactive
Input: Open or closed
Signal Output 1 and 2: Actual current in mA
Signal Output 3: Actual current in mA (if option is installed)
2.5 Interface
Only available if optional interface is installed.
Review programmed communication settings.
78 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
3 Maintenance
3.1 Calibration
In this menu, you can correct measuring values (all disinfectants
and pH) or calibrate offset and slope of pH electrode.
3.1.1 Process DIS: Possibility to correct the disinfectant value. See
Process Calibration of DIS, p. 50, for more details.
3.1.2 Process pH: Only available, if option pH has been installed.
Correction of pH electrode. See Process Calibration of DIS, p. 50,
for details.
3.1.3 Standard pH: Only available, if option pH has been installed.
Calibration of pH electrode with the two standard solutions
programmed in Installation 5.1.3. See Standard pH, p. 52, for
details.
3.2 Service
3.2.1 Verification: Performs a verification using the reference kit. Follow
dialog. See Verification, p. 49
3.2.2 Fill System: Activates the reagent pump.
3.3 Simulation
To simulate a value or a relay state, select the
alarm relay,
relay 1or 2
signal output 1 or 2
with the [ ] or [ ] key.
Press the [Enter] key.
Change the value or state of the selected item with the [ ] or
[ ] key.
Press the [Enter] key.
The value is simulated by the relay/signal output.
Alarm Relay: Active or inactive
Relay 1 and 2: Active or inactive
Signal Output 1 and 2: Actual current in mA
Signal Output 3: Actual current in mA (if option is installed)
At the absence of any key activities, the instrument will switch back
to normal mode after 20 min. If you quit the menu, all simulated val-
ues will be reset.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 79
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
3.5.2 Fill Channel 11: Activates the cleaning pump and switches the
valve to the cleaning solution 1 (right canister)
3.5.3 Fill Channel 12: Activates the cleaning pump and switches the
valve to the cleaning solution 2 (left canister)
80 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
4 Operation
4.1 Sensors
4.1.1 Filter Time Constant: Used to damp noisy signals. The higher the
filter time constant, the slower the system reacts to changes of the
measured value.
Range: 5300 sec
4.1.2 Hold after Cal: Delay permitting the instrument to stabilize again
after calibration. During calibration- plus hold-time, the signal
outputs are frozen (held on last valid value), alarm values, limits are
not active.
Range: 06000 sec
4.1.3 Meas. Interval: Measurement interval for disinfectants.
Range: 1 to 12 Min.
4.1.4 Default pH: If the pH value of the sample is known it can be entered
in this menu.This menu only appears if the pH option is not
installed.
Range: 014 pH
4.2 Relay Contacts
See 5.3 Relay Contacts, p. 87
4.3 Logger
The instrument is equipped with an internal logger. The data can be
copied to a PC with an USB stick if option USB interface is in-
stalled.
The logger can save approx. 1500 data records. The records
consist of: Date, time, alarms, measured value, measured value
uncompensated, temperature, flow.
Range: 1 second to 1 hour
4.3.1 Log Interval: Select a convenient log interval. Consult the table
below to estimate the max logging time. The logging buffer is
designed as circular buffer. If the buffer is full, the oldest data
record is erased to make room for the newest one.
If the logger interval is set to event driven, a data record of every
valid measurement is saved. The interval corresponds with the
measuring interval.
Interval 1s 5s 1 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 1h Event
Driven
Time 25 min 2h 25 h 5d 10 d 31 d 62 d
4.3.2 Clear Logger: If confirmed with yes, the complete logger data is
deleted. A new data series is started.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 81
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
5 Installation
5.1 Sensors
5.1.1 Disinf: Select the disinfectant in use. Available disinfectants are:
Free chlorine
Hypochl. acid
Ozone
Chlorine dioxide
Bromine
Iodine
Monochloramine
82 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
20
(0 - 20 [mA])
(4 - 20 [mA])
B A
10 12
0/4 X
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
A-96.250.571 / 220616 83
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
[mA]
20
(0 - 20 [mA])
(4 - 20 [mA])
10 12
0/4 X
2 4 6
1 10 100 1000 10000
0 1 2 3 4
Parameter DIS:
5.2.1.40.10 Range low: 010 ppm or 010 mg/l
5.2.1.40.20 Range high: 010 ppm or 010 mg/l
Parameter pH
5.2.1.40.11 Range low: 0 14 pH
5.2.1.40.21 Range high: 0 14 pH
Parameter Temperature
5.2.1.40.12 Range low: -30 to +120 C
5.2.1.40.22 Range high: -30 to +120 C
84 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
As control Signal outputs can be used for driving control units. We distinguish
output different kinds of controls:
P-controller: The controller action is proportional to the devia-
tion from the setpoint. The controller is characterized by the
P-Band. In the steady-state, the setpoint will never be
reached. The deviation is called steady-state error.
Parameters: setpoint, P-Band
PI-controller: The combination of a P-controller with an
I-controller will minimize the steady-state error. If the reset
time is set to zero, the I-controller is switched off.
Parameters: setpoint, P-Band, reset time.
PD-controller: The combination of a P-controller with a
D-controller will minimize the response time to a fast change
of the process value. If the derivative time is set to zero, the
D-controller is switched off.
Parameters: setpoint, P-Band, derivative time.
PID-controller: The combination of a P-, an I - and a D-con-
troller allows a proper control of the process.
Parameters: setpoint, P-Band, reset time, derivative time.
Ziegler-Nichols method for the optimization of a PID controller:
Parameters: Setpoint, P-Band, Reset time, Derivative time
Y
B A
X
a
The point of intersection of the tangent with the respective axis will
result in the parameters a and L.
Consult the manual of the control unit for connecting and
programming details. Choose control upwards or downwards.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 85
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
Control upwards/downwards
Setpoint: User-defined process value (Measured value or flow)
P-Band: Range below (upwards control) or above (downwards
control) the set-point, within the dosing intensity is reduced from
100% to 0% to reach the set-point without overshooting.
5.2.1.43 Control Parameters: if Parameters = DIS
5.2.1.43.10 Setpoint: 05 ppm or 05 mg/l
5.2.1.43.20 P-Band: 05 ppm 05 mg/l
5.2.1.43 Control Parameters: if Parameters = pH
5.2.1.43.11 Setpoint: 0 14 pH
5.2.1.43.21 P-Band: 0 14 pH
5.2.1.43 Control Parameters: if Parameters = Temperature
5.2.1.43.12 Setpoint: -30 to +120 C
5.2.1.43.22 P-Band: 0 to +100 C
5.2.1.43 Control Parameters: if Parameters = Sample Flow
5.2.1.43.13 Setpoint: 0600 B/s
5.2.1.43.23 P-Band: 0 200 B/s
Reset time: The reset time is the time till the step response of a
single I-controller will reach the same value as it will be suddenly
reached by a P-controller.
Range: 09000 sec
Derivative time: The derivative time is the time till the ramp
response of a single P-controller will reach the same value as it will
be suddenly reached by a D-controller.
Range: 09000 sec
Control timeout: If a controller action (dosing intensity) is constantly
over 90% during a defined period of time and the process value
does not come closer to the setpoint, the dosing process will be
stopped for safety reasons.
Range: 0720 min
86 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
A-96.250.571 / 220616 87
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
message list.
Range: 014.00 pH
5.3.1.2.21 Alarm Low: If the measured value falls below the alarm low value,
the alarm relay is activated and E004 is displayed in the message
list
Range: 014.00 pH
5.3.1.2.31 Hysteresis: Within the hyst. range, the relay does not switch. This
prevents damage of relays contacts when the measured value
fluctuates around the alarm value
Range: 014.00 pH
5.3.1.2.41 Delay: Duration, the activation of the alarm relay is retarded after
the measuring value has risen above/fallen below the programmed
alarm.
Range: 028800 sec
5.3.1.3 Sample Flow: Define at which sample flow a flow alarm should be
issued.
5.3.1.3.1 Flow Alarm: Program if the alarm relay should be activated if there
is a flow alarm. Choose between yes or no. The flow alarm will
always be indicated in the display, pending error list, saved in the
message list and the logger.
Available values: Yes or no
88 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
NOTICE: The navigation in the menu <Relay 1> and <Relay 2>
is equal. For reason of simplicity only the menu numbers of
Relay 1 are used in the following.
1 First select the functions as:
- Limit upper/lower,
- Control upwards/downwards,
- Timer
- Fieldbus
- End of Batch (relay 2 only)
2 Then enter the necessary data depending on the selected func-
tion.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 89
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
Parameter Range
DIS 05 ppm
pH 014.00 pH
Temperature -30 to +120 C
Sample flow 0600 B/s
5.3.2.400 Hysteresis: within the hysteresis range, the relay does not switch.
This prevents damage of relay contacts when the measured value
fluctuates around the alarm value.
Parameter Range
DIS 05 ppm
pH 014.00 pH
Temperature 0 to +100 C
Sample flow 0200 B/s
5.3.2.50 Delay: Duration, the activation of the alarm relay is retarded after
the measuring value has risen above/fallen below the programmed
alarm.
Range. 0600 sec
90 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
A-96.250.571 / 220616 91
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
92 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
5.3.2.24 daily
The relay contact can be activated daily, at any time of a day.
5.3.2.341 Start time: to set the start time proceed as follows:
1 Press [Enter], to set the hours.
2 Set the hour with the [ ] or [ ] keys.
3 Press [Enter], to set the minutes.
4 Set the minutes with the [ ] or [ ] keys.
5 Press [Enter], to set the seconds.
6 Set the seconds with the [ ] or [ ] keys.
Range: 00:00:0023:59:59
5.3.2.44 Run Time: see Interval
5.3.2.54 Delay: see Interval
5.3.2.6 Signal Outputs: see Interval
5.3.2.7 Output/Control: see Interval
5.3.2.24 weekly
The relay contact can be activated at one or several days, of a
week. The daily starting time is valid for all days.
5.3.2.342 Calendar:
5.3.2.342.1 Start time: The programmed start time is valid for each of the pro-
grammed days. To set the start time see 5.3.2.341, p. 93.
Range: 00:00:0023:59:59
5.3.2.342.2 Monday: Possible settings, on or off
to
5.3.2.342.8 Sunday: Possible settings, on or off
5.3.2.44 Run Time: see Interval
5.3.2.54 Delay: see Interval
5.3.2.6 Signal Outputs: see Interval
5.3.2.7 Output/Control: see Interval
A-96.250.571 / 220616 93
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
5.3.4 Input: The functions of the relays and signal outputs can be de-
fined depending on the position of the input contact, i.e. no function,
closed or open.
5.3.4.1 Active: Define when the input should be active:
No: Input is never active.
When closed Input is active if the input relay is closed
When open: Input is active if the input relay is open
5.3.4.2 Signal Outputs: Select the operation mode of the signal outputs
when the relay is active:
Cont.: Signal outputs continue to issue the measured
value.
Hold: Signal outputs issue the last valid measured value.
Measurement is interrupted. Errors, except fatal
errors, are not issued.
Off: Set to 0 or 4 mA respectively. Errors, except fatal
errors, are not issued.
5.3.4.3 Output/Control: (relay or signal output):
Cont.: Controller continues normally.
Hold: Controller continues on the last valid value.
Off: Controller is switched off.
94 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
5.3.4.4 Fault:
No: No message is issued in pending error list and the
alarm relay does not close when input is active.
Message E024 is stored in the message list.
Yes: Message E024 is issued and stored in the message
list. The Alarm relay closes when input is active.
5.3.4.5 Delay: Time which the instrument waits, after the input is deactivat-
ed, before returning to normal operation.
Range: 06000 sec
5.4 Miscellaneous
5.4.1 Language: Set the desired language.
Available settings: German /English/French/Spanish
5.4.2 Set defaults: Reset the instrument to factory default values in three
different ways:
Calibration: Sets calibration values back to default. All other
values are kept in memory.
In parts: Communication parameters are kept in memory. All
other values are set back to default values.
Completely: Sets back all values including communication
parameters.
5.4.3 Load Firmware: Firmware updates should be done by instructed
service personnel only.
5.4.4 Password: Select a password different from 0000 to prevent unau-
thorized access to the menus Messages, Maintenance, Opera-
tion and Installation.
Each menu may be protected by a different password.
If you forgot the passwords, contact the closest SWAN representa-
tive.
5.4.5 Sample ID: Identify the process value with any meaning full text,
such as KKS number.
5.4.6 Line Break Detection: If activated, error message E028 is shown in
case of line break on signal outputs 1 and 2.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 95
AMI Codes-II
Program List and Explanations
5.5 Interface
Select one of the following communication protocols. Depending on
your selection, different parameters must be defined.
96 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Material Safety Data sheets
10.1. Reagents
Catalogue No.: A-85.410.120
Product name: OXYCON ON-LINE DPD
Download The current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for the above list-
MSDS ed Reagents are available for downloading at www.swan.ch.
A-96.250.571 / 220616 97
AMI Codes-II
Default Values
98 A-96.250.571 / 220616
AMI Codes-II
Default Values
A-96.250.571 / 220616 99
AMI Codes-II
Default Values
12. Index
A Interface Profibus DP . . . . 33
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Interface RS485 . . . . . . . 33
Alarm Interface USB . . . . . . . . 33
DIS . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Interpolation . . . . . . . 82, 98
pH . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Interrupt measurement . . . 10
Sample flow . . . . . . . 88
Sample temperature . . 89 L
Alarm Relay . . . . 10, 28, 87 Logger .......... 81, 98
Application range . . . . . . . 9
M
C Measurement interval 44, 81, 98
Cable thicknesses . ..... 24 Measuring Range . . . . . . 13
Cal. History . . . . . ..... 77 Measuring range. . . . . . . . 9
Calendar . . . . . . ..... 93 Message List . . . . . . . . . 76
Calibration Mounting requirements . . . 17
DIS . . . . . . . ... 50, 79
pH . . . . . . . 37, 51, 79
O
Changing values . . . . . . . 41 On site requirements .... 16
Cleaning module . . 10, 80, 82
On-site requirements .... 13
Current outputs . . . . . . . 31
P
D
Pending Errors . . . . . . . . 76
Disinfectant . . . . . . . . . 9, 82 pH Electrode . . 16, 37, 58, 77
pH gain . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
E pH Measurement . . . . 10, 77
Electrical wiring ....... 16 pH offset . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Power Supply . . . . . . . . 13
F Process calibration . . . . . 17
Fill System . . . . . . . . 36, 79 Process DIS . . . . 37, 50, 79
Flow Alarm . . . . . . . . 64, 88 Process pH . . . . . . . . 51, 79
Fluidics . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
R
I Reagent consumption. . . . 44
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 28 Relay . . . . . . . . 10, 89, 99
Instrument Setup . . . . . . 16 Relay Box. . . . . . . . . . . 10
Interface Modbus . . . . . . 33
13. Notes
SWAN
is represented worldwide by subsidiary companies
and distributors.
SWAN Products
Analytical Instruments for:
Potable Water
Cooling Water
Made in Switzerland
VEGASON 61
4 20 mA/HART - two-wire
Contents
1 About this document
1.1 Function............................................................................................................................ 4
1.2 Target group...................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Symbols used................................................................................................................... 4
2 For your safety
2.1 Authorised personnel........................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Appropriate use................................................................................................................. 5
2.3 Warning about incorrect use.............................................................................................. 5
2.4 General safety instructions................................................................................................ 5
2.5 Safety label on the instrument........................................................................................... 6
2.6 CE conformity.................................................................................................................... 6
2.7 Fulfillment of NAMUR recommendations.......................................................................... 6
2.8 Environmental instructions................................................................................................ 6
3 Product description
3.1 Configuration..................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Principle of operation........................................................................................................ 8
3.3 Packaging, transport and storage...................................................................................... 8
3.4 Accessories and replacement parts.................................................................................. 9
4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions........................................................................................................ 11
4.2 Mounting instructions...................................................................................................... 12
5 Connecting to power supply
5.1 Preparing the connection................................................................................................ 20
5.2 Connection procedure..................................................................................................... 21
5.3 Wiring plan, single chamber housing.............................................................................. 22
5.4 Wiring plan, double chamber housing............................................................................. 23
5.5 Wiring plan - version IP66/IP68 (1bar).......................................................................... 25
5.6 Switch-on phase............................................................................................................. 26
6 Set up with the display and adjustment module PLICSCOM
6.1 Insert display and adjustment module............................................................................. 27
6.2 Adjustment system.......................................................................................................... 28
6.3 Setup steps..................................................................................................................... 29
6.4 Menu schematic.............................................................................................................. 40
6.9 Saving the parameter adjustment data............................................................................ 42
7 Set up with PACTware and other adjustment programs
7.1 Connect the PC via VEGACONNECT............................................................................. 43
7.2 Parameter adjustment with PACTware............................................................................. 44
7.3 Parameter adjustment with AMS and PDM.................................................................. 45
7.4 Saving the parameter adjustment data............................................................................ 46
8 Maintenance and fault rectification
28775-EN-150603
8.1 Maintenance................................................................................................................... 47
8.2 Rectify faults.................................................................................................................... 47
8.3 Exchanging the electronics module................................................................................. 48
8.4 Software update.............................................................................................................. 48
8.5 How to proceed if a repair is necessary........................................................................... 49
9 Dismount
9.1 Dismounting steps.......................................................................................................... 50
9.2 Disposal.......................................................................................................................... 50
10 Supplement
10.1 Technical data................................................................................................................. 51
10.2 Dimensions..................................................................................................................... 56
28775-EN-150603
be observed.
2.6 CE conformity
The device fulfills the legal requirements of the applicable EC guide-
lines. By affixing the CE marking, we confirm successful testing of the
product.
You can find the CE Certificate of Conformity in the download section
of our homepage.
3 Product description
3.1 Configuration
Scope of delivery The scope of delivery encompasses:
Ultrasonic sensor
Documentation
Quick setup guide VEGASON 61
Instructions for optional instrument features
Ex-specific "Safety instructions" (with Ex versions)
if necessary, further certificates
Information:
In this operating instructions manual, the optional instrument features
are described. The respective scope of delivery results from the order
specification.
Constituent parts
1
module PLICSCOM
The components are available in different versions.
Type label The type label contains the most important data for identification and
use of the instrument:
Instrument type
Article and serial number device
Article numbers, documentation
Technical data: For example approvals, process temperature,
process fitting/material, signal output, power supply, protection
SIL identification (with SIL rating ex works)
With the serial number, you can access the delivery data of the instru-
ment via www.vega.com, "VEGA Tools" and "serial number search".
You can find the serial number on the inside of the instrument as well
as on the type label on the outside.
Scope of this operating This operating instructions manual applies to the following instrument
instructions manual versions:
Hardware version <2.0.0
Software version 3.8
Functional principle The transducer of the ultrasonic sensor transmits short ultrasonic
pulses to the measured product. These pulses are reflected by
product surface and received back by the transducer as echoes.
The running time of the ultrasonic pulses from emission to reception
is proportional to the distance and hence the level. The determined
level is converted into an appropriate output signal and outputted as
measured value.
Voltage supply 420mA/HART two-wire electronics for voltage supply and meas-
ured value transmission on the same cable.
The supply voltage range can differ depending on the instrument
version.
The data for power supply are specified in chapter "Technical data".
The backlight of the display and adjustment module is powered by
the sensor. The prerequisite for this is a supply voltage at a certain
level. The exact voltage specifications are stated in chapter "Technical
data".
The optional heating requires its own operating voltage. You can find
details in the supplementary instructions manual "Heating for display
and adjustment module".
This function is generally not available for approved instruments.
28775-EN-150603
Transport Transport must be carried out in due consideration of the notes on the
transport packaging. Nonobservance of these instructions can cause
damage to the device.
Transport inspection The delivery must be checked for completeness and possible transit
damage immediately at receipt. Ascertained transit damage or con-
cealed defects must be appropriately dealt with.
Storage Up to the time of installation, the packages must be left closed and
stored according to the orientation and storage markings on the
outside.
Unless otherwise indicated, the packages must be stored only under
the following conditions:
Not in the open
Dry and dust free
Not exposed to corrosive media
Protected against solar radiation
Avoiding mechanical shock and vibration
Storage and transport Storage and transport temperature see chapter "Supplement -
temperature Technical data - Ambient conditions"
Relative humidity 2085%
VEGADIS 81 The VEGADIS 81 is an external display and adjustment unit for VEGA
plics sensors.
For sensors with double chamber housing the interface adapter
"DISADAPT" is also required for VEGADIS 81.
28775-EN-150603
Protective cap The protective cover protects the sensor housing against soiling and
intense heat from solar radiation.
You will find additional information in the supplementary instructions
manual "Protective cover" (Document-ID 34296).
Electronics module Electronics module "VEGASON series 60" is a replacement part for
ultrasonic sensors of VEGASON series 60. A different version is avail-
able for each type of signal output.
You can find further information in the operating instructions "Elec-
tronics module VEGASON series 60" (Document-ID 30206).
28775-EN-150603
4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions
Suitability for the process Make sure that all parts of the instrument coming in direct contact
conditions with the process, especially the sensor element, process seal and
process fitting, are suitable for the existing process conditions, such
as process pressure, process temperature as well as the chemical
properties of the medium.
You can find the specifications in chapter "Technical data" and on the
nameplate.
Installation position Select an installation position you can easily reach for mounting and
connecting as well as later retrofitting of a display and adjustment
module. The housing can be rotated by 330 without the use of any
tools. You can also install the display and adjustment module in four
different positions (each displaced by 90).
Cable entries - NPT In the case of instrument housings with self-sealing NPT threads, it is
thread not possible to have the cable entries screwed in at the factory. The
free openings for the cable glands are therefore covered with red dust
protective caps as transport protection.
Prior to setup you have to replace these protective caps with ap-
proved cable glands or close the openings with suitable blind plugs.
28775-EN-150603
Reference plane for The reference plane for the measuring range is the lower edge of the
measuring range transducer.
Make sure that a minimum distance from the reference plane - the
so-called dead zone, in which measurement is not possible - is
2
1
Information:
If the medium reaches the transducer, buildup can form on it and
cause faulty measurements later on.
1 2 3
100%
0%
Pressure/Vacuum Gauge pressure in the vessel does not influence VEGASON 61. Low
pressure or vacuum does, however, damp the ultrasonic pulses. This
influences the measuring result, particularly if the level is very low.
With pressures under -0.2bar (-20kPa) you should use a different
measuring principle, e.g. radar or guided microwave.
28775-EN-150603
Warning:
The housing must not be used to screw the instrument in! Applying
tightening force can damage internal parts of the housing.
Installation position When mounting the sensor, keep a distance of at least 200mm
(7.874in) to the vessel wall. If the sensor is installed in the center of
dished or round vessel tops, multiple echoes can arise. These can,
however, be suppressed by an appropriate adjustment (see chapter
"Setup").
> 200 mm
Socket Socket pieces should be dimensioned so that the lower end of the
transducer protrudes at least 10mm (0.394in) out of the socket.
ca. 10 mm
If the reflective properties of the medium are good, you can mount
VEGASON 61 on sockets which are higher than the length of the
transducer. You will find recommended values for socket heights in the
following illustration. The socket end should be smooth and burr-free,
if possible also rounded. Carry out a false echo storage.
28775-EN-150603
d h
80 mm/3" 150 mm/6"
100 mm/4" 300 mm/12"
h
150 mm/6" 400 mm/16"
Sensor orientation In liquids, direct the sensor as perpendicular as possible to the prod-
uct surface to achieve optimum measurement results.
To reduce the min. distance to the medium, you can also mount VE-
GASON 61 with a beam deflector. By doing this, it is possible to fill the
vessel nearly to maximum. Such an arrangement is suitable primarily
for open vessels such as e.g. overflow basins.
~4
45
00
x4
0
0
~200
Agitators If there are agitators in the vessel, a false signal storage should be
carried out with the agitators in motion. This ensures that the interfer-
ing reflections from the agitators are saved with the blades in different
positions.
Inflowing medium Do not mount the instruments in or above the filling stream. Make sure
that you detect the product surface, not the inflowing product.
28775-EN-150603
Foam Through the action of filling, stirring and other processes in the vessel,
dense foams which considerably damp the emitted signals may form
on the product surface.
If foams are causing measurement errors, the sensor should be used
in a standpipe or, alternatively, the more suitable guided radar sen-
sors (TDR) should be used.
Guided wave radar is unaffected by foam generation and is particu-
larly suitable for such applications.
Air turbulences If there are strong air currents in the vessel, e.g. due to strong winds
in outdoor installations or air turbulence, e.g. by cyclone extraction
you should mount VEGASON 61 in a standpipe or use a different
measuring principle, e.g. radar or guided radar (TDR).
Standpipe measurement By using a standpipe (surge or bypass tube), the influence of vessel
installations, foam generation and turbulence is excluded.
Standpipes must extend all the way down to the requested min. level,
as measurement is only possible within the tube.
28775-EN-150603
max.
min.
Flow measurement with The short examples give you introductory information on the flow
rectangular flume measurement. Detailed planning information is available from flume
manufacturers and in special literature.
3 ... 4 hmax 1
dmin
90
90
50 mm
2 mm x hmax hmax
2 2 33 4
Fig. 15: Flow measurement with rectangular flume: dmin. = min. distance of the
sensor (see chapter "Technical data"); hmax. = max. filling of the rectangular
flume
1 Overflow orifice (side view)
2 Headwater
3 Tail water
28775-EN-150603
3 ... 4 x hmax
d
90
hmax
1 B 2
Fig. 16: Flow measurement with Khafagi-Venturi flume: d = Min. distance to sen-
sor; hmax. = max. filling of the flume; B = tightest constriction in the flume
1 Position sensor
2 Venturi flume
Voltage supply Power supply and current signal are carried on the same two-wire
cable. The operating voltage can differ depending on the instrument
version.
The data for power supply are specified in chapter "Technical data".
Provide a reliable separation between the supply circuit and the
mains circuits according to DINEN61140 VDE0140-1.
Keep in mind the following additional factors that influence the operat-
ing voltage:
Lower output voltage of the power supply unit under nominal load
(e.g. with a sensor current of 20.5mA or 22mA in case of fault)
Influence of additional instruments in the circuit (see load values in
chapter "Technical data")
Connection cable The instrument is connected with standard two-wire cable without
screen. If electromagnetic interference is expected which is above the
test values of EN61326-1 for industrial areas, screened cable should
be used.
Use cable with round cross section for instruments with housing and
cable gland. To ensure the seal effect of the cable gland (IP protection
rating), find out which cable outer diameter the cable gland is suitable
for.
Use a cable gland fitting the cable diameter.
We generally recommend the use of screened cable for HART multi-
drop mode.
Cable gland NPT On the instrument with cable entry NPT and plastic housing there is
a metallic " threaded insert moulded into the plastic housing.
Caution:
No grease should be used when screwing the NPT cable gland or
steel tube into the threaded insert. Standard grease can contain
additives that corrode the connection between threaded insert and
28775-EN-150603
housing. This would influence the stability of the connection and the
tightness of the housing.
Cable screening and If screened cable is required, we recommend connecting the cable
grounding screen on both ends to ground potential. In the sensor, the screen
8. Press down the opening levers of the terminals, you will hear the
terminal spring closing
9. Check the hold of the wires in the terminals by lightly pulling on
them
28775-EN-150603
10. Connect the screen to the internal ground terminal, connect the
outer ground terminal to potential equalisation
11. Tighten the compression nut of the cable entry gland. The seal
ring must completely encircle the cable
12. Screw the housing lid back on
5 5 5
1 2 3
5
4
28775-EN-150603
Display
IC 1
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 2
Wiring plan
Display
I2C
1 2 5 6 7 8
Housing overview
1 2 3
4 5
Electronics compartment
Display
1
IC
1 2 5 6 7 8
3 2
Terminal compartment
Display
2
1 2 I2C
Wiring plan
I2C
1 2
2
Fig. 25: Wire assignment, connection cable
28775-EN-150603
1 brown (+) and blue (-) to power supply or to the processing system
2 Shielding
28775-EN-150603
Note:
If you intend to retrofit the instrument with a display and adjustment
module for continuous measured value indication, a higher lid with an
28775-EN-150603
[+] key:
Change value of the parameter
[ESC] key:
Interrupt input
Jump to next higher menu
Adjustment system You adjust the instrument via the four keys of the display and adjust-
ment module. The individual menu items are shown on the LC display.
You can find the functions of the individual keys in the previous
illustration.
Time functions By pushing the [+] and [->] keys once, the edited value or the cursor
changes by one position. By pushing the keys longer than 1s the
change will be continuously.
28775-EN-150603
By pushing the [OK] and [ESC] keys simultaneously for more than
5s, a return to the basic menu is caused. The menu language is then
switched over to "English".
Standard
Address 0
Parameter adjustment The sensor measures the distance from the sensor to the product
surface. For indication of the real level, an allocation of the measured
distance to the percentage height must be carried out.
The actual level is then calculated on the basis of these entered
values. At the same time, the operating range of the sensor is limited
from maximum range to the requested range.
(19.68") 3
0,5 m
100% 2
(196.9")
5m
0% 1
The real product level during this adjustment is not important, be-
cause the min./max. adjustment is always carried out without chang-
28775-EN-150603
ing the product level. These settings can be made ahead of time
without the instrument having to be installed.
2. Select the menu item "Basic adjustment" with [->] and confirm
with [OK]. Now the menu item "Min. adjustment" is displayed.
Min. adjustment
0.00%
=
5.000m(d)
4.000m(d)
3. Prepare the % value for editing with [OK] and set the cursor to the
requested position with [->]. Set the requested percentage value
with [+] and save with [OK]. The cursor jumps now to the distance
value.
4. Enter the suitable distance value in m for the empty vessel (e.g.
distance from the sensor to the vessel bottom) corresponding to
the percentage value.
5. Save the settings with [OK] and move to "Max. adjustment" with
[->].
1. Prepare the % value for editing with [OK] and set the cursor to the
requested position with [->]. Set the requested percentage value
with [+] and save with [OK]. The cursor jumps now to the distance
value.
2. Enter the appropriate distance value in m (corresponding to the
percentage value) for the full vessel. Keep in mind that the max.
level must lie below the dead band.
3. Save the settings with [OK] and move to "Medium selection" with
[->].
Basic adjustment - Me- Each product has different reflective properties. In addition, there
dium are various interfering factors which have to be taken into account:
agitated product surfaces and foam generation (with liquids); dust
generation, material cones and echoes from the vessel wall (with
solids). To adapt the sensor to these different conditions, you should
first select "Liquid" or "Solid".
28775-EN-150603
Medium
Liquid
Basic adjustment - Vessel Apart from the medium, the vessel shape can also influence the
form measurement. To adapt the sensor to these measuring conditions,
this menu item offers different options depending on whether liquid
or bulk solid is selected. With "Liquids" these are "Storage tank",
"Stilling tube","Open vessel" or "Stirred vessel", with "Solid", "Silo" or
"Bunker".
Vessel form
Storage tank
Enter the requested parameters via the appropriate keys, save your
settings and jump to the next menu item with the [->] key.
Basic adjustment - Damp- To suppress fluctuations in the measured value display, e.g. caused
ing by an agitated product surface, a damping can be set. This time can
be between 0 and 999 seconds. Keep in mind that the reaction time of
the entire measurement will then be longer and the sensor will react
to measured value changes with a delay. In general, a period of a few
seconds is sufficient to smooth the measured value display.
Damping
0s
Enter the requested parameters via the appropriate keys, save your
settings and jump to the next menu item with the [->] key.
Basic adjustment - Lin- A linearisation is necessary for all vessels in which the vessel volume
earization curve does not increase linearly with the level - e.g. in a horizontal cylindri-
cal or spherical tank - and the indication or output of the volume is
required. Corresponding linearisation curves are preprogrammed for
these vessels. They represent the correlation between the level per-
centage and vessel volume. By activating the appropriate curve, the
volume percentage of the vessel is displayed correctly. If the volume
should not be displayed in percent but e.g. in l or kg, a scaling can be
also set in the menu item "Display".
Linearisation curve
28775-EN-150603
Linear
Enter the requested parameters via the appropriate keys, save your
settings and jump to the next menu item with the [->] key.
Basic adjustment - Sen- In this menu item you can enter an unambiguous designation for the
sor TAG sensor, e.g. the measurement loop name or the tank or product des-
ignation. In digital systems and in the documentation of larger plants,
a singular designation should be entered for exact identification of
individual measuring points.
Sensor-TAG
Sensor
With this menu item, the Basic adjustment is finished and you can
now jump to the main menu with the [ESC] key.
Display - Displayed value In the menu item "Display" you can define how the measured value
should be presented on the display.
The following indication values are available:
Height
Distance
Current
Scaled
Percent
Lin. percent
The selection "scaled" opens the menu items "Display unit" and
"Scaling". In "Display unit" there are the following options:
Height
Ground
Flow
Volume
Without unit
Depending on selection, the different units are in turn available.
In the menu item "Scaling", the requested numerical value with deci-
mal point is entered for 0% and 100% of the measured value.
There is the following relationship between the indication value in the
menu "Display" and the adjustment unit in the menu "Device settings":
Indication value "Distance": Presentation of the measured value in
the selected adjustment unit, e.g. m(d).
Displayed value
Scaled
Display unit
Volume
28775-EN-150603
Scaling
0% = 0.0l
100% = 100.0l
Display - Backlight An already integrated background lighting can be adjusted via the
adjustment menu. The function depends on the level of the supply
voltage, see operating instructions of the respective sensor.
Backlight
Diagnosis - Peak value The respective min. and max. measured values are saved in the sen-
sor. The values are displayed in the menu item "Peak values".
Min. and max. distance in m(d)
Min. and max. temperature
Peak value indicator
Diagnosis - Measurement When non-contact level sensors are used, the measurement can be
reliability influenced by the respective process conditions. In this menu item,
the measurement reliability of the level echo is displayed as dB value.
The measurement reliability equals signal strength minus noise. The
higher the value, the more reliable the measurement. With a function-
ing measurement, the values are >10dB.
Diagnostics - Device The instrument status is displayed in this menu item. If no failure is
status detected by the sensor, "OK" will be displayed. If a failure is detected,
there will be a sensor-specific flashing fault signal, for example
"E013". The failure is also displayed in clear text, for example "No
measured value available".
Information:
The fault message as well as the clear text indication are also carried
out in the measured value display.
Meas. reliability
Sensor status
28775-EN-150603
Diagnosis - Curve selec- With ultrasonic sensors, the "Echo curve" represents the signal
tion strength of the echoes over the measuring range. The unit of signal
strength is "dB". The signal strength enables the jusgement of the
quality of the measurement.
The "False echo curve" displays the saved false echoes (see menu
"Service") of the empty vessel as signal strength in "dB" over the
measuring range.
Up to 3000 measured values are recorded (depending on the sensor)
when starting a "Trend curve". Then the values can be displayed on
a time axis. The oldest measured values are always deleted.
In the menu item "Choose curve", the respective curve is selected.
Curve selection
Echo curve
Information:
The trend recording is not activated when being shipped. It must be
started by the user via the menu item "Start trend curve".
Diagnosis - Curve pres- A comparison of the echo curve and the false echo curve allows a
entation more detailled evaluation of measurement reliability. The selected
curve is updated continuously. With the [OK] key, a submenu with
zoom functions is opened.
The following functions are available with "Echo and false echo
curve":
"X-Zoom": Zoom function for the meas. distance
"Y-Zoom": 1, 2, 5 and 10x signal magnification in "dB"
"Unzoom": Reset the presentation to the nominal measuring range
without magnification
In the menu item "Trend curve" the following are available:
"X-Zoom": Resolution
1 minute
1 hour
1 day
"Stop/Start": Interrupt a recording or start a new recording
"Unzoom": Reset the resolution to minutes
As default setting, the recording pattern has 1 minute. With the adjust-
ment software PACTware, this pattern can be also set to 1 hour or 1
day.
Echo curve
Service - False signal High sockets or vessel installations, such as e.g. struts or agitators as
suppression well as buildup and weld joints on the vessel walls, cause interfering
28775-EN-150603
Change now?
Proceed as follows:
1. Move from the measured value display to the main menu by
pushing [OK].
2. Select the menu item "Service" with [->] and confirm with [OK].
Now the menu item "False signal suppression" is displayed.
3. Confirm "False signal suppression - Change now" with [OK] and
select in the below menu "Create new". Enter the actual distance
from the sensor to the product surface. All false signals in this
area are detected by the sensor and saved after confirming with
[OK].
Note:
Check the distance to the product surface, because if an incorrect
(too large) value is entered, the existing level will be saved as a false
signal. The level would then no longer be detectable in this area.
Service - Extended set- The menu item "Extended setting" offers the possibility to optimise
ting VEGASON 61 for applications in which the level changes very quickly.
To do this, select the function "Quick level change >1m/min.".
Extended setting
Note:
Since with the function "Quick level change >1m/min." the genera-
tion of an average value of the signal processing is considerably
reduced, false reflections by agitators or vessel installations can
cause measured value fluctuations. A false echo memory is thus
recommended.
Service - Current output In the menu item "Current output" you determine the behaviour of the
current output during operation and in case of failure. The following
options are available:
Current output
Characteristics 420mA
204mA
Failure mode1) Hold value
20.5mA
22mA
28775-EN-150603
<3.6mA
Min. current2) 3.8mA
4mA
Characteristic: 4-20mA
Failure mode: 22mA
Min. current 3.8mA
Service - Simulation In this menu item you simulate a user-defined level or pressure value
via the current output. This allows you to test the signal path, e.g.
through connected indicating instruments or the input card of the
control system.
The following simulation variables are available:
Percent
Current
Pressure (with pressure transmitters)
Distance (with radar and guided microwave)
With Profibus PA sensors, the selection of the simulated value is
made via the "Channel" in the menu "Basic adjustments".
How to start the simulation:
1. Push [OK]
2. Select the requested simulation variable with [->] and confirm
with [OK].
3. Set the requested numerical value with [+] and [->].
4. Push [OK]
The simulation is now running, with 420mA/HART a current is
outputted and with Profibus PA or Foundation Fieldbus a digital value.
How to interrupt the simulation:
Push [ESC]
Information:
The simulation is automatically terminated 10 minutes after the last
pressing of a key.
Simulation
Start simulation?
Service - Reset If the function "Reset" is carried out, the sensor resets the values of
28775-EN-150603
1)
Value of the current output in case of failure, e.g. if no valid measured value is
delivered.
2)
This value is not underrun during operation.
3)
This value is not exceeded during operation.
Default setting
Like basic adjustment, but in addition, special parameters are reset to
default values.6)
Service - Adjustment unit In this menu item you select the internal arithmetic unit of the sensor.
Unit of measurement
m(d)
Service - Language The sensor is already set to the ordered national language. In this
menu item you can change the language. The following languages are
available, e.g. in software version 3.50:
Deutsch
28775-EN-150603
English
4)
Sensor-specific basic adjustment.
5)
Depending on the sensor type, see chapter "Technical data".
6)
Special parameters are parameters which are set customer-specifically on
the service level with the adjustment software PACTware.
Franais
Espanl
Pycckuu
Italiano
Netherlands
Japanese
Chinese
Language
German
Service - SIL The functional safety is already activated Ex factory for instruments
with SIL qualification. For instruments Ex factory without SIL qualifica-
tion, the functional safety must be activated by the user for applica-
tions according to SIL via the indicating and adjustment module. The
SIL factory setting cannot be deactivated by the user.
The activation of SIL has the following impact:
In the menu item "Failure mode" under "Current output", the
parameters "Hold value" and "20.5mA" are blocked
In the menu item "HART mode", the function "Multidrop" is blocked
Note:
For such applications, it is absolutely necessary to take note of
"Safety Manual".
Standard
Address 0
Service - Copy sensor This function enables reading out parameter adjustment data as well
data as writing parameter adjustment data into the sensor via the display
and adjustment module. A description of the function is available in
the operating instructions manual "Display and adjustment module".
28775-EN-150603
The following data are read out or written with this function:
7)
The 420mA signal of the HART sensor is switched off. The sensor
consumes a constant current of 4mA. The measuring signal is transmitted
exclusively as digital HART signal.
Disable permanently?
Info In this menu item the most important sensor information can be
displayed:
Instrument type
Serial number: 8-digit number, e.g. 12345678
Instrument type
Serial number
28775-EN-150603
12345678
Date of manufacture
24. March 2015
Software version
3.80
Date of last change using PC: Date of the last change of sensor
parameters via PC, e.g. 24. March 2015
Last change using PC
Display now?
Basic adjustment
Basic adjustment 1
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
Min. adjustment 1.1 Max. adjustment 1.2 Medium 1.3 Vessel form 1.4
0.00% 100.00% Liquid
= = Storage tank
4.000m(d) 1.000m(d)
3.000m(d) 2.000m(d)
0s Linear Sensor
28775-EN-150603
Display
Basic adjustment 2
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
Displayed value 2.1 Display unit 2.2 Scaling 2.3 Backlight 2.4
Diagnostics
Basic adjustment 3
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
Peak value indicator 3.1 Meas. reliability 3.2 Curve selection 3.3 Echo curve 3.4
Distance min.: 0.234m(d) 36dB
Distance max.: 5.385m(d) Sensor status Echo curve Presentation of the echo
T-min.: 16.5C OK curve
T-min.: 37.5C
Service
Basic adjustment 4
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
False signal suppression 4.1 Extended setting 4.2 Current output 4.3 Simulation 4.4
Characteristic: 4-20mA
Change now? None Fail.mode: <3.6mA Start simulation?
Info
Basic adjustment 5
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
Instrument type 5.1 Date of manufacture 5.2 Last change using PC 5.3 Sensor characteristics 5.4
24. March 2015
Software version Display now?
Serial number 3.80 10. April 2015
12345678
28775-EN-150603
VEGACONNECT exter-
nally 1 2
3
TWIST
LO
EN
CK
OP
USB
4
Necessary components:
VEGASON 61
PC with PACTware and suitable VEGA DTM
VEGACONNECT
Power supply unit or processing system
CK
LO
TWIST
USB
3 5
N
OPE
Fig. 31: Connecting the PC via HART to the signal cable
1 VEGASON 61
2 HART resistance 250 (optional depending on processing)
3 Connection cable with 2mm pins and terminals
4 Processing system/PLC/Voltage supply
Necessary components:
VEGASON 61
PC with PACTware and suitable VEGA DTM
VEGACONNECT
HART resistance approx. 250
Power supply unit or processing system
Note:
With power supply units with integrated HART resistance (internal
resistance approx. 250), an additional external resistance is not
necessary. This applies, e.g. to the VEGA instruments VEGATRENN
149A, VEGADIS 371, VEGAMET 381. Common Ex separators are
also usually equipped with a sufficient current limitation resistance.
In such cases, VEGACONNECT 4 can be connected parallel to the
420mA cable.
Standard/Full version All device DTMs are available as a free-of-charge standard version
and as a full version that must be purchased. In the standard version,
all functions for complete setup are already included. An assistant for
simple project configuration simplifies the adjustment considerably.
Saving/printing the project as well as import/export functions are also
part of the standard version.
In the full version there is also an extended print function for complete
project documentation as well as a save function for measured value
and echo curves. In addition, there is a tank calculation program as
well as a multiviewer for display and analysis of the saved measured
value and echo curves.
The standard version is available as a download under
www.vega.com/downloads and "Software". The full version is avail-
able on CD from the agency serving you.
28775-EN-150603
Causes of malfunction VEGASON 61 offers maximum reliability. Nevertheless, faults can oc-
cur during operation. These may be caused by the following, e.g.:
Sensor
Process
Voltage supply
Signal processing
Fault rectification The first measures to be taken are to check the output signals as well
as to evaluate the error messages via the display and adjustment
module. The procedure is described below. Further comprehensive
diagnostics can be carried out on a PC with the software PACTware
and the suitable DTM. In many cases, the causes can be determined
and the faults rectified this way.
24 hour service hotline Should these measures not be successful, please call in urgent cases
the VEGA service hotline under the phone no. +491805858550.
The hotline is manned 7 days a week round-the-clock. Since we offer
this service worldwide, the support is only available in the English
language. The service is free, only standard call charges are incurred.
Check the 420mA Connect a multimeter in the suitable measuring range according to
signal the wiring plan. The following table describes possible errors in the
current signal and helps to eliminate them:
Error Cause Rectification
420mA signal Level fluctuations Set damping via the display and ad-
not stable justment module
420mA signal Electrical connec- Check connection according to
missing tion faulty chapter "Connection steps" and if
necessary, correct according to chap-
ter "Wiring plan"
Voltage supply Check cables for breaks; repair if nec-
missing essary
Operating voltage Check, adapt if necessary
too low or load re-
28775-EN-150603
Reaction after fault recti- Depending on the reason for the fault and the measures taken, the
fication steps described in chapter "Set up" may have to be carried out again.
Sensor serial number The new electronics module must be loaded with the settings of the
sensor. These are the options:
At the factory by VEGA
Or on site by the user
In both cases, the sensor serial number is necessary. The serial num-
bers are stated on the type label of the instrument, inside the housing
or on the delivery note.
Information:
When loading on site, first of all the order data must be downloaded
from the Internet (see operating instructions manual "Electronics
module").
Assignment The electronics modules are adapted to the respective sensor and
distinguish also in the signal output or power supply.
9 Dismount
9.1 Dismounting steps
Warning:
Before dismounting, be aware of dangerous process conditions such
as e.g. pressure in the vessel or pipeline, high temperatures, cor-
rosive or toxic products etc.
Take note of chapters "Mounting" and "Connecting to power supply"
and carry out the listed steps in reverse order.
9.2 Disposal
The instrument consists of materials which can be recycled by spe-
cialised recycling companies. We use recyclable materials and have
designed the parts to be easily separable.
28775-EN-150603
10 Supplement
10.1 Technical data
General data
Materials, wetted parts
Transducer PVDF
Seal transducer/process fitting EPDM, FKM
Process fitting G1DIN3852-A-B PVDF
Process fitting 1 NPTASMEB1.20.1 PVDF
Materials, non-wetted parts
Housing Plastic PBT (polyester), Alu die-casting, powder-coated,
316L
Seal between housing and housing NBR (stainless steel housing), silicone (Alu/plastic hous-
cover ing)
Inspection window in housing cover Polycarbonate
Ground terminal 316Ti/316L
Weight 1.84kg (48.8lbs), depending on the process
fitting and housing
Max. torque mounting boss 25Nm
Output variable
Output signal 420mA/HART
HART output values
HART value (Primary Value) Distance to the level
HART value (Secondary Value) Temperature
HART value (3rd Value) Distance to the level - scaled
Signal resolution 1.6A
Failure signal current output (adjustable) mA-value unchanged 20.5mA, 22mA, <3.6mA
Current limitation 22mA
Load see load diagram under Power supply
Damping (63% of the input variable) 0999s, adjustable
Met NAMUR recommendation NE43
Input variable
Measured variable distance between lower edge of the transducer and
product surface
Measuring range
Liquids up to 5m (16.4ft)
Bulk solids up to 2m (6.562ft)
28775-EN-150603
Measuring characteristics
Ultrasonic frequency 70kHz
Interval >2s (dependent on the parameter adjustment)
Abstrahlwinkel at -3dB 11
Step response or adjustment time8) >3s (dependent on the parameter adjustment)
Measuring accuracy
Resolution, general >1mm (0.039in)
Deviation9) see diagram
10 mm (0.394 in)
4 mm (0.157 in)
1 m (3.28 ft) 2 m (6.562 ft) 3 m (9.843 ft) 4 m (13.123 ft) 5 m (16.404 ft)
-4 mm (-0.157 in)
Ambient conditions
Ambient, storage and transport tempera- -40+80C (-40+176F)
ture
Process conditions
Process pressure -20200kPa/-0.22bar (-2.929psig)
28775-EN-150603
8)
Time to output the correct level (with max. 10% deviation) after a sudden level change.
9)
Incl. non-linearity, hysteresis and non-repeatability.
10)
Relating to the nominal measuring range.
11)
Tested according to the guidelines of German Lloyd, GL directive 2.
12)
Depending on the version M12x1, according to DIN43650, Harting, 7/8"FF.
Voltage supply
Operating voltage
Non-Ex instrument 1436VDC
Ex ia instrument 1430VDC
Operating voltage with illuminated display and adjustment module
Non-Ex instrument 2036VDC
Ex ia instrument 2030VDC
Permissible residual ripple
<100Hz Uss <1V
100Hz10kHz Uss <10mV
Load resistor
Calculation (UB - Umin)/0.022A
Example - Non-Ex instrument with (24V - 14V)/0.022A=455
UB=24VDC
Approvals
Instruments with approvals can have different technical specifications depending on the version.
For that reason the associated approval documents of these instruments have to be carefully
noted. They are part of the delivery or can be downloaded under www.vega.com via "VEGA Tools"
and "Instrument search" as well as via "Downloads" and "Approvals".
28775-EN-150603
10.2 Dimensions
Housing in protection IP66/IP68 (0.2bar)
~ 87 mm (3.43")
~ 69 mm
~ 116 mm (4.57") 84 mm
(2.72") 77 mm
84 mm (3.31") (3.31")
(3.03")
M16x1,5
116 mm (4.57")
112 mm (4 13/32")
120 mm (4.72")
M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/ M20x1,5
NPT NPT
M20x1,5/
1 2 NPT 3
~ 59 mm ~ 69 mm ~ 87 mm (3.43")
(2.32") (2.72") 84 mm
80 mm 77 mm
(3.15") (3.03") (3.31")
M16x1,5
117 mm (4.61")
120 mm (4.72")
112 mm (4.41")
M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/
NPT NPT
M20x1,5/
4 5 NPT 6
Fig. 34: Housing versions with protection rating IP66/IP68 (0.2bar) - with integrated display and adjustment
module the housing is 9mm/0.35in higher
1 Plastic housing (IP66/IP67)
2 Aluminium housing
3 Aluminium double chamber housing
4 Stainless steel housing, electropolished
5 Stainless steel housing - precision casting
6 Stainless steel double chamber housing - precision casting 28775-EN-150603
M16x1,5
116 mm (4.57")
117 mm (4.61")
120 mm (4.72")
M20x1,5 M20x1,5 M20x1,5
M20x1,5/
1 2 NPT 3
Fig. 35: Housing version with protection rating IP66/IP68 (1bar) - with integrated display and adjustment module
the housing is 9mm/0.35in higher
1 Aluminium housing
2 Stainless steel housing - precision casting
2 Stainless steel double chamber housing - precision casting
VEGASON 61
22mm (55/64")
60mm
155mm (6 7/64")
(2 23/64")
G1A /
1"NPT
(2 19/32")
66mm
1 2
39mm
(1 17/32")
74mm
(2 58/64")
10.4 Trademark
All the brands as well as trade and company names used are property of their lawful proprietor/
originator.
28775-EN-150603
28775-EN-150603
All statements concerning scope of delivery, application, practical use and operat-
ing conditions of the sensors and processing systems correspond to the information
available at the time of printing.
Subject to change without prior notice
VEGASON 61
420mA/HART - two-wire
Ultrasonic sensor for continuous level measurement
Technical data
Measuring range
In liquids up to 5m (16.4ft)
In bulk solids up to 2m (6.562ft)
Deviation 4mm or <0.2%
Process fitting Thread G1, 1NPT
Process pressure -0.2+2bar/-20+200kPa
(-2.9+29psig)
Process temperature -40+80C (-40+176F)
Ambient, storage and -40+80C (-40+176F)
transport temperature
Operating voltage 1436VDC
SIL qualification Optionally up to SIL2
Materials
Application area
The wetted parts of the instrument are made of PVDF. The process seal
The VEGASON 61 is an ultrasonic sensor for continuous level meas- is made of EPDM.
urement of liquids or bulk solids. Typical applications are the measure- You will find a complete overview of the available materials and seals in
ment of liquids in storage vessels or open basins. The sensor is also the "Configurator" at www.vega.com and "VEGA Tools".
suitable for the detection of bulk solids in small vessels or open contain-
ers. The non-contact measuring principle is independent of product
properties and enables a setup without medium. Housing versions
Price-favourable solution for simple applications The instruments are available in different electronics versions. Apart
from the two-wire electronics with 420mA/HART, a four-wire ver-
sion and two purely digital versions with Profibus PA and Foundation
Function Fieldbus are available.
Short ultrasonic pulses in the range of 18kHz to 70kHz are emitted by
the transducer in the direction of the product, reflected by the product Approvals
surface and received back by the transducer. The pulses travel at the
speed of sound - the elapsed time from emission to reception of the The instruments are suitable for use in hazardous areas and are ap-
signals is proportional to the level in the vessel. proved e.g. according to ATEX and IEC. The instruments also have
various ship approvals such as e.g. GL, LRS or ABS.
You can find detailed information at www.vega.com/downloads and
"Approvals".
VEGA Grieshaber KG, Am Hohenstein 113, 77761 Schiltach/Germany, www.vega.com VEGASON 61 - 34584-EN-151204
Specification sheet
Operation Dimensions
The adjustment of the instrument is carried out via the optional display
and adjustment module PLICSCOM or via a PC with the adjustment
software PACTware and corresponding DTM. Further adjustment op-
tions are available via HART communicator as well as manufacturer-
specific programs such as AMS or PDM.
22 mm
(0.87")
SW 60 mm
(2.36")
155 mm (6.1")
G1 A
66 mm
(2.6")
39 mm
(1.54")
74 mm
(2.91")
Dimensions VEGASON 61
Information
You can find further information about the VEGA product line on www.
vega.com.
In the download section at www.vega.com/downloads you'll find operat-
ing instructions, product information, brochures, approval documents,
instrument drawings and much, much more.
There, you will also find GSD and EDD files for Profibus PA systems as
well as DD and CFF files for Foundation Fieldbus systems.
Instrument selection
Contact
Electrical connection
You can find the VEGA agency serving your area on our homepage
www.vega.com.
Display
IC 1
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 2
VEGASON 61 - 34584-EN-151204 VEGA Grieshaber KG, Am Hohenstein 113, 77761 Schiltach/Germany, www.vega.com
1.7InstructionManualforStreamingCurrentMonitor
ApplicableModel Area
HFScientific IPA&PEMBUBUHKIMIA
OWNERS MANUAL
MicroTSCM
Streaming Current
Monitor
HF scientific
3170 Metro Parkway
Ft. Myers, FL 33916
Phone: 239-337-2116
Fax: 239-332-7643
EMail:HFinfo@Watts.com
Website: www.hfscientific.com
21648 (07/09)
REV 2.4
Table of Contents
Section Page
Specifications ................................................................................................... 1
1.0 Overview........................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Unpacking and Inspection of the Instrument and Accessories .................... 2
21648 (07/09)
REV 2.4
Table of Contents (continued)
Section Page
10.0 Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 21
10.1 Diagnostic Chart ................................................................................. 21
10.2 Technical & Customer Assistance ...................................................... 21
13.0 Warranty........................................................................................................ 24
MICROTSCM (07/09)
REV 2.4
Specifications
Measurement Range 10.0 SCU or ICu
Accuracy 1 % of Full Scale
Repeatability 1%
Linearity 1%
Resolution 0.01 SCU or ICu
Response Time 1 second
Analyzer Display Backlit Graphical LCD with trending
Alarms Two Programmable, One Sensor, 120-240VAC 2A Form C Relay
Analog Output Powered 4-20 mA, 1000 drive
Communications Port Optional RS-232 or RS-485
Flow Rate 6.0 9.5.0 L/min. (1.5 -2.5 gpm)
Flow Alarm Optional Float Switch
Operating Temperature 0C 50C (32F 122F)
Storage Temperature -20C 60C (-4F 140F)
Wetted Materials HDPE, PTFE, Stainless Steel, Neoprene, ABS
Standard Cable Length 7.62m (25 feet)
Max. Sensor to Analyzer 76.25 m (250 feet) Consult factory for lengths over 50 feet
Power Source 120 or 240 VAC, 50/ 60 Hz, 40VA
SCM Sensor Case Designed to meet IP 66 /NEMA 4X
Analyzer Regulatory CE Approved, ETL listed to UL 3111-1 &
Compliance And ETL Certified to CSA 22.2 No. 1010-1-92
Certifications
Shipping Weight Instrument: 9.5 kg (21 lbs.)
Calibration kit: 5.5 kg (12 lbs.)
Shipping Dimensions Instrument: 61 cm X 46 cm X 35cm (24 X 18 X 14)
Calibration kit: 41cm X 41 cm X 38 cm (16 X 16 X 15)
Warranty 1 Year from date of shipment
SCM Sensor 1
Sample Chamber 1
Calibration Kit 1
Instruction Manual 1
Remove the instrument from the packing carton. Carefully inspect all items to ensure that
no visible damage has occurred during shipment. If the items received do not match the
order, please immediately contact the local distributor or the HF scientific Customer
Service Department.
2.0 Safety
This manual contains basic instructions that must be followed during the commissioning,
operation, care and maintenance of the instrument. The safety protection provided by this
equipment may be impaired if it is commissioned and/or used in a manner not described in
this manual. Consequently, all responsible personnel must read this manual prior to
working with this instrument.
In certain instances Notes, or helpful hints, have been highlighted to give further
clarification to the instructions. Refer to the Table of Contents to easily find specific
topics and to learn about unfamiliar terms.
A second phenomenon which stabilizes the suspension is the surface charge of the
suspended matter. When a salt such as sodium chloride is place in water, complete
dissolution occurs. This system reaches a stable energy level when the individual sodium
and chloride ions (Na+ and Cl-) are separated in the water phase by being surrounded by
water molecules.
In the case of large pseudo salts, e.g. Aluminosilicates (clay), only partial dissolution takes
place due to incomplete breakdown of the crystal to individual ions. The structure of these
clays is similar to silica or sand except that random silicon atoms in the crystal are
replaced by aluminum atoms in the cage structure, causing the clay to swell and crack
between adjacent aluminum atoms in the crystal. Thus a clay particle is formed with a size
of less than 1 micron with a negative charge. This particle is small enough to be
maintained in suspension by Brownian Motion. The particles in the suspension repel each
other due to their surface charge, preventing them from coming together and
agglomerating, or flocking to form a larger particle, which would settle out. The result is
an energetically stable system and is the reason why the particles remain dispersed.
The counter ions (say sodium for the sake of argument) are separated from the large cage
structure because they are dissolved in the water. Clay particles have a negative charge
associated with it, while the counter ions, typically cat-ions (or positively charged ions)
are dispersed in the water phase.
In the case of most naturally occurring substances, the larger ion, when in suspension, has
a negative net charge (anionic). The smaller, counter ion is positive (cationic). The
residual charge of the larger particles is negative, which causes them to repel each other,
preventing them from forming agglomerates. The size of the particles never becomes large
enough to settle out, so they remain dispersed in suspension.
This phenomenon creates an energetically stable system. In order to cause the suspended
particles to agglomerate and settle out, the energy of the system must be upset. There are
numerous mechanical means to accomplish this, but the addition of chemical flocking
agents to the suspension, drastically reduces the time and is far more efficient.
Chemical additives perform two functions, charge neutralization & bridging. Both of these
techniques allow the small particles to floc and grow sufficiently that Brownian motion
can no longer support them. Due to the high density of the particle, flocs will form and
settle as fine sludge.
Before the development of Streaming Current technology, the best way to determine the
optimum dosage has been the jar test method. The jar test involves taking a representative
sample of the water being treated and placing it in several jars. Different amounts of
clarifying chemicals are added to each jar; stirred and comparing the clarity of the water in
the different jars. Jar tests are time consuming and it is difficult to reproduce the
conditions of the WTP in a jar. The tests can take several hours rendering them useless
when plant personnel are really responding to rapid changes in water quality. A typical
curve of Turbidity vs. Chemical dosage is shown in Figure 3.
Some considerations when treating the water are the rate of floc formation, the size of the
floc formed, how fast the floc settles, and the clarity of the final settled and filtered water.
Other techniques exist, such as a dosing curve, which indicates a recommended dosage for
a given water turbidity. This is generally built up over years of dosing experience with the
water, but has the disadvantage that turbidity caused by extremely small particles requires
a higher dosage than that caused by larger particles, and therefore can only be adapted for
use with known type turbidity on any given water.
This is the first method developed for calculating the Zeta Potential. The motion of
charged particles under the influence of an electric field was observed and the potential
required to achieve a certain amount of particle mobility was measured.
A cell consisting of two flat plates separated by approximately 0.1 mm and having an
electrode at each end of the cell is filled with water containing suspended matter. When an
electrical potential is applied to the electrodes, the particles can be observed to drift
toward one of the electrodes. The Zeta Potential is calculated from the measured speed of
particle drift.
Equally important is the lag time from when a change in dosage occurs to when it shows
up at the sensor. If the sample point is too far from the dosing point, it will take too long
for changes to reach the sensor and control of the loop will not be possible. A lag time not
greater than 10 minutes is recommended.
Note: The sample flow must be free of large shells or other debris that might clog
the orifices or cause damage to the sensor. Supplying an adequate flow free of
debris is the responsibility of the installer.
Suggestion: If meeting the minimum flow rate may be a problem, the optional flow alarm
may be required. HF Catalog #19886. See section 8.3.
To prevent large debris from entering the sample chamber, a 40 mesh screen
strainer is recommended.
SENSOR ELECTRONICS
LIGHT SHIELD
9.41 in.
10.00 in
239mm
254 mm
Please refer to the drawing below for mounting dimensions and hole location.
The 4-20 mA connection is made at J5. Terminal 1 is positive, Terminal 2 is negative. The
recorder load may be up to 1000 ohms.
Galvanic isolation may be achieved by removing the jumper at J13. This procedure will
require the removal of the entire rear cover assembly.
If heavy particulates can be present in the water it is important to install a 40 mesh strainer
before the inlet. The flow should also be kept low to allow large sand and larger debris to
fall to the bottom of the sample chamber and drain, without causing harm to the sensor.
The sample chamber has a cover to reduce algae growth. This cover may be easily
removed for service.
There are a few analyzer keys which have special purposes as described below.
This key resets the alarms after an alarm condition has been met. A screen
display of the alarm will continue until the alarm condition is relieved.
Alarms will also reset themselves without intervention if instrument
reading returns to a non- the alarm condition.
The Enter/Menu key is used to either invoke the Main Menu while in the
graphing screen or to return to the previous menu.
These two buttons are used to modify values or to scroll through possible
selections.
On the Analyzer ensure that the Offset Level is set to 0.00 and the signal averaging is
turned OFF. To calibrate, on the Analyzer, go to Sensor Setup Extended Setup Full
Scale Cal. Cal Time. The S key will initiate the calibration, which will take 60
seconds.
At the completion of the calibration, ensure that the reading is +5.10 to +5.50 SCU. If the
reading appears unstable initiate another calibration. If the +5.30 SCU calibration value is
not achievable, refer to section 6.2.
Rinse the sensor with clean water prior to returning to service.
Step 1: Track the water quality parameters over the course of several days to establish a
base line of data from which to measure acceptable water quality.
Suggestion: The Installation Evaluation format the back of this manual is a tool that can
be used to track water quality parameters.
Step 2: After the base line of acceptable water quality has been reached, reduce the
coagulant dosage by 5% and closely monitor the water quality.
Step 3: Continue reducing the dosage in 5% increments until there is a detectable
reduction in water quality. Increase the dosage from this point by 5% and
continue monitoring for another hour.
Step 4: Record the SCU value on the instrument as this will be the optimized set point
(SP) for operating the plant.
Note: There may be a different set point for extreme variations in raw water quality or
demand on the system e.g. winter versus summer.
When the instrument is used to automatically control coagulant dosing, it monitors the
process value (PV) for a change in charge value and then adjusts the dosage up or down to
achieve the predetermined set point (SP). Using a control algorithm or process calculation,
the analyzer determines the pump speed that is required to keep the PV and SP values the
same, which is the function of any closed loop control system.
When placed under automatic control, the instrument performs the same tasks that an
operator would be required to make. An operator adjusts the dosage level, allows time to
account for mixing and then checks the process for the desired change. Additional changes
to the dosage level are made as required. Under automatic control, the instrument
constantly monitors the process value and makes adjustments as needed to maintain the
process reading at the set point.
In order to put the plant under automatic control, it is required to provide some basic
information to the analyzer that describes how the system responds to changes. The
variables that need to be determined are the Proportional Band and the Integral Time. The
Proportional Band tells the instrument what change in Streaming Current to expect for a
MICROTSCM (07/09) Page 15
REV 2.4
given change in coagulant dosing. The Integral Time tells the instrument how long it will
take to fully realize the effects of a change in coagulant dosing.
PB = % Effect X 100
% Cause 1
In our example calculating the Proportional Band or P. Band with a 10% change (cause):
% effect = 0.5 SCU X 100 = 2.5%
20.0 SCU 1
As increasing the gain may over-range the reading, this feature should not be used unless
the reading is near zero.
For organic debris, replace the cleaning solution with a 5% chlorine solution.
Please refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet for proper handling of the SCM-1 cleaning
solution.
Sensor probe not moving 1. Check the interconnect cable connection at the sensor.
2. Check the wiring of the interconnect cable on the back
of the analyzer and inside the sensor.
3. Check to ensure the probe is not jammed.
Unable to Achieve 5.3 SCU after 1. Manually reprogram calibration as described in section
Calibration 6.2 EEPROM Programming Correction.
To order any accessory or replacement part, please contact the HF scientific Customer
Service Department. If for any reason technical assistance is needed regarding this
instrument, please do not hesitate to contact the HF scientific Service Department.
HF scientific
3170 Metro Parkway
Fort Myers, Florida 33916-7597
Phone: (239) 337-2116
Fax: (239) 332-7643
Email: HFinfo@Watts.com
www.hfscientific.com
Automatic Control: Placing the control of the dosing pumps under the control of the
Streaming current monitor. The Optional PI controller is
recommended.
Ion Charge
Analyzer: Another name for a Streaming Current Monitor.
Zeta Potential: The charge potential required to induce particle mobility when
placed under the influence of an electric current.
Installation Evaluation
Use this worksheet to help establish a baseline for optimal dosing. Readings every 6 hours
are recommended.
Additional Notes: